Ÿþm Icrosoft W

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS VOLUME II OF II

For:

DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY PROJECT DT1204

Prepared for:

METROPOLITAN WASHINGTON AIRPORTS AUTHORITY

Prepared by:

URS CORPORATION 4 NORTH PARK DRIVE, SUITE 300 HUNT VALLEY, MD 21030 410-785-7220

SCHEMATIC DESIGN

JULY 31, 2012

DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

Table of Contents

Signature Sheets – Not Included For This Submission ARCHITECTURAL SS-1 - SS-2 MAINTENANCE OF TRAFFIC (MOT) SS-3 STRUCTURAL (BUILDING) SS-4 MECHANICAL (FIRE SUPPRESSION, PLUMBING, HVAC, UTILITIES, TRANSPORTATION) SS-5 - SS-6 ELECTRICAL, AIRPORT COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS (ACS), SECURITY AND ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM SS-7 - SS-8 CIVIL SS-9

Volume I of II

Division 00 – Procurement and Contracting Requirements 00 31 32 – Geotechnical Data 00 31 32-1 – 00 31 32-1 00 73 00 – Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00-1 - 00 73 00-11

Division 01 - General Requirements 01 10 00 – Summary 01 10 00-1 - 00 10 00-7 01 22 10 – Measurement and Payment 01 22 10-1 - 01 22 10-4 01 29 00 – Application for Payment 01 29 00-1 - 01 29 00-5 01 31 00 – Project Management and Coordination 01 31 00-1 - 01 31 00-10 01 32 00 – Design and Construction Progress Documentation 01 32 00-1 - 01 32 00-9 01 32 33 – Photographic Documentation 01 32 33-1 - 01 32 33-4 01 33 00 – Submittals 01 33 00-1 - 01 33 00-12 01 40 00 – Quality Requirements 01 40 00-1 - 01 40 00-23 01 42 00 – References 01 42 00-1 - 01 42 00-12 01 50 00 – Temporary Facilities and Controls 01 50 00-1 - 01 50 00-14 01 60 00 – Product Requirements 01 60 00-1 - 01 60 00-8 01 73 00 – Execution 01 73 00-1 - 01 73 00-7 01 73 29 – Cutting and Patching 01 73 29-1 - 01 73 29-5 01 77 00 – Project Closeout 01 77 00-1 - 01 77 00-7 01 78 23 – Operation and Maintenance Data 01 78 23-1 - 01 78 23-13 01 78 39 – Project Record Documents 01 78 39-1 - 01 78 39-8 01 79 00 – Demonstration and Training 01 79 00-1 - 01 79 00-6

Division 02 – Existing Conditions 02 10 00 – Mobilization/Demobilization 02 10 00-1 – 02 10 00-1 02 41 19 – Selective Structure Demolition 02 41 19-1 – 02 41 19-5

Division 03 – Concrete 03 30 00 – Cast-In-Place Concrete 03 30 00-1 – 03 30 00-9

Division 04 – Masonry (Not Used)

Page TOC - 1 Table of Contents DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

Division 05 – Metals 05 12 00 – Structural Steel Framing 05 12 00-1 – 05 12 00-6 05 31 00 – Steel Decking 05 31 00-1 – 05 31 00-4 05 40 00 – Cold-Formed Metal Framing 05 40 00-1 – 05 40 00-5 05 50 00 – Metal Fabrications 05 50 00-1 – 05 50 00-5

Division 06 – Wood, Plastics and Composites (Not Used)

Division 07 – Thermal and Moisture Protection 07 25 00 – Weather Barriers 07 25 00-1 – 07 25-00 2 07 41 13 – Metal Roof Panels 07 41 13-1 – 07 41 13-7 07 42 16 – Insulated Metal Core Wall Panels 07 42 16-1 – 07 42 16-6 07 62 00 – Steel Metal Flashing and Trim 07 62 00-1 – 07 62 00-8

Division 08 – Openings 08 36 13 – High-Speed Break-Away Doors 08 36 13-1 – 08 36 13-6 08 71 00 – Door Hardware 08 71 00-1 – 08 71 00-21 08 90 00 – Louvers and Vents 08 90 00-1 – 08 90 00-6

Division 09 – Finishes (Not Used)

Division 10 – Specialties (Not Used)

Division 11 – Equipment (Not Used)

Division 12 – Furnishings (Not Used)

Division 13 – Special Construction 13 34 19 – Metal Building Systems 13 34 19-1 – 13 34 19-15

Division 14 – Conveying Equipment (Not Used)

Division 21 – Fire Suppression 21 05 00 – Common Work Results for Fire Suppression 21 05 00-1 – 21 05 00-6 21 11 00 – Facility Fire-Suppression Water-Service Piping 21 11 00-1 – 21 11 00-13 21 12 00 – Fire-Suppression Standpipes 21 12 00-1 – 21 12 00-14 21 13 13 – Wet-Pipe Sprinkler Systems 21 13 13-1 – 21 13 13-23

Division 22 – Plumbing 22 05 19 – Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping 22 05 19-1 – 22 05 19-3 22 05 23 – General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping 22 05 23-1 – 22 05 23-7 22 05 53 – Identification for Plumping Piping and Equipment 22 05 53-1 – 22 05 53-6 22 11 13 – Facility Water Distribution Piping 22 11 13-1 – 22 11 13-11 22 11 16 – Domestic Water Piping 22 11 16-1 – 22 11 16-10

Page TOC - 2 Table of Contents DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

Division 22 – Plumbing (Cont’d) 22 11 19 – Domestic Water Piping Specialties 22 11 19-1 – 22 11 19-4

Division 23 – Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning (HVAC) 23 05 13 – Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment 23 05 13-1 – 23 05 13-3 23 05 19 - Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping 23 05 19-1 – 23 05 19-3 23 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment 23 05 29-1 – 23 05 29-6 23 05 48 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment 23 05 48-1 – 23 05 48-4 23 05 53 - Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment 23 05 53-1 – 23 05 53-4 23 05 93 - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC 23 05 93-1 – 23 05 93-8 23 07 13 - Duct Insulation 23 07 13-1 – 23 07 13-10 23 09 00 – Instrumentation and Control for HVAC 23 09 00-1 – 23 09 00-19

Volume II of II

Division 23 – Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning (HVAC) (Cont’d) 23 11 23 – Facility Natural-Gas Piping 23 11 23-1 – 23 11 23-12 23 31 13 – Metal Ducts 23 31 13-1 – 23 31 13-11 23 33 00 – Air Duct Accessories 23 33 00-1 – 23 33 00-9 23 34 23 – HVAC Power Ventilators 23 34 23-1 – 23 34 23-4 23 37 13 – Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles 23 37 13-1 – 23 37 13-3 23 51 00 – Breechings, Chimneys, and Stacks 23 51 00-1 – 23 51 00-3 23 73 33.16 – Indoor, Indirect, Gas-Fired Heating and Ventilating Units 23 73 33.16-1 – 23 73 33.16-11 23 82 13 – Valance Heating and Cooling Units 23 82 13-1 – 23 82-13-4

Division 25 – Integrated Automation (Not Used)

Division 26 – Electrical 26 05 00 – Common Work Results for Electrical 26 05 00-1 – 26 05 00-4 26 05 19 – Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 26 05 19-1 – 26 05 19-5 26 05 26 – Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 26 05 26-1 – 26 05 26-5 26 05 29 – Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 26 05 29-1 – 26 05 29-5 26 05 33 – Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems 26 05 33-1 – 26 05 33-6 26 05 43 – Underground Ducts and Raceways 26 05 43-1 – 26 05 43-6 26 05 48 – Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems 26 05 48-1 – 26 05 48-8 26 05 53 – Identification for Electrical Systems 26 05 53-1 – 26 05 53-4 26 09 23 – Lighting Control Devices 26 09 23-1 – 26 09 23-4 26 22 00 – Low-Voltage Transformers 26 22 00-1 – 26 22 00-5 26 24 16 – Panelboards 26 24 16-1 – 26 24 16-9 26 27 26 – Wiring Devices 26 27 26-1 – 26 27 26-6 26 28 13 – Fuses 26 28 13-1 – 26 28 13-2 26 28 16 – Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers 26 28 16-1 – 26 28 16-5

Page TOC - 3 Table of Contents DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

26 29 13 – Enclosed Controllers 26 29 13-1 – 26 29 13-8 26 50 00 – Lighting 26 50 00-1 – 26 50 00-7

Division 27 – Communications 27 05 01 – Basic Telecommunication Requirements 27 05 01-1 – 27 05 01-14 27 05 26 – Grounding And Bonding for Communication Systems 27 05 26-1 – 27 05 26-4 27 05 28 – Pathways For Communications Systems 27 05 28-1 – 27 05 28-6 27 10 00 – Premise Wiring Distribution System 27 10 00-1 – 27 10 00-20 27 15 00 – Communications Horizontal Cabling 27 15 00-1 – 27 15 00-9

Division 28 – Electronic Safety and Security 28 13 00 – Access Control and Alarm Monitoring System 28 13 00-1 – 28 13 00-9 28 23 00 – Video Surveillance 28 23 00-1 – 28 23 00-13 28 31 11 – Digital, Addressable Fire-Alarm System 28 31 11-1 – 28 31 11-15

Division 31 – Earthwork 31 23 19 – Dewatering 31 23 19-1 – 31 23 19-4 31 25 14 – Storm Water Pollution Prevention 31 25 14-1 – 31 25 14-9 Appendix I - SPPP Inspection Checklist 3 Appendix II - MWAA Notice of Project Termination 2 Appendix III - MWAA Hazardous Materials Spill Notification Checklist 2

Division 32 – Exterior Improvements (Not Used)

Division 33 – Utilities (Not Used)

Division 34 – Transportation 34 77 16 – Baggage Handling Equipment 34 77 16-1 – 34 77 16-63

FAA Civil Specification Sections Item D-701 – Pipe for Storm Drains and Culverts D-701-1 – D-701-3 Item D-705 – Pipe Underdrains for Airports D-705-1 – D-705-5 Item D-751 – Manholes, Catch Basins, Inlets and Inspection Holes D-751-1 – D-751-5 Item F-162 – Chain Link Fence F-162-1 – F-162-3 Item P-101 – Civil Demolition and Surface Preparation P-101-1 – P-101-2 Item P-152 – Excavation and Embankment P-152-1 – P-152-6 Item P-154 – Subbase P-154-1 – P-154-3 Item P-209 – Crushed Aggregate Base Course P-209-1 – P-209-4 Item VDOT 315 – Asphalt Concrete Pavement 315-1 – 315-4 Item P-603 – Bituminous Tack Coat P-603-1 – P-603-3 Item P-605 – Joint Sealing Filler P-605-1 – P-605-2 Item P-620 – Pavement Markings P-620-1 – P-620-3 Section 110 – Method of Estimating Percentage of Material within Specification Limits (PWL) 110-1 – 110-6 Section 120 – Nuclear Gauges 120-1 – 120-2

Page TOC - 4 Table of Contents DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

SECTION 23 11 23 - FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Pipes, tubes, and fittings. 2. Piping specialties. 3. Piping and tubing joining materials. 4. Valves. 5. Pressure regulators.

1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Minimum Operating-Pressure Ratings:

1. Piping and Valves: 100 psig minimum unless otherwise indicated. 2. Service Regulators: 100 psig minimum unless otherwise indicated.

B. Natural-Gas System Pressure within Buildings: 0.5 psig or less.

C. Delegated Design: Design restraints and anchors for natural-gas piping and equipment, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

D. It is the Design Build Contractor’s responsibility to contact Washington Gas Company (WGC) to apply for a new gas meter and obtain their scope of work and services. The contractor shall coordinate with WGC the requirements for underground piping and meter location and service clearances. The gas meter shall be protected by means of bollards or guard rails to ensure that vehicle traffic does not cause damage to the meter.

E. The delivery pressure downstream of the gas meter and regulator shall be a minimum of 14 inches of water column. A pressure regulator will be provided at the gas burning appliances to reduce pressure to equipment manufacturers recommended input pressure requirements.

F. The indoor piping on the drawings is designed per International Fuel Gas Code Natural Gas Metallic Pipe sizing tables for 0.5 psig or lower and pressure drop of 0.3 inch W.C. The contractor shall submit shop drawings for approval.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING 23 11 23 - 1 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204 B. Shop Drawings: For facility natural-gas piping layout. Include plans, piping layout and elevations, sections, and details for fabrication of pipe anchors, hangers, supports for multiple pipes, alignment guides, expansion joints and loops, and attachments of the same to building structure. Detail location of anchors, alignment guides, and expansion joints and loops.

C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For natural-gas piping and equipment indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

1. Detail fabrication and assembly of seismic restraints. 2. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting seismic restraints.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Welding certificates.

B. Field quality-control reports.

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and maintenance data.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Steel Support Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

B. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPES, TUBES, AND FITTINGS

A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel, Schedule 40, Type E or S, Grade B.

1. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 150, standard pattern. 2. Wrought-Steel Welding Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M for butt welding and socket welding. 3. Unions: ASME B16.39, Class 150, malleable iron with brass-to-iron seat, ground joint, and threaded ends. Protective Coating for Underground Piping: Factory-applied, three-layer coating of epoxy, adhesive, and PE.

FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING 23 11 23 - 2 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204 a. Joint Cover Kits: Epoxy paint, adhesive, and heat-shrink PE sleeves.

B. PE Pipe: ASTM D 2513, SDR 11.

1. PE Fittings: ASTM D 2683, socket-fusion type or ASTM D 3261, butt-fusion type with dimensions matching PE pipe. 2. PE Transition Fittings: Factory-fabricated fittings with PE pipe complying with ASTM D 2513, SDR 11; and steel pipe complying with ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel, Schedule 40, Type E or S, Grade B. 3. Anodeless Service-Line Risers: Factory fabricated and leak tested.

a. Underground Portion: PE pipe complying with ASTM D 2513, SDR 11 inlet. b. Casing: Steel pipe complying with ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, black steel, Type E or S, Grade B, with corrosion-protective coating covering. Vent casing aboveground. c. Aboveground Portion: PE transition fitting. d. Outlet shall be threaded or suitable for welded connection. e. Tracer wire connection. f. Ultraviolet shield. g. Stake supports with factory finish to match steel pipe casing or carrier pipe.

4. Transition Service-Line Risers: Factory fabricated and leak tested.

a. Underground Portion: PE pipe complying with ASTM D 2513, SDR 11 inlet connected to steel pipe complying with ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, Type E or S, Grade B, with corrosion-protective coating for aboveground outlet. b. Outlet shall be threaded or suitable for welded connection. c. Bridging sleeve over mechanical coupling. d. Factory-connected anode. e. Tracer wire connection. f. Ultraviolet shield. g. Stake supports with factory finish to match steel pipe casing or carrier pipe.

2.2 PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Appliance Flexible Connectors:

1. Indoor, Fixed-Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.24. 2. Indoor, Movable-Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.69. 3. Corrugated stainless-steel tubing with polymer coating. 4. Operating-Pressure Rating: 0.5 psig. 5. End Fittings: Zinc-coated steel. 6. Threaded Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.1. 7. Maximum Length: 72 inches

FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING 23 11 23 - 3 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

B. Y-Pattern Strainers:

1. Body: ASTM A 126, Class B, cast iron with bolted cover and bottom drain connection. 2. End Connections: Threaded ends for NPS 2 and smaller. 3. Strainer Screen: 40-mesh startup strainer, and perforated stainless-steel basket with 50 percent free area. 4. CWP Rating: 125 psig.

C. Weatherproof Vent Cap: Cast- or malleable-iron increaser fitting with corrosion-resistant wire screen, with free area at least equal to cross-sectional area of connecting pipe and threaded-end connection.

2.3 JOINING MATERIALS

A. Joint Compound and Tape: Suitable for natural gas.

B. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12/D10.12M for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.

2.4 MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVES

A. See "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles for where each valve type is applied in various services.

B. General Requirements for Metallic Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Comply with ASME B16.33.

1. CWP Rating: 125 psig. 2. Threaded Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.1. 3. Dryseal Threads on Flare Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.3. 4. Tamperproof Feature: Locking feature for valves indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles. 5. Listing: Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for valves 1 inch and smaller. 6. Service Mark: Valves 1-1/4 inches to NPS 2 shall have initials "WOG" permanently marked on valve body.

C. Two-Piece, Full-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Bronze Trim: MSS SP-110.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, or as acceptable to the Authority, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. BrassCraft Manufacturing Company; a Masco company. b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Div. c. Lyall, R. W. & Company, Inc. d. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co. e. Perfection Corporation; a subsidiary of American Meter Company.

FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING 23 11 23 - 4 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204 2. Body: Bronze, complying with ASTM B 584. 3. Ball: Chrome-plated bronze. 4. Stem: Bronze; blowout proof. 5. Seats: Reinforced TFE; blowout proof. 6. Packing: Threaded-body packnut design with adjustable-stem packing. 7. Ends: Threaded, flared, or socket as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles. 8. CWP Rating: 600 psig. 9. Listing: Valves NPS 1 and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 10. Service: Suitable for natural-gas service with "WOG" indicated on valve body.

D. Bronze Plug Valves: MSS SP-78.

a. Lee Brass Company. b. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co.

2. Body: Bronze, complying with ASTM B 584. 3. Plug: Bronze. 4. Ends: Threaded, socket, as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles. 5. Operator: Square head or lug type with tamperproof feature where indicated. 6. Pressure Class: 125 psig. 7. Listing: Valves NPS 1 and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 8. Service: Suitable for natural-gas service with "WOG" indicated on valve body.

E. Valve Boxes:

1. Cast-iron, two-section box. 2. Top section with cover with "GAS" lettering. 3. Bottom section with base to fit over valve and barrel a minimum of 5 inches in diameter. 4. Adjustable cast-iron extensions of length required for depth of bury. 5. Include tee-handle, steel operating wrench with socket end fitting valve nut or flat head, and with stem of length required to operate valve.

2.5 PRESSURE REGULATORS

A. General Requirements:

1. Single stage and suitable for natural gas. 2. Steel jacket and corrosion-resistant components. 3. Elevation compensator. 4. End Connections: Threaded for regulators NPS 2 and smaller.

FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING 23 11 23 - 5 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

B. Line Pressure Regulators: Comply with ANSI Z21.80.

a. Actaris. b. American Meter Company. c. Eclipse Combustion, Inc. d. Fisher Control Valves and Regulators; Division of Emerson Process Management. e. Invensys. f. Maxitrol Company. g. Richards Industries; Jordan Valve Div.

2. Body and Diaphragm Case: Cast iron or die-cast aluminum. 3. Springs: Zinc-plated steel; interchangeable. 4. Diaphragm Plate: Zinc-plated steel. 5. Seat Disc: Nitrile rubber resistant to gas impurities, abrasion, and deformation at the valve port. 6. Orifice: Aluminum; interchangeable. 7. Seal Plug: Ultraviolet-stabilized, mineral-filled nylon. 8. Single-port, self-contained regulator with orifice no larger than required at maximum pressure inlet, and no pressure sensing piping external to the regulator. 9. Pressure regulator shall maintain discharge pressure setting downstream, and not exceed 150 percent of design discharge pressure at shutoff. 10. Overpressure Protection Device: Factory mounted on pressure regulator. 11. Atmospheric Vent: Factory- or field-installed, stainless-steel screen in opening if not connected to vent piping. 12. Maximum Inlet Pressure: Coordinate with Washington Gas Company.

C. Appliance Pressure Regulators: Comply with ANSI Z21.18.

a. Canadian Meter Company Inc. b. Eaton Corporation; Controls Div. c. Harper Wyman Co. d. Maxitrol Company. e. SCP, Inc.

2. Body and Diaphragm Case: Die-cast aluminum. 3. Springs: Zinc-plated steel; interchangeable. 4. Diaphragm Plate: Zinc-plated steel. 5. Seat Disc: Nitrile rubber. 6. Seal Plug: Ultraviolet-stabilized, mineral-filled nylon. 7. Factory-Applied Finish: Minimum three-layer polyester and polyurethane paint finish.

FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING 23 11 23 - 6 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204 8. Regulator may include vent limiting device, instead of vent connection, if approved by authorities having jurisdiction. 9. Maximum Inlet Pressure: 2 psig.

2.6 DIELECTRIC UNIONS

A. Dielectric Unions:

a. Capitol Manufacturing Company. b. Central Plastics Company. c. Hart Industries International, Inc. d. Jomar International Ltd. e. Matco-Norca, Inc. f. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co. g. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. h. Wilkins; a Zurn company.

2. Description:

a. Standard: ASSE 1079. b. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum at 180 deg F. c. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.

2.7 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING

A. Detectable Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant, PE film warning tape manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, a minimum of 6 inches wide and 4 mils thick, continuously inscribed with a description of utility, with metallic core encased in a protective jacket for corrosion protection, detectable by metal detector when tape is buried up to 30 inches deep; colored yellow.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 OUTDOOR PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NFPA 54 and the International Fuel Gas Code for installation and purging of natural-gas piping.

B. Install underground, natural-gas piping buried at least 36 inches below finished grade. Comply with requirements in Section 31 20 00 "Earth Moving" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.

1. Install it in containment conduit.

FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING 23 11 23 - 7 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204 C. Install underground, PE, natural-gas piping according to ASTM D 2774.

D. Steel Piping with Protective Coating:

1. Apply joint cover kits to pipe after joining to cover, seal, and protect joints. 2. Repair damage to PE coating on pipe as recommended in writing by protective coating manufacturer. 3. Replace pipe having damaged PE coating with new pipe.

E. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

F. Install pressure gage upstream and downstream from each service regulator. Pressure gages are specified in Section 23 05 19 "Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping."

3.2 INDOOR PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NFPA 54 and the International Fuel Gas Code for installation and purging of natural-gas piping.

B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.

C. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, sleeves, and openings in building structure during progress of construction, to allow for mechanical installations.

D. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

E. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

F. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.

G. Locate valves for easy access.

H. Install natural-gas piping at uniform grade of 2 percent down toward drip and sediment traps.

I. Install piping free of sags and bends.

J. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

K. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.

L. Comply with requirements in Sections specifying gas-fired appliances and equipment for roughing-in requirements.

FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING 23 11 23 - 8 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204 M. Drips and Sediment Traps: Install drips at points where condensate may collect, including service-meter outlets. Locate where accessible to permit cleaning and emptying. Do not install where condensate is subject to freezing.

1. Construct drips and sediment traps using tee fitting with bottom outlet plugged or capped. Use nipple a minimum length of 3 pipe diameters, but not less than 3 inches long and same size as connected pipe. Install with space below bottom of drip to remove plug or cap.

N. Extend relief vent connections for service regulators, line regulators, and overpressure protection devices to outdoors and terminate with weatherproof vent cap.

O. Conceal pipe installations in walls, pipe spaces, utility spaces, above ceilings, below grade or floors, and in floor channels unless indicated to be exposed to view.

P. Use eccentric reducer fittings to make reductions in pipe sizes. Install fittings with level side down.

Q. Connect branch piping from top or side of horizontal piping.

R. Install unions in pipes NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve, at final connection to each piece of equipment.

S. Do not use natural-gas piping as grounding electrode.

T. Install strainer on inlet of each line-pressure regulator and automatic or electrically operated valve.

U. Install pressure gage upstream and downstream from each line regulator. Pressure gages are specified in Section 23 05 19 "Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping."

V. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in Section 23 05 17 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC Piping."

W. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with requirements for sleeve seals specified in Section 23 05 17 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC Piping."

X. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified in Section 23 05 18 "Escutcheons for HVAC Piping."

3.3 VALVE INSTALLATION

A. Install manual gas shutoff valve for each gas appliance ahead of corrugated stainless-steel tubing or copper connector.

B. Install underground valves with valve boxes.

C. Install regulators and overpressure protection devices with maintenance access space adequate for servicing and testing.

FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING 23 11 23 - 9 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204 D. Install anode for metallic valves in underground PE piping.

E. Install appliance regulators to reduce pressure to pressure requirements of gas fired appliance/equipment.

3.4 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs.

B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.

C. Threaded Joints:

1. Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads complying with ASME B1.20.1. 2. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. 3. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full inside diameter of pipe. 4. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dryseal threading is specified. 5. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.

D. Welded Joints:

1. Construct joints according to AWS D10.12/D10.12M, using qualified processes and welding operators. 2. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. 3. Patch factory-applied protective coating as recommended by manufacturer at field welds and where damage to coating occurs during construction.

E. PE Piping Heat-Fusion Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean cloth or paper towels. Join according to ASTM D 2657.

1. Plain-End Pipe and Fittings: Use butt fusion. 2. Plain-End Pipe and Socket Fittings: Use socket fusion.

3.5 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Install seismic restraints on piping. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices specified in Section 23 05 48 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC."

B. Comply with requirements for pipe hangers and supports specified in Section 23 05 29 "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

C. Install hangers for horizontal steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes:

1. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: Maximum span, 108 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.

FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING 23 11 23 - 10 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204 3.6 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect to Washington Gas Companies gas main according to their procedures and requirements.

B. Install natural-gas piping electrically continuous, and bonded to gas appliance equipment grounding conductor of the circuit powering the appliance according to NFPA 70.

C. Install piping adjacent to appliances to allow service and maintenance of appliances.

D. Connect piping to appliances using manual gas shutoff valves and unions. Install valve within 72 inches of each gas-fired appliance and equipment. Install union between valve and appliances or equipment.

E. Sediment Traps: Install tee fitting with capped nipple in bottom to form drip, as close as practical to inlet of each appliance.

3.7 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING

A. Comply with requirements in Section 23 05 53 "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for piping and valve identification.

B. Install detectable warning tape directly above gas piping, 12 inches below finished grade, except 6 inches below subgrade under pavements and slabs.

3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Test, inspect, and purge natural gas according to NFPA 54 and the International Fuel Gas Code and authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Natural-gas piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

C. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.9 OUTDOOR PIPING SCHEDULE

A. Underground natural-gas piping shall be the following:

1. PE pipe and fittings joined by heat fusion; service-line risers with tracer wire terminated in an accessible location. a. Intermediate Pressure System piping with pressure of 30psi or lower shall be Medium Density Polyethylene (MDPE) ASTM D2513 b. Medium Pressure System piping with pressure of 58 psi to 90 psi shall be High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) ASTM D2513 2. Contractor shall coordinate exact piping requirements with Washington Gas Company.

FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING 23 11 23 - 11 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

B. Aboveground natural-gas piping shall be the following:

1. Steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded joints. 2. Steel pipe with wrought-steel fittings and welded joints.

C. Containment Conduit: Steel pipe with wrought-steel fittings and welded joints. Coat pipe and fittings with protective coating for steel piping.

3.10 INDOOR PIPING SCHEDULE

A. Aboveground, distribution piping shall be one of the following:

1. Steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded joints. 2. Steel pipe with wrought-steel fittings and welded joints.

3.11 UNDERGROUND MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Connections to Existing Gas Piping: Use valve and fitting assemblies made for tapping utility's gas mains and listed by an NRTL.

3.12 ABOVEGROUND MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Valves for pipe sizes NPS 2 and smaller at service meter shall be one of the following:

1. Bronze plug valve or as recommended by Washington Gas Company

B. Distribution piping valves for pipe sizes NPS 2 and smaller shall be the following:

1. Bronze plug valve.

C. Valves in branch piping for single appliance shall be the following:

1. Bronze plug valve.

PART 4 - CONTRACTOR’S QUALITY CONTROL REQUIREMENTS

4.1 GENERAL

A. Comply with applicable provisions of Division 01 Section “Quality Requirements” for requirements for Contractor Quality Control Program.

END OF SECTION 23 11 23

FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING 23 11 23 - 12 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

SECTION 23 31 13 - METAL DUCTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Single-wall rectangular ducts and fittings. 2. Single-wall round ducts and fittings. 3. Sheet metal materials. 4. Sealants and gaskets. 5. Hangers and supports.

B. Related Sections:

1. Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for testing, adjusting, and balancing requirements for metal ducts. 2. Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories" for dampers, sound-control devices, duct- mounting access doors and panels, turning vanes, and flexible ducts.

1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Delegated Duct Design: Duct construction, including sheet metal thicknesses, seam and joint construction, reinforcements, and hangers and supports, shall comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" and performance requirements and design criteria indicated in "Duct Schedule" Article.

B. Structural Performance: Duct hangers and supports shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions described in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of the following products:

1. Adhesives. 2. Sealants and gaskets. 3. Sheet Metal.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Fabrication, assembly, and installation, including plans, elevations, sections, components, and attachments to other work. 2. Factory- and shop-fabricated ducts and fittings. 3. Duct layout indicating sizes, configuration, liner material, and static-pressure classes.

METAL DUCTS 23 31 13 - 1 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

4. Elevation of top of ducts. 5. Dimensions of main duct runs from building grid lines. 6. Fittings. 7. Reinforcement and spacing. 8. Seam and joint construction. 9. Penetrations through fire-rated and other partitions. 10. Equipment installation based on equipment being used on Project. 11. Locations for duct accessories, including dampers, turning vanes, and access doors and panels. 12. Hangers and supports, including methods for duct and building attachment and vibration isolation.

C. Delegated-Design Submittal:

1. Sheet metal thicknesses. 2. Joint and seam construction and sealing. 3. Reinforcement details and spacing. 4. Materials, fabrication, assembly, and spacing of hangers and supports.

D. Coordination Drawings: Plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:

1. Duct installation in all spaces, indicating coordination with general construction, building components, and other building services. Indicate proposed changes to duct layout. 2. Suspended ceiling components. 3. Structural members to which duct will be attached. 4. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile. 5. Penetrations of smoke barriers and fire-rated construction. 6. Items penetrating finished ceiling including the following:

a. Lighting fixtures. b. Air outlets and inlets. c. Speakers. d. Sprinklers. e. Access panels. f. Baggage conveyors.

E. Welding certificates.

F. Field quality-control reports.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel," for hangers and supports.

B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel," for hangers and supports.

METAL DUCTS 23 31 13 - 2 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SINGLE-WALL RECTANGULAR DUCTS AND FITTINGS

A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated.

B. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 1-4, "Transverse (Girth) Joints," for static- pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

C. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 1-5, "Longitudinal Seams - Rectangular Ducts," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct- support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

D. Elbows, Transitions, Offsets, Branch Connections, and Other Duct Construction: Select types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 2, "Fittings and Other Construction," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

2.2 SINGLE-WALL ROUND DUCTS AND FITTINGS

A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 3, "Round, Oval, and Flexible Duct," based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, or as acceptable to The Authority, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Lindab Inc. b. McGill AirFlow LLC. c. SEMCO Incorporated. d. Sheet Metal Connectors, Inc. e. Spiral Manufacturing Co., Inc.

B. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-2, "Transverse Joints - Round Duct," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

1. Transverse Joints in Ducts Larger Than 60 Inches in Diameter: Flanged.

METAL DUCTS 23 31 13 - 3 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

C. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-1, "Seams - Round Duct and Fittings," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

1. Fabricate round ducts larger than 90 inches in diameter with butt-welded longitudinal seams.

D. Tees and Laterals: Select types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-4, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3-5, "Conical Tees," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

2.3 SHEET METAL MATERIALS

A. General Material Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections.

B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M.

1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G90. 2. Finishes for Surfaces Exposed to View: Mill phosphatized.

C. Carbon-Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, with oiled, matte finish for exposed ducts.

D. Stainless-Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A 480/A 480M, Type 304 or 316, as indicated in the "Duct Schedule" Article; cold rolled, annealed, sheet. Exposed surface finish shall be No. 2B, No. 2D, No. 3, or No. 4 as indicated in the "Duct Schedule" Article.

E. Aluminum Sheets: Comply with ASTM B 209 Alloy 3003, H14 temper; with mill finish for concealed ducts, and standard, one-side bright finish for duct surfaces exposed to view.

F. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

1. Where black- and galvanized-steel shapes and plates are used to reinforce aluminum ducts, isolate the different metals with butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM gasket materials.

G. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.

METAL DUCTS 23 31 13 - 4 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

H. Insulation Pins and Washers:

1. Cupped-Head, Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully annealed for capacitor-discharge welding, 0.106-inch-diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated with integral 1-1/2-inch galvanized carbon-steel washer. 2. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch-thick galvanized steel ; with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place but not less than 1-1/2 inches in diameter.

2.4 SEALANT AND GASKETS

A. General Sealant and Gasket Requirements: Surface-burning characteristics for sealants and gaskets shall be a maximum flame-spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke-developed index of 50 when tested according to UL 723; certified by an NRTL.

B. Two-Part Tape Sealing System:

1. Tape: Woven cotton fiber impregnated with mineral gypsum and modified acrylic/silicone activator to react exothermically with tape to form hard, durable, airtight seal. 2. Tape Width: 4 inches. 3. Sealant: Modified styrene acrylic. 4. Water resistant. 5. Mold and mildew resistant. 6. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg, positive and negative. 7. Service: Indoor and outdoor. 8. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F. 9. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless steel, or aluminum. 10. For indoor applications, use sealant that has a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

C. Water-Based Joint and Seam Sealant:

1. Application Method: Brush on. 2. Solids Content: Minimum 65 percent. 3. Shore A Hardness: Minimum 20. 4. Water resistant. 5. Mold and mildew resistant. 6. VOC: Maximum 75 g/L (less water). 7. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg, positive and negative. 8. Service: Indoor or outdoor. 9. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless steel, or aluminum sheets.

D. Flanged Joint Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 920.

1. General: Single-component, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric.

METAL DUCTS 23 31 13 - 5 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

2. Type: S. 3. Grade: NS. 4. Class: 25. 5. Use: O. 6. For indoor applications, use sealant that has a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

E. Flange Gaskets: Butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene plasticizer.

F. Round Duct Joint O-Ring Seals:

1. Seal shall provide maximum leakage class of 3 cfm/100 sq. ft. at 1-inch wg and shall be rated for 10-inch wg static-pressure class, positive or negative. 2. EPDM O-ring to seal in concave bead in coupling or fitting spigot. 3. Double-lipped, EPDM O-ring seal, mechanically fastened to factory-fabricated couplings and fitting spigots.

2.5 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Hanger Rods: Electrogalvanized, all-thread rods or galvanized rods with threads painted with zinc-chromate primer after installation.

B. Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 4-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 4-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct."

C. Steel Cables for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 603.

D. Steel Cables for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless steel complying with ASTM A 492.

E. Steel Cable End Connections: Cadmium-plated steel assemblies with brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for duct hanger service; with an automatic-locking and clamping device.

F. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible with duct materials.

G. Trapeze and Riser Supports:

1. Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized-steel shapes and plates. 2. Supports for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless-steel shapes and plates. 3. Supports for Aluminum Ducts: Aluminum or galvanized steel coated with zinc chromate.

METAL DUCTS 23 31 13 - 6 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 DUCT INSTALLATION

A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of duct system. Indicated duct locations, configurations, and arrangements were used to size ducts and calculate friction loss for air-handling equipment sizing and for other design considerations. Install duct systems as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings and Coordination Drawings.

B. Install ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install round ducts in maximum practical lengths.

D. Install ducts with fewest possible joints.

E. Install factory- or shop-fabricated fittings for changes in direction, size, and shape and for branch connections.

F. Unless otherwise indicated, install ducts vertically and horizontally, and parallel and perpendicular to building lines.

G. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent enclosure elements of building.

H. Install ducts with a clearance of 1-inch, plus allowance for insulation thickness.

I. Route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaults and electrical equipment rooms and enclosures.

J. Where ducts pass through non-fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls and are exposed to view, cover the opening between the partition and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as the duct. Overlap openings on four sides by at least 1-1/2 inches.

K. Where ducts pass through fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls, install fire dampers. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke dampers.

L. Protect duct interiors from moisture, construction debris and dust, and other foreign materials. Comply with SMACNA's "Duct Cleanliness for New Construction Guidelines."

3.2 INSTALLATION OF EXPOSED DUCTWORK

A. Protect ducts exposed in finished spaces from being dented, scratched, or damaged.

METAL DUCTS 23 31 13 - 7 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

B. Trim duct sealants flush with metal. Create a smooth and uniform exposed bead. Do not use two-part tape sealing system.

C. Grind welds to provide smooth surface free of burrs, sharp edges, and weld splatter. When welding stainless steel with a No. 3 or 4 finish, grind the welds flush, polish the exposed welds, and treat the welds to remove discoloration caused by welding.

D. Maintain consistency, symmetry, and uniformity in the arrangement and fabrication of fittings, hangers and supports, duct accessories, and air outlets.

E. Repair or replace damaged sections and finished work that does not comply with these requirements.

3.3 DUCT SEALING

A. Seal ducts for duct static-pressure, seal classes, and leakage classes specified in "Duct Schedule" Article according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

B. Seal ducts to the following seal classes according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible":

1. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." 2. Unconditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes 2-Inch wg and Lower: Seal Class B. 3. Unconditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes Higher Than2-Inch wg: Seal Class A. 4. Unconditioned Space, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class C. 5. Unconditioned Space, Return-Air Ducts: Seal Class B. 6. Conditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes2-Inch wg and Lower: Seal Class C. 7. Conditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes Higher Than 2-Inch wg: Seal Class B. 8. Conditioned Space, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class B. 9. Conditioned Space, Return-Air Ducts: Seal Class C.

3.4 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 4, "Hangers and Supports."

B. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel fasteners appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached.

1. Where practical, install concrete inserts before placing concrete. 2. Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured. 3. Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate concretes or for slabs more than 4 inches thick.

METAL DUCTS 23 31 13 - 8 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

4. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate concretes or for slabs less than 4 inches thick. 5. Do not anchor to existing upper level roadway structure.

C. Hanger Spacing: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 4-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 4-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct," for maximum hanger spacing; install hangers and supports within 24 inches of each elbow and within 48 inches of each branch intersection.

D. Hangers Exposed to View: Threaded rod and angle or channel supports.

E. Support vertical ducts with steel angles or channel secured to the sides of the duct with welds, bolts, sheet metal screws, or blind rivets; support at each floor and at a maximum intervals of 16 feet.

F. Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

3.5 CONNECTIONS

A. Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors complying with Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories."

B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections.

3.6 PAINTING

A. Paint interior of metal ducts that are visible through registers and grilles and that do not have duct liner. Apply one coat of flat, black, latex paint over a compatible galvanized-steel primer. Paint materials and application requirements are specified in Division 09 painting Sections.

3.7 START UP

A. Air Balance: Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC."

3.8 DUCT SCHEDULE

A. Supply Ducts:

1. Ducts Connected to Constant-Volume Air-Handling Units:

a. Pressure Class: Positive 3-inch wg. b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: B.

METAL DUCTS 23 31 13 - 9 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

2. Ducts Connected to Equipment Not Listed Above:

a. Pressure Class: Positive 3-inch wg. b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: B.

B. Exhaust Ducts:

1. Ducts Connected to Fans Exhausting (ASHRAE 62.1, Class 1 and 2) Air:

a. Pressure Class: Negative 2-inch wg . b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: B if negative pressure, and A if positive pressure.

C. Outdoor-Air (Not Filtered, Heated, or Cooled) Ducts:

1. Ducts Connected to Air-Handling Units:

a. Pressure Class: Positive or negative 2-inch wg. b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: B.

D. Intermediate Reinforcement:

1. Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel.

E. Elbow Configuration:

1. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-2, "Rectangular Elbows."

a. Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio. b. Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and two vanes.

2. Round Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-3, "Round Duct Elbows."

a. Minimum Radius-to-Diameter Ratio and Elbow Segments: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 3- 1, "Mitered Elbows." Elbows with less than 90-degree change of direction have proportionately fewer segments. b. Round Elbows, 12 Inches and Smaller in Diameter: Stamped or pleated. c. Round Elbows, 14 Inches and Larger in Diameter: Standing seam.

F. Branch Configuration:

1. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-6, "Branch Connections."

a. Rectangular Main to Rectangular Branch: 45-degree entry. b. Rectangular Main to Round Branch: Spin in.

METAL DUCTS 23 31 13 - 10 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

2. Round and Flat Oval: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-4, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3-5, "Conical Tees." Saddle taps are permitted in existing duct.

a. Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower: 90-degree tap. b. Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm: Conical tap. c. Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher: 45-degree lateral.

PART 4 - CONTRACTOR’S QUALITY CONTROL REQUIREMENTS

4.1 GENERAL

A. Comply with applicable provisions of Division 01 Section “Quality Requirements” for requirements for Contractor Quality Control Program.

B. Field Quality Control:

1. Perform tests and inspections. 2. Duct System Cleanliness Tests:

a. Visually inspect duct system to ensure that no visible contaminants are present. b. Test sections of metal duct system, chosen randomly by Owner, for cleanliness according to "Vacuum Test" in NADCA ACR, "Assessment, Cleaning and Restoration of HVAC Systems."

1) Acceptable Cleanliness Level: Net weight of debris collected on the filter media shall not exceed 0.75 mg/100 sq. cm.

END OF SECTION 23 31 13

METAL DUCTS 23 31 13 - 11 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

SECTION 23 33 00 - AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Backdraft and pressure relief dampers. 2. Manual volume dampers. 3. Turning vanes. 4. Duct-mounted access doors. 5. Flexible connectors. 6. Duct accessory hardware.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: For duct accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, details and attachments to other work.

1. Detail duct accessories fabrication and installation in ducts and other construction. Include dimensions, weights, loads, and required clearances; and method of field assembly into duct systems and other construction. Include the following:

a. Special fittings. b. Manual volume damper installations. c. Fire-damper, installations, including sleeves; and duct-mounted access doors. d. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Source quality-control reports.

D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air duct accessories to include in operation and maintenance manuals.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," and with NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."

B. Comply with AMCA 500-D testing for damper rating.

AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 23 33 00 - 1 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections.

B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M.

1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G90. 2. Exposed-Surface Finish: Mill phosphatized.

C. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed on galvanized sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless-steel ducts.

D. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.

2.2 BACKDRAFT DAMPERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, or as acceptable to the Authority, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Air Balance Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc. 2. American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc. 3. Cesco Products; a division of Mestek, Inc. 4. Greenheck Fan Corporation. 5. Nailor Industries Inc. 6. Ruskin Company. 7. SEMCO Incorporated. 8. Vent Products Company, Inc.

B. Description: Gravity balanced.

C. Maximum Air Velocity: 2000 fpm .

D. Maximum System Pressure: 2-inch wg.

E. Frame: 0.063-inch-thick extruded aluminum, with welded corners and mounting flange.

F. Blades: Multiple single-piece blades, maximum 6-inch width, 0.025-inch- thick, roll-formed aluminum with sealed edges.

G. Blade Action: Parallel.

AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 23 33 00 - 2 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

H. Blade Seals: Extruded vinyl, mechanically locked.

I. Blade Axles:

1. Material: Aluminum. 2. Diameter: 0.20-inch.

J. Tie Bars and Brackets: Aluminum.

K. Return Spring: Adjustable tension.

L. Bearings: Synthetic pivot bushings.

M. Accessories:

1. Screen Mounting: Front mounted in sleeve.

a. Sleeve Thickness: 20-gage minimum. b. Sleeve Length: 6 inches minimum.

2. Screen Mounting: Rear mounted. 3. Screen Material: Aluminum. 4. Screen Type: Bird. 5. 90-degree stops.

2.3 MANUAL VOLUME DAMPERS

A. Standard, Steel, Manual Volume Dampers:

a. Air Balance Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc. b. American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc. c. McGill AirFlow LLC. d. METALAIRE, Inc. e. Nailor Industries Inc. f. Ruskin Company. g. Vent Products Company, Inc.

2. Standard leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream. 3. Suitable for horizontal or vertical applications. 4. Frames:

a. Hat-shaped, galvanized-steel channels, 0.064-inch minimum thickness. b. Mitered and welded corners. c. Flanges for attaching to walls and flangeless frames for installing in ducts.

AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 23 33 00 - 3 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

5. Blades:

a. Multiple or single blade. b. Parallel- or opposed-blade design. c. Stiffen damper blades for stability. d. Galvanized-steel, 0.064-inch thick.

6. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel . 7. Bearings:

a. Molded synthetic. b. Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3-inch wg or less shall have axles full length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft.

8. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.

B. Standard, Aluminum, Manual Volume Dampers:

a. American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc. b. McGill AirFlow LLC. c. METALAIRE, Inc. d. Nailor Industries Inc. e. Ruskin Company. f. Vent Products Company, Inc.

2. Standard leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream. 3. Suitable for horizontal or vertical applications. 4. Frames: Hat-shaped, 0.10-inch- thick, aluminum sheet channels; frames with flanges for attaching to walls and flangeless frames for installing in ducts. 5. Blades:

a. Multiple or single blade. b. Parallel- or opposed-blade design. c. Stiffen damper blades for stability. d. Roll-Formed Aluminum Blades: 0.10-inch- thick aluminum sheet. e. Extruded-Aluminum Blades: 0.050-inch- thick extruded aluminum.

6. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel . 7. Bearings:

a. Molded synthetic. b. Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3-inch wg or less shall have axles full length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft.

8. Tie Bars and Brackets: Aluminum.

AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 23 33 00 - 4 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

C. Jackshaft:

1. Size: 1-inch diameter. 2. Material: Galvanized-steel pipe rotating within pipe-bearing assembly mounted on supports at each mullion and at each end of multiple-damper assemblies. 3. Length and Number of Mountings: As required to connect linkage of each damper in multiple-damper assembly.

D. Damper Hardware:

1. Zinc-plated, die-cast core with dial and handle made of 3/32-inch- thick zinc-plated steel, and a 3/4-inch hexagon locking nut. 2. Include center hole to suit damper operating-rod size. 3. Include elevated platform for insulated duct mounting.

2.4 TURNING VANES

1. Ductmate Industries, Inc. 2. METALAIRE, Inc. 3. SEMCO Incorporated. 4. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc.

B. Manufactured Turning Vanes for Metal Ducts: Curved blades of galvanized sheet steel; support with bars perpendicular to blades set; set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting.

C. General Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"; Figures 2-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and 2-4, "Vane Support in Elbows."

D. Vane Construction: Double wall.

2.5 DUCT-MOUNTED ACCESS DOORS

1. American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc. 2. Cesco Products; a division of Mestek, Inc. 3. Ductmate Industries, Inc. 4. Greenheck Fan Corporation. 5. McGill AirFlow LLC. 6. Nailor Industries Inc. 7. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc.

AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 23 33 00 - 5 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

B. Duct-Mounted Access Doors: Fabricate access panels according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"; Figures 2-10, "Duct Access Doors and Panels," and 2-11, "Access Panels - Round Duct."

1. Door:

a. Double wall, rectangular. b. Galvanized sheet metal with insulation fill and thickness as indicated for duct pressure class. c. Hinges and Latches: 1-by-1-inch butt or piano hinge and cam latches. d. Fabricate doors airtight and suitable for duct pressure class.

2. Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, with bend-over tabs and foam gaskets. 3. Number of Hinges and Locks:

a. Access Doors Less Than 12 Inches Square: No hinges and two sash locks. b. Access Doors up to 18 Inches Square: Two hinges and two sash locks. c. Access Doors up to 24 by 48 Inches: Three hinges and two compression latches. d. Access Doors Larger Than 24 by 48 Inches: Four hinges and two compression latches with outside and inside handles.

C. Pressure Relief Access Door:

1. Door and Frame Material: Galvanized sheet steel. 2. Door: Double wall with insulation fill with metal thickness applicable for duct pressure class. 3. Operation: Open outward for positive-pressure ducts and inward for negative-pressure ducts. 4. Factory set at 10-inch wg. 5. Doors close when pressures are within set-point range. 6. Hinge: Continuous piano. 7. Latches: Cam. 8. Seal: Neoprene or foam rubber. 9. Insulation Fill: 1-inch- thick, fibrous-glass or polystyrene-foam board.

2.6 DUCT ACCESS PANEL ASSEMBLIES

1. Ductmate Industries, Inc. 2. Flame Gard, Inc. 3. 3M.

B. Labeled according to UL 1978 by an NRTL.

C. Panel and Frame: Minimum thickness 0.0528-inch carbon steel.

AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 23 33 00 - 6 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

D. Fasteners: Carbon steel. Panel fasteners shall not penetrate duct wall.

E. Gasket: Comply with NFPA 96; grease-tight, high-temperature ceramic fiber, rated for minimum 2000 deg F.

F. Minimum Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg, positive or negative.

2.7 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS

1. Ductmate Industries, Inc. 2. Duro Dyne Inc. 3. Ventfabrics, Inc. 4. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc.

B. Materials: Flame-retardant or noncombustible fabrics.

C. Coatings and Adhesives: Comply with UL 181, Class 1.

D. Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip 3-1/2 inches wide attached to 2 strips of 2-3/4-inch- wide, 0.028-inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel or 0.032-inch- thick aluminum sheets. Provide metal compatible with connected ducts.

E. Indoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with neoprene.

1. Minimum Weight: 26 oz./sq. yd.. 2. Tensile Strength: 480 lbf/inch in the warp and 360 lbf/inch in the filling. 3. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F.

F. Outdoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with weatherproof, synthetic rubber resistant to UV rays and ozone.

1. Minimum Weight: 24 oz./sq. yd.. 2. Tensile Strength: 530 lbf/inch in the warp and 440 lbf/inch in the filling. 3. Service Temperature: Minus 50 to plus 250 deg F.

2.8 DUCT ACCESSORY HARDWARE

A. Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw cap and gasket. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing instruments and of length to suit duct-insulation thickness.

B. Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof, and resistant to gasoline and grease.

AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 23 33 00 - 7 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts.

B. Install duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials.

C. Install backdraft dampers at inlet of exhaust fans or exhaust ducts as close as possible to exhaust fan unless otherwise indicated.

D. Install volume dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches extend from larger ducts. Where dampers are installed in ducts having duct liner, install dampers with hat channels of same depth as liner, and terminate liner with nosing at hat channel.

E. Set dampers to fully open position before testing, adjusting, and balancing.

F. Install test holes at fan inlets and outlets and elsewhere as indicated.

G. Install duct access doors on sides of ducts to allow for inspecting, adjusting, and maintaining accessories and equipment at the following locations:

1. On both sides of duct coils. 2. Upstream from duct filters. 3. At outdoor-air intakes and mixed-air plenums. 4. At drain pans and seals. 5. Downstream from manual volume dampers, control dampers, backdraft dampers, and equipment. 6. At each change in direction and at maximum 50-foot spacing. 7. Upstream and downstream from turning vanes. 8. Control devices requiring inspection. 9. Elsewhere as indicated. 10. Every 50 feet of straight ducts.

H. Install access doors with swing against duct static pressure.

I. Access Door Sizes:

1. One-Hand or Inspection Access: 8 by 5 inches. 2. Two-Hand Access: 12 by 6 inches. 3. Head and Hand Access: 18 by 10 inches. 4. Head and Shoulders Access: 21 by 14 inches. 5. Body Access: 25 by 14 inches. 6. Body plus Ladder Access: 25 by 17 inches.

J. Label access doors according to Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" to indicate the purpose of access door.

AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 23 33 00 - 8 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

K. Install flexible connectors to connect ducts to equipment.

L. For fans developing static pressures of 5-inch wg and more, cover flexible connectors with loaded vinyl sheet held in place with metal straps.

M. Connect terminal units to supply ducts directly or with maximum 12-inch lengths of flexible duct. Do not use flexible ducts to change directions.

N. Connect diffusers or light troffer boots to ducts directly or with maximum 60-inch lengths of flexible duct clamped or strapped in place.

O. Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with draw bands.

P. Install duct test holes where required for testing and balancing purposes.

Q. Provide airflow directional arrows on all fire dampers.

PART 4 - CONTRACTOR’S QUALITY CONTROL REQUIREMENTS

4.1 GENERAL

A. Comply with applicable provisions of Division 01 Section “Quality Requirements” for requirements for Contractor Quality Control Program.

B. Field Quality Control:

1. Tests and Inspections:

a. Operate dampers to verify full range of movement. b. Inspect locations of access doors and verify that purpose of access door can be performed. c. Operate fire dampers to verify full range of movement and verify that proper heat- response device is installed. d. Inspect turning vanes for proper and secure installation.

END OF SECTION 23 33 00

AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 23 33 00 - 9 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

SECTION 23 34 23 - HVAC POWER VENTILATORS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. In-line centrifugal fans.

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 2. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring. 3. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include adjustable motor bases, rails, and frames for equipment mounting. 4. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators and for designing vibration isolation bases.

1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and maintenance data.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. AMCA Compliance: Fans shall have AMCA-Certified performance ratings and shall bear the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.

HVAC POWER VENTILATORS 23 34 23 - 1 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 IN-LINE CENTRIFUGAL FANS

1. Carnes Company. 2. Greenheck Fan Corporation. 3. Hartzell Fan Incorporated. 4. Loren Cook Company. 5. PennBarry.

B. Housing: Split, spun aluminum with aluminum straightening vanes, inlet and outlet flanges, and support bracket adaptable to floor, side wall, or ceiling mounting.

C. Belt-Driven Units: Motor mounted on adjustable base, with adjustable sheaves, enclosure around belts within fan housing, and lubricating tubes from fan bearings extended to outside of fan housing.

D. Fan Wheels: Aluminum, airfoil blades welded to aluminum hub.

E. Accessories:

1. Companion Flanges: For inlet and outlet duct connections. 2. Motor and Drive Cover (Belt Guard): Epoxy-coated steel. 3. Disconnect switch with integral motor starter.

F. Capacities and Characteristics:

1. Wheel Type: Backward inclined.

2. Vibration Isolators:

a. Type: Elastomeric hangers. b. Static Deflection: 1 inch.

2.2 MOTORS

A. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and efficiency requirements for motors specified in Section 23 05 13 "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment."

1. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.

B. Enclosure Type: Totally enclosed, fan cooled.

HVAC POWER VENTILATORS 23 34 23 - 2 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Certify sound-power level ratings according to AMCA 301, "Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data." Factory test fans according to AMCA 300, "Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans." Label fans with the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.

B. Certify fan performance ratings, including flow rate, pressure, power, air density, speed of rotation, and efficiency by factory tests according to AMCA 210, "Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Aerodynamic Performance Rating." Label fans with the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Support suspended units from structure using threaded steel rods and elastomeric hangers having a static deflection of 1 inch. Vibration-control devices are specified in Section 23 05 48 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC."

B. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.

C. Label units according to requirements specified in Section 23 05 53 "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. Make final duct connections with flexible connectors. Flexible connectors are specified in Section 23 33 00 "Air Duct Accessories."

B. Install ducts adjacent to power ventilators to allow service and maintenance.

C. Ground equipment according to Section 26 05 26 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

D. Connect wiring according to Section 26 05 19 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Perform tests and inspections.

1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.

HVAC POWER VENTILATORS 23 34 23 - 3 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

B. Tests and Inspections:

1. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed. 2. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections to ducts and electrical components are complete. Verify that proper thermal-overload protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnect switches. 3. Verify that cleaning and adjusting are complete. 4. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and verify fan wheel free rotation and smooth bearing operation. Reconnect fan drive system, align and adjust belts, and install belt guards. 5. Adjust belt tension. 6. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation. 7. Verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts. 8. Verify that manual and automatic volume control in connected ductwork systems are in fully open position. 9. Disable automatic temperature-control operators, energize motor and adjust fan to indicated rpm, and measure and record motor voltage and amperage. 10. Shut unit down and reconnect automatic temperature-control operators. 11. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

C. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.

B. Adjust belt tension.

C. Comply with requirements in Section 23 05 93 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures.

D. Replace fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design airflow.

E. Lubricate bearings.

PART 4 - CONTRACTOR’S QUALITY CONTROL REQUIREMENTS

4.1 GENERAL

A. Comply with applicable provisions of Division 01 Section “Quality Requirements” for requirements for Contractor Quality Control Program.

END OF SECTION 23 34 23

HVAC POWER VENTILATORS 23 34 23 - 4 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

SECTION 23 37 13 - DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Fixed face registers and grilles.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 23 33 00 "Air Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke dampers and volume-control dampers not integral to diffusers, registers, and grilles.

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, include the following:

1. Data Sheet: Indicate materials of construction, finish, and mounting details; and performance data including throw and drop, static-pressure drop, and noise ratings. 2. Register, and Grille Schedule: Indicate drawing designation, room location, quantity, model number, size, and accessories furnished.

B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CEILING DIFFUSERS

A. Louver Face Diffuser CD-1:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Carnes. b. METALAIRE, Inc. c. Nailor Industries Inc. d. Price Industries. e. Titus. f. Tuttle & Bailey.

2. Devices shall be specifically designed for variable-air-volume flows. 3. Material: Steel.

DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES 23 37 13 - 1 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204 4. Finish: Baked enamel, white. 5. Face Size: 24 inch x 24 inch. 6. Mounting: Surface with capability of installing without a ceiling. 7. Pattern: Four-way core style. 8. Dampers: Radial opposed blade. 9. Accessories:

a. Square to round neck adaptor. b. Equalizing grid. c. Safety chain. d. Operating rod extension.

B. Fixed Face Grille EG-1: Steel return/exhaust air grilles with 3/4-inch blade spacing.

a. Krueger. b. Nailor Industries Inc. c. Price Industries. d. Titus.

2. Material: Steel. 3. Finish: Baked enamel, white. 4. Face Arrangement:

a. Fixed deflection blades shall be parallel to the long dimension of the grille. b. Blades shall be steel with 35° deflection angle.

5. Core Construction: Integral. 6. Frame: 1-1/4 inches wide. 7. Mounting: Countersunk screw painted white.

2.2 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Verification of Performance: Rate diffusers, registers, and grilles according to ASHRAE 70, "Method of Testing for Rating the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install registers, and grilles level and plumb.

B. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles with airtight connections to ducts and to allow service and maintenance of dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers.

DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES 23 37 13 - 2 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204 3.2 ADJUSTING

A. After installation, adjust diffusers, registers, and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as directed, before starting air balancing.

PART 4 - CONTRACTOR’S QUALITY CONTROL REQUIREMENTS

4.1 GENERAL

A. Comply with applicable provisions of Division 01 Section “Quality Requirements” for requirements for Contractor Quality Control Program.

END OF SECTION 23 37 13

DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES 23 37 13 - 3 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

SECTION 23 51 00 - BREECHINGS, CHIMNEYS, AND STACKS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Listed double-wall vents and chimneys.

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Type B and BW vents. 2. Type L vents. 3. Special gas vents. 4. Building-heating-appliance chimneys.

B. Shop Drawings: For vents, breechings, chimneys, and stacks. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 LISTED TYPE B AND BW VENTS

1. Cleaver-Brooks; Div. of Aqua-Chem Inc. 2. Hart & Cooley, Inc. 3. Heat-Fab, Inc. 4. Industrial Chimney Company. 5. Metal-Fab, Inc. 6. Selkirk Inc.; Selkirk Metalbestos and Air Mate.

B. Description: Double-wall metal vents tested according to UL 441 and rated for 480 deg F continuously for Type B, or 550 deg F continuously for Type BW; with neutral or negative flue pressure complying with NFPA 211.

C. Construction: Inner shell and outer jacket separated by at least a 1/4-inch airspace.

D. Inner Shell: ASTM B 209, Type 3105 aluminum.

BREECHINGS, CHIMNEYS, AND STACKS 23 51 00 - 1 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204 E. Outer Jacket: Aluminized steel.

F. Accessories: Tees, elbows, increasers, draft-hood connectors, terminations, adjustable roof flashings, storm collars, support assemblies, thimbles, firestop spacers, and fasteners; fabricated from similar materials and designs as vent-pipe straight sections; all listed for same assembly.

1. Termination: Round chimney top designed to exclude minimum 98 percent of rainfall. 2. Termination: Antibackdraft.

2.2 LISTED TYPE L VENTS

1. Heat-Fab, Inc. 2. Industrial Chimney Company. 3. Metal-Fab, Inc. 4. Selkirk Inc.; Selkirk Metalbestos and Air Mate.

B. Description: Double-wall metal vents tested according to UL 641 and rated for 570 deg F continuously, or 1700 deg F for 10 minutes; with neutral or negative flue pressure complying with NFPA 211.

C. Construction: Inner shell and outer jacket separated by at least a 1-inch airspace filled with high-temperature, ceramic-fiber insulation.

D. Inner Shell: ASTM A 666, Type 316 stainless steel.

E. Outer Jacket: Stainless steel.

1. Termination: Round chimney top designed to exclude 98 percent of rainfall.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

A. Listed Chimney Liners: High-efficiency boiler or furnace vents in masonry chimney, dishwasher exhaust, or Type II commercial kitchen hood.

B. Listed Type B and BW Vents: Vents for certified gas appliances.

C. Listed Type L Vents: Vents for low-heat appliances.

BREECHINGS, CHIMNEYS, AND STACKS 23 51 00 - 2 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204 D. Listed Special Gas Vents: Condensing gas appliances.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF LISTED VENTS AND CHIMNEYS

A. Locate to comply with minimum clearances from combustibles and minimum termination heights according to product listing or NFPA 211, whichever is most stringent.

B. Seal between sections of positive-pressure vents and grease exhaust ducts according to manufacturer's written installation instructions, using sealants recommended by manufacturer.

C. Support vents at intervals recommended by manufacturer to support weight of vents and all accessories, without exceeding appliance loading.

D. Slope breechings down in direction of appliance, with condensate drain connection at lowest point piped to nearest drain.

E. Lap joints in direction of flow.

F. After completing system installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair damaged finishes.

G. Clean breechings internally, during and after installation, to remove dust and debris. Clean external surfaces to remove welding slag and mill film. Grind welds smooth and apply touchup finish to match factory or shop finish.

H. Provide temporary closures at ends of breechings, chimneys, and stacks that are not completed or connected to equipment.

PART 4 - CONTRACTOR’S QUALITY CONTROL REQUIREMENTS

4.1 GENERAL

A. Comply with applicable provisions of Division 01 Section “Quality Requirements” for requirements for Contractor Quality Control Program.

END OF SECTION 23 51 00

BREECHINGS, CHIMNEYS, AND STACKS 23 51 00 - 3 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

SECTION 23 73 33.16 - INDOOR, INDIRECT, GAS-FIRED HEATING AND VENTILATING UNITS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes indirect, gas-fired heating and ventilating units.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. BAS: Building automation system.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type and configuration of indoor, indirect, gas-fired heating and ventilating unit.

1. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: For each type and configuration of indoor, indirect, gas-fired heating and ventilating unit.

1. Signed, sealed, and prepared by or under the supervision of a qualified professional engineer. 2. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details. 3. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 4. Detail fabrication and assembly of gas-fired heating and ventilating units, as well as procedures and diagrams. 5. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators and for designing vibration isolation bases. 6. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Startup service reports.

INDOOR, INDIRECT, GAS-FIRED HEATING AND VENTILATING UNITS 23 73 33.16 - 1 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

B. Sample Warranty: For manufacturer's special warranty.

1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For indirect-fired heating and ventilating units to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Filters: One set(s) for each unit. 2. Fan Belts: One set(s) for each unit.

1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Comply with NFPA 70.

B. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and Startup."

C. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, Section 6 - "Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning."

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of indirect, gas-fired heating and ventilating units that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period for Heat Exchangers: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, or as acceptable to the Authority, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product. Products may be provided by, but are not limited to, one of the following:

1. Reznor/Thomas & Betts. 2. CaptiveAire Systems.

INDOOR, INDIRECT, GAS-FIRED HEATING AND VENTILATING UNITS 23 73 33.16 - 2 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

3. Greenheck Fan Corporation. 4. I.C.E. Manufacturing Ltd.; Industrial Commercial Equipment - I.C.E. (US), Inc. 5. Modine Manufacturing Company. 6. Sterling HVAC Products. 7. Temprite. 8. Trane. 9. Weather-Rite, Inc.

2.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Factory-assembled, prewired, self-contained unit consisting of cabinet, supply fan, controls, filters, and indirect-fired gas burner to be installed inside the building.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

2.3 UNIT CASINGS

A. General Fabrication Requirements for Casings:

1. Forming: Form walls, roofs, and floors with at least two breaks at each joint. 2. Casing Joints: Sheet metal screws or pop rivets, factory sealed with water-resistant sealant. 3. Factory Finish for Galvanized-Steel Casings: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on enamel finish, consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat. 4. Air-Handling-Unit Mounting Frame: Formed galvanized-steel channel or structural channel supports, designed for low deflection, welded with integral lifting lugs. 5. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1.

B. Configuration: Horizontal unit with horizontal discharge for suspended installation.

C. Cabinet: Galvanized-steel panels, formed to ensure rigidity and supported by galvanized-steel channels or structural channel supports with lifting lugs. Duct flanges at inlet and outlet.

D. Outer Casing: 0.0478-inch- thick steel with heat-resistant, baked-enamel finish over corrosion- resistant-treated surface in color to match fan section.

E. Casing Internal Insulation and Adhesive:

1. Materials: Type I, The entire unit casing shall be insulated withASTM C 1071, Type I 1” thick 1.5 lb/cf fiberglass insulation with hard neoprene backing in a sandwich wall fashion. 2. Location and Application: Factory applied with adhesive and mechanical fasteners to the internal surface of section panels downstream from, and including, the heating-coil section.

INDOOR, INDIRECT, GAS-FIRED HEATING AND VENTILATING UNITS 23 73 33.16 - 3 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

a. Liner Adhesive: Comply with ASTM C 916, Type I. b. Mechanical Fasteners: Galvanized steel, suitable for adhesive, mechanical, or welding attachment to duct without damaging liner when applied as recommended by manufacturer and without causing leakage in cabinet. c. Liner materials applied in this location shall have airstream surface coated with a temperature-resistant coating or faced with a plain or coated fibrous mat or fabric, depending on service-air velocity.

F. Inspection and Access Panels and Access Doors:

1. Access Doors:

a. Hinges: A minimum of two ball-bearing hinges or stainless-steel piano hinge and two wedge-lever-type latches, operable from inside and outside. Arrange doors to be opened against air-pressure differential. b. Gasket: Neoprene, applied around entire perimeters of panel frames. c. Fabricate windows in fan and burner section doors of double-glazed, wire- reinforced safety glass with an air space between panes and sealed with interior and exterior rubber seals. d. Size: At least 18 inches wide by full height of unit casing.

2. Locations and Applications:

a. Fan Section: Doors. b. Access Section: Doors. c. Coil Section: Inspection and access panels. d. Filter Section: Doors large enough to allow periodic removal and installation of filters.

2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. Service Platform: Steel, 42 inches wide running entire length of unit and located on service access side, with angle side rails, 4-inch kick plates, and expanded metal floor. Provide platform with safety hand rail and hangers to attach removal ladder.

2.5 SUPPLY-AIR FAN

A. Fan Type: Centrifugal, rated according to AMCA 210; statically and dynamically balanced, galvanized steel; mounted on solid-steel shaft with heavy-duty, pillow-block bearings rated for L20 or 100,000 hours with external grease fittings.

B. Drive: V-belt drive with matching fan pulley and adjustable motor sheaves and belt assembly.

C. Mounting: Fan wheel, motor, and drives shall be mounted in fan casing with elastomeric isolators.

D. Fan-Shaft Lubrication Lines: Extended to a location outside the casing.

INDOOR, INDIRECT, GAS-FIRED HEATING AND VENTILATING UNITS 23 73 33.16 - 4 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

2.6 AIR FILTERS

A. Comply with NFPA 90A.

B. Disposable Panel Filters: Factory-fabricated, flat-panel-type, disposable air filters with holding frames, with a MERV 8 according to ASHRAE 52.2.

1. Thickness: 2 inches. 2. Media: Interlaced glass fibers. 3. Frame: Galvanized steel. 4. Maximum Face Velocity: 500.

2.7 DAMPERS

A. Outdoor-Air Damper: Galvanized-steel, opposed-blade dampers with vinyl blade seals and stainless-steel jamb seals, having a maximum leakage of 10 cfm/sq. ft. of damper area, at a differential pressure of 2-inch wg.

B. Damper Operator: Direct coupled, electronic with spring return or fully modulating as required by the control sequence.

2.8 INDIRECT-FIRED GAS BURNER

A. Description: Factory assembled, piped, and wired; and complying with ANSI Z21.47, "Gas- Fired Central Furnaces," and with NFPA 54, "National Fuel Gas Code."

1. CSA Approval: Designed and certified by and bearing label of CSA. 2. Burners: 409 Stainless steel.

a. Gas Control Valve: Modulating. b. Fuel: Natural gas. c. Minimum Combustion Efficiency: 80 percent. d. Ignition: Electronically controlled electric spark with flame sensor. e. 15:1 turn down ratio

B. Venting: Power vented, with integral, motorized centrifugal fan interlocked with gas valve.

C. Combustion-Air Intake: Separate combustion-air intake and vent terminal assembly.

D. Heat Exchanger: 409/304 Stainless steel.

E. Heat-Exchanger Drain Pan: Stainless steel.

F. Safety Controls:

1. Vent Flow Verification: Differential pressure switch to verify open vent or Flame rollout switch. 2. Control Transformer: 24-V ac.

INDOOR, INDIRECT, GAS-FIRED HEATING AND VENTILATING UNITS 23 73 33.16 - 5 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

3. High Limit: Thermal switch or fuse to stop burner. 4. Gas Train: Regulated, redundant, 24-V ac gas valve assembly containing pilot solenoid valve, electronic-modulating temperature control valve, pilot filter, pressure regulator, pilot shutoff, and manual shutoff all in one body. 5. Purge-period timer shall automatically delay burner ignition and bypass low-limit control. 6. Gas Manifold: Safety switches and controls complying with ANSI standards and CSD 1. 7. Airflow Proving Switch: Differential pressure switch senses correct airflow before energizing pilot. 8. Automatic-Reset, High-Limit Control Device: Stops burner and closes main gas valve if high-limit temperature is exceeded. 9. Safety Lockout Switch: Locks out ignition sequence if burner fails to light after three tries. Controls are reset manually by turning the unit off and on.

2.9 UNIT CONTROL PANEL

A. Factory-wired, fuse-protected control transformer, connection for power supply and field-wired unit to remote control panel.

B. Control Panel: Surface-mounted remote panel, with engraved plastic cover, and the following lights and switches:

1. On-off-auto fan switch. 2. Heat-vent-off switch. 3. Supply-fan operation indicating light. 4. Heating operation indicating light. 5. Thermostat. 6. Damper position potentiometer. 7. Dirty-filter indicating light operated by unit-mounted differential pressure switch. 8. Safety-lockout indicating light. 9. Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 1.

2.10 CONTROLS

A. Comply with requirements in Section 23 09 00 "Instrumentation and Control for HVAC" and Section 23 09 93 "Sequence of Operations for HVAC Controls" for control equipment and sequence of operation.

B. Control Devices:

1. Remote Thermostat: Adjustable room thermostat with temperature readout. 2. Remote Setback Thermostat: Adjustable room thermostat without temperature readout. 3. Static-Pressure Transmitter: Nondirectional sensor with suitable range for expected input, and temperature compensated. 4. Fire-Protection Thermostats: Fixed or adjustable settings to operate at not less than 75 deg F above normal maximum operating temperature.

INDOOR, INDIRECT, GAS-FIRED HEATING AND VENTILATING UNITS 23 73 33.16 - 6 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

5. Timers: Seven-day, programming-switch timer with synchronous-timing motor and seven-day dial; continuously charged, nickel-cadmium-battery-driven, eight-hour, power- failure carryover; multiple-switch trippers; minimum of two and maximum of eight signals per day with two normally open and two normally closed output contacts. 6. Timers: Solid-state, programmable time control with four separate programs; 24-hour battery carryover; individual on-off-auto switches for each program; 365-day calendar with 20 programmable holidays; choice of fail-safe operation for each program; and system fault alarm. 7. Ionization-Type Smoke Detectors: 24-V dc, nominal; self-restoring; plug-in arrangement; integral visual-indicating light; sensitivity that can be tested and adjusted in place after installation; integral addressable module; remote controllability; responsive to both visible and invisible products of combustion; self-compensating for changes in environmental conditions. 8. Smoke detectors, located in supply air, shall stop fans when the presence of smoke is detected.

C. Fan Control: Interlock fan to start with exhaust fan(s) to which this heating and ventilating unit is associated for makeup air.

D. Fan Control: Timer starts and stops indirect-fired heating and ventilating unit and exhaust fan(s).

1. Smoke detectors, located in supply air, shall stop fans when the presence of smoke is detected.

E. Outdoor-Air Damper Control, 100 Percent Outdoor-Air Units: Outdoor-air damper shall open when supply fan starts, and close when fan stops.

F. Temperature Control: Operates gas valve to maintain supply-air temperature.

1. Operates gas valve to maintain discharge-air temperature with factory-mounted sensor in blower outlet. 2. Burner Control: 20 to 100 percent modulation of the firing rate. 10 to 100 percent with dual burner units.

G. BAS Interface: Factory-installed hardware and software to enable the BAS to monitor, control, and display status and alarms of heating and ventilating unit.

1. Hardwired Points:

a. Discharge-air temperature. b. Burner operating.

2. Compatible with existing Siemens Building Automation System, communication interface with the BAS shall enable the BAS operator to remotely control and monitor the heating and ventilating unit from an operator workstation. Control features and monitoring points displayed locally at heating and ventilating unit control panel shall be available through the BAS.

INDOOR, INDIRECT, GAS-FIRED HEATING AND VENTILATING UNITS 23 73 33.16 - 7 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

2.11 MOTORS

A. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, and efficiency requirements for motors specified in Section 23 05 13 "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment."

1. Enclosure: Open, dripproof. 2. Enclosure Materials: Cast iron. 3. Efficiency: EPAct compliant.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of indirect-fired heating and ventilating units.

B. Examine roughing-in for piping, ducts, and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before equipment installation.

C. Verify cleanliness of airflow path to include inner-casing surfaces, filters, coils, turning vanes, fan wheels, and other components.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Equipment Mounting:

1. Comply with requirements for vibration isolation and seismic control devices specified in Section 23 05 48 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC."

B. Install gas-fired units according to NFPA 54, "National Fuel Gas Code."

C. Install controls and equipment shipped by manufacturer for field installation with indirect-fired heating and ventilating units.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

1. Gas Piping: Comply with requirements in Section 23 11 23 "Facility Natural-Gas Piping." Connect gas piping with shutoff valve and union and with sufficient clearance for burner removal and service. Make final connections of gas piping to unit with

INDOOR, INDIRECT, GAS-FIRED HEATING AND VENTILATING UNITS 23 73 33.16 - 8 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

corrugated, stainless-steel tubing flexible connectors complying with ANSI LC 1/CSA 6.26 equipment connections.

B. Where installing piping adjacent to heating and ventilating units, allow space for service and maintenance.

C. Duct Connections: Connect supply and outdoor air ducts to indirect-fired heating and ventilating units with flexible duct connectors. Comply with requirements in Section 23 33 00 "Air Duct Accessories" for flexible duct connectors.

D. Ground equipment according to Section 26 05 26 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

E. Connect wiring according to Section 26 05 19 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

B. Perform tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative.

C. Units will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.5 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.

1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions and perform the following: 2. Inspect for visible damage to burner combustion chamber. 3. Inspect casing insulation for integrity, moisture content, and adhesion. 4. Verify that clearances have been provided for servicing. 5. Verify that controls are connected and operable.

a. Verify that filters are installed. b. Purge gas line. c. Inspect and adjust vibration isolators. d. Verify bearing lubrication. e. Inspect fan-wheel rotation for movement in correct direction without vibration and binding. f. Adjust fan belts to proper alignment and tension. g. Start unit according to manufacturer's written instructions.

6. Complete startup sheets and attach copy with Contractor's startup report.

INDOOR, INDIRECT, GAS-FIRED HEATING AND VENTILATING UNITS 23 73 33.16 - 9 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

7. Inspect and record performance of interlocks and protective devices; verify sequences. 8. Operate unit for run-in period recommended by manufacturer. 9. Perform the following operations for both minimum and maximum firing and adjust burner for peak efficiency:

a. Measure gas pressure at manifold. b. Measure combustion-air temperature at inlet to combustion chamber. c. Measure supply-air temperature and volume when burner is at maximum firing rate and when burner is off. Calculate useful heat to supply air.

10. Calibrate thermostats. 11. Adjust and inspect high-temperature limits. 12. Inspect dampers, if any, for proper stroke and interlock with return-air dampers. 13. Inspect controls for correct sequencing of heating, mixing dampers, refrigeration, and normal and emergency shutdown. 14. Measure and record airflow. Plot fan volumes on fan curve. 15. Verify operation of remote panel, including pilot-operation and failure modes. Inspect the following:

a. High-limit heat. b. Alarms.

16. After startup and performance testing, change filters, verify bearing lubrication, and adjust belt tension. 17. Verify drain-pan performance. 18. Verify outdoor-air damper operation.

3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust initial temperature set points.

B. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated.

C. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months from date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose.

3.7 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain heating and ventilating units.

PART 4 - CONTRACTOR’S QUALITY CONTROL REQUIREMENTS

4.1 GENERAL

INDOOR, INDIRECT, GAS-FIRED HEATING AND VENTILATING UNITS 23 73 33.16 - 10 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

A. Comply with applicable provisions of Division 01 Section “Quality Requirements” for requirements for Contractor Quality Control Program.

END OF SECTION 23 73 33.16

INDOOR, INDIRECT, GAS-FIRED HEATING AND VENTILATING UNITS 23 73 33.16 - 11 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

SECTION 23 82 13 - VALANCE HEATING AND COOLING UNITS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Electric radiant heaters.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, specialties, and accessories for each product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. Detail equipment assemblies and suspension and attachment. 2. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 3. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plan(s) and other details, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:

1. Suspended ceiling components. 2. Structural members to which heaters and suspension systems will be attached. 3. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile. 4. Items penetrating finished ceiling, including the following:

a. Lighting fixtures. b. Air outlets and inlets. c. Sprinklers.

B. Seismic Qualification Certificates: Submit certification that suspended radiant heaters and panels, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Section 23 05 48 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment." Include the following:

VALANCE HEATING AND COOLING UNITS 23 82 13 - 1 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation.

a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."

2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. 3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements.

C. Field quality-control reports.

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For electric radiant heaters to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ELECTRIC RADIANT HEATERS

1. Berko Electric Heating; a division of Marley Engineered Products. 2. Chromalox Inc.; a division of Emerson Electric Company. 3. Fostoria Industries, Inc.; a division of TPI Corporation. 4. Markel Products; a division of TPI Corporation.

B. Quartz Lamp Heating Elements: Coiled tungsten-wire heating element enclosed in clear quartz tube.

C. Comply with UL 499 and UL 2021.

D. Enclosures: Stainless-steel housing with anodized-aluminum reflector.

E. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

F. Unit Controls:

1. Line-voltage thermostat. 2. Motion sensor.

VALANCE HEATING AND COOLING UNITS 23 82 13 - 2 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

G. Control Panels:

1. The infrared heaters shall be controlled using a Distribution/Contactor Panel, Hand-Off- Automatic control switch, and controlled with thermostat set for 45 degrees that opens on temperature rise. 2. The Distribution/Contactor Panel shall be NEMA 1 enclosure and have a UL label as a system rated for 300 Amps with (6) 50 Amp 3-pole contactors. The contactors shall be 3-pole definite purpose rated for 50 Amps with 120 VAC coils. Panel shall be equipped with control power (120 V) transformer. Contactor panel shall be Fostoria, Model Number FPC-463-6FA. Fuses shall be included in the panels. 3. Thermostat shall be a NEMA 4, 0-120 degrees F device.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas to receive radiant heating units for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine roughing-in for electrical connections to verify actual locations before radiant heating and cooling unit installation.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install radiant heating and cooling units level and plumb.

B. Suspend radiant heaters from structure.

C. Coordinate layout and installation of radiant heaters and suspension-system components with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, communications system, security system, and partition assemblies.

D. Install devices 60 inches (1525 mm) above finished floor.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Ground electric units according to Section 26 05 26 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

B. Connect wiring according to Section 26 05 19 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

VALANCE HEATING AND COOLING UNITS 23 82 13 - 3 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative:

1. Operate electric heating elements through each stage to verify proper operation and electrical connections. 2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and units.

B. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

C. After installing panels, inspect unit cabinet for damage to finish. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris. Repair damaged finish to match original finish.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.5 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain radiant heaters and panels. See Section 01 79 00 "Demonstration and Training."

PART 4 - CONTRACTOR’S QUALITY CONTROL REQUIREMENTS

4.1 GENERAL

A. Comply with applicable provisions of Division 01 Section “Quality Requirements” for requirements for Contractor Quality Control Program.

END OF SECTION 23 82 13

VALANCE HEATING AND COOLING UNITS 23 82 13 - 4 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

SECTION 26 05 00 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Electrical equipment coordination and installation. 2. Sleeves for raceways and cables. 3. Sleeve seals. 4. Grout. 5. Common electrical installation requirements.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For sleeve seals.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate arrangement, mounting, and support of electrical equipment:

1. To allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights that reduce headroom are indicated. 2. To provide for ease of disconnecting the equipment with minimum interference to other installations. 3. To allow right of way for piping and conduit installed at required slope. 4. So connecting raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, and busways will be clear of obstructions and of the working and access space of other equipment.

B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in cast-in-place concrete, masonry walls, and other structural components as they are constructed.

C. Coordinate Electrical Installation performed under this project with the Terminal A Expansion project construction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SLEEVES FOR RACEWAYS AND CABLES

A. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends.

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 26 05 00 - 1 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

B. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings: Galvanized sheet steel.

1. Minimum Metal Thickness:

a. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches and no side more than 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.052 inch. b. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter equal to, or more than, 50 inches and 1 or more sides equal to, or more than, 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.138 inch.

2.2 SLEEVE SEALS

A. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable.

a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. b. Calpico, Inc. c. Metraflex Co. d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

2. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of cable or conduit. Include type and number required for material and size of raceway or cable. 3. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel. Include two for each sealing element. 4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element.

2.3 GROUT

A. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged, nonmetallic aggregate grout, noncorrosive, nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1.

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 26 05 00 - 2 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

B. Measure indicated mounting heights to bottom of unit for suspended items and to center of unit for wall-mounting items.

C. Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated, arrange and install components and equipment to provide maximum possible headroom consistent with these requirements.

D. Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components of both electrical equipment and other nearby installations. Connect in such a way as to facilitate future disconnecting with minimum interference with other items in the vicinity.

E. Right of Way: Give to piping systems installed at a required slope.

3.2 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Electrical penetrations occur when raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, or busways penetrate concrete slabs, concrete or masonry walls, or fire-rated floor and wall assemblies.

B. Concrete Slabs and Walls: Install sleeves for penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of slabs and walls.

C. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.

D. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies unless openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated during construction of floor or wall.

E. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls.

F. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches above finished floor level.

G. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and raceway or cable, unless indicated otherwise.

H. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry

1. Promptly pack grout solidly between sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Tool exposed surfaces smooth; protect grout while curing.

I. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint.

J. Fire-Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at raceway and cable penetrations. Install sleeves and seal raceway and cable penetration sleeves with firestop materials.

K. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways and cables with flexible boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 26 05 00 - 3 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

L. Underground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Install cast-iron pipe sleeves. Size sleeves to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between raceway or cable and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

3.3 SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION

A. Install to seal exterior wall penetrations.

B. Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway or cable material and size. Position raceway or cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between raceway or cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

3.4 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies for electrical installations to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly.

PART 4 - CONTRACTOR’S QUALITY CONTROL REQUIREMENTS

4.1 GENERAL

A. Comply with applicable provisions of Division 01 Section “Quality Requirements” for requirements for Contractor Quality Control Program.

END OF SECTION 26 05 00

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 26 05 00 - 4 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

SECTION 26 05 19 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less. 2. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less.

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Field quality-control reports.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing Association (NETA) or is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or the National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

C. Comply with NFPA 70.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Copper Conductors: Comply with NEMA WC 70.

LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 05 19 - 1 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

B. Conductor Insulation: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658 for Types THHN-THWN and Type XHHW.

C. Multiconductor Cable: Comply with NEMA WC 70.

2.2 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES

A. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class for application and service indicated.

2.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. Comply with NFPA 70.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS

A. Feeders: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.

B. Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger, except VFC cable, which shall be extra flexible stranded.

3.2 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND WIRING METHODS

A. Service Entrance: Type THHN-2-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.

B. Exposed Feeders: Type THHN-2-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.

C. Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, Partitions, and Crawlspaces: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.

D. Feeders Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type XHHW, single conductors in raceway.

E. Exposed Branch Circuits, Including in Crawlspaces: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.

F. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.

LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 05 19 - 2 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

G. Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type XHHW, single conductors in raceway.

H. Class 1 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway.

I. Class 2 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors.

B. Complete raceway installation between conductor and cable termination points according to Section 26 05 33 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" prior to pulling conductors and cables.

C. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.

D. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will not damage cables or raceway.

E. Support cables according to Section 26 05 29 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."

F. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque- tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A-486B.

B. Make splices, terminations, and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors.

1. Use oxide inhibitor in each splice, termination, and tap for aluminum conductors.

C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 12 inches of slack.

3.5 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Section 26 05 53 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 05 19 - 3 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

B. Identify each spare conductor at each end with identity number and location of other end of conductor, and identify as spare conductor.

3.6 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly.

PART 4 - CONTRACTOR’S QUALITY CONTROL REQUIREMENTS

4.1 GENERAL

A. Comply with applicable provisions of Division 01 Section “Quality Requirements” for requirements for Contractor Quality Control Program.

B. Field Quality Control:

1. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports. 2. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports. 3. Tests and Inspections:

a. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized, test feeder conductors, and conductors feeding the critical equipment and services for compliance with requirements. b. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. c. Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each splice in cables and conductors No. 3 AWG and larger. Remove box and equipment covers so splices are accessible to portable scanner.

1) Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each splice 11 months after date of Substantial Completion. 2) Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device. 3) Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies splices checked and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

4. Test Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following:

a. Test procedures used. b. Test results that comply with requirements. c. Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve compliance with requirements.

LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 05 19 - 4 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

5. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

C. Cables will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

END OF SECTION 26 05 19

LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 05 19 - 5 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

SECTION 26 05 26 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes grounding and bonding systems and equipment.

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Other Informational Submittals: Plans showing dimensioned as-built locations of grounding features specified in Part 3 "Field Quality Control" Article, including the following:

1. Ground rods. 2. Grounding arrangements and connections for separately derived systems. 3. Grounding for sensitive electronic equipment.

C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For grounding to include the following in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals:

1. Instructions for periodic testing and inspection of grounding features at grounding connections for separately derived systems based on NFPA 70B.

a. Tests shall be to determine if ground resistance or impedance values remain within specified maximums, and instructions shall recommend corrective action if they do not. b. Include recommended testing intervals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUCTORS

A. Insulated Conductors: Copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise required by applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Bare Copper Conductors:

1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3. 2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8. 3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33. 4. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG conductor, 1/4 inch in diameter. 5. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor.

GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 26 - 1 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

6. Bonding Jumper: Copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick. 7. Tinned Bonding Jumper: Tinned-copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick.

2.2 CONNECTORS

A. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for applications in which used and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items connected.

B. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for materials being joined and installation conditions.

2.3 GROUNDING ELECTRODES

A. Ground Rods: Copper-clad steel; 3/4 inch by 10 feet.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATIONS

A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for AWG and larger unless otherwise indicated.

B. Underground Grounding Conductors: Install bare tinned-copper conductor, No. 4/0 AWG minimum.

1. Bury at least 24 inches below grade.

C. Conductor Terminations and Connections:

1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors. 2. Underground Connections: Welded connectors except at test wells and as otherwise indicated. 3. Connections to Ground Rods at Test Wells: Bolted connectors. 4. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors.

3.2 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING

A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch circuits.

B. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with the following items, in addition to those required by NFPA 70:

GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 26 - 2 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

1. Feeders and branch circuits. 2. Lighting circuits. 3. Receptacle circuits. 4. Single-phase motor and appliance branch circuits. 5. Three-phase motor and appliance branch circuits. 6. Flexible raceway runs. 7. Armored and metal-clad cable runs. 8. Busway Supply Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor from grounding bus in the switchgear, switchboard, or distribution panel to equipment grounding bar terminal on busway.

C. Air-Duct Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor to duct- mounted electrical devices operating at 120 V and more, including air cleaners, heaters, dampers, humidifiers, and other duct electrical equipment. Bond conductor to each unit and to air duct and connected metallic piping.

D. Water Heater, Heat-Tracing, and Antifrost Heating Cables: Install a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor to each electric water heater and heat-tracing cable. Bond conductor to heater units, piping, connected equipment, and components.

E. Signal and Communication Equipment: For telephone, alarm, voice and data, and other communication equipment, provide No. 4 AWG minimum insulated grounding conductor in raceway from grounding electrode system to each service location, terminal cabinet, wiring closet, and central equipment location.

1. Service and Central Equipment Locations and Wiring Closets: Terminate grounding conductor on a 1/4-by-2-by-12-inch grounding bus. 2. Terminal Cabinets: Terminate grounding conductor on cabinet grounding terminal.

F. Metallic Fences: Comply with requirements of IEEE C2.

1. Grounding Conductor: Bare, tinned copper, not less than No. 8 AWG. 2. Gates: Shall be bonded to the grounding conductor with a flexible bonding jumper. 3. Barbed Wire: Strands shall be bonded to the grounding conductor.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible unless required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.

B. Ground Bonding Common with Lightning Protection System: Comply with NFPA 780 and UL 96 when interconnecting with lightning protection system. Bond electrical power system ground directly to lightning protection system grounding conductor at closest point to electrical service grounding electrode. Use bonding conductor sized same as system grounding electrode conductor, and install in conduit.

C. Ground Rods: Drive rods until tops are a minimum of 2 inches below finished floor or final grade.

GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 26 - 3 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

1. Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductor below grade and as otherwise indicated. Make connections without exposing steel or damaging coating if any.

D. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance except where routed through short lengths of conduit.

1. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate any adjacent parts. 2. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install bonding so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment. 3. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations; if a disconnect-type connection is required, use a bolted clamp.

E. Grounding and Bonding for Piping:

1. Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system downstream from equipment shutoff valve.

F. Bonding Interior Metal Ducts: Bond metal air ducts to equipment grounding conductors of associated fans, blowers, electric heaters, and air cleaners. Install bonding jumper to bond across flexible duct connections to achieve continuity.

G. Grounding for Steel Building Structure: Install a driven ground rod at base of each corner column and at intermediate exterior columns at distances not more than 60 feet apart.

PART 4 - CONTRACTOR’S QUALITY CONTROL REQUIREMENTS

4.1 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Comply with applicable provisions of Division 01 Section “Quality Requirements” for requirements for Contractor Quality Control Program.

C. Field Quality Control:

1. Testing Agency: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing Association (NETA) or is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

a. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the InterNational Electrical Testing Association to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3.

GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 26 - 4 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

2. Perform the following tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

a. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been energized, test for compliance with requirements. b. Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground- resistance level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal. Make tests at ground rods before any conductors are connected.

1) Measure ground resistance not less than two full days after last trace of precipitation and without soil being moistened by any means other than natural drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural ground resistance. 2) Perform tests by fall-of-potential method according to IEEE 81.

c. Prepare dimensioned drawings locating each test well, ground rod and ground rod assembly, and other grounding electrodes. Identify each by letter in alphabetical order, and key to the record of tests and observations. Include the number of rods driven and their depth at each location, and include observations of weather and other phenomena that may affect test results. Describe measures taken to improve test results.

3. Report measured ground resistances that exceed the following values:

a. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity 500 kVA and Less: 10 ohms. b. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity 500 to 1000 kVA: 5 ohms. c. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity More Than 1000 kVA: 3 ohms. d. Power Distribution Units or Panelboards Serving Electronic Equipment: 3 ohm(s).

4. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify COTR promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance.

5. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.

END OF SECTION 26 05 26

GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 26 - 5 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

SECTION 26 05 29 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes:

1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems. 2. Construction requirements for concrete bases.

1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Delegated Design: Design supports for multiple raceways, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

B. Design supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems and its contents.

C. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components.

D. Rated Strength: Adequate in tension, shear, and pullout force to resist maximum loads calculated or imposed for this Project, with a minimum structural safety factor of five times the applied force.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For steel slotted support systems.

B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the following:

1. Trapeze hangers. Include Product Data for components. 2. Steel slotted channel systems. Include Product Data for components. 3. Equipment supports.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Welding certificates.

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 29 - 1 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS

A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components for field assembly.

a. Allied Tube & Conduit. b. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. c. ERICO International Corporation. d. GS Metals Corp. e. Thomas & Betts Corporation. f. Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd.

2. Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to MFMA-4. 3. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria.

B. Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101.

C. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.

D. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non-armored electrical conductors or cables in riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces as required to suit individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be malleable iron.

E. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

F. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their supports to building surfaces include the following:

1. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, or as acceptable to the Authority, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1) Hilti Inc. 2) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc. 3) MKT Fastening, LLC.

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 29 - 2 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

4) Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.; Masterset Fastening Systems Unit.

2. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units similar to MSS Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58. 3. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable for attached structural element. 4. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325. 5. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type. 6. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.

2.2 FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES

A. Description: Welded or bolted, structural-steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions of supported equipment.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter.

B. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for EMT and RMC as required by NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch in diameter.

C. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted or other support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding specified design load limits.

1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with two-bolt conduit clamps.

3.2 SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this Article.

B. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, EMT and RMC may be supported by openings through structure members, as permitted in NFPA 70.

C. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 lb.

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 29 - 3 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

D. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless otherwise indicated by code:

1. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts. 2. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor fasteners on solid masonry units. 3. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners. 4. Instead of expansion anchors, powder-actuated driven threaded studs provided with lock washers and nuts may be used in existing standard-weight concrete 4 inches thick or greater. Do not use for anchorage to lightweight-aggregate concrete or for slabs less than 4 inches thick. 5. To Steel: Beam clamps (MSS Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27) complying with MSS SP-69. 6. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws. 7. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets, panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate by means that meet seismic-restraint strength and anchorage requirements.

E. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing bars.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS

A. Comply with installation requirements in Section 05 50 00 "Metal Fabrications" for site- fabricated metal supports.

B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

3.4 CONCRETE BASES

A. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated but not less than 4 inches larger in both directions than supported unit, and so anchors will be a minimum of 10 bolt diameters from edge of the base.

B. Use 4000-psi, 28-day compressive-strength concrete. Concrete materials, reinforcement, and placement requirements are specified in Section 03 30 00 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

C. Anchor equipment to concrete base.

1. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 2. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. 3. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions.

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 29 - 4 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

3.5 PAINTING

A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.

1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.

PART 4 - CONTRACTOR’S QUALITY CONTROL REQUIREMENTS

4.1 Quality Control

A. Comply with applicable provisions of Division 01 Section “Quality Requirements” for requirements for Contractor Quality Control Program.

B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

C. Comply with NFPA 70.

END OF SECTION 26 05 29

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 29 - 5 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

SECTION 26 05 33 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings. 2. Nonmetal conduits, tubing, and fittings. 3. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 26 05 43 "Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems" for exterior ductbanks, manholes, and underground utility construction.

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover enclosures, and cabinets.

B. Shop Drawings: For the following raceway components. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Custom enclosures and cabinets. 2. For handholes and boxes for underground wiring, including the following:

a. Duct entry provisions, including locations and duct sizes. b. Frame and cover design. c. Grounding details. d. Dimensioned locations of cable rack inserts, and pulling-in and lifting irons. e. Joint details.

1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Coordination Drawings: Conduit routing plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of items involved:

1. Structural members in paths of conduit groups with common supports. 2. HVAC and plumbing items and 3. Architectural features in paths of conduit groups with common supports. 4. Baggage handling system equipment including but not limited to conveyors, conduits, and Motor Control Panel in the paths of conduit groups with common supports.

RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33 - 1 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

B. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For enclosures, cabinets, and conduit racks and their mounting provisions, including those for internal components, from manufacturer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL CONDUITS, TUBING, AND FITTINGS

A. Listing and Labeling: Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. Conduit used for this project shall be selected from those listed below.

B. GRC: Comply with ANSI C80.1 and UL 6.

C. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket and complying with UL 360.

D. Fittings for Metal Conduit: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 514B.

1. Conduit Fittings for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with UL 886 and NFPA 70.

E. Joint Compound for GRC: Approved, as defined in NFPA 70, by authorities having jurisdiction for use in conduit assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and protect threaded conduit joints from corrosion and to enhance their conductivity.

2.2 NONMETALLIC CONDUITS, TUBING, AND FITTINGS

A. Listing and Labeling: Nonmetallic conduits, tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. Conduit used for this project shall be selected from those listed below.

B. RNC: Type EPC-40-PVC, complying with NEMA TC 2 and UL 651 unless otherwise indicated.

C. Fittings for ENT and RNC: Comply with NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material.

2.3 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS

A. General Requirements for Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets: Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets installed in wet locations shall be listed for use in wet locations.

B. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1 and UL 514A.

C. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, ferrous alloy, Type FD, with gasketed cover.

RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33 - 2 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

D. Metal Floor Boxes:

1. Material: Cast metal. 2. Type: Fully adjustable. 3. Shape: Rectangular. 4. Listing and Labeling: Metal floor boxes shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

E. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.

F. Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 1773, galvanized, cast iron with gasketed cover.

G. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: Comply with UL 50 and NEMA 250, Type 3R with continuous- hinge cover with flush latch unless otherwise indicated.

1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.

H. Cabinets:

1. NEMA 250, Type 3R galvanized-steel box with removable interior panel and removable front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. 2. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge. 3. Key latch to match panelboards. 4. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage. 5. Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment.

2.4 HANDHOLES AND BOXES FOR EXTERIOR UNDERGROUND WIRING

A. General Requirements for Handholes and Boxes:

1. Boxes and handholes for use in underground systems shall be designed and identified as defined in NFPA 70, for intended location and application. 2. Boxes installed in wet areas shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. Polymer-Concrete Handholes and Boxes with Polymer-Concrete Cover: Molded of sand and aggregate, bound together with polymer resin, and reinforced with steel, fiberglass, or a combination of the two.

1. Standard: Comply with SCTE 77. 2. Configuration: Designed for flush burial with closed bottom unless otherwise indicated. 3. Cover: Weatherproof, secured by tamper-resistant locking devices and having structural load rating consistent with enclosure and handhole location. 4. Cover Finish: Nonskid finish shall have a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.50. 5. Cover Legend: Molded lettering, "ELECTRIC.". 6. Conduit Entrance Provisions: Conduit-terminating fittings shall mate with entering ducts for secure, fixed installation in enclosure wall.

RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33 - 3 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION

A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated:

1. Exposed Conduit: GRC. 2. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: GRC. 3. Underground Conduit: RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC, concrete encased. 4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC. 5. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 3R.

B. Indoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated.

1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: GRC. 2. Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage: GRC. Raceway locations include the following:

a. Loading dock. b. Corridors used for traffic of mechanized carts, forklifts, and pallet-handling units. c. Baggage handling areas.

3. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: GRC. 4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC. 5. Damp or Wet Locations: GRC. 6. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 3R stainless steel in institutional and commercial kitchens and damp or wet locations.

C. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4-inch trade size.

D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.

1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings unless otherwise indicated. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10.

E. Do not install aluminum conduits, boxes, or fittings in contact with concrete or earth.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except where requirements on Drawings or in this article are stricter. Comply with NFPA 70 limitations for types of raceways allowed in specific occupancies and number of floors.

B. Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.

RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33 - 4 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

C. Comply with requirements in Section 26 05 29 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for hangers and supports.

D. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above finished slab.

E. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for control wiring conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed. Support within 12 inches of changes in direction.

F. Conceal conduit within finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated. Install conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines.

G. Support conduit within 12 inches of enclosures to which attached.

H. Raceways Embedded in Slabs:

1. Run conduit larger than 1-inch trade size, parallel or at right angles to main reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab support. Secure raceways to reinforcement at maximum 10-foot intervals. 2. Arrange raceways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion fittings. 3. Change from ENT to GRC before rising above floor.

I. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound manufacturer's written instructions.

J. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings to protect conductors including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG.

K. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire. Cap underground raceways designated as spare above grade alongside raceways in use.

L. Install devices to seal raceway interiors at suitable, approved, and accessible locations. Locate seals so no fittings or boxes are between the seal and the following changes of environments. Seal the interior of all raceways at the following points:

1. Where an underground service raceway enters a building or structure. 2. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.

M. Flexible Conduit Connections: Comply with NEMA RV 3. Use a maximum of 18 inches of flexible conduit for equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors.

1. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations subject to severe physical damage. 2. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations not subject to severe physical damage.

N. Mount boxes at heights that comply with ADA requirements.

RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33 - 5 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

O. Horizontally separate boxes mounted on opposite sides of walls so they are not in the same vertical channel.

P. Locate boxes so that cover or plate will not span different building finishes.

Q. Support boxes of three gangs or more from more than one side by spanning two framing members or mounting on brackets specifically designed for the purpose.

R. Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure. Do not support boxes by conduits.

3.3 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 26 05 00 "Common Work Results for Electrical."

3.4 FIRESTOPPING

A. Install firestopping at penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage and deterioration.

1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer. 2. Repair damage to PVC coatings or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by manufacturer.

PART 4 - CONTRACTOR’S QUALITY CONTROL REQUIREMENTS

4.1 QUALITY CONTROL

A. Comply with applicable provisions of Division 01 Section “Quality Requirements” for requirements for Contractor Quality Control Program.

END OF SECTION 26 05 33

RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33 - 6 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

SECTION 26 05 43 - UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Conduit, ducts, and duct accessories for concrete-encased duct banks. 2. Handholes and boxes. 3. Manholes.

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For accessories for manholes, handholes, and boxes.

B. Shop Drawings for Precast or Factory-Fabricated Underground Utility Structures: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, attachments to other work, and accessories, including the following:

1. Duct entry provisions, including locations and duct sizes. 2. Reinforcement details. 3. Frame and cover design and manhole frame support rings. 4. Ladder details. 5. Grounding details. 6. Dimensioned locations of cable rack inserts, pulling-in and lifting irons, and sumps. 7. Joint details.

C. Shop Drawings for Factory-Fabricated Handholes and Boxes: Include dimensioned plans, sections, and elevations, and fabrication and installation details, including the following:

1. Duct entry provisions, including locations and duct sizes. 2. Cover design. 3. Grounding details. 4. Dimensioned locations of cable rack inserts, and pulling-in and lifting irons.

1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Field quality-control test reports.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Comply with ANSI C2.

UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL 26 05 43 - 1 SYSTEMS DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

B. Comply with NFPA 70.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUIT

A. Rigid Steel Conduit: Galvanized. Comply with ANSI C80.1.

B. RNC: NEMA TC 2, Type EPC-40-PVC, UL 651, with matching fittings by same manufacturer as the conduit, complying with NEMA TC 3 and UL 514B.

2.2 NONMETALLIC DUCTS AND DUCT ACCESSORIES

1. ARNCO Corp. 2. Beck Manufacturing. 3. Cantex, Inc. 4. CertainTeed Corp.; Pipe & Plastics Group. 5. Condux International, Inc. 6. ElecSys, Inc. 7. Electri-Flex Company. 8. IPEX Inc. 9. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products. 10. Manhattan/CDT; a division of Cable Design Technologies. 11. Spiraduct/AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 12. Thomas & Betts Corporation.

B. Duct Accessories:

1. Duct Separators: Factory-fabricated rigid PVC interlocking spacers, sized for type and sizes of ducts with which used, and selected to provide minimum duct spacings indicated while supporting ducts during concreting or backfilling. 2. Warning Tape: Underground-line warning tape specified in Section 26 05 53 "Identification for Electrical Systems." 3. Concrete Warning Planks: Nominal 12 by 24 by 3 inches in size, manufactured from 6000-psi concrete.

a. Color: Red dye added to concrete during batching. b. Mark each plank with "ELECTRIC" in 2-inch-high, 3/8-inch-deep letters.

2.3 HANDHOLES AND BOXES

A. Description: Comply with SCTE 77.

UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL 26 05 43 - 2 SYSTEMS DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

1. Color: Gray. 2. Configuration: Units shall be designed for flush burial and have open bottom. 3. Cover: Weatherproof, secured by tamper-resistant locking devices and having structural load rating consistent with enclosure. 4. Cover Finish: Nonskid finish shall have a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.50. 5. Cover Legend: Molded lettering, "ELECTRIC." 6. Duct Entrance Provisions: Duct-terminating fittings shall mate with entering ducts for secure, fixed installation in enclosure wall. 7. Handholes 12 inches wide by 24 inches long and larger shall have inserts for cable racks and pulling-in irons installed before concrete is poured.

B. Fiberglass Handholes and Boxes with Polymer Concrete Frame and Cover: Sheet-molded, fiberglass-reinforced, polyester resin enclosure joined to polymer concrete top ring or frame.

a. Armorcast Products Company. b. Carson Industries LLC. c. Christy Concrete Products. d. Synertech Moulded Products, Inc.; a division of Oldcastle Precast.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EARTHWORK

A. Excavation and Backfill: Comply with Section P152 "Excavation and Embankment," but do not use heavy-duty, hydraulic-operated, compaction equipment.

B. Restore surface features at areas disturbed by excavation and reestablish original grades, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Restore areas disturbed by trenching, storing of dirt, cable laying, and other work.

D. Cut and patch existing pavement in the path of underground ducts and utility structures according to Section P-401 "Plant Mix Bituminous Pavements."

3.2 DUCT INSTALLATION

A. Slope: Pitch ducts a minimum slope of 1:300 down toward manholes and handholes and away from buildings and equipment. Slope ducts from a high point in runs between two manholes to drain in both directions.

B. Curves and Bends: Use 5-degree angle couplings for small changes in direction. Use manufactured long sweep bends with a minimum radius of 48 inches, both horizontally and vertically, at other locations, unless otherwise indicated.

UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL 26 05 43 - 3 SYSTEMS DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

C. Joints: Use solvent-cemented joints in ducts and fittings and make watertight according to manufacturer's written instructions. Stagger couplings so those of adjacent ducts do not lie in same plane.

D. Duct Entrances to Manholes and Concrete and Polymer Concrete Handholes: Use end bells, spaced approximately 10 inches o.c. for 5-inch ducts, and vary proportionately for other duct sizes.

1. Begin change from regular spacing to end-bell spacing 10 feet from the end bell without reducing duct line slope and without forming a trap in the line. 2. Direct-Buried Duct Banks: Install an expansion and deflection fitting in each conduit in the area of disturbed earth adjacent to manhole or handhole. 3. Grout end bells into structure walls from both sides to provide watertight entrances.

E. Building Wall Penetrations: Make a transition from underground duct to rigid steel conduit at least 10 feet outside the building wall without reducing duct line slope away from the building, and without forming a trap in the line. Use fittings manufactured for duct-to-conduit transition.

F. Sealing: Provide temporary closure at terminations of ducts that have cables pulled. Seal spare ducts at terminations. Use sealing compound and plugs to withstand at least 15-psig hydrostatic pressure.

G. Pulling Cord: Install 200-lbf test nylon cord in ducts, including spares.

H. Concrete-Encased Ducts: Support ducts on duct separators.

1. Separator Installation: Space separators close enough to prevent sagging and deforming of ducts, with not less than 4 spacers per 20 feet of duct. Secure separators to earth and to ducts to prevent floating during concreting. Stagger separators approximately 6 inches between tiers. Tie entire assembly together using fabric straps; do not use tie wires or reinforcing steel that may form conductive or magnetic loops around ducts or duct groups. 2. Concreting Sequence: Pour each run of envelope between manholes or other terminations in one continuous operation.

a. Start at one end and finish at the other, allowing for expansion and contraction of ducts as their temperature changes during and after the pour. Use expansion fittings installed according to manufacturer's written recommendations, or use other specific measures to prevent expansion-contraction damage. b. If more than one pour is necessary, terminate each pour in a vertical plane and install 3/4-inch reinforcing rod dowels extending 18 inches into concrete on both sides of joint near corners of envelope.

3. Pouring Concrete: Spade concrete carefully during pours to prevent voids under and between conduits and at exterior surface of envelope. Do not allow a heavy mass of concrete to fall directly onto ducts. Use a plank to direct concrete down sides of bank assembly to trench bottom. Allow concrete to flow to center of bank and rise up in middle, uniformly filling all open spaces. Do not use power-driven agitating equipment unless specifically designed for duct-bank application.

UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL 26 05 43 - 4 SYSTEMS DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

4. Reinforcement: Reinforce concrete-encased duct banks where they cross disturbed earth and where indicated. Arrange reinforcing rods and ties without forming conductive or magnetic loops around ducts or duct groups. 5. Forms: Use walls of trench to form side walls of duct bank where soil is self-supporting and concrete envelope can be poured without soil inclusions; otherwise, use forms. 6. Minimum Space between Ducts: 3 inches between ducts and exterior envelope wall, 2 inches between ducts for like services, and 4 inches between power and signal ducts. 7. Depth: Install top of duct bank at least 24 inches below finished grade in areas not subject to deliberate traffic, and at least 30 inches below finished grade in deliberate traffic paths for vehicles, unless otherwise indicated. 8. Stub-Ups: Use manufactured duct elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at building entrances through the floor, unless otherwise indicated. Extend concrete encasement throughout the length of the elbow. 9. Stub-Ups: Use manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at building entrances through the floor.

a. Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose, and encase coupling with 3 inches of concrete. b. Stub-Ups to Equipment: For equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases, extend steel conduit horizontally a minimum of 60 inches from edge of base. Install insulated grounding bushings on terminations at equipment.

10. Warning Tape: Bury warning tape approximately 12 inches above all concrete-encased ducts and duct banks. Align tape parallel to and within 3 inches of the centerline of duct bank. Provide an additional warning tape for each 12-inch increment of duct-bank width over a nominal 18 inches. Space additional tapes 12 inches apart, horizontally.

3.3 GROUNDING

A. Ground underground ducts and utility structures according to Section 26 05 26 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

3.4 CLEANING

A. Pull leather-washer-type duct cleaner, with graduated washer sizes, through full length of ducts. Follow with rubber duct swab for final cleaning and to assist in spreading lubricant throughout ducts.

B. Clean internal surfaces of manholes, including sump. Remove foreign material.

PART 4 - CONTRACTOR’S QUALITY CONTROL REQUIREMENTS

4.1 QUALITY CONTROL

A. Comply with applicable provisions of Division 01 Section “Quality Requirements” for requirements for Contractor Quality Control Program.

UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL 26 05 43 - 5 SYSTEMS DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

1. Demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements on completion of installation of underground ducts and utility structures. 2. Pull aluminum or wood test mandrel through duct to prove joint integrity and test for out- of-round duct. Provide mandrel equal to 80 percent fill of duct. If obstructions are indicated, remove obstructions and retest. 3. Test manhole grounding to ensure electrical continuity of grounding and bonding connections. Measure and report ground resistance as specified in Section 26 05 26 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

C. Correct deficiencies and retest as specified above to demonstrate compliance

END OF SECTION 26 05 43

UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL 26 05 43 - 6 SYSTEMS DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

SECTION 26 05 48 - VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Isolation pads. 2. Spring isolators. 3. Restrained spring isolators. 4. Channel support systems. 5. Restraint cables. 6. Hanger rod stiffeners. 7. Anchorage bushings and washers.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Section 26 05 29 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for commonly used electrical supports and installation requirements.

1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Seismic-Restraint Loading:

1. Site Class as Defined in the by ASCE: D. 2. Assigned Seismic Use Group or Building Category as Defined by ASCE:.

a. Component Importance Factor: 1.5. b. Component Response Modification Factor: 5.0. c. Component Amplification Factor: 2.5.

3. Design Spectral Response Acceleration at Short Periods (0.2 Second): 15.3. 4. Design Spectral Response Acceleration at 1.0-Second Period: 5.0.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Include rated load, rated deflection, and overload capacity for each vibration isolation device. 2. Illustrate and indicate style, material, strength, fastening provision, and finish for each type and size of seismic-restraint component used.

VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 48 - 1 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

a. Tabulate types and sizes of seismic restraints, complete with report numbers and rated strength in tension and shear as evaluated by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. b. Annotate to indicate application of each product submitted and compliance with requirements.

3. Restrained-Isolation Devices: Include ratings for horizontal, vertical, and combined loads.

B. Delegated-Design Submittal: For vibration isolation and seismic-restraint details indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

1. Design Calculations: Calculate static and dynamic loading due to equipment weight and operation, seismic forces required to select vibration isolators and seismic restraints. 2. Indicate materials and dimensions and identify hardware, including attachment and anchorage devices. 3. Field-fabricated supports. 4. Seismic-Restraint Details:

a. Design Analysis: To support selection and arrangement of seismic restraints. Include calculations of combined tensile and shear loads. b. Details: Indicate fabrication and arrangement. Detail attachments of restraints to the restrained items and to the structure. Show attachment locations, methods, and spacings. Identify components, list their strengths, and indicate directions and values of forces transmitted to the structure during seismic events. Indicate association with vibration isolation devices. c. Preapproval and Evaluation Documentation: By an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, showing maximum ratings of restraint items and the basis for approval (tests or calculations).

C. Coordination Drawings: Show coordination of seismic bracing for electrical components with other systems and equipment in the vicinity, including other supports and seismic restraints.

D. Qualification Data: For professional engineer and testing agency.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 VIBRATION ISOLATORS

1. Ace Mountings Co., Inc. 2. Amber/Booth Company, Inc. 3. California Dynamics Corporation. 4. Isolation Technology, Inc.

VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 48 - 2 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

5. Kinetics Noise Control. 6. Mason Industries. 7. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc. 8. Vibration Isolation. 9. Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc.

B. Pads: Arrange in single or multiple layers of sufficient stiffness for uniform loading over pad area, molded with a nonslip pattern and galvanized-steel baseplates, and factory cut to sizes that match requirements of supported equipment.

1. Resilient Material: Oil- and water-resistant neoprene.

C. Spring Isolators: Freestanding, laterally stable, open-spring isolators.

1. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated load. 2. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load. 3. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness. 4. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or failure. 5. Baseplates: Factory drilled for bolting to structure and bonded to 1/4-inch- thick, rubber isolator pad attached to baseplate underside. Baseplates shall limit floor load to 500 psig. 6. Top Plate and Adjustment Bolt: Threaded top plate with adjustment bolt and cap screw to fasten and level equipment.

D. Restrained Spring Isolators: Freestanding, steel, open-spring isolators with seismic or limit-stop restraint.

1. Housing: Steel with resilient vertical-limit stops to prevent spring extension due to weight being removed; factory-drilled baseplate bonded to 1/4-inch- thick, neoprene or rubber isolator pad attached to baseplate underside; and adjustable equipment mounting and leveling bolt that acts as blocking during installation. 2. Restraint: Seismic or limit-stop as required for equipment and authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated load. 4. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load. 5. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness. 6. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or failure.

2.2 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICES

1. Amber/Booth Company, Inc.

VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 48 - 3 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

2. California Dynamics Corporation. 3. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. 4. Hilti Inc. 5. Loos & Co.; Seismic Earthquake Division. 6. Mason Industries. 7. TOLCO Incorporated; a brand of NIBCO INC. 8. Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd.

B. General Requirements for Restraint Components: Rated strengths, features, and application requirements shall be as defined in reports by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Structural Safety Factor: Allowable strength in tension, shear, and pullout force of components shall be at least four times the maximum seismic forces to which they will be subjected.

C. Channel Support System: MFMA-3, shop- or field-fabricated support assembly made of slotted steel channels with accessories for attachment to braced component at one end and to building structure at the other end and other matching components and with corrosion-resistant coating; and rated in tension, compression, and torsion forces.

D. Restraint Cables: ASTM A 603 galvanized or ASTM A 492 stainless-steel cables with end connections made of steel assemblies with thimbles, brackets, swivels, and bolts designed for restraining cable service; and with a minimum of two clamping bolts for cable engagement.

E. Hanger Rod Stiffener: Steel tube or steel slotted-support-system sleeve with internally bolted connections or reinforcing steel angle clamped to hanger rod. Do not weld stiffeners to rods.

F. Bushings for Floor-Mounted Equipment Anchor: Neoprene bushings designed for rigid equipment mountings, and matched to type and size of anchors and studs.

G. Bushing Assemblies for Wall-Mounted Equipment Anchorage: Assemblies of neoprene elements and steel sleeves designed for rigid equipment mountings, and matched to type and size of attachment devices.

H. Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: One-piece, molded, oil- and water-resistant neoprene, with a flat washer face.

I. Mechanical Anchor: Drilled-in and stud-wedge or female-wedge type in zinc-coated steel for interior applications and stainless steel for exterior applications. Select anchors with strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488. Minimum length of eight times diameter.

2.3 FACTORY FINISHES

A. Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested equipment before shipping.

1. Powder coating on springs and housings.

VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 48 - 4 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

2. All hardware shall be galvanized. Hot-dip galvanize metal components for exterior use. 3. Baked enamel or powder coat for metal components on isolators for interior use. 4. Color-code or otherwise mark vibration isolation and seismic-control devices to indicate capacity range.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation and seismic-control devices for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Examine roughing-in of reinforcement and cast-in-place anchors to verify actual locations before installation.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 APPLICATIONS

A. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Secure raceways and cables to trapeze member with clamps approved for application by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Hanger Rod Stiffeners: Install hanger rod stiffeners where indicated or scheduled on Drawings to receive them and where required to prevent buckling of hanger rods due to seismic forces.

C. Strength of Support and Seismic-Restraint Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static and seismic loads within specified loading limits.

3.3 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICE INSTALLATION

A. Equipment and Hanger Restraints:

1. Install restrained isolators on electrical equipment. 2. Install resilient, bolt-isolation washers on equipment anchor bolts where clearance between anchor and adjacent surface exceeds 0.125 inch. 3. Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction providing required submittals for component.

B. Install bushing assemblies for mounting bolts for wall-mounted equipment, arranged to provide resilient media where equipment or equipment-mounting channels are attached to wall.

C. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing to structure at flanges of beams, at upper truss chords of bar joists, or at concrete members.

VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 48 - 5 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

D. Drilled-in Anchors:

1. Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling holes for anchors. Do not damage existing reinforcing or embedded items during coring or drilling. Notify the structural engineer if reinforcing steel or other embedded items are encountered during drilling. Locate and avoid prestressed tendons, electrical and telecommunications conduit, and gas lines. 2. Do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until concrete, mortar, or grout has achieved full design strength. 3. Wedge Anchors: Protect threads from damage during anchor installation. Heavy-duty sleeve anchors shall be installed with sleeve fully engaged in the structural element to which anchor is to be fastened. 4. Adhesive Anchors: Clean holes to remove loose material and drilling dust prior to installation of adhesive. Place adhesive in holes proceeding from the bottom of the hole and progressing toward the surface in such a manner as to avoid introduction of air pockets in the adhesive. 5. Set anchors to manufacturer's recommended torque, using a torque wrench. 6. Install zinc-coated steel anchors for interior and stainless-steel anchors for exterior applications.

3.4 ACCOMMODATION OF DIFFERENTIAL SEISMIC MOTION

A. Install flexible connections in runs of raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, and busways where they cross seismic joints, where adjacent sections or branches are supported by different structural elements, and where they terminate with connection to equipment that is anchored to a different structural element from the one supporting them as they approach equipment.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust isolators after isolated equipment is at operating weight.

B. Adjust limit stops on restrained spring isolators to mount equipment at normal operating height. After equipment installation is complete, adjust limit stops so they are out of contact during normal operation.

C. Adjust active height of spring isolators.

D. Adjust restraints to permit free movement of equipment within normal mode of operation.

3.6 ELECTRICAL VIBRATION-CONTROL AND SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICE SCHEDULE

A. Supported or Suspended Equipment:

1. Pads:

a. Material: Neoprene.

VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 48 - 6 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

2. Isolator Type: Spring Isolators. 3. Component Importance Factor: 1.5. 4. Component Response Modification Factor: 5.0. 5. Component Amplification Factor: 2.5.

PART 4 - CONTRACTOR’S QUALITY CONTROL REQUIREMENTS

4.1 GENERAL

A. Comply with applicable provisions of Division 01 Section “Quality Requirements” for requirements for Contractor Quality Control Program.

B. Field Quality Control:

1. Testing Agency: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Perform tests and inspections. 3. Tests and Inspections:

a. Provide evidence of recent calibration of test equipment by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. b. Schedule test with Owner, through COTR, before connecting anchorage device to restrained component (unless postconnection testing has been approved), and with at least seven days' advance notice. c. Obtain COTR's approval before transmitting test loads to structure. Provide temporary load-spreading members. d. Test at least four of each type and size of installed anchors and fasteners selected by COTR. e. Test to 90 percent of rated proof load of device. f. Measure isolator restraint clearance. g. Measure isolator deflection. h. Verify snubber minimum clearances. i. If a device fails test, modify all installations of same type and retest until satisfactory results are achieved.

4. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. 5. Prepare test and inspection reports.

C. Comply with seismic-restraint requirements in the IBC unless requirements in this Section are more stringent.

D. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

E. Seismic-restraint devices shall have horizontal and vertical load testing and analysis and shall bear anchorage, preapproval by ICC-ES, or preapproval by another agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, showing maximum seismic-restraint ratings. Ratings based on independent testing are preferred to ratings based on calculations. If preapproved ratings are

VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 48 - 7 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

not available, submittals based on independent testing are preferred. Calculations (including combining shear and tensile loads) to support seismic-restraint designs must be signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer.

F. Comply with NFPA 70.

END OF SECTION 26 05 48

VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 48 - 8 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

SECTION 26 05 53 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies electrical identification materials and includes requirements for electrical identification including but not limited to the following:

1. Identification labeling for raceways, cables, and conductors. 2. Operational instruction signs. 3. Warning and caution signs. 4. Equipment labels and signs.

B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:

1. Refer to other Division 26 sections for additional specific electrical identification associated with specific items.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data for each type of product specified.

B. Schedule of all tags, markers, nameplates, signs, etc.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

1. American Engraving Co. 2. Seton Name Plate Co. 3. Standard Signs, Inc. 4. W.H. Brady, Co. 5. Almetek Industries 6. Tech Products, Inc. 7. William Frick & Company 8. Thomas & Betts

IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 53- 1 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

2.2 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS

A. Engraved, Plastic Laminated Labels, Signs, and Instruction Plates: Engraving stock melamine plastic laminate, 1/16-inch minimum thick for signs up to 20 square inches, or 8 inches in length; 1/8-inch thick for larger sizes. Drill holes for mechanical fasteners when mounted indoors.

B. Baked Enamel Warning and Caution Signs for Interior Use: Preprinted aluminum signs, punched for fasteners, with colors, legend, and size appropriate to the location.

C. Exterior Metal Backed Butyrate Warning and Caution Signs: Weather resistant, nonfading, preprinted cellulose acetate butyrate signs with 20-gage galvanized steel backing, with colors, legend, and size appropriate to the location. Provide 1/4-inch grommets in corners for mounting.

D. Fasteners for Plastic Laminated and Metal Signs: Self tapping stainless steel screws or number 10/32 stainless steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.

E. Cable Ties: Fungus inert, self-extinguishing, one piece, self-locking nylon cable ties, 0.18-inch minimum width, 50-lb minimum tensile strength, and suitable for a temperature range from minus 50 deg F to 350 deg F.

F. Cable Markers: Provide "E-Z Tag" as manufactured by Almetek Industries Inc., or "Everlast" tags as manufactured by Tech Products Inc. Tags shall consist of 1.0-inch high numerals or letters placed in a tag holder. Tags and holder shall be manufactured from U.V. stabilized non- conductive, non-corrosive polyethylene or equal. Tag holder shall be black and numerals and letters shall be black on yellow background. Numerals and letters shall be oriented either horizontally or vertically depending on orientation of cable.

G. Pressure Sensitive Markers for Outdoor Equipment: Provide markers as manufactured by Almetek Industries or William Frick & Company or equal. Provide minimum 1.0-inch high numerals or letters. On medium voltage equipment provide markers that are black on reflective yellow background. On low voltage equipment provide markers which are black on reflective silver background. Markers shall be resistant to U.V. light.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Lettering and Graphics: Coordinate names, abbreviations, colors, and other designations with corresponding designations specified or indicated. Install numbers, lettering, and colors as approved in submittals and as required by code.

B. Install identification products in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and requirements of NEC.

C. Sequence of Work: Where identification is to be applied to surfaces that require finish, install identification after completion of finish work.

IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 53- 2 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

D. Medium Voltage Cable Identification: In manholes indicate voltage, feeder number and phase letter on each cable. Inside equipment indicate phase letter on each cable. Install markers on cables after arc proofing is applied. Attach with cable ties.

E. Low Voltage Conductor Color-Coding: Provide color coding for as follows:

208/120 Volts Phase 480/277 Volts

Black A Yellow Red B Brown Blue C Orange White Neutral Gray Green Ground Green

F. Use low voltage conductors with color factory-applied the entire length of the conductors except as follows:

1. The following color-coding methods may be used in lieu of factory color-coded wire for sizes No. 4 AWG and Larger.

a. Apply colored, pressure-sensitive plastic tape in half lapped turns for a distance of 6 inches from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made. Apply the last two laps of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding.

G. Provide warning, caution, and instruction signs as follows:

1. Install warning, caution, or instruction signs where required by NEC, where indicated, or where required for safe operation and maintenance of electrical systems. Install engraved plastic laminated instruction signs where instructions or explanations are needed for system or equipment operation. Install butyrate signs with metal backing for outdoor items. Attach signs to outdoor equipment using two-part epoxy cement.

H. Provide equipment/system, circuit/device identification as follows:

1. Provide engraved plastic laminate identification markers on electrical equipment. For 240V systems and below provide white lettering on black background. For 480/277V systems, use black lettering on yellow background. Text shall match terminology and numbering specified in the MWAA Design Manual. Apply markers on all of the following:

a. Panelboards, electrical cabinets, and enclosures. b. Contactors. c. Transformers. d. Disconnect switches. e. Control equipment. f. Circuit breakers

I. Circuit Schedules: For panelboards provide typed circuit schedules with identification of items controlled by each breaker.

IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 53- 3 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

J. Install labels, tags and markers at locations for best convenience of viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.

K. Pad Mounted Equipment: Place 1.0-inch high, black on reflective yellow marker indicating voltage and circuit number in upper left corner of exterior of door securing feeder compartment. Where two feeders enter a compartment, place marker on exterior of door along top edge opposite respective feeder.

L. Transformers: Using 3.0-inch high, black on reflective yellow pressure sensitive markers, identify transformer size (i.e., 45KVA). Centrally locate marker on exterior of high voltage compartment door. Identify feeders per paragraph "K" and "D" above.

M. Raceway: Identify with pressure sensitive markers purpose of circuit ( i.e., lighting, power, alarm, signal, PA, etc.). Place marker on junction boxes and along raceway on 150-foot centers. Markers shall be black on white background.

N. Underground-Line Warning Tape: During backfilling of trenches install continuous underground-line warning tape directly above line at 6 to 8 inches below finished grade. Use multiple tapes where width of multiple lines installed in a common trench or concrete envelope exceeds 16 inches overall.

PART 4 - CONTRACTOR’S QUALITY CONTROL REQUIREMENTS

4.1 GENERAL

A. Comply with applicable provisions of Division 01 Section “Quality Requirements” for requirements for Contractor Quality Control Program

4.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Electrical Component Standard: Components and installation shall comply with NFPA 70 “National Electrical Code."

B. Comply with manufacturer’s instructions

C. Comply with ANSI A13.1.

D. Comply with NFPA 70.

E. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.144 and 29 CFR 1910.145.

F. Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels.

END OF SECTION 26 05 53

IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 53- 4 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

SECTION 26 09 23 - LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following lighting control devices:

1. Time switches. 2. Photoelectric Switch 3. Lighting contactors.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Field quality-control test reports.

C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each type of product to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of ceiling-mounted devices with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, smoke detectors, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 TIME SWITCHES

1. Paragon Electric Co.; Invensys Climate Controls. 2. Grasslin Controls Corporation; a GE Industrial Systems Company. 3. Intermatic, Inc. 4. Lithonia Lighting; Acuity Lighting Group, Inc. 5. Square D; Schneider Electric. 6. TORK.

LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 26 09 23 - 1 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

B. Electronic Time Switches: Electronic, solid-state programmable units with alphanumeric display; complying with UL 917.

1. Contact Configuration: 12, SPDT, Individually controlled relays. 2. Contact Rating: 20-A ballast load, 120/277-V ac. 3. Program: 8 on-off set points on a 24-hour schedule and an annual holiday schedule that overrides the weekly operation on holidays. 4. Circuitry: Allow connection of a photoelectric relay as substitute for on-off function of a program. 5. Astronomic Time: All channels. 6. Battery Backup: For schedules and time clock.

2.2 OUTDOOR PHOTOELECTRIC SWITCHES

1. Cooper Industries, Inc. 2. Intermatic, Inc. 3. NSi Industries LLC; TORK Products. 4. Tyco Electronics; ALR Brand.

B. Description: Solid state, with DPST dry contacts rated for 1800 VA, to operate connected load, complying with UL 773.

1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 2. Light-Level Monitoring Range: 1.5 to 10 fc, with an adjustment for turn-on and turn-off levels within that range. 3. Time Delay: Thirty-second minimum, to prevent false operation. 4. Lightning Arrester: Air-gap type. 5. Mounting: Twist lock complying with NEMA C136.10, with base.

2.3 LIGHTING CONTACTORS

1. GE Industrial Systems; Total Lighting Control. 2. Grasslin Controls Corporation; a GE Industrial Systems Company. 3. Hubbell Lighting. 4. Lithonia Lighting; Acuity Lighting Group, Inc. 5. Square D; Schneider Electric. 6. TORK.

LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 26 09 23 - 2 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

B. Description: Electrically operated and mechanically held, combination type with nonfused disconnect, complying with NEMA ICS 2 and UL 508.

1. Current Rating for Switching: Listing or rating consistent with type of load served, including tungsten filament, inductive, and high-inrush ballast (ballast with 15 percent or less total harmonic distortion of normal load current). 2. Fault Current Withstand Rating: Equal to or exceeding the available fault current at the point of installation. 3. Enclosure: Comply with NEMA 250. 4. Provide with control and pilot devices, matching the NEMA type specified for the enclosure.

2.4 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Power Wiring to Supply Side of Remote-Control Power Sources: Not smaller than No. 12 AWG. Comply with requirements in Section 26 05 19 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

B. Classes 2 and 3 Control Cable: Multiconductor cable with stranded-copper conductors not smaller than No. 18 AWG. Comply with requirements in Section 26 05 19"Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

C. Class 1 Control Cable: Multiconductor cable with stranded-copper conductors not smaller than No. 14 AWG. Comply with requirements in Section 26 05 19"Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install and aim sensors in locations to achieve not less than 90 percent coverage of areas indicated. Do not exceed coverage limits specified in manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Mount electrically held lighting contactors with elastomeric isolator pads, to eliminate structure- borne vibration, unless contactors are installed in an enclosure with factory-installed vibration isolators.

C. Wiring Method: Comply with Section 26 05 19"Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." Minimum conduit size shall be 3/4-inch.

D. Wiring within Enclosures: Comply with NECA 1. Separate power-limited and nonpower- limited conductors according to conductor manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Size conductors according to lighting control device manufacturer's written instructions, unless otherwise indicated.

LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 26 09 23 - 3 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

F. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Make connections only on numbered terminal strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify components and power and control wiring according to Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

1. Identify controlled circuits in lighting contactors. 2. Identify circuits or luminaries controlled by photoelectric and occupancy sensors at each sensor.

B. Label time switches and contactors with a unique designation.

3.3 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain lighting control devices. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training."

PART 4 - CONTRACTOR’S QUALITY CONTROL REQUIREMENTS

4.1 GENERAL

A. Comply with applicable provisions of Division 01 Section “Quality Requirements” for requirements for Contractor Quality Control Program.

C. Field Quality Control:

1. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

a. After installing time switches and sensors, and after electrical circuitry has been energized, adjust and test for compliance with requirements. b. Operational Test: Verify operation of each lighting control device, and adjust time delays.

2. Lighting control devices that fail tests and inspections are defective work.

END OF SECTION 26 09 23

LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 26 09 23 - 4 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

SECTION 26 22 00 - LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following types of dry-type transformers rated 600 V and less, with capacities up to 1000 kVA:

1. Distribution transformers.

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions and weights.

1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.

1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that transformers, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Section 26 05 48 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

B. Field quality-control test reports.

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and maintenance data.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat according to manufacturer's written instructions within the enclosure of each ventilated-type unit, throughout periods during which equipment is not energized and when transformer is not in a space that is continuously under normal control of temperature and humidity.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of wall-mounting and structure-hanging supports with actual transformer provided.

LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS 26 22 00 - 1 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

1. ACME Electric Corporation; Power Distribution Products Division. 2. General Electric Company. 3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 4. Square D; Schneider Electric.

2.2 GENERAL TRANSFORMER REQUIREMENTS

A. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, air-cooled units for 60-Hz service.

B. Cores: Grain-oriented, non-aging silicon steel.

C. Coils: Continuous windings without splices except for taps.

1. Internal Coil Connections: Brazed or pressure type. 2. Coil Material: Copper.

2.3 DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS

A. Comply with NEMA ST 20, and list and label as complying with UL 1561.

B. Provide transformers that are constructed to withstand seismic forces specified Section 26 05 48 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

C. Cores: One leg per phase.

D. Enclosure: Ventilated, NEMA 250, Type 3R.

1. Core and coil shall be encapsulated within resin compound, sealing out moisture and air.

E. Transformer Enclosure Finish: Comply with NEMA 250.

1. Finish Color: Gray.

F. Taps for Transformers Smaller Than 3 kVA: One 5 percent tap above normal full capacity.

G. Taps for Transformers 7.5 to 24 kVA: Two 5 percent taps below rated voltage.

H. Taps for Transformers 25 kVA and Larger: Two 2.5 percent taps above and four 2.5 percent taps below normal full capacity.

LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS 26 22 00 - 2 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

I. Insulation Class: 220 deg C, UL-component-recognized insulation system with a maximum of 150 deg C rise above 40 deg C ambient temperature.

J. Energy Efficiency for Transformers Rated 15 kVA and Larger:

1. Complying with NEMA TP 1, Class 1 efficiency levels. 2. Tested according to NEMA TP 2.

K. Electrostatic Shielding: Each winding shall have an independent, single, full-width copper electrostatic shield arranged to minimize interwinding capacitance.

1. Arrange coil leads and terminal strips to minimize capacitive coupling between input and output terminals. 2. Include special terminal for grounding the shield. 3. Shield Effectiveness:

a. Capacitance between Primary and Secondary Windings: Not to exceed 33 picofarads over a frequency range of 20 Hz to 1 MHz. b. Common-Mode Noise Attenuation: Minimum of minus 120 dBA at 0.5 to 1.5 kHz; minimum of minus 65 dBA at 1.5 to 100 kHz. c. Normal-Mode Noise Attenuation: Minimum of minus 52 dBA at 1.5 to 10 kHz.

L. Wall Brackets: Manufacturer's standard brackets.

M. Fungus Proofing: Permanent fungicidal treatment for coil and core.

N. Low-Sound-Level Requirements: Minimum of 3 dBA less than NEMA ST 20 standard sound levels when factory tested according to IEEE C57.12.91.

2.4 IDENTIFICATION DEVICES

A. Nameplates: Engraved, laminated-plastic or metal nameplate for each distribution transformer, mounted with corrosion-resistant screws. Nameplates and label products are specified in Section 26 05 53 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine conditions for compliance with enclosure- and ambient-temperature requirements for each transformer.

B. Verify that field measurements are as needed to maintain working clearances required by NFPA 70 and manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Examine walls, floors, roofs, and concrete bases for suitable mounting conditions where transformers will be installed.

LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS 26 22 00 - 3 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

D. Verify that ground connections are in place and requirements in Section 26 05 26 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems" have been met. Maximum ground resistance shall be 5 ohms at location of transformer.

E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Ground equipment according to Section 26 05 26 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

B. Connect wiring according to Section 26 05 19 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Record transformer secondary voltage at each unit for at least 48 hours of typical occupancy period. Adjust transformer taps to provide optimum voltage conditions at secondary terminals. Optimum is defined as not exceeding nameplate voltage plus 10 percent and not being lower than nameplate voltage minus 3 percent at maximum load conditions. Submit recording and tap settings as test results.

B. Connect buck-boost transformers to provide nameplate voltage of equipment being served, plus or minus 5 percent, at secondary terminals.

C. Output Settings Report: Prepare a written report recording output voltages and tap settings.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning.

PART 4 - CONTRACTOR’S QUALITY CONTROL REQUIREMENTS

4.1 GENERAL

A. Comply with applicable provisions of Division 01 Section “Quality Requirements” for requirements for Contractor Quality Control Program.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each transformer type through one source from a single manufacturer.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

D. Comply with IEEE C57.12.91, "Test Code for Dry-Type Distribution and Power Transformers."

LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS 26 22 00 - 4 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

E. Field Quality Control:

1. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing Association (NETA) or is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Tests and Inspections:

a. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. b. Test and inspect transformers according to IEEE C57.12.91.

3. Remove and replace units that do not pass tests or inspections and retest as specified above. 4. Infrared Scanning: Two months after Substantial Completion, perform an infrared scan of transformer connections.

a. Use an infrared-scanning device designed to measure temperature or detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide documentation of device calibration. b. Perform 2 follow-up infrared scans of transformers, one at 4 months and the other at 11 months after Substantial Completion. c. Prepare a certified report identifying transformer checked and describing results of scanning. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and scanning observations after remedial action.

5. Test Labeling: On completion of satisfactory testing of each unit, attach a dated and signed "Satisfactory Test" label to tested component.

END OF SECTION 26 22 00

LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS 26 22 00 - 5 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

SECTION 26 24 16 - PANELBOARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes distribution panelboards and lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards.

1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Seismic Performance: Panelboards shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to SEI/ASCE 7.

1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment.

1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulations of installed devices, equipment features, and ratings. 2. Detail enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1. 3. Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings. 4. Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices. 5. Include evidence of NRTL listing for series rating of installed devices. 6. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent protective devices and auxiliary components. 7. Include wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. 8. Include time-current coordination curves for each type and rating of overcurrent protective device included in panelboards.

C. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.

D. Seismic Qualification Certificates: Submit certification that panelboards, overcurrent protective devices, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Section 26 05 48 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." Include the following:

PANELBOARDS 26 24 16 - 1 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements.

E. Field Quality-Control Reports:

1. Test procedures used. 2. Test results that comply with requirements. 3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with requirements.

F. Panelboard Schedules: For installation in panelboards. Submit final versions after load balancing.

G. Operation and Maintenance Data: For panelboards and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective devices. 2. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device that allows adjustments.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside panelboards; install temporary electric heating (250 W per panelboard) to prevent condensation.

B. Handle and prepare panelboards for installation according to NEMA PB 1.

1.5 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace transient voltage suppression devices that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Keys: Two spares for each type of panelboard cabinet lock. 2. Circuit Breakers: Two spares for each panelboard.

PANELBOARDS 26 24 16 - 2 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PANELBOARDS

A. Fabricate and test panelboards according to IEEE 344 to withstand seismic forces defined in Section 26 05 48 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

B. Enclosures: Surface-mounted cabinets.

1. Rated for environmental conditions at installed location.

a. Indoor Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1. b. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R. c. Wash-Down Areas: NEMA 250, Type 4X, stainless steel. d. Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4. e. Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive Liquids: NEMA 250, Type 12.

2. Hinged Front Cover: Entire front trim hinged to box and with standard door within hinged trim cover. 3. Skirt for Surface-Mounted Panelboards: Same gage and finish as panelboard front with flanges for attachment to panelboard, wall, and ceiling or floor. 4. Gutter Extension and Barrier: Same gage and finish as panelboard enclosure; integral with enclosure body. Arrange to isolate individual panel sections. 5. Finishes:

a. Panels and Trim: Galvanized steel, factory finished immediately after cleaning and pretreating with manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat. b. Back Boxes: Galvanized steel. c. Fungus Proofing: Permanent fungicidal treatment for overcurrent protective devices and other components.

6. Directory Card: Inside panelboard door, mounted in transparent card holder.

C. Incoming Mains Location: Top and bottom.

D. Phase, Neutral, and Ground Buses:

1. Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity. 2. Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch-circuit equipment grounding conductors; bonded to box. 3. Isolated Ground Bus: Adequate for branch-circuit isolated ground conductors; insulated from box.

E. Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes.

1. Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity. 2. Main and Neutral Lugs: Compression type.

PANELBOARDS 26 24 16 - 3 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

3. Ground Lugs and Bus-Configured Terminators: Compression type.

F. Service Equipment Label: NRTL labeled for use as service equipment for panelboards or load centers with one or more main service disconnecting and overcurrent protective devices.

G. Future Devices: Mounting brackets, bus connections, filler plates, and necessary appurtenances required for future installation of devices.

H. Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short-circuit current available at terminals.

2.2 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS

1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.

B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, power and feeder distribution type.

C. Doors: Secured with vault-type latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.

1. For doors more than 36 inches high, provide two latches, keyed alike.

D. Mains: Circuit breaker.

E. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes 125 A and Smaller: Bolt-on circuit breakers.

F. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes Larger Than 125 A: Bolt-on circuit breakers; plug-in circuit breakers where individual positive-locking device requires mechanical release for removal.

G. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Fused switches.

H. Contactors in Main Bus: NEMA ICS 2, Class A, mechanically held, general-purpose controller, with same short-circuit interrupting rating as panelboard.

1. Internal Control-Power Source: Control-power transformer, with fused primary and secondary terminals, connected to main bus ahead of contactor connection.

PANELBOARDS 26 24 16 - 4 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

2.3 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH-CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS

B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, lighting and appliance branch-circuit type.

C. Mains: Circuit breaker.

D. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt-on circuit breakers, replaceable without disturbing adjacent units.

E. Contactors in Main Bus: NEMA ICS 2, Class A, mechanically held, general-purpose controller, with same short-circuit interrupting rating as panelboard.

1. Internal Control-Power Source: Control-power transformer, with fused primary and secondary terminals, connected to main bus ahead of contactor connection.

F. Doors: Concealed hinges; secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.

G. Column-Type Panelboards: Narrow gutter extension, with cover, to overhead junction box equipped with ground and neutral terminal buses.

2.4 DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES

B. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB): Comply with UL 489, with interrupting capacity to meet available fault currents.

1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.

a. Instantaneous trip. b. Long- and short-time pickup levels.

PANELBOARDS 26 24 16 - 5 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

c. Long- and short-time time adjustments. d. Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I2t response.

2. GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole configurations with Class A ground-fault protection (6-mA trip). 3. Ground-Fault Equipment Protection (GFEP) Circuit Breakers: Class B ground-fault protection (30-mA trip). 4. Arc-Fault Circuit Interrupter (AFCI) Circuit Breakers: Comply with UL 1699; 120/240- V, single-pole configuration. 5. Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker (MCCB) Features and Accessories:

a. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles. b. Lugs: Compression style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor materials. c. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity discharge (HID) lighting circuits. d. Ground-Fault Protection: Integrally mounted relay and trip unit with adjustable pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, and ground-fault indicator. e. Shunt Trip: 120-V trip coil energized from separate circuit, set to trip at 75 percent of rated voltage. f. Auxiliary Contacts: Two SPDT switches with "a" and "b" contacts; "a" contacts mimic circuit-breaker contacts and "b" contacts operate in reverse of circuit- breaker contacts. g. Handle Padlocking Device: Fixed attachment, for locking circuit-breaker handle in on or off position. h. Handle Clamp: Loose attachment, for holding circuit-breaker handle in on position.

2.5 ACCESSORY COMPONENTS AND FEATURES

A. Accessory Set: Include tools and miscellaneous items required for overcurrent protective device test, inspection, maintenance, and operation.

B. Portable Test Set: For testing functions of solid-state trip devices without removing from panelboard. Include relay and meter test plugs suitable for testing panelboard meters and switchboard class relays.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store panelboards according to NEMA PB 1.1.

B. Examine panelboards before installation. Reject panelboards that are damaged or rusted or have been subjected to water saturation.

PANELBOARDS 26 24 16 - 6 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

C. Examine elements and surfaces to receive panelboards for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install panelboards and accessories according to NEMA PB 1.1.

B. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from panelboards.

C. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Section 26 05 48 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

D. Mount top of trim 90 inches above finished floor unless otherwise indicated.

E. Mount panelboard cabinet plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed panelboards with fronts uniformly flush with wall finish and mating with back box.

F. Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers not already factory installed.

1. Set field-adjustable, circuit-breaker trip ranges.

G. Install filler plates in unused spaces.

H. Arrange conductors in gutters into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties after completing load balancing.

I. Comply with NECA 1.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs complying with Section 26 05 53 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads after balancing panelboard loads; incorporate Owner's final room designations. Obtain approval before installing. Use a computer or typewriter to create directory; handwritten directories are not acceptable.

C. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 26 05 53"Identification for Electrical Systems."

D. Device Nameplates: Label each branch circuit device in distribution panelboards with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 26 05 53 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

PANELBOARDS 26 24 16 - 7 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust moving parts and operable component to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer.

B. Load Balancing: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, measure load balancing and make circuit changes.

1. Measure as directed during period of normal system loading. 2. Perform load-balancing circuit changes outside normal occupancy/working schedule of the facility and at time directed. Avoid disrupting critical 24-hour services such as fax machines and on-line data processing, computing, transmitting, and receiving equipment. 3. After circuit changes, recheck loads during normal load period. Record all load readings before and after changes and submit test records. 4. Tolerance: Difference exceeding 20 percent between phase loads, within a panelboard, is not acceptable. Rebalance and recheck as necessary to meet this minimum requirement.

PART 4 - CONTRACTOR’S QUALITY CONTROL REQUIREMENTS

4.1 GENERAL

A. Comply with applicable provisions of Division 01 Section “Quality Requirements” for requirements for Contractor Quality Control Program.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain panelboards, overcurrent protective devices, components, and accessories from single source from single manufacturer.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

D. Comply with NEMA PB 1.

E. Comply with NFPA 70.

F. Field Quality Control:

G. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL..

1. Acceptance Testing Preparation:

a. Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit. b. Test continuity of each circuit.

2. Tests and Inspections:

a. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.

PANELBOARDS 26 24 16 - 8 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

b. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest. c. Perform the following infrared scan tests and inspections and prepare reports:

1) Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each panelboard. Remove front panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner. 2) Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each panelboard 11 months after date of Substantial Completion. 3) Instruments and Equipment:

a) Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.

3. Panelboards will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. 4. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies panelboards included and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

END OF SECTION 26 24 16

PANELBOARDS 26 24 16 - 9 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK. DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

SECTION 26 27 26 - WIRING DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Receptacles, receptacles with integral GFCI, and associated device plates. 2. Twist-locking receptacles. 3. Isolated-ground receptacles. 4. Snap switches and wall-box dimmers.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: List of legends and description of materials and process used for premarking wall plates.

C. Field quality-control test reports.

D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For wiring devices to include in all manufacturers' packing label warnings and instruction manuals that include labeling conditions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following manufacturers' names are used in other Part 2 articles:

1. Cooper Wiring Devices; a division of Cooper Industries, Inc. (Cooper). 2. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems (Hubbell). 3. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. (Leviton). 4. Pass & Seymour/Legrand; Wiring Devices & Accessories (Pass & Seymour).

2.2 STRAIGHT BLADE RECEPTACLES

A. Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 configuration 5-20R, and UL 498.

WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26 - 1 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, or as acceptable to the Authority, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product. Products may be provided by, but are not limited to, one of the following:

a. Cooper; 5351 (single), 5352 (duplex). b. Hubbell; HBL5351 (single), CR5352 (duplex). c. Leviton; 5891 (single), 5352 (duplex). d. Pass & Seymour; 5381 (single), 5352 (duplex).

2.3 GFCI RECEPTACLES

A. General Description: Straight blade, feed-through type. Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, UL 498, and UL 943, Class A, and include indicator light that is lighted when device is tripped.

B. Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A:

a. Cooper; GF20. b. Pass & Seymour; 2084.

2.4 TWIST-LOCKING RECEPTACLES

A. Single Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 configuration L5-20R, and UL 498.

a. Cooper; L520R. b. Hubbell; HBL2310. c. Leviton; 2310. d. Pass & Seymour; L520-R.

B. Isolated-Ground, Single Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A:

a. Hubbell; IG2310. b. Leviton; 2310-IG.

WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26 - 2 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

2. Description: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 configuration L5-20R, and UL 498. Equipment grounding contacts shall be connected only to the green grounding screw terminal of the device and with inherent electrical isolation from mounting strap. Isolation shall be integral to receptacle construction and not dependent on removable parts.

2.5 SNAP SWITCHES

A. Comply with NEMA WD 1 and UL 20.

B. Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A:

a. Cooper; 2221 (single pole), 2222 (two pole), 2223 (three way), 2224 (four way). b. Hubbell; CS1221 (single pole), CS1222 (two pole), CS1223 (three way), CS1224 (four way). c. Leviton; 1221-2 (single pole), 1222-2 (two pole), 1223-2 (three way), 1224-2 (four way). d. Pass & Seymour; 20AC1 (single pole), 20AC2 (two pole), 20AC3 (three way), 20AC4 (four way).

2.6 WALL PLATES

A. Single and combination types to match corresponding wiring devices.

1. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish. 2. Material for Finished Spaces: 0.035-inch- thick, satin-finished stainless steel. 3. Material for Unfinished Spaces: Galvanized steel. 4. Material for Damp Locations: Cast aluminum with spring-loaded lift cover, and listed and labeled for use in "wet locations."

B. Wet-Location, Weatherproof Cover Plates: NEMA 250, complying with type 3R weather- resistant, die-cast aluminum with lockable cover.

2.7 FINISHES

A. Color: Wiring device catalog numbers in Section Text do not designate device color.

1. Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: Brown, unless otherwise indicated or required by NFPA 70 or device listing. 2. Wiring Devices Connected to Emergency Power System: Red. 3. TVSS Devices: Blue. 4. Isolated-Ground Receptacles: Orange.

WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26 - 3 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1, including the mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise noted.

B. Coordination with Other Trades:

1. Take steps to insure that devices and their boxes are protected. Do not place wall finish materials over device boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding against outside of the boxes. 2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust, paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and cables. 3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall. 4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete.

C. Conductors:

1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until just before they are spliced or terminated on devices. 2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire. 3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70, Article 300, without pigtails. 4. Existing Conductors:

a. Cut back and pigtail, or replace all damaged conductors. b. Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and foreign matter. c. Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted provided the outlet box is large enough.

D. Device Installation:

1. Replace all devices that have been in temporary use during construction or that show signs that they were installed before building finishing operations were complete. 2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect conductors. 3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last possible moment. 4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches in length. 5. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals. Wrap solid conductor tightly clockwise, 2/3 to 3/4 of the way around terminal screw. 6. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by the manufacturer. 7. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections. 8. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device.

WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26 - 4 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

9. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold device mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact.

E. Receptacle Orientation:

1. Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles up, and on horizontally mounted receptacles to the right.

F. Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening.

G. Dimmers:

1. Install dimmers within terms of their listing. 2. Verify that dimmers used for fan speed control are listed for that application. 3. Install unshared neutral conductors on line and load side of dimmers according to manufacturers' device listing conditions in the written instructions.

H. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under single, multigang wall plates.

I. Adjust locations of floor service outlets and service poles to suit arrangement of partitions and furnishings.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with Section 26 05 53 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

1. Receptacles: Identify panelboard and circuit number from which served. Use hot, stamped or engraved machine printing with black-filled lettering on face of plate, and durable wire markers or tags inside outlet boxes.

PART 4 - CONTRACTOR’S QUALITY CONTROL REQUIREMENTS

4.1 GENERAL

A. Comply with applicable provisions of Division 01 Section “Quality Requirements” for requirements for Contractor Quality Control Program.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate through one source from a single manufacturer. Insofar as they are available, obtain all wiring devices and associated wall plates from a single manufacturer and one source.

WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26 - 5 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

D. Comply with NFPA 70.

E. Field Quality Control:

1. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

a. Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436. b. Test Instrument for Convenience Receptacles: Digital wiring analyzer with digital readout or illuminated LED indicators of measurement.

2. Tests for Convenience Receptacles:

a. Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V. b. Percent Voltage Drop under 15-A Load: A value of 6 percent or higher is not acceptable. c. Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable. d. GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943. e. Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted. f. The tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the circuit breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective devices, or similar problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace with new ones, and retest as specified above.

3. Test straight blade for the retention force of the grounding blade according to NFPA 99. Retention force shall be not less than 4 oz..

END OF SECTION 26 27 26

WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26 - 6 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

SECTION 26 28 13 - FUSES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Cartridge fuses rated 600-V ac and less for use in enclosed switches.

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and maintenance data.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

1. Cooper Bussmann, Inc. 2. Edison Fuse, Inc. 3. Ferraz Shawmut, Inc. 4. Littelfuse, Inc.

2.2 CARTRIDGE FUSES

A. Characteristics: NEMA FU 1, nonrenewable cartridge fuses with voltage ratings consistent with circuit voltages.

FUSES 26 28 13 - 1 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FUSE APPLICATIONS

A. Cartridge Fuses:

1. Feeders: Class L, fast acting. 2. Motor Branch Circuits: Class RK1, time delay. 3. Other Branch Circuits: Class RK1, time delay. 4. Control Circuits: Class CC, fast acting.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install fuses in fusible devices. Arrange fuses so rating information is readable without removing fuse.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Install labels complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 26 05 53 "Identification for Electrical Systems" and indicating fuse replacement information on inside door of each fused switch and adjacent to each fuse block, socket, and holder.

PART 4 - CONTRACTOR’S QUALITY CONTROL REQUIREMENTS

4.1 GENERAL

A. Comply with applicable provisions of Division 01 Section “Quality Requirements” for requirements for Contractor Quality Control Program.

B. Comply with NEMA FU 1 for cartridge fuses.

C. Comply with NFPA 70.

D. Comply with UL 248-11 for plug fuses.

E. Source Limitations: Obtain fuses, for use within a specific product or circuit, from single source from single manufacturer.

F. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

END OF SECTION 26 28 13

FUSES 26 28 13 - 2 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

SECTION 26 28 16 - ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Fusible switches. 2. Enclosures.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. NC: Normally closed.

B. NO: Normally open.

C. SPDT: Single pole, double throw.

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Seismic Performance: Enclosed switches and circuit breakers shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and component indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.

ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 26 28 16 - 1 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

B. Field quality-control reports.

1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and maintenance data.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of switches, circuit breakers, and components with equipment served and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FUSIBLE SWITCHES

B. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 600-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate indicated fuses, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.

C. Accessories:

1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground conductors. 2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors. 3. Isolated Ground Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors. 4. Class R Fuse Kit: Provides rejection of other fuse types when Class R fuses are specified. 5. Auxiliary Contact Kit: Two NO/NC (Form "C") auxiliary contact(s), arranged to activate before switch blades open. 6. Lugs: Compression type, suitable for number, size, and conductor material.

ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 26 28 16 - 2 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

2.2 ENCLOSURES

A. Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, NEMA KS 1, NEMA 250, and UL 50, to comply with environmental conditions at installed location.

1. Indoor, Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1. 2. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R. 3. Wash-Down Areas: NEMA 250, Type 4X, stainless steel. 4. Other Wet or Damp, Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4. 5. Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive Liquids: NEMA 250, Type 12.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive enclosed switches and circuit breakers for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install individual wall-mounted switches and circuit breakers with tops at uniform height unless otherwise indicated.

B. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Section 26 05 48 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

C. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.

D. Install fuses in fusible devices.

E. Comply with NECA 1.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with requirements in Section 26 05 53 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

1. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs. 2. Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated-plastic nameplate.

ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 26 28 16 - 3 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust moving parts and operable components to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer.

B. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges.

PART 4 - CONTRACTOR’S QUALITY CONTROL REQUIREMENTS

4.1 GENERAL

A. Comply with applicable provisions of Division 01 Section “Quality Requirements” for requirements for Contractor Quality Control Program.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain enclosed switches and circuit breakers, overcurrent protective devices, components, and accessories, within same product category, from single source from single manufacturer.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

D. Comply with NFPA 70.

E. Field Quality Control:

1. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL. 2. Acceptance Testing Preparation:

a. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed switch and circuit breaker, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit. b. Test continuity of each circuit.

3. Tests and Inspections:

a. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. b. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest. c. Perform the following infrared scan tests and inspections and prepare reports:

1) Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each enclosed switch and circuit breaker. Remove front panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner. 2) Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each enclosed switch and circuit breaker 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.

ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 26 28 16 - 4 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

3) Instruments and Equipment: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.

d. Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

4. Enclosed switches and circuit breakers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. 5. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies enclosed switches and circuit breakers and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

END OF SECTION 26 28 16

ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 26 28 16 - 5 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

SECTION 26 29 13 - ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes the following enclosed controllers rated 600 V and less:

1. Full-voltage manual. 2. Full-voltage magnetic.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. CPT: Control power transformer.

B. N.C.: Normally closed.

C. N.O.: Normally open.

D. OCPD: Overcurrent protective device.

E. SCR: Silicon-controlled rectifier.

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Seismic Performance: Enclosed controllers shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed controller.

B. Shop Drawings: For each enclosed controller. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, details, and required clearances and service spaces around controller enclosures.

1. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.

ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS 26 29 13 - 1 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For enclosed controllers, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.

B. Field quality-control reports.

1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and maintenance data.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Store enclosed controllers indoors in clean, dry space with uniform temperature to prevent condensation. Protect enclosed controllers from exposure to dirt, fumes, water, corrosive substances, and physical damage.

B. If stored in areas subject to weather, cover enclosed controllers to protect them from weather, dirt, dust, corrosive substances, and physical damage. Remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside controllers; install temporary electric heating, with at least 250 W per controller.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of enclosed controllers with other construction including conduit, piping, equipment, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.

B. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Cast anchor- bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03.

C. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FULL-VOLTAGE CONTROLLERS

A. General Requirements for Full-Voltage Controllers: Comply with NEMA ICS 2, general purpose, Class A.

B. Motor-Starting Switches: "Quick-make, quick-break" toggle or push-button action; marked to show whether unit is off or on.

ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS 26 29 13 - 2 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

a. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. b. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. c. Rockwell Automation, Inc.; Allen-Bradley brand. d. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. e. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.

2. Configuration: Nonreversing. 3. Surface mounting. 4. Red pilot light.

C. Fractional Horsepower Manual Controllers: "Quick-make, quick-break" toggle or push-button action; marked to show whether unit is off, on, or tripped.

2. Configuration: Nonreversing. 3. Overload Relays: Inverse-time-current characteristics; NEMA ICS 2, Class 10 tripping characteristics; heaters matched to nameplate full-load current of actual protected motor; external reset push button; bimetallic type. 4. Surface mounting. 5. Red pilot light.

D. Magnetic Controllers: Full voltage, across the line, electrically held.

2. Configuration: Nonreversing. 3. Contactor Coils: Pressure-encapsulated type with coil transient suppressors.

ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS 26 29 13 - 3 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

a. Operating Voltage: Depending on contactor NEMA size and line-voltage rating, manufacturer's standard matching control power or line voltage.

4. Power Contacts: Totally enclosed, double-break, silver-cadmium oxide; assembled to allow inspection and replacement without disturbing line or load wiring. 5. Control Circuits: 120-V ac; obtained from integral CPT, with primary and secondary fuses, with CPT of sufficient capacity to operate integral devices and remotely located pilot, indicating, and control devices.

a. CPT Spare Capacity: 50 VA.

6. Bimetallic Overload Relays:

a. Inverse-time-current characteristic. b. Class 10 tripping characteristic. c. Heaters in each phase matched to nameplate full-load current of actual protected motor and with appropriate adjustment for duty cycle. d. Ambient compensated. e. Automatic resetting.

7. N.C. and N.O., isolated overload alarm contact. 8. External overload reset push button.

E. Combination Magnetic Controller: Factory-assembled combination of magnetic controller, OCPD, and disconnecting means.

2. Fusible Disconnecting Means:

a. NEMA KS 1, heavy-duty, horsepower-rated, fusible switch with clips or bolt pads to accommodate Class J fuses. b. Lockable Handle: Accepts three padlocks and interlocks with cover in closed position.

3. Auxiliary Contacts: N.O./N.C., arranged to activate before switch blades open. 4. Nonfusible Disconnecting Means:

a. NEMA KS 1, heavy-duty, horsepower-rated, nonfusible switch. b. Lockable Handle: Accepts three padlocks and interlocks with cover in closed position. c. Auxiliary Contacts: N.O./N.C., arranged to activate before switch blades open.

ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS 26 29 13 - 4 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

2.2 ENCLOSURES

A. Enclosed Controllers: NEMA ICS 6, to comply with environmental conditions at installed location.

1. Dry and Clean Indoor Locations: Type 1. 2. Outdoor Locations: Type 3R. 3. Wash-Down Areas: Type 4X, stainless steel. 4. Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: Type 4. 5. Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive Liquids: Type 12.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. General Requirements for Control Circuit and Pilot Devices: NEMA ICS 5; factory installed in controller enclosure cover unless otherwise indicated.

1. Push Buttons, Pilot Lights, and Selector Switches: Heavy-duty, oiltight type.

a. Push Buttons: Covered types; momentary as indicated. b. Pilot Lights: LED types; colors as indicated; push to test. c. Selector Switches: Rotary type.

B. N.C. and N.O. auxiliary contact(s).

C. Control Relays: Auxiliary and adjustable solid-state time-delay relays.

D. Space heaters, with N.C. auxiliary contacts, to mitigate condensation in Type 3R enclosures installed outdoors or in unconditioned interior spaces subject to humidity and temperature swings.

E. Sun shields installed on fronts, sides, and tops of enclosures installed outdoors and subject to direct and extended sun exposure.

F. Cover gaskets for Type 1 enclosures.

G. Terminals for connecting power factor correction capacitors to the load side of overload relays.

H. Spare control wiring terminal blocks, quantity as indicated; wired.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and surfaces to receive enclosed controllers, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS 26 29 13 - 5 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

B. Examine enclosed controllers before installation. Reject enclosed controllers that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Wall-Mounted Controllers: Install enclosed controllers on walls with tops at uniform height unless otherwise indicated, and by bolting units to wall or mounting on lightweight structural- steel channels bolted to wall. For controllers not at walls, provide freestanding racks complying with Section 26 05 29 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."

B. Seismic Bracing: Comply with requirements specified in Section 26 05 48 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

C. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.

D. Install fuses in each fusible-switch enclosed controller.

E. Install fuses in control circuits if not factory installed. Comply with requirements in Section 26 28 13 "Fuses."

F. Install heaters in thermal overload relays. Select heaters based on actual nameplate full-load amperes after motors have been installed.

G. Install, connect, and fuse thermal-protector monitoring relays furnished with motor-driven equipment.

H. Comply with NECA 1.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify enclosed controllers, components, and control wiring. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 26 05 53 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

1. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs. 2. Label each enclosure with engraved nameplate. 3. Label each enclosure-mounted control and pilot device.

3.4 CONTROL WIRING INSTALLATION

A. Install wiring between enclosed controllers and remote devices.

B. Bundle, train, and support wiring in enclosures.

ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS 26 29 13 - 6 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

C. Connect selector switches and other automatic-control selection devices where applicable.

1. Connect selector switches to bypass only those manual- and automatic-control devices that have no safety functions when switch is in manual-control position. 2. Connect selector switches with enclosed-controller circuit in both manual and automatic positions for safety-type control devices such as low- and high-pressure cutouts, high- temperature cutouts, and motor overload protectors.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Set field-adjustable switches, auxiliary relays, time-delay relays, timers, and overload-relay pickup and trip ranges.

B. Adjust the trip settings of MCPs and thermal-magnetic circuit breakers with adjustable instantaneous trip elements. Initially adjust to six times the motor nameplate full-load ampere ratings and attempt to start motors several times, allowing for motor cooldown between starts. If tripping occurs on motor inrush, adjust settings in increments until motors start without tripping. Do not exceed eight times the motor full-load amperes (or 11 times for NEMA Premium Efficient motors if required). Where these maximum settings do not allow starting of a motor, notify Owner before increasing settings.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain enclosed controllers.

PART 4 - CONTRACTOR’S QUALITY CONTROL REQUIREMENTS

4.1 GENERAL

A. Comply with applicable provisions of Division 01 Section “Quality Requirements” for requirements for Contractor Quality Control Program.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

C. Comply with NFPA 70.

D. IEEE Compliance: Fabricate and test enclosed controllers according to IEEE 344 to withstand seismic forces defined in Section 26 05 48 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

E. Field Quality Control:

1. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL. 2. Acceptance Testing Preparation:

ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS 26 29 13 - 7 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

a. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed controller, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit. b. Test continuity of each circuit.

3. Tests and Inspections:

a. Inspect controllers, wiring, components, connections, and equipment installation. Test and adjust controllers, components, and equipment. b. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed-controller element, component, connecting motor supply, feeder, and control circuits. c. Test continuity of each circuit. d. Verify that voltages at controller locations are within plus or minus 10 percent of motor nameplate rated voltages. If outside this range for any motor, notify COTR before starting the motor(s). e. Test each motor for proper phase rotation. f. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. g. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest. h. Perform the following infrared (thermographic) scan tests and inspections and prepare reports:

1) Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each multi-pole enclosed controller. Remove front panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner. 2) Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each multi-pole enclosed controller 11 months after date of Substantial Completion. 3) Instruments and Equipment: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.

i. Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

4. Enclosed controllers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. 5. Prepare test and inspection reports including a certified report that identifies enclosed controllers and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

END OF SECTION 26 29 13

ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS 26 29 13 - 8 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

SECTION 26 50 00 - LIGHTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Lighting fixtures, lamps, and ballasts. 2. Exit signs. 3. Lighting fixture supports.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Section 26 09 23 "Lighting Control Devices" for automatic control of lighting, including time switches, photoelectric relays, occupancy sensors, and multipole lighting relays and contactors.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. BF: Ballast factor.

B. CRI: Color-rendering index.

C. CU: Coefficient of utilization.

D. HID: High-intensity discharge.

E. LER: Luminaire efficacy rating.

F. Luminaire: Complete lighting fixture, including ballast housing if provided.

G. RCR: Room cavity ratio.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of lighting fixture, arranged in order of fixture designation. Include data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following:

1. Physical description of lighting fixture including dimensions. 2. Ballast. 3. Energy-efficiency data. 4. Life, output, and energy-efficiency data for lamps.

B. Qualification Data: For agencies providing photometric data for lighting fixtures.

LIGHTING 26 50 00 - 1 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

C. Field quality-control test reports.

D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For lighting equipment and fixtures to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

E. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of lighting fixtures and suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including HVAC equipment, fire- suppression system, and partition assemblies.

1.5 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty for Ballasts: Manufacturer's standard form in which ballast manufacturer agrees to repair or replace ballasts that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period for Electronic Ballasts: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Special Warranty for T5 and T8 Fluorescent Lamps: Manufacturer's standard form, made out to Owner and signed by lamp manufacturer agreeing to replace lamps that fail in materials or workmanship, f.o.b. the nearest shipping point to Project site, within specified warranty period indicated below.

1. Warranty Period: One year(s) from date of Substantial Completion.

1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Lamps: 10 for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type. 2. Plastic Diffusers and Lenses: 1 for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type. 3. Ballasts: 1 for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type. 4. Globes and Guards: 1 for every 20 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type.

LIGHTING 26 50 00 - 2 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In Lighting Fixture Schedule where titles below are column or row headings that introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection:

a. Cooper Lighting b. Lithonia Lighting c. Hubbell Lighting

2.2 LIGHTING FIXTURES AND COMPONENTS, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Recessed Fixtures: Comply with NEMA LE 4 for ceiling compatibility for recessed fixtures.

B. Fluorescent Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598.

C. HID Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598.

D. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.

E. Sheet Metal Components: Steel, unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging.

F. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position.

G. Reflecting surfaces shall be calculated as having a maximum reflectance as follows:

1. White Surfaces: 85 percent. 2. Specular Surfaces: 83 percent. 3. Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 75 percent. 4. Laminated Silver Metallized Film: 90 percent.

H. Plastic Diffusers, Covers, and Globes:

1. Acrylic Lighting Diffusers: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic. High resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation.

a. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125-inch minimum unless different thickness is indicated. b. UV stabilized.

LIGHTING 26 50 00 - 3 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

2. Glass: Annealed crystal glass, unless otherwise indicated.

2.3 BALLASTS FOR LINEAR FLUORESCENT LAMPS

A. Electronic Ballasts: Comply with ANSI C82.11; rapid-start type, unless otherwise indicated, and designed for type and quantity of lamps served. Ballasts shall be designed for full light output unless dimmer or bi-level control is indicated.

1. Sound Rating: A. 2. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 20 percent. 3. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41, Category A or better. 4. Operating Frequency: 20 kHz or higher. 5. Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.7 or less. 6. BF: 0.85 or higher. 7. Power Factor: 0.95 or higher.

B. Ballasts Types:

1. Electronic Ballasts.

2.4 BALLASTS FOR HID LAMPS

A. Comply with ANSI C82.4 and UL 1029 and capable of open-circuit operation without reduction of average lamp life. Include the following features unless otherwise indicated:

1. Ballast Circuit: Constant-wattage autotransformer or regulating high-power-factor type. 2. Minimum Starting Temperature: Minus 22 deg F. 3. Normal Ambient Operating Temperature: 104 deg F. 4. Ballast Fuses: One in each ungrounded power supply conductor. Voltage and current ratings as recommended by ballast manufacturer.

B. High-Pressure Sodium Ballasts: Electromagnetic type with solid-state igniter/starter and capable of open-circuit operation without reduction of average lamp life. Igniter/starter shall have an average life in pulsing mode of 10,000 hours at an igniter/starter-case temperature of 90 deg C.

2.5 EXIT SIGNS

A. Description: Comply with UL 924; for sign colors, visibility, luminance, and lettering size, comply with authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Internally Lighted Signs:

1. Lamps for AC Operation: LEDs, 70,000 hours minimum rated lamp life.

LIGHTING 26 50 00 - 4 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

2.6 FLUORESCENT LAMPS

A. Low-Mercury Lamps: Comply with EPA's toxicity characteristic leaching procedure test; shall yield less than 0.2 mg of mercury per liter when tested according to NEMA LL 1.

B. T8 instant-start low-mercury lamps, rated 32 W maximum, nominal length of 48 inches, 2800 initial lumens (minimum), CRI 75 (minimum), color temperature 4100 K, and average rated life 20,000 hours, unless otherwise indicated.

C. T5 rapid-start low-mercury lamps, rated 28 W maximum, nominal length of 45.2 inches, 2900 initial lumens (minimum), CRI 85 (minimum), color temperature 4100 K, and average rated life of 20,000 hours, unless otherwise indicated.

D. T5HO rapid-start, high-output low-mercury lamps, rated 54W maximum, nominal length of 45.2 inches, 5000 initial lumens (minimum), CRI 85 (minimum), color temperature 4100 K, and average rated life of 20,000 hours, unless otherwise indicated.

2.7 HID LAMPS

A. High-Pressure Sodium Lamps: ANSI C78.42, CRI 21 (minimum), CCT color temperature 1900 K, and average rated life of 24,000 hours, minimum.

1. Dual-Arc Tube Lamp: Arranged so only one of two arc tubes is lighted at one time and, when power is restored after an outage, the cooler arc tube, with lower internal pressure, lights instantly, providing an immediate 8 to 15 percent of normal light output.

2.8 LIGHTING FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS

A. Comply with Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for channel- and angle-iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports.

B. Single-Stem Hangers: 1/2-inch steel tubing with swivel ball fittings and ceiling canopy. Finish same as fixture.

C. Twin-Stem Hangers: Two, 1/2-inch steel tubes with single canopy designed to mount a single fixture. Finish same as fixture.

D. Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc-coated steel, 12 gage.

E. Wires for Humid Spaces: ASTM A 580/A 580M, Composition 302 or 304, annealed stainless steel, 12 gage.

F. Rod Hangers: 3/16-inch minimum diameter, cadmium-plated, threaded steel rod.

G. Hook Hangers: Integrated assembly matched to fixture and line voltage and equipped with threaded attachment, cord, and locking-type plug.

LIGHTING 26 50 00 - 5 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 DESIGN

A. Lighting fixture layout shall be designed to supply the light levels as specified on the drawings or by the authority having jurisdiction, whichever requirements are more stringent.

B. Submit photometric calculations using a 3d lighting analysis software and a point by point analysis method to show desired light levels are achieved by the proposed design.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Lighting fixtures: Set level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls. Install lamps in each fixture.

B. Suspended Lighting Fixture Support:

1. Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches, brace to limit swinging. 2. Stem-Mounted, Single-Unit Fixtures: Suspend with twin-stem hangers. 3. Continuous Rows: Use tubing or stem for wiring at one point and tubing or rod for suspension for each unit length of fixture chassis, including one at each end.

C. Adjust aimable lighting fixtures to provide required light intensities.

D. Connect wiring according to Section 26 05 19 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

PART 4 - CONTRACTOR’S QUALITY CONTROL REQUIREMENTS

4.1 GENERAL

A. Comply with applicable provisions of Division 01 Section “Quality Requirements” for requirements for Contractor Quality Control Program.

C. Comply with NFPA 70.

D. Field Quality Control:

1. Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation. Verify transfer from normal power to generator power and retransfer to normal. Verify minimum emergency lighting levels are obtained from emergency design.

LIGHTING 26 50 00 - 6 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

2. Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating and interpreting results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest to demonstrate compliance with standards.

END OF SECTION 26 50 00

LIGHTING 26 50 00 - 7 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

SECTION 27 05 01 – BASIC TELECOMMUNICATION REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements for the Divisions 27 and Division 28 and Divisions 33 and 34 Telecommunications and Electronic Systems specification Sections.

B. Related Sections:

1. Division 01 Section “Summary.” 2. Division 26 – Applicable Electrical Sections. 3. Division 27 – Communications and Electronic Systems Sections. 4. Division 28 – Electronic Safety and Security 5. Division 33 – Wireless Communications Distribution System 6. Division 34 – Baggage Handling Equipment

C. The scope of work for the DCA Building Modifications to Accommodate In-Line Baggage Screening Project governed by this section includes telecommunications and electronic systems ancillary:

1. Communications and Electronic Systems specified in Division 27.

2. Electronic Safety and Security Systems specified in Division 28.

3. Wireless Communications Distribution System specified in Division 33

4. Related Baggage Handling Equipment specified in Division 34.

D. The work shown in the Contract Drawings is diagrammatic in nature and the Contractor is responsible for providing final equipment arrangements, and locations.

E. The work described in this Specification includes all labor, engineering, design work, materials, equipment and services necessary to install new, existing, and Owner-provided equipment. Materials or labor not specifically mentioned in this Specification, or not shown on the Contract Drawings, but required for proper installation, performance, and operation of the equipment or systems, shall be furnished and installed by the Contractor.

F. The following administrative and procedural requirements are included in this Section to expand the requirements specified in Division 01.

BASIC TELECOMMUNICATION REQUIREMENTS 27 05 01 - 1 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Follow the submittal procedures specified in Division 01 Section “Submittals.” Increase by the quantity listed below, the number of related shop drawings, product data, and samples submitted for Divisions 27, 28 and Division 34 Sections.

1. The follow submittals shall be in addition to the requirements indicated in Division 01 Section “Submittals.” Increase by the quantity listed below, the number of related shop drawings, product data, and samples submitted for Division 27 Sections.

a. Shop Drawings – Initial Submittal: 2 additional copies of each blue- or black-line prints. b. Shop Drawings – Final Submittal: 2 additional copies of each blue- or black-line prints. c. Product Data: 1 additional copy of each item. d. Samples: 1 additional. e. Additional copies may be required by individual Sections of these Specifications. f. Test data: Submit all test data within 5 days of testing and as required by individual sections.

2. Prepare coordination drawings detailing major elements, components, and systems of electrical equipment and materials in relationship with other systems, installations, and building components for related Division 27 Sections. 3. For related Divisions 27 and 28 Sections, indicate locations where space is limited for installation and access. Indicate where sequencing and coordination of installations are of importance to the efficient flow of the Work, including (but not necessarily limited to) the following:

a. Provide complete front panel equipment fabrication dimensions with equipment locations of equipment racks and cabinets. b. Provide equipment wiring terminal point-to-point color-coded wiring diagrams. Drawings shall show each item of equipment, locations, all wiring, and all connections. Wiring color code shall be as described by the specifications. If no color code is specifically mentioned, the color code shall be as recommended by the equipment manufacturer. c. All sheets shall be sized to match contract drawings and shall be executed in a neat and professional manner (see Contract Drawings). All devices schematically represented on wiring diagrams shall be identified with room numbers corresponding to equipment locations in the building. d. Submittal shall include block diagram of equipment to show equipment relationship and signal flow paths.

4. Submittal information shall include the following manufacturer’s published data and specific data for the system or equipment submittal for approval:

a. Complete operating instructions. b. Complete schematic drawings for each item of equipment. c. Complete maintenance instructions.

BASIC TELECOMMUNICATION REQUIREMENTS 27 05 01 - 2 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

5. Prepare floor plans, elevations, and details to indicate penetrations in floors, walls, and ceilings and their relationship to other penetrations and installations. Submittal shall indicate the proposed locations of major raceway systems, equipment, and materials. Include the following:

a. Clearances for servicing equipment, including space for equipment disassembly required for periodic maintenance. b. Fire-rated wall and floor penetrations. c. Equipment connections and support details. d. Sizes and location of required concrete pads and bases. e. Indicate scheduling, sequencing, movement, and positioning of large equipment into the building during construction.

6. Record documents: For related Divisions 27 and 28 Sections, prepare record documents in accordance with the requirements of Division 01 Section “Project Record Documents” and the applicable requirements contained in the individual technical specifications and this specification. In addition to the requirements specified in Division 01, indicate installed conditions for:

a. Raceway systems, size, and location, for both exterior and interior; locations of control devices; distribution and branch electrical circuitry; and fuse and circuit breaker size and arrangements. b. Equipment locations (exposed and concealed), dimensioned from prominent building lines.

7. Approved substitutions, Contract modifications, and actual equipment and materials installed. 8. Maintenance manuals: Prepare maintenance manuals in accordance with requirements of Division 01 Section “Operation and Maintenance Data.” In addition to the requirements specified in Division 01 Section Operation and Maintenance Data,” include the following information for equipment items:

a. Description of function, normal operating characteristics and limitations, performance curves, engineering data and tests, and complete nomenclature and commercial numbers of replacement parts. b. Manufacturer’s printed operating procedures to include start-up, break-in, and routine and normal operating instructions; regulation, control, stopping, shutdown, and emergency instructions; and summer and winter operating instructions. c. Maintenance procedures for routine preventative maintenance and troubleshooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly; aligning and adjusting instructions.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only.

BASIC TELECOMMUNICATION REQUIREMENTS 27 05 01 - 3 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

B. Specific reference in Specifications to codes, rules, regulations, standards, manufacturer’s instructions or requirements of regulatory agencies shall mean the latest printed edition of each in effect at date of contract unless the Document is shown dated.

C. References: 1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)

a. NSI C2 (2007): National Electrical Safety Code

2. Code of Federal Regulations (CFR)

a. CFR 29 Part 1910.146: Permit-Required Confined Spaces Standard

b. CFR 47 Part 15: Radio Frequency Devices

3. International Code Council

a. International Building Code (IBC)

b. International Fire Code (IFC)

4. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)

a. NFPA 70 (2009): National Electrical Code

b. NFPA 72: National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code

c. NFPA 262: Standard Method of Test for Flame Travel and Smoke of Wires and Cables for Use in Air-Handling Spaces

5. Telecommunications Industries Association / Electronics Industries Alliance (TIA/EIA)

a. TIA/EIA-TSB 67: Additional Transmission Specifications for Unshielded Twisted Pair Cabling Systems

b. ANSI/TIA/EIA-526-7 Measurement of Optical Power Loss of Installed Single-mode Fiber Cable Plant

c. ANSI/TIA/EIA-526-14-A Optical Power Loss Measurements of Installed Multimode Fiber Cable Plant

d. TIA/EIA 455B: Standard Test Procedures for Fiber Optic Fibers, Cables, Transducers, Connecting and Terminating Devices

e. TIA/EIA 455-78B: FOTP-61, Measurement of Fiber or Cable Attenuation Using an OTDR.

f. ANSI/TIA/EIA C1 - Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standards

g. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-CB.3 Optical Fiber Cabling Components Standard

BASIC TELECOMMUNICATION REQUIREMENTS 27 05 01 - 4 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

h. TIA 568-B.2-6 Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard - Part 2: Balanced Twisted Pair Cabling Components. Addendum 6 – Category 6 Related Component Test Procedure.

i. TIA-568-B.1-4 (February 2003) Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard - Part 1: General Requirements. Addendum 4, Recognition of Category 6 and 850 nm Laser-Optimized 50/125 Multimode Fiber Optic Cabling

j. ANSI / TIA / EIA 568-A (CSA T529-95) Structured Cabling Systems Standards

k. TIA/EIA-568-B.2-1 (June 2002) Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard - Part 2: Balanced Twisted Pair Components - Addendum 1 - Transmission Performance Specifications for 4-Pair 100 Ohm Category 6 Cabling.

l. TIA/EIA-854 (June 2001) A Full Duplex Ethernet Specification for 1000 Mbis/s (1000BASE-TX) Operating Over Category 6 Balanced Twister Pair Cabling. (ANSI/TIA/EIA-854-2001)

m. TSB-95 (October 1999) Additional Transmission Performance Guidelines for 4-Pair 100 Ohm Category 5 Cabling (superseded by TIA/EIA-568-B.1, TIA/EIA-568-B.2, and TIA/EIA-568-B.3)

n. ANSI/TIA 568-B.2—10 March 2008 Transmission performance Specifications for 4-Pr. 100 Ohm Augmented Category 6 Cabling

o. ANSI/TIA/EIA-569-B Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces

p. ANSI-J-STD-607-A Commercial Building Grounding (Earthing) and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications

q. ANSI/TIA/EIA-758A Customer-Owned Outside Plant Telecommunications Cabling Standard

r. TSB-155 Guidelines for the Assessment and Mitigation of Installed Category 6 Cabling to Support 10GBASE-T

6. BICSI® publications:

a. BICSI - Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual

b. BICSI - Customer-Owned Outside Plant Design Manual

7. Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc. (ICEA)

a. S-80-576: Standard for Telecommunications Wire & Cable for Wiring of Premises

8. Institute Of Electrical And Electronic Engineers (IEEE)

BASIC TELECOMMUNICATION REQUIREMENTS 27 05 01 - 5 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

a. IEEE 802.3: Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection (multiple sub-standards depending upon media).

9. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)

a. UL 6 (1981; Rev thru Dec 1992): Rigid Metal Conduit

b. UL 444: Communication Cables

c. UL 797 (1993; Rev thru May 1995): Safety Electrical Metallic Tubing

d. UL 969: UL Standard for Safety Marking and Labeling Systems

e. UL 1666: Standard Test for Flame Propagation Height of Electrical and Optical - Fiber Cables Installed Vertically in Shafts

10. Owner References

a. Metropolitan Washington Airports Authority’s (MWAA) Airport Communications System (ACS) Design Manual b. 2010 Version of the MWAA DCA Specific Design Standards Manual c. 2006 MWAA Airport Communications Systems (ACS) Design Manual.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer: Each manufacturer shall have been in the business of manufacturing the applicable system(s) hardware and software for at least five years.

B. Contractor experience: Contractor shall have at least five years’ experience in installing electronic systems and equipment of the type used for projects of similar size and complexity and be able to provide documentation on three successful projects completed over the past five years of similar size and complexity.

C. Contractor shall submit proof to the satisfaction of the COTR that the Contractor has:

1. Adequate plant and equipment to do the work properly and expeditiously. 2. Adequate staff and technical experience. 3. Contractor shall have performed a minimum of three similar installations using software and hardware of the type described for the systems in Divisions 27 and 28, and for a premise wiring system of the same size and complexity as this project.

a. If Contractor has not had direct experience with all of the systems listed in Divisions 27 and 28, then Contractor shall furnish written documentation that the Contractor’s subcontractor for the system meets the requirements listed above. b. Contractor shall provide resumes of the persons assigned to this project detailing relevant experience with the specialty systems in Divisions 27 and 28.

4. All equipment shall be installed by technicians trained by the equipment manufacturer or a recognized training school or course for the installations of this type system. The

BASIC TELECOMMUNICATION REQUIREMENTS 27 05 01 - 6 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

Contractor shall maintain all records of individuals at the jobsite and, if requested, show proof of a specific individual’s training upon request. 5. Authorized distributor: Proof shall be required at the time of equipment submittal for approval that the Company or Firm supplying the equipment is an approved representative for the sale, installation, and service of the equipment submitted for approval. Proof shall be required at the time of submittal approval that the Firm or Company is an established organization, within 100 miles of the project, and has successfully completed projects of this type and has an acceptable reputation for service to installations of this type. Distributor, if requested, shall submit the name and location of a similar project and date of completion. Distributor must maintain a fully staffed and equipped service organization, and must regularly offer maintenance service for systems of this type and size. 6. Operating system software: System software and language development software shall be existing, industry accepted, and of a type widely used in commercial systems. 7. Application software: The application software, substantially as offered, shall have been used for a minimum of two years and shall be written in a standard, industry accepted computer language. 8. Software: Database software shall be a commercially available software program. 9. Unapproved materials: The use of “or acceptable” equipment does not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for use of any unapproved, substituted equipment. The Contractor, at no cost to the Owner, shall remove and replace with the specified equipment any equipment or system that shows evidence of improper operation, function, or size. 10. Contractor shall supply equipment, cabling, connectors, fixtures, and appurtenances required for a complete, operational, and fully functioning systems.

1.5 SUBSTITUTIONS OF EQUIPMENT

A. Where systems or equipment substitutions are proposed, Contractor shall submit the following to the COTR for approval before purchasing equipment or beginning installation in addition to the requirements of Division 01 Section “Product Requirements.”

1. Complete catalog data proving that the proposed equipment and/or design are equal to or better than the equipment and design as specified. 2. Compiled matrix showing performance features of specified product compared to:

a. The performance criteria of the specifications and performance features of the specified product. b. Cost of proposed product versus specified product including differences in installation costs.

B. Testing of Samples: When, in the COTR’s opinion, the submittal data or the manufacturer’s literature is insufficient for purposes of an evaluation, the individual or firm making the submittal shall arrange for sample items of equipment to be delivered to the COTR for his inspection and evaluation or the Contractor shall arrange for a field test of the equipment, as requested by the COTR.

BASIC TELECOMMUNICATION REQUIREMENTS 27 05 01 - 7 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

1.6 EQUIPMENT CERTIFICATION

A. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.: All equipment, including accessories to the system and including all wire and cable, shall be listed by the Underwriters Laboratories product directory and/or “The Electrical Construction Materials List.”

B. Applicable standards compliance: In addition to the UL listing, all communication equipment shall meet applicable portions of Federal Communications Commission (FCC), TIA/EIA, ANSI, and Bellcore for product performance and quality.

C. Equipment to be certified by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL).

1.7 STORAGE AND DELIVERY

A. Equipment shall be delivered in original packages with labels intact and identification clearly marked.

B. Equipment and components shall be protected from the weather, humidity, temperature variations, dirt, dust, or other contaminants.

C. Equipment damaged prior to system acceptance shall be replaced at no cost to The Authority.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Warranties of products furnished under this Division shall comply with the requirement of the individual technical specifications. Where specific durations and scope is not specifically indicated, product and systems warranties shall be 1 year or greater (if greater then 1 year is the standard offering) and include all products, parts, installation and workmanship. In the case of software systems all labor and materials (software programs) to configure and correct any product deficiencies.

1.9 DAMAGE

A. The Contractor shall be responsible for any damage to any surfaces or work disrupted as a result of his work. Repair of surfaces including painting shall be included as necessary.

1.10 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICES

A. General Requirements: Contractor shall provide all services required and equipment necessary to maintain the entire system in an operational state as specified for a period of 1 year after formal written acceptance of the system, and shall provide all necessary material required for performing scheduled adjustments or other nonscheduled work.

BASIC TELECOMMUNICATION REQUIREMENTS 27 05 01 - 8 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

1.11 PROJECT SCOPE, PROJECT COORDINATION AND RELATED WORKS PROJECTS

A. Contractor shall refer to Division 01 Section “Summary” for a description of related work that may affect the work required of the Contractor.

B. Contractor shall:

1. Seal all openings through rated walls made by other Contractors for use by this Contractor including tray and conduit penetrations. Re-enterable material shall be used that is in compliance with Division 07 Section “Penetration Firestopping and the requirements of Division 27 Section “Common Work Results for Communications.”

1.12 DAILY SITE MAINTENANCE AND CLEAN-UP

A. At the end of each work day (period) the Contractor shall be required to clean-up the work area and all construction debris such that the site is clean and usable without hazard to the general public, airport staff and tenants.

B. Debris shall be removed daily and depending on the work area swept clean or vacuumed accordingly. Areas where vacuum shall occur daily shall be in any finished space including but not limited to areas of the Terminal or Airport Control center. Areas where sweeping would be considered acceptable would include utility spaces such as equipment rooms and the Garage.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS – NOT USED

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. Contractor shall not begin work on site or submit shop drawings, product data, design data, or other technical submittals, until after making a detailed inspection of existing site.

B. Contractor shall verify:

1. Information presented in Contract Documents is correct. 2. Installation of equipment and work can be accomplished as shown in Contract Documents. 3. Contractor’s proposed equipment and methods of installation are compatible with existing conditions.

C. Take field measurements and record other data required for preparation of shop drawings and other submittals.

D. Variations: Contract Drawings and other Documents indicate basic location, arrangement, and routing of equipment and components.

BASIC TELECOMMUNICATION REQUIREMENTS 27 05 01 - 9 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

E. Improvements and modifications of layout to accommodate Contractor’s proposed equipment, field conditions, and detailed designs will be considered by the COTR.

F. Do not proceed on incorporation of modifications and associated work until receiving written approval from the COTR.

G. Reporting: Prepare report describing site investigation. Indicate noted conflicts between Contract Documents and site investigation information.

1. Describe proposed modifications and reasons for change. 2. Provide specification sheets and written functional requirements to support findings. 3. Prepare drawings and other data required to show variations and corrections. 4. Associated costs to accommodate existing site conditions. 5. If work schedule is affected by site investigation, revise initial progress schedule.

H. Certify that site investigation has been performed and that, except for items noted, conditions shown and described in Contract Documents are correct, and equipment can be installed and work can be performed as specified without conflicts with existing site conditions.

I. Installation drawings. Prior to installation of any equipment, the Contractor shall submit a copy of the installation drawings in hard copy and AutoCAD 2010 (or later) format for review by the COTR. Contractor shall provide the copy on a compact disc (CD), and shall submit the CD to the COTR. The drawings shall include all installation information including, but not limited to, that described in Part 1. Drawings shall also include actual conduit routing and results of all measurements and tests.

3.2 GENERAL

A. Coordinate the requirements of the Divisions 27 and 28 Sections.

B. Contractor shall install equipment to meet seismic requirements as indicated on the Drawings.

1. Where undefined by codes and standards, Contractor shall apply a safety factor of at least 2 times the rated load to all fastenings and supports.

C. The Contractor shall install all system components including furnished equipment and appurtenances in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions, NFPA 70, ANSI-C2, and State and local codes and as indicated, and shall furnish all cables, connectors, terminators, interconnections, services, and adjustments required for a complete and operable system.

D. Contractor shall check with COTR to verify areas that are permit-required confined spaces as defined in OSHA 29 CFR Part 1910.

1. Contractor shall comply with requirements of OSHA 29 CFR Part 1910 when working in permit-required confined spaces.

E. Avoid disturbance of materials known to contain hazardous materials in making acceptable modifications of raceway routing, mounting of equipment, and other work.

BASIC TELECOMMUNICATION REQUIREMENTS 27 05 01 - 10 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

1. Do not mount conduit, equipment, hangers, and other accessories on surface materials known to contain asbestos or other hazardous materials. Where asbestos is encountered, the Contractor shall notify the COTR immediately. Abatement shall be performed by others. 2. If Contractor encounters hazardous materials or conditions not shown on drawings, Contractor shall:

a. Stop work immediately. b. Vacate area. c. Immediately notify COTR of condition encountered. d. Contractor shall not enter area or work in area until receiving written authorization from COTR.

F. All system components and appurtenances shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and as shown.

3.3 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION

A. General: The Contractor shall correlate final equipment locations with governing engineering drawings and lay out all work before installation so that all trades may install equipment in spaces available. Coordinate device placement with the COTR where applicable. The Contractor shall provide coordination as required for the installation of the system in a neat and workmanlike manner. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate the various elements of electrical systems, materials, and equipment. Comply with the following requirements:

1. Coordinate electrical systems, equipment, and materials installation with other building components and trades. 2. Verify all dimensions by field measurements. 3. Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in other building components during progress of construction, to allow for electrical installations. 4. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of materials and equipment for efficient flow of the Work. Give particular attention to large equipment requiring positioning prior to closing spaces. 5. Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install systems, materials, and equipment per code to provide the maximum headroom possible. 6. Coordinate connection of electrical systems with exterior underground and overhead utilities and services. Pay particular attention to requirements for access and service of the equipment in choosing final equipment locations. Comply with requirements of governing regulations, franchised service companies, and controlling agencies. Provide required connection for each service. 7. Install systems, materials, and equipment to conform with approved submittal data, including coordination drawings, to greatest extent possible. Conform to arrangements indicated by the Contract Documents, recognizing that portions of the Work are shown only in diagrammatic form. Where coordination requirements conflict with individual system requirements, refer conflict to the COTR. 8. Install systems, materials, and equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components, where installed exposed in finished spaces.

BASIC TELECOMMUNICATION REQUIREMENTS 27 05 01 - 11 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

9. Install electrical equipment to facilitate servicing, maintenance, and repair or replacement of equipment components. As much as practical, connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum of interference with other installations. 10. Install access panel or doors where units are concealed behind inaccessible surfaces.

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. All connections of stranded wire to screw terminals shall be by insulated spade lugs, crimp fastened to wire.

B. No splices shall be made within a conduit run.

C. All non-terminal block connections shall be made with mechanical connectors or rosin core solder, with insulation equal to conductor insulation and as approved by the COTR.

D. All conductors shall be marked with wrap-type labels per Division 27 Section “Premise Wiring Distribution System.” All terminal block terminations shall be labeled. The inside portion of the terminal cabinet doors shall display a protected terminal cabinet drawing with all connections shown and described as to color code, number assigned to connection function of conductor and destination.

E. Wire shall be guided within terminal cabinets by cable supports. All conductors shall be neatly led to terminations.

F. Cabinets: All communication cabinets shall be labeled with an engraved plastic laminate label riveted to the door. Cabinet designation shall be as indicated on the contract drawings.

3.5 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION

A. Unless otherwise noted on the drawings all equipment mounting boxes shall be mounted flush to the mounting surface and shall be plumb. Systems Contractor shall coordinate conduit box requirements with the Electrical Contractor. Systems Contractor shall examine boxes with the Electrical Contractor at the proper time to ensure correct box alignment and type.

B. All screws shall be of the correct type for each device as to head size, material, and slot type.

C. Installation shall conform to the latest edition of the National Electrical Code. Workmanship shall be of the highest quality. All connections and equipment installation and adjustment shall be made by or supervised by a Journeyman Electronic Technician.

D. The systems upon completion, shall be complete in every respect-clean, operating, and properly adjusted and in perfect operating condition.

3.6 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. The following requirements shall apply to all work performed by the Contractor.

BASIC TELECOMMUNICATION REQUIREMENTS 27 05 01 - 12 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

1. Perform cutting, fitting, and patching of electrical equipment and materials required to:

a. Uncover Work to provide for installation of ill-timed Work. b. Remove and replace defective Work. c. Remove and replace Work not conforming to requirements of the Contract Documents. d. Remove samples of installed Work as specified for testing. e. Install equipment and materials. f. Upon written instructions from the COTR, uncover and restore Work to provide for observation of concealed Work.

2. Protect the structure, furnishings, finishes, and adjacent materials not indicated or scheduled to be removed. 3. Provide and maintain temporary partitions or dust barriers adequate to prevent the spread of dust and dirt to adjacent areas. 4. Protection of Installed Work: During cutting and patching operations, protect adjacent installations. 5. Patch existing finished surfaces and building components using new materials matching existing materials and experienced Installers. Installers’ qualifications refer to the materials and methods required for the surface and building components being patched. 6. Patch finished surfaces and building components using new materials specified for the original installation and experienced Installers. Installers’ qualifications refer to the materials and methods required for the surface and building components being patched. 7. All openings created by this Contractor or by other contractors for use by this Contractor in rated surfaces such as fire-rated walls, floors, or ceilings shall be patched and made tight in a manner to conform to the fire rating for the surface penetrated and installed and tested in accordance with Division 07 Section “Penetration Firestopping.”

3.7 TESTING

A. The Contractor shall provide all personnel, equipment, instrumentation, and supplies necessary to perform all testing.

B. COTR will witness all field tests.

C. Contractor shall submit test results to COTR for approval and as required by individual Sections.

3.8 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS

A. Contractor shall develop as-built drawings for all systems and installations provided as part of the Project to provide Building Modifications to Accommodate In-Line Baggage Screening Systems.

B. Comply with the requirements of Division 01 Section “Project Record Documents.”

BASIC TELECOMMUNICATION REQUIREMENTS 27 05 01 - 13 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

C. As-built Documentation shall consist of the initial shop and submittal drawing documentation requirements for each system revised to reflect installed conditions including final equipment and wiring configurations, labeling and testing results.

D. All as-built drawings shall be produced in AutoCAD 2010 (or later) and delivered to the COTR in CD(s) in addition to hard copies in quantities as required per the Special and general Provisions.

3.9 COTR’S FINAL INSPECTION

A. Before requesting a final inspection, all systems shall be inspected by the equipment manufacturer’s representative and the Contractor. When the system and all equipment is in place and is operating properly, the manufacturer’s representative shall develop and complete a checkout memo and have all equipment ready for final inspection. One week prior to final inspection, final as-built drawings and brochures shall be provided to the COTR.

PART 4 - CONTRACTOR’S QUALITY CONTROL REQUIREMENTS

4.1 GENERAL

A. Comply with applicable provisions of Division 01 Section “Quality Requirements” for requirements for Contractor Quality Control Program.

END OF SECTION 27 05 01

BASIC TELECOMMUNICATION REQUIREMENTS 27 05 01 - 14 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

SECTION 27 05 26 – GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Communication equipment power system grounding.

B. Communication system grounding.

C. Electrical equipment and raceway grounding and bonding.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Division 26 – Applicable Electrical Sections.

B. Division 27 – Communications and Electronic Systems Sections.

C. Division 28 – Electronic Safety and Security.

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. Comply with the requirements of the reference standards noted herein, except where more stringent requirements are listed herein or otherwise required by the Contract Documents.

B. NFPA Compliance: NFPA 70 “National Electrical Code (NEC).”

C. UL Compliance: Applicable requirements of UL Standards Nos. 467 “Electrical Grounding and Bonding Equipment,” and 869, “Electrical Service Equipment,” pertaining to grounding and bonding of systems, circuits and equipment. In addition, require compliance with UL Std. 486A, “Wire Connectors.” Grounding and bonding products are to be UL listed and labeled for their intended usage.

D. IEEE Compliance: Applicable requirements and recommended installation practices of IEEE Standards 80, 81, 141 and 142 pertaining to grounding and bonding of systems, circuits and equipment.

1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Ground each separately derived electrical source, including transformers, UPS’s and PDU associated with the Division 27 and 28 sections with a system neutral per the Drawings and as required by the NEC. Refer to the electrical specifications. Where applicable, building steel shall be included in the bonding, per the Drawings.

GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS 27 05 26 - 1 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

B. Provide communications systems backboards with a No. 6 copper grounding conductor to the nearest referenced ground plate.

C. Bond together system neutrals, service equipment enclosures, all non-current carrying metal parts of electrical equipment, metal raceway systems, grounding conductor in raceways and cables, and receptacle ground connectors. Exception: IG receptacles shall have the Equipment Grounding Conductor carried back to the source IG bar and shall not be bonded to the raceway or box at the receptacle yoke.

1.5 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Comply with the requirements of Division 01 Section “Product Requirements.”

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Standards of workmanship shall meet or exceed accepted telecommunications systems industry installation practices.

1.7 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Comply with the requirements of Division 01 Section “Submittals.”

B. Additional submittal procedures are identified in Division 27 Section “Basic Telecommunication Requirements” and in the individual technical specification.

C. Bonding equipment, including exothermic or removable screw type.

D. Submit all field test reports.

1.8 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Comply with the requirements of Division 01 Section “Project Record Documents.”

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Grounding Connection Accessories.

1. Electrical insulating tape, heat-shrinkable insulating tubing, welding materials, bonding straps, as recommended by accessories manufacturers for type of service required.

B. Exothermic welded connections are required where grounding conductors by bonding to building steel.

GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS 27 05 26 - 2 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

C. All ground wires shall be copper, sized according to the NEC or as shown on the Drawings, whichever is larger.

D. Signal Reference Grid mat conductors shall be at least .04” thick by 2.75” wide and spaced not more than 2 ft x 2 ft. Conductors shall be welded or soldered at every intersection.

E. Ground rods shall be 10-feet x 5/8-inches diameter copper-clad steel.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Provide a separate, insulated, equipment grounding conductor in all branch circuit conduits.

B. Use minimum No. 6 AWG copper conductor for communications service grounding conductor. Leave 10 feet slack conductor at terminal board or cabinet.

C. Provide isolated and insulated ground conductors for all microprocessor and data processing equipment. The isolated Equipment Ground Conductor and neutral conductor for a given branch circuit shall not be shared across branch circuits.

D. Tighten grounding and bonding connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with manufacturer’s published torque tightening values for connectors and bolts. Where manufacturer’s torque requirements are not indicated, connections are to be tightened to comply with tightening torque values specified in UL 486A to assure permanent and effective grounding.

E. Provide code-sized ground cable bonding jumpers, installed with ground clamps, across all conduit expansion couplings and fittings, including flexible steel conduit used as expansion fittings.

F. Provide a corrosion-resistant finish to field connections where factory applied protective coatings have been destroyed.

G. All continuous runs of cable tray and all isolated sections of cable tray shall be bonded and grounded.

H. Provide an equipment grounding conductor in all nonmetallic conduits.

I. All receptacles and switches shall be provided with ground jumper from outlet box to ground terminal of the device. Exception isolated ground receptacles.

J. Provide parallel equipment bonding jumper for parallel conduit feeders.

K. Provide bonding jumpers around all concentric or eccentric knockouts.

GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS 27 05 26 - 3 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

PART 4 - CONTRACTOR’S QUALITY CONTROL REQUIREMENTS

4.1 GENERAL

A. Comply with applicable provisions of Division 01 Section “Quality Requirements” for requirements for Contractor Quality Control Program.

B. Field Quality Control:

1. Upon completion of installation and bonding of electrical grounding system, field test ground resistance to building steel in accordance with ANSI/IEEE 81. Where test shows resistance to ground over 0.5 Ohms, alert the COTR prior to test record submittal. Submit test results to the COTR.

END OF SECTION 27 05 26

GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS 27 05 26 - 4 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

SECTION 27 05 28 – PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Provide pathways as required for the premise wiring distribution system (PWDS) and other Divisions 27 and 28 telecommunications and electronic systems as required for cabling being installed as part of this Project.

B. TSA communications cabling systems including station cables serving TSA equipment and backbone cabling between dedicated TSA communications rooms when run outside of TSA controlled spaces shall be run in rigid conduit.

C. All penetrations through fire-rated walls, floors or ceilings as shown on the Drawings and fire safeing of existing penetrations utilized for the passage of PWDS wiring systems and other Divisions 27 and 28 systems utilizing the PWDS systems for signal carriage shall be the responsibility of the PWDS Contractor.

D. Provide conduits and raceways as shown on the Drawings. Ensure that adequate conduit facilities are installed to support the intended systems. Primary raceways and conduits are shown on the Drawings; however, the Contractor shall also be responsible for additional raceways as required to provide a complete conduit system.

E. All telecommunications raceways shall be installed per the latest issue of the TIA/EIA-569A Standards and shall comply with the National Electrical Code and all other applicable state and local codes and regulations.

F. All telecommunication raceways shall be grounded per NEC requirements.

G. Fiber Optic Cabling Systems: The Contractor shall install conduit and boxes in locations and sizes as indicated on the Drawings. All conduits, conduit bends, pull boxes and junction boxes shall be sized in accordance with the fiber optic cable manufacturer’s minimum bend radius.

H. Color Code all telecommunications conduits at each end, at 10’ intervals along route and at each side of junction or pull boxes as follows.

1. Conduits containing copper communications cables – Green 2. Conduits containing communications fiber optic cables – Blue 3. Conduits containing defibrillator cables – Purple 4. Material and application utilized for color coding shall be permanent. Submit color and material to the COTR for approval.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Applicable conduit and raceway specifications sections of Division 26.

B. Division 27 – Communications and Electronic Systems Sections.

PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 27 05 28 - 1 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

C. Division 28 – Electronic Safety and Security.

1.3 CODES, STANDARDS AND REFERENCES

A. As specified in Division 27 Section “Basic Telecommunication Requirements,” Division 27 Section “Premise Wiring Distribution System,” and Division 26 Section “Common Work Results for Electrical.”

1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. The locations of telecommunications devices, equipment and raceways are diagrammatically expressed on the Drawings. Exact locations of items of work shall be field coordinated prior to installation.

B. Provide site inspection to verify areas of work, conditions, products to match existing and conflicts between contract documentation and site conditions. Bring conflicts to COTR’s attention for resolution.

C. Verify locations of pull and junction boxes prior to rough-in.

1.5 ROUTING OF CONDUITS A. Conduits installed in support of the telecommunications and Ethernet connected IT systems indicated in Division 27 systems are shown on the drawings in a diagrammatic form. It is the Contractors responsibility to coordinate with other trades and architectural and structural features and conditions and route conduits between end devices and serving Telecommunications Rooms (TR) and other spaces indicated on the drawings and schedules to minimize distances. The maximum allowable cable distance between an Ethernet connected device and the serving port on the Ethernet switch located in the serving TR is 295 feet. Where a conduit routing will exceed 295’ the Contractor shall notify the engineer prior to installation. This requirement does not apply to fiber optic cables or high count category 3 voice grade copper cables

1.6 COORDINATION

A. As specified in Division 27 Section “Basic Telecommunication Requirements” and Division 27 Section “Premise Wiring Distribution System.”

B. Coordinate the work of this section with that of other Divisions as required to ensure that the entire work of this project will be carried out in an orderly, complete and coordinated fashion.

1.7 CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS

A. As specified in Division 27 Section “Basic Telecommunication Requirements,” Division 27 Section “Premise Wiring Distribution System” and Division 26 Section “Common Work Results for Electrical.”

PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 27 05 28 - 2 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Standards of workmanship shall meet or exceed accepted telecommunications systems industry installation practices.

B. Refer to specifications, Division 27 Section “Basic Telecommunication Requirements” and Division 01 Section “Quality Requirements.”

1.9 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Comply with the requirements of Division 01 Section “Submittals.”

B. Additional submittal procedures are identified in Division 27 Section “Basic Telecommunication Requirements,” and in the individual technical specification.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. As specified in Division 27 Section “Basic Telecommunication Requirements,” and Division 26 Section “Common Work Results for Electrical.”

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. All equipment shall be new and unused.

B. All equipment, materials, accessories, devices, and other facilities covered by this specification or noted on the Contract Drawings shall be the best suited for the intended use and shall be provided by a single manufacturer.

C. Provide all components, equipment, parts, accessories and associated quantities required for complete installations and according to the manufacturer’s installation specifications. All components may not be specified herein.

2.2 CONDUIT, BOXES AND FITTINGS

A. Conduit boxes and fittings shall comply with the requirements of Division 26 Electrical Sections.

2.3 CABLE LADDER

A. Cable ladder shall be as specified in Division 27 Section “Communications Cable Management and Ladder Racks.”

PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 27 05 28 - 3 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

2.4 CABLE TRAY

A. Comply with EIA/TIA 570.

B. Cable tray shall be 24 inches wide with 6-inch side rails, solid bottom, provided with (3) equal partitions for installation of cables of varying voltages, hot dip galvanized steel with cover NEMA 12, Class B material. Generally the partitions shall be designated as communications, Life Safety systems and security system. Where paging system speaker circuits are run in cable trays, 70.7 volt lines shall be bundled separately and away from other cables in the tray. All fittings and supports shall be hot dip galvanized steel. Rungs shall be removable, and capable of sustaining minimum 75 lbs per linear foot when supported at 10-foot interval with a maximum deflection of 0.6 inches at the center of cable tray width for each 18-inch tray. Grounding connections shall be in accordance with the latest edition of NEC.

C. Provide supports, couplings, elbows, tees, dropouts and other fittings as required. Support assemblies shall support at least 200 percent of tray system allowable load.

D. Internal Bend Radius: 12 inches.

E. Comply with the requirements of NEMA VE-1, 2 and ASTM A123.

F. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, or as acceptable to the Authority, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. M.P. Husky, T.J. Cope and B-Line Systems.

2.5 INNER DUCT

A. Contractor shall install inner duct in all indoor and outdoor 4-inch conduits and ducts and in cable trays within the buildings. When installed in cable trays provide 50% spare empty inner duct capacity.

B. All inner duct shall be 1-inch in size (inside diameter), provisioned with factory installed pull ropes and orange in color.

C. Inner duct shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and industry standards.

D. Install four (4) 1-inch inner ducts in 4-inch conduits and ducts.

E. Inside Plant Inner duct

1. All inner duct for indoor applications shall be rated for installation in plenum spaces and shall be nonmetallic, pliable corrugated raceway that conforms to UL 2024 in accordance with the National Electrical Code for Plenum, Riser, and General Purpose applications as defined in Articles 725, 770, 800 and 820.

PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 27 05 28 - 4 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

F. Where applicable, inner duct shall be continuous throughout from pull box to pull box or hand hole. Contractor is responsible for determination of actual lengths of inner duct required.

G. Each segment of inner duct shall extend at least twelve inches beyond the end of the service conduit. Within equipment rooms, the inner duct shall extend from the end of conduit to four feet above the floor and shall be affixed by means of clamps designed for that purpose.

H. Design Product Selection: Subject to compliance with requirements, or as acceptable to the Authority, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product. Products may be provided by, but are not limited to, one of the following:

1. Inside Plant: Carlon Plenum-Gard or equal. 2. Outside Plant: Carlon Optic-Gard/PE Corrugated or equal.

2.6 PULLBOXES

A. Pull boxes inclusive of accessories and performance criteria required for the installation, housing of termination systems for the site fiber optic cabling are detailed on the Drawings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Installations shall meet or exceed industry standards and installation practices listed herein.

B. Product installations failing to meet standards and practices shall be removed and replaced at no addition cost to the Authority.

C. The PWDS Contractor shall be responsible for any damage to any surfaces or work disrupted as a result of his work. Repair of surfaces including painting shall be included as necessary.

3.2 INSTALLATION PRACTICES

A. General:

1. Install all equipment in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations and in compliance with the latest issue of the TIA/EIA-568-A/B Telecommunications Standards and BISCI’s Telecommunications Distributions Methods Manual (TDMM) guidelines. 2. The installation shall be in compliance with the requirements of the NEC, OSHA and the rules, regulations and requirements of the FCC. 3. The installation shall comply with federal, city, county and state laws, ordinances, regulations, and codes applicable to the installation. 4. Contractor shall supply all tools and test equipment necessary for successful completion of the Project. 5. If deviations from the Drawings are required, they shall require approval by the COTR prior to placement of the affected work.

PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 27 05 28 - 5 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

B. Building Raceway System:

1. Provide conduits and raceways as shown on the Drawings. Ensure that adequate conduit facilities are installed to support the intended systems. Primary raceways and conduits are shown on the Drawings; however, the Contractor shall also be responsible for additional raceways as required to provide a complete conduit system. 2. All telecommunications raceways shall be installed per the latest issue of the TIA/EIA- 569A Standards and shall comply with the National Electrical Code and all other applicable state and local codes and regulations. 3. All telecommunication raceways shall be grounded per NEC requirements. 4. The minimum size of conduits used for raceways shall be no less than 1-inch trade size. No section of conduit shall be longer than 100 feet between pull points and shall contain no more than 180 degrees of total bend. The inside bend radius of conduits shall be at least 6 times the internal diameter for conduits under 2 inches and 10 times the internal diameter for conduits 2 inches and larger. In no case shall conduit bodies or LB’s be used. All conduits shall be terminated with bushings. 5. Pull boxes should be placed in straight sections of conduit and not used in lieu of a bend. Pull boxes shall have a length of at least 8 times the trade-size diameter of the largest conduit. 6. All conduit bends shall be sweeping and shall not be smaller than the manufacturer’s stated minimum bend radius for cable during installation. 7. Provide pull stings in all conduits for installation of the cables by the Contractor. 8. Label all telecommunications conduits at regular intervals and at each side of junction or pull boxes.

C. Fire And Smoke Partition Penetrations:

1. Sealing of openings between floors, through rated fire and smoke walls, existing or created by this Contractor for cable pass through shall be the responsibility of the PWDS Contractor. Sealing material and application of this material shall be accomplished in such a manner that is acceptable to the local fire and building authorities having jurisdiction over this work. Any openings created by or for this Contractor and left unused shall also be sealed as part of this work. 2. Conduit sleeves have been provided as a means of routing cables between various equipment rooms and into the cable tray in the ceiling space. Openings in sleeves and conduits used for the PWDS system cables shall be sealed with an approved fireproof, removable material in accordance with Division 07 Section “Penetration Firestopping.” 3. Additional penetrations through rated assemblies necessary for passage of PWDS wiring shall be made using an approved method and permanently sealed after installation of cables.

PART 4 - CONTRACTOR’S QUALITY CONTROL REQUIREMENTS

4.1 GENERAL

A. Comply with applicable provisions of Division 01 Section “Quality Requirements” for requirements for Contractor Quality Control Program.

END OF SECTION 27 05 28

PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 27 05 28 - 6 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

SECTION 27 10 00 – PREMISE WIRING DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Systems Description

1. The Premise Wiring Distribution System (PWDS) specified herein and in related specifications sections will support the connectivity requirements of the Metropolitan Washington Airport Authority (MWAA) and Transportation Security Administration (TSA) operations in the new facility being constructed to house the new Terminal A Security Screening Check Point (SSCP).

2. The PWDS design includes communications outlets, station cables, backbone cables, termination and cable management hardware, communications rooms and other spaces dedicated to TSA operations. Additional requirements are indicated on the plans that serve MWAA. Interfaces between the PWDS serving MWAA and the PWDS serving the TSA are also indicated on the plans. The combination of these systems comprises a single PWDS for the SSCP Project.

1.2 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Furnish and install, complete with all accessories, a Premise Wiring Distribution System (PWDS) consisting of single mode fiber optic (SMF) cables, multimode fiber optic (MMF) cables, Category 6 station cables, Category 3 voice grade cables and other cabling as described herein and shown on the Drawings for the SSCP Project.

B. The PWDS shall provide wiring, cable, pathways, connectors, copper and fiber optic termination systems, terminations, system administration and testing as defined herein and in applicable related documents.

C. The PWDS system shall serve as a vehicle for transport of signals from new and existing telecommunications and electronic systems and for all of the new telecommunications and applicable electronic systems specified in Divisions 27 and 28.

D. The primary elements of the PWDS system includes:

1. The provision, installation, termination and cross connect and patching of SMF fiber optic cables, category 6A voice and data cables and Category 3 voice grade cables in the facilities and locations as indicated on the Drawings and specified herein. 2. Provision and installation of cable connectors, termination facilities and hardware for fiber optic and copper cables required as part of this work. 3. Provision and installation of copper and fiber optic cross connect hardware including fiber optic jumpers and cross connect wiring and patch cords required to achieve specified systems operation.

PREMISE WIRING DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM 27 10 00 - 1 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

E. The Contractor shall build out communications rooms, inclusive of all accessories, to the extent indicated on the Drawings including mounting backboards, termination equipment, patch bays, open frame relay racks, enclosed equipment cabinets, grounding systems, cable ladders and accessories indicated on the Drawings.

F. The Contractor shall install conduit and boxes in locations and sizes as indicated on the Drawings. All pull boxes and junction boxes shall be sized in accordance with the fiber optic cable manufacturer’s minimum bend radii.

G. All penetrations through fire-rated walls, floors or ceilings as shown on the Drawings and fire safeing of existing penetrations utilized for the passage of PWDS wiring systems and other Divisions 27 and 28 systems utilizing the PWDS systems for signal carriage shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.

H. The Contractor shall be responsible for the patching of fiber optic and metallic circuits to provide connectivity for the local area network (LAN) and voice systems, video systems and infrastructure supporting telecommunications and electronic specified in the individual sections as requiring signal carriage on the PWDS. Owner will provide a connection schedule to the Contractor 60 days prior to beneficial use of the system indicating by outlet configuration requirements for voice and LAN services. This requirement is not the same as the Contractors obligation to configure, connect, patch and make operational special systems specified as part of the contract documents.

I. Contractor shall be responsible for the coordination of final communications outlet locations at TSA work stations, control rooms and screening equipment locations. The Contractor shall similarly coordinate with MWAA regarding the placement of communications outlets and equipment in MWAA facilities.

J. Contractor shall provide testing of all cable and components installed for the PWDS.

K. All work shall be completed in compliance with:

1. Local Building Codes 2. NFPA-101 Life Safety Code 3. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC) 4. National Electrical Safety Code (NESC) 5. The American with Disabilities Act (ADA)

L. Placement of all equipment and work performed in existing and new MWAA and TSA equipment rooms shall be coordinated with MWAA Airport Communications System (ACS) staff and the TSA prior to commencement of work. All work affecting operational systems shall be coordinated in advance with system owner.

1.3 MWAA RESPONSIBILITIES

A. MWAA shall be responsible for the identification of fiber optic resources and the cross connect of those single mode fiber optic cabling resources between designated points indicated on the plans and communications room designated NW – BAG and points of demarcation indicated on the drawings including Terminal A Level 1 Communications room NW Operations and Level 1

PREMISE WIRING DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM 27 10 00 - 2 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

rooms Stair 146 and Mechanical Room 150 which house new Ethernet switches that provide network connectivity for the Access Control and IP CCTV systems between each existing communications room indicated above and the Main Operations Equipment Room located in Concourse A. To ensure that the fiber optic cabling required for correct systems functionality is available or made available to support the project commissioning testing and opening, the Contractor shall be responsible for technical and schedule coordination with MWAA and begin coordination 1 year prior to scheduled opening.

1.4 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Applicable Division 01 Sections.

B. Applicable Division 26 Sections.

C. All Division 27 Sections.

D. All Division 28 Sections.

1.5 CODES, STANDARDS AND REFERENCES

A. Materials and workmanship shall conform to the latest issue of all industry standards, publications, codes, regulations or requirements of regulatory agencies referenced in this section.

B. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only.

C. References:

1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)

a. ANSI/IEEE C2 - National Electrical Safety Code (NESC)

2. Code Of Federal Regulations (CFR)

a. CFR 29 Part 1910.146; Permit-Required Confined Spaces Standard b. CFR 47 Part 15; Radio Frequency Devices

3. Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA) / Electronic Industries Alliance (EIA) 4. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)

a. UL 6 (Latest Edition); Rigid Metal Conduit b. UL 797 (Latest Edition); Safety Electrical Metallic Tubing c. UL 910: Test Method for Fire and Smoke Characteristics of Electrical and Optical - Fiber Cables Used in Air-Handling Spaces d. UL 1666: Standard Test for Flame Propagation Height of Electrical and Optical - Fiber Cables Installed Vertically in Shafts

PREMISE WIRING DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM 27 10 00 - 3 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

5. Supplementary References:

a. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) b. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) E-814 Fire Tests of Through- Penetration Fire Stops

6. Owner References

a. Metropolitan Washington Airports Authority’s (MWAA) Airport Communications System (ACS) Design Manual b. 2006 MWAA Design Standards Book.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

1.7 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Comply with the requirements of Division 01 Section “Product Requirements.”

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate the work of this section with that of other Divisions as required to ensure that the entire work of this project will be carried out in an orderly, complete and coordinated fashion.

B. The Contractor is required to supply all necessary supervision and coordination of information to any contractor or subcontractor who is performing work to accommodate the work of this section and minimize interferences.

C. Prior to installation of any work, participate in detailed coordination planning meetings with all other building utilities system trades, under the direction of the General Contractor, so as to completely establish routings, elevations, space requirements and coordination of the work with all other trades.

D. Coordinate exact mounting locations of equipment racks and cabinets within the communications rooms with the COTR prior to installation.

E. Any system outages necessary as part of this scope of work shall be coordinated with the COTR. System shutdown shall be submitted to and approved by the COTR two weeks prior to the shutdown.

PREMISE WIRING DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM 27 10 00 - 4 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

F. Any work penetrating concrete walls or floors shall require saw cutting and/or core drilling and shall require approval by the COTR. X-ray is required in advance of any penetration deeper than 1” in existing concrete elements.

1.9 CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS

A. The PWDS Contractor shall be experienced in all aspects of this work and shall be required to demonstrate direct experience on recent systems of similar type and size. The Contractor shall own and maintain tools and equipment necessary for successful installation and testing of optical and metallic premise distribution systems and have personnel who are adequately trained in the use of such tools and equipment.

B. The Contractor or subcontractor shall employ a Building Industry Consulting Services International (BICSI) Registered Communications Distribution Designer (RCDD) with a LAN Specialist Certification to directly oversee the installation of all elements of the Premise Wiring Distribution System.

C. A resume of qualification shall be submitted with the Contractor's bid. In addition to those requirements, the Contractor shall submit the following information.

1. A list of (5) five completed PWDS projects over the past 5 years of similar type and size with contact names and telephone numbers for each. 2. A list of test equipment proposed for use in verifying the installed integrity of fiber and metallic cable systems on this project. 3. A technical resume of experience for the Contractor's Engineer and on-site installation foreman who will be assigned to this project. 4. Similar documentation for any sub-Contractor who will assist the PWDS Contractor in performance of this work.

1.10 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Standards of workmanship shall meet or exceed accepted telecommunications systems industry installation practices.

B. Refer to Division 27 Section “Basic Telecommunication Requirements” and Division 01 Section “Quality Requirements” for quality assurance requirements.

1.11 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Comply with the requirements of Division 01 Section “Submittals.”

B. Additional submittal procedures are identified in Division 27 Section “Basic Telecommunication Requirements” and in the individual technical specification.

C. Submittals shall include adequate descriptive literature, catalog cut sheets, shop drawings and other data necessary for the COTR to ascertain that the proposed equipment and materials comply with the specification requirements.

PREMISE WIRING DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM 27 10 00 - 5 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

D. Product Data Submittals:

1. Product data submittals shall consist of catalog cut sheets, technical data sheets, manufacturer specifications, brochures and/or diagrams necessary to illustrate a product, material or system for some portion of the work. 2. Product data literature is required on all items of material and equipment and should be clearly marked, identifying specific items proposed. 3. Indicate the UL listing and NEC insulation type for each type of cable installed as part of the PWDS.

E. Shop Drawings shall include the following drawings:

1. Coordination Drawings: prepare and submit coordination drawings in detailing raceways and system components and materials in relationship with other building systems and components. 2. Detail Drawings: submit detailed drawings for:

a. Wall-mounted facilities on terminal backboards. b. Equipment rack and cabinet elevations for all termination locations. c. Detail drawings shall include clearances for servicing equipment, including space for equipment disassembly required for periodic maintenance.

3. All sheets shall be sized to match Contract Drawings, shall be executed in a neat and professional manner, and shall include a right hand margin title block (see Contract Drawings).

F. Contractor shall also submit the following:

1. Contractor Qualifications. 2. Record Documentation. 3. Cable and equipment labeling schemes and sample labels. 4. Reel tests of fiber optic cable from the manufacturer. Submit test reports with, manufacturers' specifications and any other information necessary to determine compliance with published performance documents. 5. Test Reports. Refer to part 3 of the Specification for specific test and documentation requirements.

G. Prior to assembling or installing the work, prepare and submit shop drawings and product data literature for review.

H. The Contractor shall not purchase any materials or equipment prior to receipt of reviewed and accepted Submittals from the COTR.

I. Review of product data shall not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for deviations from the Drawings or specifications, unless the Contractor has, in writing, called attention to such deviations at the time of submission and secured written approval.

J. Record documents: Comply with the requirements of Division 01 Section “Project Record Documents.” Include:

PREMISE WIRING DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM 27 10 00 - 6 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

1. Product Data Manuals. 2. Complete set of Record Drawings. 3. Complete Test Reports. 4. Warranty and Close-Out Documents.

K. Product Data Manuals: upon completion of the project, submit final Product Data Manuals that include:

1. A complete as-installed equipment list of all components installed with manufacturers' names and model numbers. 2. A complete set of product data sheets for all products installed. Product data sheets shall be clearly marked, identifying the specific items installed. 3. Updated and completed circuit schedule spreadsheets to reflect all voice and data horizontal wiring (station wiring), backbone cable and pairs used on each backbone to support each circuit, including circuit ID and user. This submittal shall be provided in both hard copy and in electronic format. 4. Submit six (6) identical sets of Product Data Manuals with electronic copies of circuit schedule spreadsheets in MS Excel format.

L. Record Drawings:

1. As-Built documents are to include updating and revising contract documents to record actual locations (as-installed) of all equipment, pull boxes, devices, raceways, cabling, outlets, communications rooms and all Premise Distribution cable infrastructure components. 2. As-Built drawings shall include:

a. Complete floor plans and site plans, indicating placement and routing of as- installed raceways, outlet locations and types with labels and cabling facilities installed under this scope of work. b. A complete Premise Distribution System riser diagram, showing as-installed originations, destinations, and type of pathways for all cabling. Include wire numbers, terminal block numbers and layouts, and other designations. c. Equipment rack/cabinet and wallboard as-installed elevation drawings shall be provided for each communication room and termination location. d. Wiring terminal point-to-point color-coded wiring diagrams. Drawings shall show each item of equipment, locations, all wiring, and all connections. Wiring color code shall be as described by the specifications. If no color code is specifically mentioned, the color code shall be as recommended by the equipment manufacturer.

3. Submit six (6) full-size sets of drawings. 4. Drawings shall be produced in the AutoCAD 2010. 5. Submit all drawing files on CD-ROM.

M. Test Reports: The Contractor shall be responsible for recording all test data. Copies of all test results are to be submitted to the COTR for review as part of final acceptance and subsequently submitted to The Authority for their records.

PREMISE WIRING DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM 27 10 00 - 7 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

1. Submit test reports in both printed format and an electronic format to assist the COTR in the final review process. Printed test reports shall be provided in 8-1/2 x 11-inch three ring binders. Electronic copies of the test reports shall be either in a file format that can be imported or viewed using standard office software or in a file format used by the testing software, provided the testing software program is also submitted with the raw testing files. 2. Refer to the testing section of the specifications for details on the data that shall be included in the test reports. 3. Submit six (6) printed copies of the test reports and six (6) electronic copies of the test reports with the testing software program on CD-ROM.

N. The Contractor shall provide an "as-built" list of the initial patch cable connections that with the Schedule of Outlets will enable the COTR to trace the circuit continuity of each voice and data outlet to its point of demarcation.

1.12 WARRANTY

A. As specified in Division 27 Section: “Basic Telecommunication Requirements.”

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. All equipment shall be new and unused.

2.2 PRODUCTS

A. Copper tie cabling: as specified in Division 27 Section “Communications Backbone Cabling.”

B. Data copper terminations: as specified in Division 27 Section “Communications Backbone Cabling.”

C. Patch panels: as specified in Division 27 Section “Communications Equipment Room Fittings.”

D. Voice copper terminations: Division 27 Section “Communications Equipment Room Fittings.”

PREMISE WIRING DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM 27 10 00 - 8 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

2.3 FIBER OPTIC CABLES

A. As specified in Division 27 Section “Communications Equipment Room Fittings.”

2.4 FIBER OPTIC CONNECTORS

A. As specified in Division 27 Section “Communications Equipment Room Fittings.”

2.5 FIBER OPTIC TERMINATION EQUIPMENT

A. As specified in Division 27 Section “Communications Equipment Room Fittings.”

2.6 FIBER OPTIC SPLICE TRAYS

A. As specified in Division 27 Section “Communications Equipment Room Fittings.”

2.7 FIBER OPTIC SPLICE CASE/ENCLOSURE

A. As specified in Division 27 Section “Communications Backbone Cabling.”

2.8 FIBER OPTIC PATCH CORDS

A. As specified in Division 27 Section “Communications Equipment Room Fittings.”

2.9 EQUIPMENT RACKS, RELAY RACKS, AND CABINETS

A. As specified in Division 27 Section “Communications Cabinets, Racks, Frames and Enclosures.”

2.10 CABLE LADDER

A. As specified in Division 27 Section “Communications Cable Management and Ladder Racks.”

2.11 GROUNDING

A. As specified in Division 27 Section “Grounding and Bonding for Communications Systems.”

PREMISE WIRING DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM 27 10 00 - 9 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Installations shall meet or exceed industry standards and installation practices listed herein.

B. Product installations failing to meet standards and practices shall be removed and replaced at no additional cost to The Authority.

C. The PWDS Contractor shall be responsible for any damage to any surfaces or work disrupted as a result of his work. Repair of surfaces including painting shall be included as necessary.

3.2 INSTALLATION PRACTICES

A. General: install all equipment in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations and in compliance with the latest issue of the TIA/EIA-568-A Telecommunications Standards and BISCI’s Telecommunications Distributions Methods Manual (TDMM) guidelines.

B. The installation shall be in compliance with the requirements of the NEC, OSHA and the rules, regulations and requirements of the FCC.

C. The installation shall comply with federal, city, county and state laws, ordinances, regulations, and codes applicable to the installation.

D. Contractor shall supply all tools and test equipment necessary for successful completion of the Project.

E. If deviations from the Drawings are required, they shall require approval by the COTR prior to placement of the affected work.

F. The locations of raceways, stub ups, outlets, panels, equipment racks and cabinets and other related products as indicated on the Drawings are diagrammatic in location. Contractor should have precise and definite locations accepted by the COTR before proceeding with the installation.

G. Contractor shall field coordinate the exact mounted heights and locations of cable ladder within the Communications rooms prior to installation.

3.3 FIRE AND SMOKE PARTITION PENETRATIONS

A. Conduit sleeves have been provided as a means of routing cables between various IDF rooms and into the cable tray in the ceiling space. Openings in sleeves and conduits used for the PWDS system cables and those which remain (empty) spare shall be sealed in accordance with Division 07 Section “Penetration Firestopping.”

B. Sleeves which pass vertically between floors shall be sealed in a similar manner using an approved re-enterable system.

PREMISE WIRING DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM 27 10 00 - 10 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

C. Additional penetrations through fire rated assemblies necessary for passage of PWDS wiring shall be made using an approved method and permanently sealed after installation of cables.

3.4 CABLE INSTALLATION PRACTICES:

A. A portion of the PWDS wiring installed within the buildings will be installed above ceilings within existing cable tray in areas used for circulation of environmental air. Cables installed within these areas shall be rated for use in such plenum locations and shall bear the CMP marking.

B. Contractor shall pull cable in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations, industry- accepted practices and within the limits of cable bend radius and pulling tension specifications.

C. Use pulling lubricants compatible with the cable. Petroleum products shall not be used as cable pulling lubricant.

D. Vertical riser cables shall be properly secured to prevent slippage due to gravity. As a minimum requirement, cables shall be supported at their uppermost point and at each two floors of vertical travel.

E. Contractor shall not install more cables in a conduit than shown unless approved in writing by the COTR.

F. Conduit systems shall not exceed 40% cable fill. The Contractor shall provide larger conduit or additional conduit should planned cable fill exceed 40 percent.

G. Contractor shall plan cable pulls so that the maximum number of cables required in the conduit is pulled simultaneously.

H. Restraints shall be provided on each backboard associated with cable terminations that meet industry standards for cable restraint hardware. Provide sufficient quantities to assure cables routed on backboards are restrained at periodic intervals.

I. Avoid routing horizontal telecommunications cables near sources of EMI and specifically motors associated with the baggage conveyance systems . Maintain a minimum clearance of 4 feet from power transformers and motors and 12 inches from fluorescent lighting and power distribution cables. Advise the COTR of any field conditions where EMI issues may arise prior to proceeding with that portion of the work.

J. All horizontal telecommunications cables shall not exceed 295 feet in length from the station outlets to the horizontal cross-connects within the Communications rooms.

K. Horizontal cables shall not be spliced but must be continuous from the station outlets to the horizontal cross-connects within Communications rooms.

L. Terminate all horizontal telecommunications cables according to the TIA/EIA T568B wiring scheme.

PREMISE WIRING DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM 27 10 00 - 11 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

M. The Category 6 connecting hardware used shall be installed to provide minimal signal impairment by preserving wire pair twists as closely as possible to the point of mechanical termination. The amount of untwisting in a pair as a result of termination to connecting hardware shall be no greater than 0.5 inches.

N. All fiber optic cables shall include a thirty (30) foot service loop located on both ends, unless otherwise noted.

O. All optical fiber terminations are to be made by personnel trained and certified by the fiber manufacturer. All connectors shall be installed utilizing the appropriate certified tool kit and equipment as recommended by the manufacturer.

P. Fiber optic splices are not allowed except where specifically noted on the Drawings and where pre-terminated pigtails are used for fiber terminations. If field conditions are discovered that require additional splices, submit a request in writing to the COTR and obtain approval prior to performing the splicing.

Q. All fiber optic splices shall be made by fusing splicing and shall be performed in the field by a qualified splicer. Provide heat shrink protection for all fiber optic splices and store within splice trays. Mechanical splices are not allowed.

R. The maximum optical attenuation for fusion splicing shall not exceed 0.30 dB per the TIA/EIA- 568-B Standards.

S. Contractor shall ensure that all cable reel tests have been performed and that the cable has passed all pre-installation tests.

3.5 BUILDING RACEWAY SYSTEM:

A. Refer to Division 27 Section “Pathways for Communications Systems.”

3.6 GROUNDING:

A. Provide grounding installation as specified in Division 27 Section “Grounding and Bonding for Communications Systems.”

B. The Contractor shall furnish and install grounding busbars and ground wire to provide a single common grounding point in each telecommunication space for connection of telecommunication equipment and components to the Building Ground Reference.

C. Grounding shall meet the requirements and practices of applicable authorities or codes. In addition, telecommunications grounding shall conform with ANSI-J-STD-607-A “Commercial Building Grounding (Earthing) and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications” standard.

D. Contractor shall ground and bond all telecommunications conduits, cable ladder, equipment racks and cabinets and other telecommunications components requiring grounding to the Telecommunication Ground Bars (TGBs) within the Telecommunications Spaces.

PREMISE WIRING DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM 27 10 00 - 12 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

E. Provide green insulated copper grounding conductors from the Main Building Ground Reference to each of the telecommunications spaces and bond each grounding conductor to the Ground Reference and to each Grounding Busbar.

F. Coordinate with power trades to extend insulated ground cable from the TGB to the Main Building Ground Reference.

3.7 LABELING

A. All communication conduits, cable jacket ends, voice/data outlets, termination punch down blocks, ports and patch panels, shall be labeled and identified with labels in compliance with Class 3 ANSI/TIA/EIA-606A. In addition, provide the following:

B. Label each face plate and outlet and with permanent self-adhesive label with minimum 3/16- inch high characters.

C. Label each Horizontal cable with permanent self-adhesive label with minimum, 1/8-inch high characters, in the following locations:

1. Inside receptacle box at the work area. 2. Behind the communication room patch panel and adjacent to punch block.

D. Use labels on face of data patch panels.

E. Use color-coded labels for each termination field that conforms to ANSI/TIA/EIA-606(A) standard color codes for termination blocks.

F. Mount termination blocks on color-coded backboards.

G. Labels shall be machine-printed, Brady or equal. Hand-lettered labels shall not be acceptable.

H. All racks, cabinets and enclosures installed as part of this Section’s scope of work shall be permanently labeled with engraved black on white laminate matching identification scheme depicted in the Project Drawings and defined in this section.

I. The label numbering scheme shall apply to all test result identification and as-built documentation.

J. All labeling systems and schemes shall be coordinated with The Authority to assure integration and extension of existing labeling systems. Submit labeling scheme and sample labels for approval prior to fabrication.

K. PWDS components to be labeled shall include:

1. Communication conduit labeling: Each communication conduit entering a communication room (/MDF/IDF) shall be permanently labeled with adhesive labels or tie on tags. 2. Riser, Tie and Backbone cabling shall be labeled with adhesive cable labels on each cable end, within 12 inches of jacket terminations at each termination point.

PREMISE WIRING DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM 27 10 00 - 13 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

3. All Horizontal (Station) Wiring shall be labeled at each cable end, end within 6 inches of the jacket termination. This scheme shall apply to voice and data cables. 4. Voice and Data communication outlets provided under this project scope of work shall be provisioned with permanent labeling coordinated with the cabling scheme. 5. Copper termination systems shall include color coded designator strips providing indication of building floor and IDF serviced by remote cable ends. 6. Fiber optic termination systems shall include port assignments and color coded designator strips providing indication of building floor and IDF serviced by remote cable ends 7. Termination system identification strips (punch down blocks and patch panels) shall be used. All cable identification shall be in numerical sequence. Horizontal cable identification shall reflect the outlet number as shown on the building floor plan drawings. Riser / tie cabling systems shall be identified in a numerical sequence. 8. Grounding bus bars shall be labeled.

L. Provide facility assignment records and a copy of the as-built Horizontal cable plant floor plan drawing for each Communications Room coverage area, posted on the wall of each Communications Room. These drawings and schedules shall be covered by protective sheet of Lexan or plexiglass.

M. Contractor shall supply and attach permanent labels to both ends of all cables and conductors. For proper administration, additional cable labeling may be required on the cable at intermediate locations such as conduit ends and along cable tray runs.

N. Contractor shall supply and attach permanent labels to cables, wiring, and equipment.

1. All cables shall be labeled at both ends of all cables and conductors. 2. All outlets shall be labeled. 3. All termination blocks and patch panels shall be labeled. 4. All terminations shall be labeled. 5. All equipment frames and cabinets shall be labeled. 6. Each system shall be labeled. 7. Grounding system shall be labeled. 8. Other items as directed by COTR shall be labeled.

O. Identification information shall be typed or printed on labels.

1. Identification information on labels shall be indelible. 2. Handwritten labels will not be accepted.

P. Labels for equipment, racks, backboards, patch panels, enclosures of all types, and other equipment shall be by engraved label.

1. Labels on same type of equipment shall be attached in same place on each piece of equipment.

Q. Identify empty outlet boxes, junction boxes, and cabinets installed for future use by means of indelible markings on the inside of the box or cabinet noting system use.

PREMISE WIRING DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM 27 10 00 - 14 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

R. Enclosures and junction boxes located above unfinished spaces, such as lay-in ceilings, shall be clearly identified on the outside as “COMM.”

S. Cable label format: Cables shall have a two line label attached using the following format:

1. Line 1: ABCDxxxx-yyy-zzz.

a. A = “F” for fiber optic cable, “U” for unshielded twisted pair cable (UTP), or “S” for shielded twisted pair cable. b. B = “S” for single mode, “M” for multimode, “3" for Category 3, “5" for Category 5, etc. c. C = “V” for voice, or “D” for data. d. D = Floor, i.e. “B” for basement, “1" for first floor etc. e. xxxx = unique numerical identifier in cable management system. f. yyy-zzz = Conductor numbers in cable.

2. Line two: Building/room identifier where cable is located, and building/room identifier end point of opposite end of cable.

a. Contractor shall contact COTR for correct nomenclature for building and room.

3. Labeling for user outlets shall be as directed by COTR as conditions may vary according to project.

3.8 TESTING

A. Test 100 percent of all telecommunications cables installed and submit test reports for all tests.

B. Test Reports: Submit six (6) printed copies of a final test reports and communication circuit schedules (typed and bound) and six (6) electronic copies (CD media), which confirms that the cabling infrastructure has been tested, labeled and documented.

1. All test results shall be delivered to COTR within four weeks after completion of the installation. 2. Each report copy shall be labeled and submitted in white, three-ring view-binder(s). 3. Test reports shall include:

a. Pass/fail results and actual cable test data and required cable measurements and/or calculations for all installed cables. b. An installer-signed statement of compliance with specifications herein. c. All certificates of test equipment calibration/certification. d. All certificates of training for test personnel. e. All fiber and copper parameters specified below in the fiber and copper testing sections. f. All fiber optic backbone cable strands and port ID’s, cable length’s, each termination room ID and test results compliant with applicable standards and specifications.

PREMISE WIRING DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM 27 10 00 - 15 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

g. All Category 6 UTP horizontal cable, outlet and port ID’s, cable length’s, each termination room ID and test results compliant with applicable standards and specifications.

4. The cable test results and communication schedules shall be formatted as spreadsheets and submitted in electronic file (MS-Access, Excel 7.0 or approved equal). Automated calculations (equations) may be inserted by the Contractor to further reduce documentation time. 5. Submit electronic copies of the manufacturer’s OTDR and Power Meter testing software to allow the COTR to view raw test results in the native software programs. If software is not public, provide The Authority with a licensed copy as part of the submittal. 6. Cable reel serial number and cable product number shall be recorded and included in the test results for each reel.

C. Test Equipment: All test equipment shall be calibrated yearly and the calibration shall be NIST traceable.

1. Submit data sheets and the last calibration certificate on the test equipment that is being used. 2. Optical test equipment shall be properly adjusted prior to use. The optical time domain reflectometer shall be calibrated to show anomalies of 0.2 dB as a minimum. 3. The Contractor shall provide proof that the OTDR to be used in the testing was recently calibrated using a 1-Kilometer launch cable. 4. Variable unit adjustments shall be calibrated to match cable manufacturer's stated cable transmission parameters. 5. Acceptable test equipment manufacturers are as listed below:

a. Fluke/Microtest. b. HP. c. Tektronics. d. Siecore.

D. Test Procedures:

1. General: Create “Cable Test Forms” and submit sample at least 60 days prior to need date for approval by COTR. 2. Annotate test equipment parameter settings on "Cable Test Form." 3. Cables and components that fail performance tests shall be replaced and retested until they meet the required performance standards. 4. Do not proceed with testing when multiple failures have occurred without prior approval of the COTR. 5. Fiber optic connector losses shall not exceed manufacturer's listed maximum loss for the connector type installed. Connectors shall be replaced at Contractors expense if it fails testing. 6. Fiber Optic Cable:

a. All fiber optic cable shall be factory tested, pre-installation tested, and post installation tested. All test reports shall be required to be submitted to the COTR for approval.

PREMISE WIRING DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM 27 10 00 - 16 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

7. Pre-installation Testing: The factory shall test cabling prior to shipment to jobsite.

a. The Contractor shall be responsible for performing pre-installation testing of each fiber strand on each reel to verify the cable and all strands are acceptable, the fiber contains no breaks or anomalies, the fiber meets attenuation requirements defined within the specifications and no damage was incurred during shipping. b. Report defective cables immediately to the COTR. c. Submit pre-installation test results to COTR prior to cable installation. d. Test data shall include cable reel serial number and cable product number for identification. e. Repeat pre-installation tests if necessary if cable reels are stored unprotected on the job site or are mishandled. Do not install defective cables.

8. Post Installation Testing - General:

a. Tests shall be performed on 100 percent of the fibers of each circuit and repeated from the opposite end of each circuit. b. Contractor shall perform post installation tests on 100 percent of fiber strands with an OTDR and Power Meter Light source at the following wavelengths: c. Multimode fiber: 62.5/125 micron at 850 and 1300 nanometers. d. Single mode fiber: 8.3/125 micron at 1310 and 1550 nanometers. e. Perform optical attenuation measurements for each optical fiber after both ends of an optical cable have been connectorized, dressed, and mounted into outlets, panels, or frames to show losses of the optical cable, connectors, and couplers.

1) Optical attenuation measurements shall be made from both ends of each fiber of each circuit. 2) Record results on the appropriate test forms.

9. Post Installation OTDR Testing: Perform OTDR testing according to the manufacturer’s recommendations and industry practices. Single mode fiber optic testing shall also be in compliance with ANSI/TIA/EIA-526-7, Method B.

a. A launch cable shall be used when performing OTDR testing to ensure accurate test results. b. Record cable length of each strand tested, through OTDR test. c. Each strand test shall be documented and submitted for approval. d. OTDR test methods and testing documentation shall include:

1) Test equipment model and tested wavelength. 2) Date tested. 3) Cable label identification. 4) Fiber type (singlemode type or multimode type). 5) Fiber strand identification – color. 6) Total link length. 7) Link loss in dB/km. 8) OTDR settings. 9) OTDR trace at each operating wavelength for each strand of fiber tested.

PREMISE WIRING DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM 27 10 00 - 17 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

e. Test for 2-point loss average (dB/Km) for each strand shall be measured by placement of OTDR cursors following launch peak and prior to end reflection peak. f. Test for splice loss shall be used where splicing is planned for and defined in the Project Drawings. Splices shall be measured using auto-testing mode on the OTDR. No splice loss exceeding 0.15 dB shall be acceptable. g. Any anomalies in the OTDR trace, indicating discontinuities, macrobends, microbends, or other loss features shall be noted and corrected by the Contractor. Uncorrectable anomalies in excess of .15 dB losses shall require complete cable replacement by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner.

10. Post Installation Power Meter Attenuation Testing:

a. Power Meter / Light Source testing is required for each fiber strand installed in the project. b. Testing shall be in compliance with ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B and ANSI/TIA/EIA- 526-14A, Method B (one jumper method) for multimode fibers and ANSI/TIA/EIA-526-7, Method A.1 (one jumper method) for single-mode fibers. The one jumper method validates connector losses since it measures the loss of the fiber segment plus the connectors at both ends. c. Testing shall be completed on the “Permanent Link” following connector terminations on each installed strand using a fiber optic power meter / light source test set. d. Tests shall be made with an optical source and receiving power meter at the designated window wavelength. e. Power Meter / Light Source testing methods and testing documentation shall include:

1) Test equipment model and tested wavelength. 2) Date tested. 3) Cable label identification. 4) Fiber type (singlemode type or multimode type). 5) Fiber strand identification-color. 6) Cable length. 7) The flux shall be measured at the optical fiber receiver end and shall be compared to the flux injected at the transmitter end. 8) The circuit loss shall be recorded and shall not exceed the calculated loss, which shall include length of fiber being tested, splices, and connectors. 9) Comparison of loss between tests in opposite directions shall not be greater than 1dB. 10) Optical attenuation for each circuit shall not exceed the predicted total attenuation (PTA). PTA for each circuit shall be calculated using the following formula:

a) PTA = (CoQ x CoA) + (CaL x CaA) where: b) CoQ = Connector Quantity. c) CoA = Connector Attenuation (in dB). d) CaL = Cable Length (in kilometers). e) CaA = Cable Attenuation (in dB per kilometer).

PREMISE WIRING DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM 27 10 00 - 18 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

11) Contractor shall calculate PTA for each circuit and enter predicted value and measured value on test form. 12) All test failures must be documented in the "miscellaneous notes" section of the test form prior to correcting the failure. 13) Failing connectors shall be replaced and fully retested until they pass. 14) Negative losses (i.e. gainers) and 0dB test results are unacceptable and must be retested by the Contractor at no additional expense to the Owner.

E. 4-Pair UTP Cable Testing:

1. Test the 4-pair UTP horizontal cables after both ends of a UTP cable have been connectorized and mounted into outlets, panels, or frames, thereby including losses of the UTP cable, connectors, frames, etc. 2. Test all 4-pair UTP horizontal cables using a Level III Field Tester. Prior to commencing the testing submit to the COTR for review, information on the field tester that shall be used for testing, including calibration reports. 3. Perform the permanent link test on all 4-pair UTP horizontal cables. 4. Field test measurements shall be made in accordance with annex I of ANSI/TIA/EIA- 568-B.2 Standard and shall be conducted from 1 MHz to 250 MHz. For extended Category 6 cables that exceed the 250 MHz bandwidth, test to the highest reference frequency per the manufacturer’s recommendations. 5. Field test the following transmission performance parameters: 6. Wire map.

a. Length. b. Attenuation. c. Near End Crosstalk (NEXT). d. Power Sum Near End Crosstalk (PSNEXT). e. Equal Level Far-End Crosstalk (ELFEXT). f. Power Sum Equal Level Far-End Crosstalk (PSELFEXT). g. Return loss. h. Propagation Delay. i. Delay skew. j. At a minimum attenuation, NEXT, PSNEXT, ELFEXT and PSELFEXT performance parameters shall be sweep/step tested from 1 MHz to 250 MHz per compliance with ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B. For extended Category 6 cables that exceed the 250 MHz bandwidth, sweep/step from 1 MHz to the highest reference frequency per the manufacturer’s recommendations. k. Test the NEXT, PSNEXT, ELFEXT and PSELFEXT performance parameters from both ends of the cable. l. Each report shall include all completed cable test forms bound in order by room number. Record the test pass or fail on the appropriate UTP cable test form. All test failures must be documented in the "miscellaneous notes" section of the test form prior to correcting the failure. m. All four-pair UTP copper cables must have the following data recorded and submitted:

1) The cable tester used during testing. 2) Cable ID/Pair #.

PREMISE WIRING DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM 27 10 00 - 19 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

3) Wire Map. 4) Cable Length. 5) Attenuation. 6) NEXT. 7) Attenuation to Crosstalk (ACR) ratio. 8) Capacitance. 9) Impedance. 10) DC Loop Resistance. 11) PSNEXT. 12) Far-End Crosstalk (FEXT). 13) ELFEXT. 14) PSELFEXT. 15) Return Loss. 16) Propagation Delay. 17) Delay Skew. 18) Pass/Fail for each parameter. 19) Overall pass/fail for the circuit. 20) The Dialectric Constant and Velocity of Propagation must also be recorded from the manufacturer’s data sheet of the cable tested.

F. Multi-Pair UTP Cable Testing:

1. All multi-pair UTP copper cables shall be wire map tested to verify pair-to-pair termination at each end and to check for installation connectivity errors. For all of the conductors in the cable, the wire map shall indicate:

a. Continuity to the remote end, b. Shorts between any two or more conductors, c. Crossed pairs, d. Reversed pairs, e. Split pairs, f. Other miscellaneous wiring errors.

PART 4 - CONTRACTOR’S QUALITY CONTROL REQUIREMENTS

4.1 GENERAL

A. Comply with applicable provisions of Division 01 Section “Quality Requirements” for requirements for Contractor Quality Control Program.

END OF SECTION 27 10 00

PREMISE WIRING DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM 27 10 00 - 20 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

SECTION 27 15 00 - COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Furnish and install, Category 6A horizontal station cables for transport of voice and data signals between communications outlets and communications rooms and other special systems cabling as described herein and shown on the Drawings.

B. Furnish and install, multi and single mode fiber optic horizontal station cables for transport of voice and data signals between communications outlets and communications rooms as described herein and shown on the Drawings.

C. Furnish and install, Category 3 horizontal tie cables for the transport of voice and special circuits between communications facilities as indicated on the Drawings.

D. Provide testing of installed cables as described in Division 27 Section “Premise Wiring Distribution System.”

E. Related Sections:

1. Applicable Division 01 Sections. 2. All Division 27 – Communications and Electronic Systems Sections. 3. All Division 28 – Security System Sections.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Basket Cable Tray: A fabricated structure consisting of wire mesh bottom and side rails.

B. BICSI: Building Industry Consulting Service International.

C. Channel Cable Tray: A fabricated structure consisting of a one-piece, ventilated-bottom or solid- bottom channel.

D. Consolidation Point: A location for interconnection between horizontal cables extending from building pathways and horizontal cables extending into furniture pathways.

E. Cross-Connect: A facility enabling the termination of cable elements and their interconnection or cross-connection.

F. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.

G. IDC: Insulation displacement connector.

H. Ladder Cable Tray: A fabricated structure consisting of two longitudinal side rails connected by individual transverse members (rungs).

COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 27 15 00 - 1 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

I. LAN: Local area network.

J. MUTOA: Multiuser telecommunications outlet assembly, a grouping in one location of several telecommunications outlet/connectors.

K. Outlet/Connectors: A connecting device in the work area on which horizontal cable or outlet cable terminates.

L. RCDD: Registered Communications Distribution Designer.

M. Solid-Bottom or Nonventilated Cable Tray: A fabricated structure consisting of longitudinal side rails and a bottom without ventilation openings.

N. Trough or Ventilated Cable Tray: A fabricated structure consisting of longitudinal side rails and a bottom having openings for the passage of air.

O. UTP: Unshielded twisted pair.

1.3 CODES, STANDARDS AND REFERENCES

A. As specified in Division 27 Section “Basic Telecommunication Requirements” and Division 27 Section “Premise Wiring Distribution System.”

1.4 CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS

A. As specified in Division 27 Section “Basic Telecommunication Requirements” and Division 27 Section “Premise Wiring Distribution System.”

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Comply with the requirements of Division 01 Section “Submittals.:”

B. As specified in Division 27 Section “Basic Telecommunication Requirements” and Division 27 Section “Premise Wiring Distribution System.”

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. As specified in Division 27 Section “Basic Telecommunication Requirements,” Division 27 Section “Premise Wiring Distribution System,” and Division 01 Section “Quality Requirements.”

B. Standards of workmanship shall meet or exceed accepted telecommunications systems industry installation practices.

COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 27 15 00 - 2 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS

C. Verify locations of pull and junction boxes prior to rough-in.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. As specified in Division 27 Section “Basic Telecommunication Requirements” and Division 27 Section “Premise Wiring Distribution System.”

1.9 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Comply with the requirements of Division 27 Section “Basic Telecommunication Requirements,” Division 27 Section “Premise Wiring Distribution System,” and the requirements contained in the individual specifications.

1.10 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Comply with the requirements of Division 01 Section “Project Record Documents,” Division 27 Section “Basic Telecommunication Requirements.” and the requirements contained in the individual specifications.

B. Test Reports: As specified in Division 27 Section “Premise Wiring Distribution System.”

1.11 WARRANTY

A. As specified in Division 27 Section “Basic Telecommunication Requirements.”

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. All equipment shall be new and unused.

COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 27 15 00 - 3 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

2.2 COMMUNICATION OUTLETS

A. Outlet modules: Communications Voice and Data outlets shall be provisioned with 8W, 8 Pin (RJ45) modules. Each outlet shall be labeled and designated voice or data with a color coded icon. Connector modules shall utilize insulation displacement techniques. Connectors and modules shall be removable.

B. Pinning of RJ45 connectors and copper patch panels are globally referred to as in compliance with EIA/TIA 568A throughout the Division 26 specification sections. However the following shall be observed

1. RJ45 Jacks provided for outlets designated for use by MWAA shall be pinned EIA/TIA 568A. RJ45 Jacks provided for outlets designated for use by the TSA shall be pinned EIA/TIA 568B. Refer to the telecommunications outlet for outlet usage designation.

C. Refer to the drawings for outlet configurations. Manufacturer is subject to compliance with requirements, or as acceptable to The Authority based on the requirements outlined in the Airport Communications System (ACS) Design Manual.

D. Outlet configurations: Communications Voice and Data outlets shall be provisioned in various configurations and quantities as indicated in project Drawings and schedules.

1. Surface mount configuration: Communications outlets to be provisioned as surface mount configurations shall be furnished with outlet module quantities as defined in the project Drawings and schedules. Coordinate color selection with the COTR.

2. Flush wall mount configuration: Communication outlets to be provisioned as flush mount shall be furnished with outlet module types and quantities on a single gang face plate as defined in the project Drawings and schedules.

2.3 HORIZONTAL STATION CABLES – VOICE AND DATA - UNSHIELDED UTP COPPER

A. All horizontal cables provided for installation shall conform to the requirements of the National Electric code article 760 and labeled CMP-50 as limited combustion plenum cable.

B. All horizontal cables provided for installation shall be certified as Category 6A as defined by the requirements of EIA / TIA 568C2 Horizontal Cable Requirements and meet or exceed the following minimum electrical requirements.

1. ANSI / TIA Category: 6A 2. Cable Type 4Pr. UTP 3. Impedance: 100 Ohms at 100 Mhz (nominal) 4. Mutual Capacitance: 6.0 NF / 100m @1 kHz.

COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 27 15 00 - 4 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

5. Operating Voltage: 80 V 6. Operating Frequency (max): 550MHz 7. Velocity of Propagation: 66% (Nominal) 8. Conductor DC Resistance: 29 Ohms / 1K ft. (Max) 9. Category 6A Horizontal cable shall meet or exceed the following performance characteristics:

Freq. Atten. Return Atten. Atten. NEXT NEXT ELFEXT ELFEXT MHz dB Loss /NEXT /NEXT Pr.to Pr. PowerSum Pr.to Pr PowerSum dB Pr. to Pr. PowerSum

1 1.9 20.1 72.3 70.3 74.3 72.3 67.8 64.8 4 3.7 23.1 61.5 59.5 65.3 63.3 55.7 52.7 8 5.3 24.6 55.4 53.4 60.8 58.8 49.7 46.7 10 5.9 25.1 53.3 51.3 59.3 57.3 47.8 44.8 16 7.5 25.1 48.7 46.7 56.3 54.3 43.7 40.7 20 8.4 25.1 46.3 44.3 54.8 52.8 41.7 38.7 25 9.5 24.4 43.7 41.7 53.3 51.3 39.8 36.8 31.25 10.6 23.7 41.2 39.2 51.9 49.9 37.9 34.9 62.5 15.4 21.6 31.9 29.9 47.4 45.4 31.8 28.8 100 19.8 20.2 24.4 22.4 44.3 42.3 27.8 24.8 155 25.2 18.9 16.1 14.1 41.5 39.5 23.9 20.9 200 29.1 18.1 10.6 8.6 39.8 37.8 21.7 18.7 250 32.9 17.4 5.5 3.3 38.3 36.3 19.8 16.8 300 36.5 19.7 5.4 2.7 37.2 36.1 17.0 15.2 350 37.1 19.6 5.3 2.2 39.4 26.2 16.2 14.8 400 40.2 20.5 5.3 1.1 41.6 25.8 14.7 13.0 550 48 21.3 5.2 -1.0 42.8 22.9 11.9 9.7

C. Special Horizontal cable jacket color code requirements:

1. Horizontal cables utilized for voice service shall have a yellow outer jacket. Horizontal cables utilized for Data service shall have a blue outer jacket.

2. All horizontal cables shall be plenum rated and bare a CMP marking on the outer jacket.

D. Design Selection: CommScope Systimax X10D 2091x where x = color TBD by MWAA or approved equal.

2.4 HORIZONTAL STATION CABLES – VIDEO / DATA – SINGLE AND MULTI MODE FIBER

A. All horizontal cables provided for installation shall conform to the requirements of the National Electric code article 760 and labeled CMP-50 as limited combustion plenum cable.

B. Horizontal fiber optic cables will be extended between the Transportation Security Administration (TSA) Explosive Detection System (EDS) devices and their serving communications equipment room. Fiber optic cables provided for installation shall meet or exceed the following minimum technical requirements:

COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 27 15 00 - 5 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

1. Multi-Mode Fiber Optic Cable:

a. Type: Tight Buffer b. Core / Cladding Dia. 62.5 / 125 c. Microbend 100 turns @ 50mm: 0.05 max @ 850nm / 1300nm d. Attenuation: 3.5db/km @850nm 1.5db/km @1300nm e. Design Selection: CommScope Systimax P-006-DS-6F-FSUxx (Where XX = Color TBD by MWAA) or approved equal

2. Singlemode Fiber Optic:

a. Type: Tight Buffer b. Core / Cladding Dia. 9.6 / 125 c. Microbend 100 turns @ 75mm: 0.05 db max @ 1550nm d. Attenuation: 0.7db/km @1310nm 0.7db/km @15501300nm e. Design Selection: CommScope Systimax P-006-SW-8W-FSUxx (Where XX = Color TBD by MWAA) or approved equal

2.5 DATA COPPER TERMINATIONS

A. As specified in Division 27 Section “Communications Equipment Room Fittings.”

2.6 VOICE COPPER TERMINATIONS

A. As specified in Division 27 Section “Communications Equipment Room Fittings.”

2.7 COPPER PATCH CORDS

A. As specified in Division 27 Section “Communications Equipment Room Fittings.”

2.8 GROUNDING

A. As specified in Division 27 Section “Grounding and Bonding for Communications Systems.”

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. As specified in Division 27 Section “Basic Telecommunication Requirements” and Division 27 Section “Premise Wiring Distribution System.”

COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 27 15 00 - 6 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

B. Installations shall meet or exceed industry standards and installation practices listed herein.

C. Product installations failing to meet standards and practices shall be removed and replaced at no additional cost to The Authority.

D. The Contractor shall be responsible for any damage to any surfaces or work disrupted as a result of his work. Repair of surfaces including painting shall be included as necessary.

3.2 INSTALLATION PRACTICES

A. General:

1. Install all equipment in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations and in compliance with the latest issue of the TIA/EIA-568A Telecommunications Standards and BISCI’s Telecommunications Distributions Methods Manual (TDMM) guidelines. 2. The installation shall be in compliance with the requirements of the NEC, OSHA and the rules, regulations and requirements of the FCC. 3. The installation shall comply with federal, city, county and state laws, ordinances, regulations, and codes applicable to the installation. 4. Contractor shall supply all tools and test equipment necessary for successful completion of the Project. 5. If deviations from the Drawings are required, they shall require approval by the COTR prior to placement of the affected work. 6. The locations of raceways, stub ups, outlets, panels, equipment racks and cabinets and other related products as indicated on the Drawings are diagrammatic in location. Contractor should have precise and definite locations accepted by the COTR before proceeding with the installation. 7. Contractor shall field coordinate the exact mounted heights and locations of cable ladder within the Communications rooms prior to installation.

B. Cabling Installation Practices:

1. A portion of the PWDS wiring installed within the buildings will be installed above ceilings within existing cable tray in areas used for circulation of environmental air. Cables installed within these areas shall be rated for use in such plenum locations and shall bare the CMP marking. 2. Contractor shall pull cable in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations, industry- accepted practices and within the limits of cable bend radius and pulling tension specifications. 3. Use pulling lubricants compatible with the cable. Petroleum products shall not be used as cable pulling lubricant. 4. Contractor shall not install more cables in a conduit than shown unless approved in writing by the COTR. 5. Conduit systems shall not exceed 40% cable fill. The Contractor shall provide larger conduit or additional conduit should planned cable fill exceed 40%. 6. Contractor shall plan cable pulls so that the maximum number of cables required in the conduit is pulled simultaneously.

COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 27 15 00 - 7 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

7. Avoid routing horizontal telecommunications cables near sources of EMI. Maintain a minimum clearance of 4 feet from power transformers and motors and 12 inches from fluorescent lighting and power distribution cables. Advise the COTR of any field conditions where EMI issues may arise prior to proceeding with that portion of the work. 8. All horizontal telecommunications cables shall not exceed 295 feet in length from the station outlets to the horizontal cross-connects within the Communications rooms. 9. Horizontal cables shall not be spliced but must be continuous from the station outlets to the horizontal cross-connects within Communications rooms. 10. Terminate all horizontal telecommunications cables according to the TIA/EIA T568A wiring scheme. 11. The Category 6 connecting hardware used shall be installed to provide minimal signal impairment by preserving wire pair twists as closely as possible to the point of mechanical termination. The amount of untwisting in a pair as a result of termination to connecting hardware shall be no greater than 0.5 inches. 12. Terminate horizontal voice copper cables onto wall-mounted 110-wiring blocks and horizontal data copper cables onto rack-mounted RJ45 patch panels within the Communications rooms.

C. Grounding: Contractor shall install grounding as specified in Division 27 Section “Grounding and Bonding for Communications Systems.”

D. Fire And Smoke Partition Penetrations:

1. Conduit sleeves have been provided as a means of routing cables between various equipment rooms and into the cable tray in the ceiling space. Openings in sleeves and conduits used for the PWDS system cables shall be sealed with an approved fireproof, removable material. 2. Additional penetrations through rated assemblies necessary for passage of PWDS wiring shall be made using an approved method and permanently sealed after installation of cables.

3.3 LABELING

A. Provide labeling as specified in Division 27 Section “Premise Wiring Distribution System.”

3.4 TESTING

A. Provide testing and submit test reports as specified in Division 27 Section “Premise Wiring Distribution System.”

B. Test 100 percent of all telecommunications cables installed and submit test reports for all tests.

COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 27 15 00 - 8 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

PART 4 - CONTRACTOR’S QUALITY CONTROL REQUIREMENTS

4.1 GENERAL

A. Comply with applicable provisions of Division 01 Section “Quality Requirements” for requirements for Contractor Quality Control Program.

END OF SECTION 27 15 00

COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 27 15 00 - 9 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

SECTION 28 13 00 – ACCESS CONTROL AND ALARM MONITORING SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. The work defined in this section and related drawings consist of the extension of the existing Software House CCURE Access Control and Alarm Monitoring System (ACAM). The ACAM System shall consist of, but not be limited to, intelligent controllers, card readers with PIN pads, power supplies, and audio/visual devices.

B. The Contractor shall provide all required equipment, raceways, cabinets, cabling, field terminations, and test and checkout for all work specified herein and detailed on the Contract Drawings.

C. The Contractor’s scope of work (SOW) shall consist of the provision of all required material and labor required for physically complete and functional extension of the existing system. Work shall be limited to all required field work for the installation of the security portals as detailed on the Contract Drawings and as specified herein. This includes, but is not limited to, the installation of the security devices at the portals, intelligent controllers and power supplies.

D. Installation of the Ethernet switches and Category 6A cabling and jumpers shall be provided by the Division 27 Contractor.

E. Terminations of the field devices at the intelligent access controllers, final connection to the existing headend and all system programming shall be performed by The Authority’s Security Maintenance Contractor.

F. Upon completion of the installation of all equipment and devices, field testing and system programming by The Authority’s Security Maintenance Contractor the Contractor shall jointly test all portals with The Authority and its Security Maintenance Contractor to verify proper system operation.

G. The work described in this section includes engineering, design, labor, materials, equipment, installation, programming, and services necessary for a physically complete and functional system. Materials, equipment, appurtenances, or labor not specifically mentioned in this specification, or not shown on the Contract Drawings, but required for proper installation, performance, and operation of the equipment or systems, shall be furnished and installed by the Contractor.

H. Related Sections:

1. Division 01 – All Applicable Sections. 2. Division 08 Section “Door Hardware.” 3. Applicable Division 26 Sections. 4. All Division 27 Sections. 5. All Division 28 Sections.

ACCESS CONTROL AND ALARM MONITORING SYSTEM 28 13 00 - 1 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. Comply with NFPA 70 “National Electrical Code.”

B. UL Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of UL standard 294, 609 and 1410 as they pertain to Local Burglar Alarm Units and systems products. Provide ACAM System with components which are UL listed and labeled.

C. EIA/TIA Compliance: Products and installation shall comply with Electronic and Telecommunications Industries Association’s standards for networking and component interfaces as defined in EIA/TIA 568B, 569, 606A and 607.

D. FCC Compliance: Comply with subpart J of part 15, FCC rules pertaining to computing devices including class A, class B personal and peripheral types. Provide equipment which complies with technical standards for both radiated and power line conducted interferences.

1.3 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Unless otherwise noted the ACAM System and equipment specified in this section is an extension of the existing proprietary legacy system and as such no substitutions are allowed.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Standards of workmanship shall meet or exceed accepted telecommunications systems industry installation practices.

B. Refer to specifications Division 27 Section “Basic Telecommunication Requirements” for additional requirements.

C. Contractor Qualifications: System shall be engineered by a qualified Engineer (in-house) having at least five (5) years experience in the design of systems of similar size and complexity. System installation shall be supervised by a Software House factory trained and certified Project Engineer (field) having at least five (5) years experience installing and maintaining systems of similar size and complexity. The qualified individuals shall have engineered and installed at least two (2) systems of similar size and complexity within the past five (5) years. Submit evidence of required experience. Submit evidence of successful installation, owner training and maintenance for a minimum of the previous five years. Submit listing of projects with verifiable references with names and telephone numbers.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Comply with the requirements of Division 01 Section - Submittals.

B. Additional submittal procedures are identified in Division 27 Section - Basic Telecommunication Requirements and in the technical specification.

C. Product Data Submittals:

ACCESS CONTROL AND ALARM MONITORING SYSTEM 28 13 00 - 2 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

1. Submit catalog cut sheets, technical data sheets, manufacturer specifications and/or diagrams necessary to illustrate a product, material or system for provision of the work. Product data literature is required on all items of material and equipment and should be clearly marked; identifying specific items proposed with a reference to the specification requirement the item is being submitted for. 2. Product data shall include adequate descriptive literature and catalog cut sheets required for the Engineer to ascertain that the proposed equipment and materials comply with the Contract requirements.

D. System Shop Drawings:

1. The shop drawings shall be approved by the Contract Officer’s Technical Representative (COTR) prior to system installation. 2. Floor plans detailing all devices, conduit and raceway systems. 3. Equipment room layouts to scale including equipment cabinet and wall elevations. 4. System One-Line and Block Diagrams. Including connections to the existing fiber optic backbone system detailing all cross connects installed as part of the installation of this system back to the ACAM System headend. 5. Door Rough-in Details. 6. Point-to-Point Wiring Diagrams. 7. Prepare using the latest release of AutoCAD and deliver files to the COTR.

E. Manuals

1. Provide complete sets of manuals and other information necessary for the operation and maintenance of the equipment installed by the Contractor in accordance with this specification and Division 01 requirements. 2. Manuals: Manuals shall include names, addresses, and telephone numbers of each subcontractor installing equipment and systems, and nearest service representatives for each item of equipment for each system.

a. The manuals shall have a table of contents and tab sheets. b. Tab sheets shall be placed at the beginning of each chapter or section and at the beginning of each appendix. c. The final copies delivered after completion of testing shall include all modifications made during installation, checkout, and testing.

F. Record Shop Drawings: Provide a copy of corrected, approved shop drawings for the project, updated to show as-built conditions. Include the manufacturers' brochures in the as-built documentation. Drawings shall indicate exact device locations, panel terminations, cable routes and wire numbers as tagged and color-coded on the cable tag. Final point-to-point wiring diagrams of each type of device shall be included in the as-builts. Prepare as-builts using the latest release of AutoCAD and deliver files to the COTR:

G. Warranty information: All materials relating to warranties.

H. Manufacturer’s training certifications of installation personnel.

ACCESS CONTROL AND ALARM MONITORING SYSTEM 28 13 00 - 3 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

1.6 COORDINATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordination with Other Trades: The Contractor shall provide system technical requirements, shop drawings and schedule coordination as required with the Trades performing work required for the following Sections:

1. Division 08 Section “Door Hardware.”

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Warranties shall be executed in the perpetuity of The Authority.

B. Hardware Warranties shall extend for a minimum of One year following Project Acceptance by The Authority.

1.8 SPARE PARTS

A. Unless stated otherwise provide the following quantity of extra materials:

1. Card Reader with PIN - 1 2. Audio/Visual Device - 1 3. Power Supply - 1

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INTELLIGENT ACCESS CONTROL AND ALARM MONITORING PANEL

A. Acceptable Manufacturer/Model: The access control panel shall be Software House iStar Pro Enterprise Control Panel with 64 Mbytes of memory, no substitutions.

B. Include all General Control Modules (GCM), Access Control Modules (ACM), input modules (I8), output modules (R8) and power supplies as specified herein and as detailed on Sheet SS04.002. Install per The Authority’s standard arrangement of control panel and power supplies as detailed on Sheet SS0#.###. Any deviations from this standard must be approved in advance by the COTR. Refer to the Contract Drawings for the standard arrangement for the installation of the control panels and power supplies.

C. Panel and Card Reader Power Supplies: Each panel shall be provisioned with two AL600ULACM power supplies as specified below.

D. The panel communications shall be Ethernet (10/100 Base-T) and shall be fully functional during system and credential downloads.

E. Enclosure: The panel enclosure shall be a UL rated NEMA 1 style metal cabinet designed for surface mounting. It shall have a tampered, hinged door with a high security key lock keyed

ACCESS CONTROL AND ALARM MONITORING SYSTEM 28 13 00 - 4 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

identical to that of the existing panels. It shall have conduit knockouts to allow 1/2” to 1” EMT conduit to be used for cabling entry into the cabinet.

2.2 CARD READER/PINPAD

A. Software House Model RM2-MP, no substitutions.

2.3 AUDIO/VISUAL DEVICE

A. AMSECO Model CSH24W-BW (interior) and CSHB24-BG (exterior), no substitutions.

2.4 POWER SUPPLY – WALL MOUNT

A. Each control panel location shall be provisioned with AL600ULACM Power Supplies, no substitutions, for provision of power to ACAM access control panel, System field devices including audio/visual, electric locks and other input and output devices.

1. Power supplies shall be provided with two 7Amp Hour 12VDC Batteries. 2. Failure of the battery set, charging system, or transitional switching equipment shall be recorded as an "Abnormal" condition on the ACAM. 3. Power supplies shall be equipped with tamper switches mounted in the enclosure. Activation shall occur within 1/4" abnormal movement, and recorded as an "Alarm" on the ACAM System.

B. Power supplies shall be installed per The Authority’s standard arrangement of control panel and power supplies. Any deviations from this standard must be approved in advance by the COTR. Refer to the Contract Drawings for the standard arrangement for the installation of the control panels and power supplies.

2.5 CABLE, WIRE, LABELS AND CONNECTORS

A. General: Provide all wire and cable types in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. Wire and cable components shall be rated for the environment the wire or cable is to be installed in for a minimum of 20 years. ALL cabling installed for installation of the ACAM System shall be Plenum rated and ANSI-C2 CL2P certified.

B. Cable type and conductor size shall be as follows:

1. Card Reader – 18 AWG, 4 conductor (red, black, green and white), Belden 6302FE or as acceptable by The Authority.

2. Electric Lock Power– 18 AWG, 2 conductor (red and black), Belden 6300FE or as acceptable by The Authority.

3. Door Position Switch – 18 AWG, 2 conductor (red and black), Belden 6300FE or as acceptable by The Authority.

ACCESS CONTROL AND ALARM MONITORING SYSTEM 28 13 00 - 5 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

4. Audio/Visual Device – 18 AWG, 2 conductor (red and black), Belden 6300FE or as acceptable by The Authority. Wiring of the audio and visual power shall be separate requiring installation of two cables.

5. Electric Lock RX – 18 AWG, 2 conductor (red and black), Belden 6300FE or as acceptable by The Authority.

C. Acceptable Manufacturers: Belden, West Penn, and Alpha.

1. Cables: Belden, West Penn, and Alpha.

2. Labels: Brady PermaSleeve, or approved equal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. All materials and equipment shall be installed in accordance with all applicable standards of the National Electrical Code, codes of governing local authorities, and all safety codes and ordinances.

3.2 GENERAL INSTALLATION

A. Where undefined by codes and standards, Contractor shall apply a safety factor of at least 2 times the rated load to all fastenings and supports.

B. The Contractor shall install all system components including furnished equipment, and appurtenances in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions, NFPA 70, IEEE-C2, State and local codes and as shown. Provide all cables, connectors, terminators, interconnections, services, and adjustments required for a physically complete and fully functional system.

C. Contractor shall check with the COTR to verify areas that are permit-required confined spaces as defined in OSHA 29 CFR 1910.

1. Contractor shall comply with requirements of OSHA 29 CFR 1910 when working in permit-required confined spaces.

3.3 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS

A. General: The Contractor shall correlate final equipment locations with governing architectural and engineering drawings and lay out all work before installation so that all trades may install equipment in spaces available. Coordinate device placement with the COTR. The Contractor shall provide coordination as required for the installation of the system in a neat and workmanlike manner. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate the various elements of electrical systems, materials, and equipment. Comply with the following requirements:

ACCESS CONTROL AND ALARM MONITORING SYSTEM 28 13 00 - 6 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

1. Coordinate electrical systems, equipment, and materials installation with other building components and trades. 2. Verify all dimensions by field measurements. 3. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be set in poured- in-place concrete and other structural components, as they are constructed. 4. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of materials and equipment for efficient flow of the work. 5. Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install systems, materials, and equipment to provide the maximum headroom possible. 6. Coordinate connection of electrical systems with exterior underground and overhead utilities and services. Pay particular attention to requirements for access and service of the equipment in choosing final equipment locations. Comply with requirements of governing regulations, franchised service companies, and controlling agencies. Provide required connection for each service. 7. Install systems, materials, and equipment to conform with approved submittal data, including coordination drawings, to the greatest extent possible. Conform to arrangements indicated by the Contract Documents, recognizing that portions of the work are shown only in diagrammatic form. Where coordination requirements conflict with individual system requirements, refer conflict to the COTR. 8. Install systems, materials, and equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components, where installed exposed in finished spaces. 9. Install electrical equipment to facilitate servicing, maintenance, and repair or replacement of equipment components. As much as practical, connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum of interference with other installations. 10. Install access panel or doors where units are concealed behind finished surfaces. 11. Install systems, materials, and equipment giving right-of-way priority to systems required to be installed at a specified slope.

B. All wiring, including low voltage wiring outside boxes and enclosures, which is not installed in a raceway or duct bank, shall be installed in electric metallic tubing (EMT) conforming to UL 797. Minimum size shall be 3/4-inch unless otherwise shown or approved by the COTR. All electrical work shall be as specified in Division 26 Electrical Sections, and as shown. Grounding shall be installed as necessary to preclude ground loops, noise, and surges from adversely affecting system operation.

C. Maintain consistent color-coding for all wiring/cabling in accordance with the approved shop drawings and as specified herein.

D. Power line surge protection: All equipment connected to alternating current circuits shall be protected from power line surges.

E. Device wiring and communication circuit surge protection: Copper wire inputs and outputs shall be protected against surges induced on communication and device wiring.

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. All connections of stranded wire to screw terminals shall be by insulated spade lugs, crimp fastened to wire or as specified otherwise.

ACCESS CONTROL AND ALARM MONITORING SYSTEM 28 13 00 - 7 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

B. No splicing of cables is permitted for installation of the system.

C. All non-terminal block connections shall be made with mechanical connectors with insulation equal to conductor insulation and as approved by the COTR.

D. All conductors and cabinets shall be labeled. Coordinate labeling scheme with the COTR and submit for approval.

E. Wire shall be guided within terminal cabinets by cable supports. All conductors shall be neatly led to terminations.

3.5 MOUNTING SCREWS

A. Mounting screws for all junction boxes, including pull boxes, and mounting of all devices are to be of the pinned torx stainless steel type. Size and thread type as required by manufacturer and back box type. Provide 5 pinned torx screwdrivers to The Authority.

3.6 TESTING

A. Provide test plan and procedures documentation for system in accordance with Division 26 and as specified herein.

B. Provide system test plans and procedures including test plan narrative, step-by-step procedure instructions, list of test equipment to be used, and expected results.

C. Provide all personnel, equipment, instrumentation, and supplies necessary to perform all testing.

D. Upon completion of the installation and testing of all field devices and equipment back to the ACAM System headend and completion of programming by The Authority’s Security Maintenance Contractor the Contractor shall jointly test and document the system expansion with The Authority’s Maintenance Contractor. All devices, equipment and system programming shall be tested 100 percent. This is to include all ACAM System alarm and trouble conditions including but not limited to:

1. Door Held Open 2. Door Forced Open 3. Duress 4. Tamper (All) 5. Low Battery 6. AC Power Loss 7. Invalid Card 8. Stolen Card 9. Lost Card 10. System Trouble Conditions

E. Field-mounted devices shall be tested via actual activation of the devices under normal operating conditions rather than simulated activations.

ACCESS CONTROL AND ALARM MONITORING SYSTEM 28 13 00 - 8 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

F. Where system testing will cause outages or impacts, schedule testing activities so as to impose the least inconvenience on system users, Airport tenants, and other Airport agencies. This may require that the Contractor schedule testing during off shift hours in order to avoid conflicts with airport operations.

G. Upon completion of the testing the Contractor shall submit a Test Report within 14 days to The Authority. The Test Report shall document the following:

1. That the system extension meets all requirements of the Contract Documents. 2. That system equipment meets all requirements of the Contract Documents. 3. That all system functions and operations meet all requirements of the Contract Documents.

H. Repair or replace malfunctioning units. Retest as specified above after repairs or replacements are made.

3.7 CLEANING

A. After completing system installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris. Repair damaged finish to match original finish.

3.8 WIRE AND CABLE

A. After installation and before termination all wiring and cabling shall be checked and tested to insure there are no grounds, opens or shorts on any conductors or shields.

B. Visually inspect wire for faulty insulation prior to installation. Protect cable ends at all times with acceptable end caps except during termination.

C. All wire and cabling shall be labeled at each end and within intermediate junction boxes. All labeling shall be identified on the Contractor’s as-built drawings. Submit labeling scheme for approval by the COTR prior to installation.

PART 4 - CONTRACTOR’S QUALITY CONTROL REQUIREMENTS

4.1 GENERAL

A. Comply with applicable provisions of Division 01 Section - Quality Requirements for requirements for Contractor Quality Control Program.

END OF SECTION 28 13 00

ACCESS CONTROL AND ALARM MONITORING SYSTEM 28 13 00 - 9 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

SECTION 28 23 00 - VIDEO SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Contractor shall provide all work for a physically complete and functional extension of the Airport’s existing video surveillance system as specified herein and detailed on the Contract Drawings. Work shall be limited to the installation of cameras, varifocal lenses, enclosures, power supplies, fiber optic and Cat 6A jumpers, cabling and accessories between the new camera location, existing equipment rooms and the Main Operations Equipment Room.

B. Installation of equipment within the Main Operations Equipment Room to expand the NICE Vision Pro IPTV headend, programming and connections from the existing fiber optic patch panels to the Security Network Core Switch shall be by The Authority’s Security Maintenance Contractor. All programming and software licenses for the incorporation of the additional cameras into the Airport’s Aegis KapLogic and Integraph Computer-Aided Dispatch systems shall be by the Authority.

C. Work of this section includes wires/cables, raceways, electrical boxes and fittings, as specified in Division 27 Sections in conjunction with the video surveillance system.

D. Comply with codes, ordinances, regulations, and other legal requirements of public authorities that bear on installation and performance of Work.

E. The work described in this section includes engineering, design, labor, materials, equipment, installation, and services necessary for physically complete and functional system expansion. Materials, equipment, appurtenances, or labor not specifically mentioned in this Specification, or not shown on the Contract Drawings, but required for proper installation, performance, and operation of the equipment or systems, shall be furnished and installed by the Contractor.

F. The work shown in the Contract Drawings is diagrammatic in nature and the Contractor is responsible for determining the final equipment locations, arrangements, and installation to meet site-specific requirements.

G. Related Sections:

1. Applicable Division 01 Sections. 2. Applicable Division 26 Sections. 3. Applicable Division 27 Sections. 4. Division 28 Section “Access Control and Alarm Monitoring System.”

VIDEO SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM 28 23 00 - 1

WARNING: This record contains Sensitive Security Information that is controlled under 49 CFR parts 15 and 1520. No part of this record may be disclosed to persons without a “need to know”, as defined in 49 CFR parts 15 and 1520, except with the written permission of the Administrator of the Transportation Security Administration or the Secretary of Transportation. Unauthorized release may result in civil penalty or other action. For U.S. government agencies, public disclosure is governed by 5 U.S.C. 552 and 49 CFR parts 15 and 1520. DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

1.2 REFERENCES STANDARDS

A. General: The latest version of the following codes and standards shall be applicable.

B. Code of Federal Regulations (CFR):

1. 47 CFR 15 et seq.: Radio Frequency Devices. 2. 47 CFR 76: Multichannel Video and Cable Television Service.

C. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE):

1. IEEE C2: National Electrical Safety Code. 2. IEEE 142: IEEE Recommended Practice for Grounding of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems. 3. IEEE C62.41 (Latest Edition): Recommended Practice on Surge Voltages in Low- Voltage AC Power Circuits.

D. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):

1. NFPA 70: National Electrical Code (NEC).

E. Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronics Industry Association (TIA/EIA):

1. EIA-170: Electrical Performance Standards - Monochrome Television Studio Facilities. 2. EIA-310-D: Cabinets, Racks, Panels, and Associated Equipment. 3. TIA/EIA-232-E: Interface Between Data Terminal Equipment and Data Circuit- Terminating Equipment Employing Serial Binary Data Interchange. 4. TIA/EIA-250-C: Electrical Performance for Television Transmission Systems. 5. TIA/EIA-568-B: Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard.

F. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL):

1. UL 294: Standard for Safety for Access Control System Units. 2. UL 2044: Commercial Closed-Circuit Television Equipment. 3. Provide video surveillance system components which are UL listed and labeled.

1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Existing system: Provide additional cameras for the extension of the existing video surveillance system. The video surveillance system shall include:

1. Megapixel IP camera – Mini Dome. 2. Megapixel IP camera – Wall Mount. 3. Varifocal lens. 4. Camera housing.

VIDEO SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM 28 23 00 - 2

5. Camera mounts. 6. Cable, wire, and connectors.

1.4 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Unless otherwise noted the video surveillance system and equipment specified in this Section are an extension of the existing proprietary legacy system and as such no substitutions are allowed.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Comply with the requirements of Division 01 Section “Submittals.”

B. Additional submittal procedures are identified in Division 27 Section “Basic Telecommunication Requirements” and in the individual technical specification sections.

C. Product Data Submittals:

1. Submit catalog cut sheets, technical data sheets, manufacturer specifications and/or diagrams necessary to illustrate a product, material or system for some portion of the work. Product data literature is required on all items of material and equipment and should be clearly marked; identifying specific items proposed with a reference to the specification requirement the item is being submitted for. 2. Product data shall include adequate descriptive literature and catalog cut sheets required for the Engineer to ascertain that the proposed equipment and materials comply with specification requirements.

D. Shop Drawings:

1. System Block Diagrams. 2. System Riser Diagrams. 3. Point-to-Point wiring diagrams. 4. Floor plans detailing device locations. 5. Equipment room layouts to scale. 6. Installation of video surveillance system equipment in cabinets and racks, including wiring diagrams. 7. Installation of video surveillance system equipment located in the equipment rooms, including wiring diagrams. 8. Interconnection with Ethernet Switch including block diagrams and wiring diagrams. 9. Details of interconnection to fiber optic backbone system. 10. Prepare using the latest release of AutoCAD and deliver files to the COTR.

VIDEO SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM 28 23 00 - 3

E. Manuals:

1. Provide complete sets of manuals and other information necessary for the operation and maintenance of the equipment installed by the Contractor in accordance with Division 01 requirements. 2. Manuals: Manuals shall include names, addresses, and telephone numbers of each subcontractor installing equipment and systems, and nearest service representatives for each item of equipment for each system.

a. The manuals shall have a table of contents and tab sheets. b. Tab sheets shall be placed at the beginning of each chapter or section and at the beginning of each appendix. c. The final copies delivered after completion testing shall include all modifications made during installation, checkout, and testing.

G. Warranty information: All materials relating to warranties.

H. Manufacturer’s training certifications of service personnel.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Standards of workmanship shall meet or exceed accepted telecommunications systems industry installation practices.

B. Refer to Division 27 Section “Basic Telecommunication Requirements” and Division 01 Section “Quality Requirements” for quality assurance requirements.

C. System hardware and software components shall be produced by a manufacturer regularly engaged in the production of video surveillance system equipment for at least 5 years.

D. System Installer Qualifications: All Work shall be performed by qualified individuals having at least five (5) years experience installing and maintaining video surveillance systems. The qualified individuals shall have completed installation of at least two (2) systems of similar size and complexity within the past five (5) years. Submit evidence of successful installation, owner training and maintenance for a minimum of the previous five years. Provide listing of projects with verifiable references with names and telephone numbers.

VIDEO SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM 28 23 00 - 4

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Warranty shall commence in accordance with the final completion date and shall not be a function of material delivery dates.

B. Warranties shall be executed in the perpetuity of The Authority.

C. Warrant all components, parts and assemblies provided under this Contract against defects in materials and workmanship for a period of 12 months from final completion.

D. Warranty service shall be provided by a trained specialist of the equipment manufacturer and the warranty response time shall not exceed four (4) hours.

E. If items supplied as part of this project have longer warranties, Contractor shall supply longer warranty.

1.8 SPARE PARTS

A. Unless stated otherwise provide the following quantity of extra materials:

1. Fixed IP Camera – 1 of each type used in the Project. 2. Camera Housings – 1 of each type used in the Project. 3. Varifocal Lens – 1 of each type used in the Project.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS

A. The system shall include all equipment, cables, adapters, terminators, and appurtenances necessary for a complete and fully functional system expansion.

B. Special hardware, software, tools, test equipment, programming or initialization equipment needed to modify or maintain any part of the video surveillance system shall be provided.

2.2 MEGAPIXEL IP FIXED CAMERA – WALL MOUNT

A. Basis of Design: Axis Model P3346, or as acceptable to The Authority.

B. Cameras shall be provided complete with all back boxes, mounting adapters, and hardware required to install camera in location shown on the Contract Drawings.

VIDEO SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM 28 23 00 - 5

C. Camera shall meet the following specifications:

1. Lens (Provide varifocal lens with range as required for optimum fov):

a. 3.5 – 10 mm, F1.6, P-Iris b. Remote Focus c. Automatic day/night functionality

2. Minimum Illumination:

a. Color Mode: 0.5 lux b. B/W: 0.08 lux

3. Shutter Time:

a. 1/25500 s to 1/6 s

4. Image sensor:

a. 1/4-inch Progressive Scan RGB CMOS

5. Video Compression:

a. H.264 Baseline Profile (MPEG-4 Part 10/AVC) b. Motion JPEG

6. Resolution:

a. 2560x1920 (5 MP) to 160x90 b. HDTV 1080p

7. Maximum Frame Rate:

a. H.264: 12 fps b. MJPEG: 12 fps

8. Video Stream:

a. Simultaneous H.264 (MPEG-4 Part 10/AVC) and MJPEG

D. Pan/Tilt/Zoom: Digital PTZ with Presets

E. Image Settings:

1. Wide Dynamic Range

VIDEO SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM 28 23 00 - 6

2. Electronic Image Stabilization 3. Privacy mask 4. Compression 5. Text and image overlay 6. Auto-iris drive

F. Housing: T92A20

G. Mount: VT Wall Bracket WBOVA1 T92E Part No. 0217-031

H. Contractor shall consult with the Airport on color of pendants and exposed hardware and submit samples to the Airport for approval.

2.3 MEGAPIXEL IP FIXED CAMERA – DOME

A. Basis of Design: Axis Model P3346V/VE, or as acceptable to The Authority.

B. Cameras shall be provided complete with all back boxes, mounting adapters, and hardware required to install camera in location shown on the Contract Drawings.

C. Integrated dome camera shall be suitable for in-ceiling mount, pendant mount, or wall mount as required for the camera location and meet the following specifications:

1. Lens (Provide varifocal lens with range as required for optimum fov):

a. 3 - 9 mm, F1.2, P-Iris b. Remote Focus c. Automatic day/night functionality

2. Minimum Illumination:

a. Color Mode: 0.5 lux b. B/W: 0.08 lux

3. Shutter Time:

a. 1/25500 s to 1/6 s

4. Image sensor:

a. 1/4-inch Progressive Scan RGB CMOS

5. Video Compression:

a. H.264 Baseline Profile (MPEG-4 Part 10/AVC)

VIDEO SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM 28 23 00 - 7

b. Motion JPEG

6. Resolution:

a. 1280x800 (3 MP) to 160x90 b. HDTV 1080p

7. Maximum Frame Rate:

a. H.264: 12 fps b. MJPEG: 12 fps

8. Video Stream:

a. Simultaneous H.264 (MPEG-4 Part 10/AVC) and MJPEG

D. Pan/Tilt/Zoom: Digital PTZ with Presets

E. Image Settings:

1. Wide Dynamic Range 2. Electronic Image Stabilization 3. Privacy mask 4. Compression 5. Text and image overlay 6. Auto-iris drive

2.4 CABLE, WIRE AND CONNECTORS

B. Cable/Wiring:

1. Category 6A – Provided by Division 27 Contractor.

VIDEO SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM 28 23 00 - 8

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Install all system components and appurtenances in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, applicable codes and standards and as shown, and provide all necessary interconnections, services, and adjustments required for complete and operable systems as specified and detailed on the Contract Documents. Control signals, communications, and data transmission line grounding shall be installed as necessary to preclude ground loops, noise, and surges from adversely affecting system operation.

3.2 GENERAL INSTALLATION

A. Where undefined by codes and standards, Contractor shall apply a safety factor of at least 2 times the rated load to all fastenings and supports.

B. The Contractor shall install all system components including furnished equipment, and appurtenances in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions, NFPA 70, IEEE-C2, and State and local codes and as shown, and shall furnish all cables, connectors, terminators, interconnections, services, and adjustments required for a complete and fully functional system.

C. Contractor shall check with the COTR to verify areas that are permit-required confined spaces as defined in OSHA 29 CFR 1910.

1. Contractor shall comply with requirements of OSHA 29 CFR 1910 when working in permit-required confined spaces.

3.3 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS

A. General: The Contractor shall correlate final equipment locations with governing Architectural and engineering drawings and lay out all work before installation so that all trades may install equipment in spaces available. Coordinate device placement with the COTR. The Contractor shall provide coordination as required for the installation of the system in a neat and workmanlike manner. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate the various elements of electrical systems, materials, and equipment. Comply with the following requirements:

VIDEO SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM 28 23 00 - 9

5. Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install systems, materials, and equipment to provide the maximum headroom possible. 6. Coordinate connection of electrical systems with exterior underground and overhead utilities and services. Pay particular attention to requirements for access and service of the equipment in choosing final equipment locations. Comply with requirements of governing regulations, franchised service companies, and controlling agencies. Provide required connection for each service. 7. Install systems, materials, and equipment to conform with approved submittal data, including coordination drawings, to greatest extent possible. Conform to arrangements indicated by the Contract Documents, recognizing that portions of the work are shown only in diagrammatic form. Where coordination requirements conflict with individual system requirements, refer conflict to the COTR. 8. Install systems, materials, and equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components, where installed exposed in finished spaces. 9. Install electrical equipment to facilitate servicing, maintenance, and repair or replacement of equipment components. As much as practical, connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum of interference with other installations. 10. Install access panel or doors where units are concealed behind finished surfaces. 11. Install systems, materials, and equipment giving right-of-way priority to systems required to be installed at a specified slope.

B. All wiring, including low voltage wiring outside boxes and enclosures, which is not installed in a raceway or duct bank, shall be installed in electric metallic tubing (EMT) conforming to UL 797. Minimum size shall be 3/4-inch unless otherwise shown. All electrical work shall be as specified in Division 26 Electrical Sections, and as shown. Grounding shall be installed as necessary to preclude ground loops, noise, and surges from adversely affecting system operation.

C. Maintain consistent color-coding for all wiring/cabling in accordance with the approved shop drawings.

D. Power line surge protection: All equipment connected to alternating current circuits shall be protected from power line surges.

E. Device wiring and communication circuit surge protection: Copper wire inputs and outputs shall be protected against surges induced on communication and device wiring.

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. All connections of stranded wire to screw terminals shall be by insulated spade lugs, crimp fastened to wire or as specified otherwise.

B. No splicing of cables is permitted for installation of the system.

VIDEO SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM 28 23 00 - 10

C. All non-terminal block connections shall be made with mechanical connectors with insulation equal to conductor insulation and as approved by the COTR.

D. All conductors and cabinets shall be labeled.

E. Wire shall be guided within terminal cabinets by cable supports. All conductors shall be neatly led to terminations.

3.5 MOUNTING SCREWS

3.6 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. The Contractor shall supply all equipment supports, hangers, anchors, bases, sleeves and the sealing of work to adjacent construction.

B. Submit all data in accordance with Part 1 of this specification.

C. Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.

D. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.

E. Install hangers to provide minimum ½-inch space between finished covering and adjacent work.

F. Place hangers within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow.

G. Use hangers with 1½-inch minimum vertical adjustment.

H. Support vertical piping at floor penetration.

I. Where several conduits can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple or trapeze hangers.

J. Design hangers for movement without disengagement of supported conduit.

K. Conduits shall not be hung or supported from each other.

L. Where support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding.

M. Provide hangers adjacent to motor driven equipment with vibration isolation.

VIDEO SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM 28 23 00 - 11

N. Use a separate hanger for each branch.

O. Support vertical risers at the floor with extension conduit clamps approved by the COTR.

3.7 TESTING

A. Provide test plan and procedures documentation for system in accordance with Division 26 and as specified herein.

B. Provide system test plans and procedures including test plan narrative, step-by-step procedure instructions, list of test equipment used, and expected results.

C. Provide all personnel, equipment, instrumentation, and supplies necessary to perform all testing.

D. Upon completion of the installation and testing of all field devices and equipment back to the CCTV headed and completion of programming by The Authority the Contractor shall jointly test and document the system extension with The Authority’s maintenance contractor. All devices, equipment and system programming shall be tested 100 percent. This is to include:

1. Verification that the video and power cabling has been installed, tested, and approved. 2. Verification that all video sources and video outputs provide a full bandwidth signal that complies with EIA-170 and EIA-170-A at all video inputs.

E. Field-mounted devices shall be tested via actual activation of the devices under normal operating conditions rather than simulated activations.

F. Where system testing will cause outages or impacts, schedule testing activities so as to impose the least inconvenience on system users, Airport tenants, and other Airport agencies. This may require that the Contractor schedule testing off shift in order to avoid conflicts with airport operations.

G. Upon completion of the testing the Contractor shall submit a Test Report within 14 days to The Authority. The Test Report shall document the following:

H. Repair or replace malfunctioning units. Retest as specified above after repairs or replacements are made.

VIDEO SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM 28 23 00 - 12

PART 4 - CONTRACTOR’S QUALITY CONTROL REQUIREMENTS

4.1 GENERAL

A. Comply with applicable provisions of Division 01 Section “Quality Requirements” for requirements for Contractor Quality Control Program.

END OF SECTION 28 23 00

VIDEO SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM 28 23 00 - 13

WARNING: This record contains Sensitive Security Information that is controlled under 49 CFR parts 15 and 1520. No part of this record may be disclosed to persons without a “need to know”, as defined in 49 CFR parts 15 and 1520, except with the written permission of the Administrator of the Transportation Security Administration or the Secretary of Transportation. Unauthorized release may result in civil penalty or other action. For U.S. government agencies, public disclosure is governed by 5 U.S.C. 552 and 49 CFR parts 15 and 1520. THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

SECTION 28 31 11 - DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Fire-alarm control unit. 2. Addressable manual fire-alarm stations. 3. Analog/addressable smoke detectors. 4. Analog/addressable combination smoke/heat detectors. 5. Analog/addressable duct smoke detectors. 6. Audible and visual notification appliances. 7. Addressable monitor and control modules. 8. Magnetic door holders. 9. Remote annunciator. 10. Duct smoke detectors. 11. Automatic sprinkler system water flow.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. LED: Light-emitting diode.

B. NICET: National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies.

C. NFPA: National Fire protection Association

D. AHJ: Authority Having Jurisdiction

1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Noncoded, Siemens Cerberus’ analog/addressable system, with multiplexed signal transmission, dedicated to fire-alarm service only.

B. Siemens type MXL, Class B system fully compatible with the existing fire alarm control panel equipment and devices currently installed in other areas of the project.

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Seismic Performance: Fire-alarm control unit and raceways shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to SEI/ASCE 7.

DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM 28 31 11 - 1 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. General Submittal Requirements:

1. Fire Alarm system installation shop drawings shall be coordinated with and submitted to the Fire Marshall prior to systems installation. 2. Submittals shall be approved by authorities having jurisdiction prior to submitting them to COTR. 3. Shop Drawings shall be prepared by persons with the following qualifications:

a. Trained and certified by manufacturer in fire-alarm system design. b. NICET-certified fire-alarm technician, Level IV minimum. c. Licensed or certified by authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

C. Shop Drawings: For fire-alarm system. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Comply with recommendations in the "Documentation" Section of the "Fundamentals of Fire Alarm Systems" Chapter in NFPA 72. 2. Include voltage drop calculations for all audible, visual, and audible/visual notification appliance circuits. 3. Include power supply and battery-size calculations. 4. Include performance parameters and installation details for each detector, verifying that each detector is listed for complete range of air velocity, temperature, and humidity possible when air-handling system is operating. 5. Include plans, sections, and elevations of heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning ducts, drawn to scale and coordinating installation of duct smoke detectors and access to them. Show critical dimensions that relate to placement and support of sampling tubes, detector housing, and remote status and alarm indicators. Locate detectors according to manufacturer's written recommendations. 6. Include equipment rack or console layout of all fire alarm control panel equipment, grounding schematic, and single-line connection diagram. 7. Include floor plans to indicate final outlet locations showing address of each addressable device. Show size and route of cable and conduits. 8. Include input/output system operational programming matrix. 9. Include point list, with device address, input number, and device description of how the device will be annunciated on the control panel.

D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For smoke and heat detectors indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM 28 31 11 - 2 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

1. Drawings showing the location of each smoke and heat detector, ratings of each, and installation details as needed to comply with listing conditions of the detector. 2. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting the spacing and sensitivity of detection, complying with NFPA 72.

E. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.

F. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For fire-alarm control unit, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.

1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation. 2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. 3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements.

G. Field quality-control reports.

H. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire-alarm systems and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Comply with the "Records" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in NFPA 72. 2. Provide "Record of Completion Documents" according to NFPA 72 article "Permanent Records" in the "Records" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter. 3. Record copy of site-specific software. 4. Provide "Maintenance, Inspection and Testing Records" according to NFPA 72 article of the same name and include the following:

a. Frequency of testing of installed components. b. Frequency of inspection of installed components. c. Requirements and recommendations related to results of maintenance. d. Manufacturer's user training manuals.

5. Manufacturer's required maintenance related to system warranty requirements. 6. Abbreviated operating instructions for mounting at fire-alarm control unit. 7. Copy of NFPA 25.

I. Software and Firmware Operational Documentation:

1. Software operating and upgrade manuals. 2. Program Software Backup: On magnetic media or compact disk, complete with data files. 3. Device address list. 4. Printout of software application and graphic screens.

DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM 28 31 11 - 3 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: Personnel shall be trained and certified by manufacturer for installation of units required for this Project.

B. Installer Qualifications: Installation shall be by personnel certified by NICET as fire-alarm Level II or higher technician.

C. Source Limitations for Fire-Alarm System and Components: Obtain fire-alarm system from single source from single manufacturer. Components shall be compatible with, and operate as, an extension of existing system.

D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

E. NFPA Certification: Obtain certification according to NFPA 72 by an NRTL.

F. NFPA Certification: Obtain certification according to NFPA 72 by a UL-listed alarm company.

G. NFPA Certification: Obtain certification according to NFPA 72 in the form of a placard by an FMG-approved alarm company.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Interruption of Existing Fire-Alarm Service: Do not interrupt fire-alarm service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary guard service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify COTR no fewer than seven days in advance of proposed interruption of fire-alarm service. 2. Do not proceed with interruption of fire-alarm service without COTR’s written permission.

1.8 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Existing Fire-Alarm Equipment: Maintain existing equipment fully operational. As new equipment is installed, label it "NOT IN SERVICE" until it is accepted. Remove labels from new equipment when put into service.

1.9 SOFTWARE SERVICE AGREEMENT

A. Comply with UL 864.

B. Technical Support: Beginning with Substantial Completion, provide software support as part of the existing maintenance contract.

DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM 28 31 11 - 4 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, or as acceptable to The Authority, provide products by one of the following:

1. Manufacturers: Siemens Cerberus. 2. Substitutions: No substitutions permitted.

2.2 SYSTEMS OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION

A. Fire-alarm signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and systems:

1. Manual fire alarm stations. 2. Combination smoke/heat detectors. 3. Smoke detectors. 4. Duct smoke detectors. 5. Verified automatic alarm operation of smoke detectors. 6. Automatic sprinkler system water flow. 7. Fire-extinguishing system operation. 8. Fire standpipe system.

B. Fire-alarm signal shall initiate the following actions:

1. Continuously operate alarm notification appliances. 2. Identify alarm at fire-alarm control unit. 3. Transmit an alarm signal to the remote alarm receiving station. 4. Unlock electric door locks in designated egress paths. 5. Release fire and smoke doors held open by magnetic door holders. 6. Activate voice/alarm communication system. 7. Switch heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning equipment controls to fire-alarm mode. 8. Activate smoke-control system (smoke management) at firefighter smoke-control system panel. 9. Close smoke dampers in air ducts of designated air-conditioning duct systems. 10. Recall elevators to primary or alternate recall floors. 11. Record events in the system memory. 12. Record events by the system printer.

C. Supervisory signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and actions:

1. Valve supervisory switch. 2. Low-air-pressure switch of a dry-pipe sprinkler system.

DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM 28 31 11 - 5 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

D. System trouble signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and actions:

1. Open circuits, shorts, and grounds in designated circuits. 2. Opening, tampering with, or removing alarm-initiating and supervisory signal-initiating devices. 3. Loss of primary power at fire-alarm control unit. 4. Ground or a single break in fire-alarm control unit internal circuits. 5. Abnormal AC voltage at fire-alarm control unit. 6. Break in standby battery circuitry. 7. Failure of battery charging. 8. Abnormal position of any switch at fire-alarm control unit or annunciator. 9. Fire-pump power failure, including a dead-phase or phase-reversal condition. 10. Low-air-pressure switch operation on a dry-pipe or preaction sprinkler system.

E. System Trouble and Supervisory Signal Actions: Initiate notification appliance and annunciate at fire-alarm control unit. Record the event on system printer.

2.3 FIRE-ALARM CONTROL UNIT

A. General Requirements for Fire-Alarm Control Unit: The new fire-alarm expansion unit shall be connected to the existing fire alarm monitoring system.

2.4 REMOTE POWER SUPPLY PANEL

A. Provide booster power supply panels as required, to meet project requirements.

B. The booster power supply shall activate via dry contact from the fire alarm control panel. The booster power supply shall generate a fault condition at the main fire alarm control panel, when any fault condition occurs on circuits connected to the booster power supply, or a trouble condition occurs at the booster power supply panel. The booster power supply shall contain an integral battery charger capable of recharging the standby batteries per NFPA 72 requirements, and shall provide battery supervision for placement and low voltage.

2.5 STANDBY BATTERIES

A. The secondary power source shall be standby batteries.

B. Batteries shall be sealed lead acid type, with a minimum life expectancy of five years, and shall provide twenty-four (24) hours of normal standby operation and fifteen (15) minutes of normal alarm condition at the end of the standby period.

1. Batteries shall be dated with month and year of installation in the system. 2. Dedicated battery cabinets (when required) shall be located below the fire alarm control panel.

DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM 28 31 11 - 6 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

2.6 ADDRESSABLE MANUAL FIRE-ALARM BOXES

A. General Requirements for Manual Fire-Alarm Boxes: Comply with UL 38. Boxes shall be finished in red with molded, raised-letter operating instructions in contrasting color; shall show visible indication of operation; and shall be mounted on recessed outlet box. If indicated as surface mounted, provide manufacturer's surface back box.

1. Double-action mechanism requiring two actions to initiate an alarm, pull-lever type; with integral addressable module arranged to communicate manual-station status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit. 2. Station Reset: Key- or wrench-operated switch. 3. Indoor Protective Shield: Factory-fabricated clear plastic enclosure hinged at the top to permit lifting for access to initiate an alarm. Lifting the cover actuates an integral battery-powered audible horn intended to discourage false-alarm operation, where requested by the Owner.

2.7 SYSTEM SMOKE DETECTORS

A. General Requirements for System Smoke Detectors:

1. Comply with UL 268; operating at 24-V dc, nominal. 2. Detectors shall be two-wire type, which communicate and receive power over the analog/addressable signaling device loop (SLC) circuit.. 3. Integral Analog/addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit. 4. Base Mounting: Detector and associated electronic components shall be mounted in a twist-lock module that connects to a fixed base. Provide terminals in the fixed base for connection to building wiring. 5. Self-Restoring: Detectors do not require resetting or readjustment after actuation to restore them to normal operation. 6. Integral Visual-Indicating Light: LED type indicating detector has operated and power- on status. 7. Remote Control: Unless otherwise indicated, detectors shall be analog-addressable type, individually monitored at fire-alarm control unit for calibration, sensitivity, and alarm condition and individually adjustable for sensitivity by fire-alarm control unit.

a. Rate-of-rise temperature characteristic shall be selectable at fire-alarm control unit for 15 or 20 deg F per minute. b. Fixed-temperature sensing shall be independent of rate-of-rise sensing and shall be settable at fire-alarm control unit to operate at 135 or 190 deg F. c. Provide multiple levels of detection sensitivity for each sensor.

B. Analog/Addressable Photoelectric Smoke Detectors:

1. Detector address shall be accessible from fire-alarm control unit and shall be able to identify the detector's location within the system and its sensitivity setting.

DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM 28 31 11 - 7 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

2. An operator at fire-alarm control unit, having the designated access level, shall be able to manually access the following for each detector:

a. Primary status. b. Device type. c. Present average value. d. Present sensitivity selected. e. Sensor range (normal, dirty, etc.).

C. Analog/Addressable Duct Smoke Detectors:

1. Photoelectric type complying with UL 268A. 2. Detector address shall be accessible from fire-alarm control unit and shall be able to identify the detector's location within the system and its sensitivity setting. 3. An operator at fire-alarm control unit, having the designated access level, shall be able to manually access the following for each detector:

a. Primary status. b. Device type. c. Present average value. d. Present sensitivity selected. e. Sensor range (normal, dirty, etc.).

4. Weatherproof Duct Housing Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 4X; NRTL listed for use with the supplied detector, where applicable. 5. Each sensor shall have multiple levels of detection sensitivity. 6. Sampling Tubes: Design and dimensions as recommended by manufacturer for specific duct size, air velocity, and installation conditions where applied. 7. Relay Fan Shutdown: Rated to interrupt fan motor-control circuit. 8. Provide a key activated remote test switch mounted at an accessible location from a 6’ ladder above finished floor.

2.8 NON-SYSTEM SMOKE DETECTORS

A. Non-system Smoke Detectors shall not be allowed. All smoke detectors shall be Siemens Cerberus brand.

2.9 ANALOG/ADDRESSABLE HEAT DETECTORS

A. General Requirements for Heat Detectors:

1. Comply with UL 521. 2. Detectors shall be two-wire type, which communicate and receive power over the analog/addressable signaling device loop (SLC) circuit. 3. Integral Analog/addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit.

DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM 28 31 11 - 8 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

4. Base Mounting: Detector and associated electronic components shall be mounted in a twist-lock module that connects to a fixed base. Provide terminals in the fixed base for connection to building wiring. 5. Self-Restoring: Detectors do not require resetting or readjustment after actuation to restore them to normal operation. 6. Integral Visual-Indicating Light: LED type indicating detector has operated and power- on status. 7. Remote Control: Unless otherwise indicated, detectors shall be analog-addressable type, individually monitored at fire-alarm control unit for calibration, sensitivity, and alarm condition and individually adjustable for sensitivity by fire-alarm control unit.

B. Heat Detector, Combination Type: Actuated by either a fixed temperature of 135 deg F or a rate of rise that exceeds 15 deg F per minute unless otherwise indicated.

1. Mounting: Adapter plate for outlet box mounting. 2. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit.

C. Heat Detector, Fixed-Temperature Type: Actuated by temperature that exceeds a fixed temperature of 190 deg F.

1. Mounting: Adapter plate for outlet box mounting. 2. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit.

2.10 ADDRESSABLE MONITOR AND CONTROL MODULES

A. The system modules shall be individually addressable. The modules shall have a separate means of displaying communication and alarm status. As a minimum, each module shall have a flashing LED to indicate communications status, and a red LED to indicate alarm or active control status of the module. The modules input and output circuit wiring shall be supervised for opens and ground faults.

B. Single Input Module:

1. The input module shall mount to a standard electrical box or trim ring, and shall provide one (1) supervised Class B circuits, capable of supporting the following circuit types:

a. Normally-Open Alarm Latching (Manual Stations, Heat Detectors, etc.) b. Normally-Open Active Non-Latching (Monitors, Fans, Dampers, Doors, etc.) c. Normally-Open Active Latching (Supervisory, Tamper Switches)

DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM 28 31 11 - 9 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

C. Single Input Signal Module:

1. The signal module shall mount to a standard electrical box or trim ring, and shall provide one (1) supervised Class B output circuit, capable of supporting the following circuit types:

a. Audible Indicating Appliance Circuit, polarized, rated at 24vDC at 2 Amps. b. Visual Indicating Appliance Circuit, polarized, rated at 24vDC at 2 Amps. c. Supervised Control Circuit, polarized, rated at 24vDC at 2 Amps.

D. Control Relay Module:

1. The control relay module shall mount to a standard electrical box or trim ring, and shall provide one (1) Form "C" dry relay contact, rated at 2 Amps at 24vDC or 0.5 Amps at 120vAC; to control external appliances or equipment shutdown. The control relay module shall be rated for "pilot duty" and releasing systems.

2. Provide interposing relay for circuits higher than the modules rated load, where applicable.

2.11 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES

A. General Requirements for Notification Appliances: Connected to notification appliance signal circuits, zoned as indicated, equipped for mounting as indicated and with screw terminals for system connections.

1. Combination Devices: Factory-integrated audible and visible devices in a single- mounting assembly, equipped for mounting as indicated and with screw terminals for system connections.

B. Horns: Electric-vibrating-polarized type, 24-V dc; with provision for housing the operating mechanism behind a grille. Comply with UL 464. Horns shall produce a sound-pressure level of 90 dBA, measured 10 feet from the horn, using the coded signal prescribed in UL 464 test protocol.

C. Visible Notification Appliances: Xenon strobe lights comply with UL 1971, with clear or nominal white polycarbonate lens mounted on an aluminum faceplate. The word "FIRE" is engraved in minimum 1-inch- high letters on the lens.

1. Rated Light Output:

a. 15, 30, 75, 110 cd. b. Selectable in the field.

2. Mounting: Wall mounted unless otherwise indicated. 3. Flashing shall be in a temporal pattern, synchronized with other units. 4. Strobe Leads: Factory connected to screw terminals. 5. Mounting Faceplate: Factory finished, red.

DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM 28 31 11 - 10 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

2.12 VOICE/TONE NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES

A. Voice/Tone Notification Appliances: 1. Comply with UL 1480. 2. Speakers for Voice Notification: Locate speakers for voice notification to provide the intelligibility requirements of the “Notification Appliances” and “Emergency Communications Systems” chapters in NFPA 72. 3. High-Range Units: Rated 2 to 15 W. 4. Low-Range Units: Rated 1 to 2 W. 5. Mounting: Surface mounted and bidirectional. 6. Matching Transformers: Tap range matched to acoustical environment of speaker location.

2.13 SYSTEM WIRING

A. Wiring shall utilize solid conductors, comply with the requirements of Article 760 of the NEC and meet the minimum requirement

1. Size:

a. Initiating Circuits: 16AWG (or larger) b. Indicating Circuits: 14AWG (or Larger)

2. Color

a. Positive Wires: RED b. Negative Wires: BLACK

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION

A. System wiring and equipment shall be installed in strict compliance with the manufacturers published installation recommendations and in compliance with Article 760 of the NEC. Only solid wire conductors shall be permitted and T tapping of class B circuits shall be permitted in compliance with the manufacturers published installation recommendations.

B. Fire Alarm System indicating and initiating circuits shall be contained within separate raceways. Junction boxes and covers in Fire Alarm system raceway shall be painted red. Junction box covers shall have a permanent label identifying the system circuits passing through the box which shall also be indicated on and correspond to the as-built drawings. Fire alarm conduits shall have a 1” red painted band every 20’.

C. Fire alarm initiating devices shall have the device address permanently affixed to both the device base and the device.

DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM 28 31 11 - 11 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

D. Comply with NFPA 72 for installation of fire-alarm equipment.

E. Connecting to Existing Equipment: Verify that existing fire-alarm system is operational before making changes or connections.

1. Connect new equipment to existing control panel in existing part of the building. 2. Connect new equipment to existing monitoring equipment at the supervising station. 3. Expand, modify, and supplement existing control equipment as necessary to extend existing control functions to the new points. New components shall be capable of merging with existing configuration without degrading the performance of either system.

F. Smoke- or Heat-Detector Spacing:

1. Comply with NFPA 72, "Smoke-Sensing Fire Detectors" Section in the "Initiating Devices" Chapter, for smoke-detector spacing. 2. Comply with NFPA 72, "Heat-Sensing Fire Detectors" Section in the "Initiating Devices" Chapter, for heat-detector spacing. 3. Smooth ceiling spacing shall not exceed 30 feet. 4. Spacing of detectors for irregular areas, for irregular ceiling construction, and for high ceiling areas shall be determined according to Appendix A in NFPA 72. 5. HVAC: Locate detectors not closer than 3 feet from air-supply diffuser or return-air opening. 6. Lighting Fixtures: Locate detectors not closer than 36 inches from any part of a lighting fixture.

G. Duct Smoke Detectors: Comply with NFPA 72 and NFPA 90A. Install sampling tubes so they extend the full width of duct.

H. Remote Status and Alarm Indicators: Install near each smoke detector, duct smoke detector which is not readily visible from normal viewing position.

I. Audible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Mount at 80 inches from the finished floor to the bottom of the audible device, but not less than 6 inches below the ceiling to the top of the device. Install bells and horns on flush-mounted back boxes with the device-operating mechanism concealed behind a grille.

J. Visible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Mount at 80 inches from the finished floor to the bottom of the visual signal lens, but n higher than 96 inches above finished floor to the top of the visual lens. For low ceiling areas, mount visual device such that the top of the visual signal lens is not less than 6 inches below the ceiling.

K. Device Location-Indicating Lights: Locate in public space near the device they monitor.

L. Fire-Alarm Control Unit: Surface mounted, with tops of cabinets not more than 72 inches above the finished floor.

M. Annunciator: Install with top of panel not more than 72 inches above the finished floor.

DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM 28 31 11 - 12 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. For fire-protection systems related to doors in fire-rated walls and partitions and to doors in smoke partitions, comply with requirements in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware." Connect hardware and devices to fire-alarm system.

1. Verify that hardware and devices are NRTL listed for use with fire-alarm system in this Section before making connections.

B. Make addressable connections with a supervised interface device to the following devices and systems. Install the interface device less than 3 feet from the device controlled. Make an addressable confirmation connection when such feedback is available at the device or system being controlled.

1. Alarm-initiating connection to smoke-control system (smoke management) at firefighter smoke-control system panel. 2. Alarm-initiating connection to stairwell and elevator-shaft pressurization systems. 3. Smoke dampers in air ducts of designated air-conditioning duct systems. 4. Alarm-initiating connection to elevator recall system and components. 5. Alarm-initiating connection to activate emergency lighting control. 6. Alarm-initiating connection to activate emergency shutoffs for gas and fuel supplies. 7. Supervisory connections at valve supervisory switches. 8. Supervisory connections at low-air-pressure switch of each dry-pipe sprinkler system. 9. Supervisory connections at elevator shunt trip breaker. 10. Supervisory connections at fire-pump power failure including a dead-phase or phase- reversal condition. 11. Supervisory connections at fire-pump engine control panel.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Install framed instructions in a location visible from fire-alarm control unit.

3.4 GROUNDING

A. Ground fire-alarm control unit and associated circuits; comply with IEEE 1100. Install a ground wire from main service ground to fire-alarm control unit.

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Field tests shall be witnessed by COTR.

B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM 28 31 11 - 13 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

C. Perform tests and inspections.

1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.

D. Tests and Inspections:

1. Visual Inspection: Conduct visual inspection prior to testing.

a. Inspection shall be based on completed Record Drawings and system documentation that is required by NFPA 72 in its "Completion Documents, Preparation" Table in the "Documentation" Section of the "Fundamentals of Fire Alarm Systems" Chapter. b. Comply with "Visual Inspection Frequencies" Table in the "Inspection" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in NFPA 72; retain the "Initial/Reacceptance" column and list only the installed components.

2. System Testing: Comply with "Test Methods" Table in the "Testing" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in NFPA 72. 3. Test audible appliances for the public operating mode according to manufacturer's written instructions. Perform the test using a portable sound-level meter complying with Type 2 requirements in ANSI S1.4. 4. Test audible appliances for the private operating mode according to manufacturer's written instructions. 5. Test visible appliances for the public operating mode according to manufacturer's written instructions. 6. Factory-authorized service representative shall prepare the "Fire Alarm System Record of Completion" in the "Documentation" Section of the "Fundamentals of Fire Alarm Systems" Chapter in NFPA 72 and the "Inspection and Testing Form" in the "Records" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in NFPA 72.

E. Reacceptance Testing: Perform reacceptance testing to verify the proper operation of added or replaced devices and appliances.

F. Fire-alarm system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

G. Prepare test and inspection reports.

H. Maintenance Test and Inspection: Perform tests and inspections listed for weekly, monthly, quarterly, and semiannual periods. Use forms developed for initial tests and inspections.

I. Annual Test and Inspection: One year after date of Substantial Completion, test fire-alarm system complying with visual and testing inspection requirements in NFPA 72. Use forms developed for initial tests and inspections.

DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM 28 31 11 - 14 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

PART 4 - CONTRACTOR’S QUALITY CONTROL REQUIREMENTS

4.1 GENERAL

A. Comply with applicable provisions of Division 01 Section “Quality Requirements” for requirements for Contractor Quality Control Program.

END OF SECTION 28 31 11

DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM 28 31 11 - 15 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK DCATERMINALAIMPROVEMENTSSCHEMATICDESIGN TASKORDER04:OUTBOUNDBAGGAGEFACILITY 31JULY2012 RONALDREAGANWASHINGTONNATIONALAIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

SECTION 31 23 19 – DEWATERING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Scope: This section specifies the disturbance to, modification of, or removal of all equipment, devices

1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.3 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes construction dewatering that will be required in the event that uncontaminated or petroleum impacted groundwater is encountered within excavations and existing utility manholes. Dewatering of contaminated groundwater may be required in the event a sheen, odor, or discoloration is evident.

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Dewatering Performance: Design, provide, test, operate, monitor, and maintain a dewatering system of sufficient scope, size, and capacity to control ground-water flow into, and removal from, excavations and impacted utility manholes, and permit work to proceed on dry, stable subgrades.

B. Work includes removing dewatering system when no longer needed.

C. Accomplish dewatering without damaging adjacent buildings/structures.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings:

1. Show arrangement, locations, and details of dewatering equipment, treatment system, and storage tanks including proposed discharge points (if applicable).

B. Describe how water will be collected, stored and treated before discharging to storm sewer. Provide sizes, dimensions, locations, and capacities of collection, storage and treatment

DEWATERING 312319-1 DCATERMINALAIMPROVEMENTSSCHEMATICDESIGN TASKORDER04:OUTBOUNDBAGGAGEFACILITY 31JULY2012 RONALDREAGANWASHINGTONNATIONALAIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

facilities. Also describe procedures to be implemented in the event that free product is encountered.

C. Include Shop Drawings signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

D. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in Quality Assurance Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of competed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.

1. Submit qualifications of specialist(s) responsible for groundwater control and treatment (if applicable).

2. Submit qualifications of laboratory to be used in testing environmental samples (if applicable)

3. If applicable, include a sampling plan to ensure discharges from on-site treatment facilities are meeting The Authority’s non-detect requirement.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced environmental professional/firm responsible for the treatment, storage and disposal of contaminated groundwater required for this Project.

B. Operator Qualifications: The Contractor shall have a qualified environmental professional to monitor the water treatment operation during all discharges. The environmental professional shall have a minimum of 5 years of environmental experience, and have experience in the operation of portable treatment systems.

C. Engineering Responsibility: Engage a qualified professional engineer to prepare to supervise the preparation of date for the dewatering system including drawings, testing program, testing result interpretation, and comprehensive engineering analysis that show the systems compliance with specified requirements.

D. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with water disposal requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. The Authority requires contaminated groundwater be treated before being discharged to the storm sewer.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by The Authority or others unless permitted in writing by the COTR and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated.

B. Water Collection and Treatment:

DEWATERING 312319-2 DCATERMINALAIMPROVEMENTSSCHEMATICDESIGN TASKORDER04:OUTBOUNDBAGGAGEFACILITY 31JULY2012 RONALDREAGANWASHINGTONNATIONALAIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

1. Petroleum contaminated water will be encountered during construction. Petroleum impacted water ranges from free product to 1 ppm. The Contractor shall provide training for personnel in accordance with OSHA regulations, in order to work in these conditions.

2. The Contractor can discharge uncontaminated manhole water to the storm system. If the manhole water contains a petroleum sheen, odor, or discoloration, the Contractor shall treat and discharge contaminated water in accordance with the requirements of paragraph 3 below.

3. Petroleum contaminated water shall be directed at the manufacturer’s recommended rate through portable oil/water separator (minimum capacity 45 gpm) with carbon filter unit before being discharged to the storm sewer. Effluent from the oil/water separator must be maintained at Anone detect@ levels of Total Petroleum Hydrocarbon (TPH) in accordance with The Authority requirements. Alternatively, water collected from the dewatering operation may be temporarily stored in tanks for off-site treatment and disposal at an approved recycling facility.

C. During dewatering, collect a minimum of three (3) environmental samples (grab samples) during each eight-hour shift. Each sample must be collected under standard chain-of-custody procedures by a qualified environmental professional. Samples shall be submitted to a qualified laboratory for analysis of Total Petroleum Hydrocarbon (TPH). Results of analysis shall be reported to COTR within 24 hours of sample collection. TPH concentrations of treated water shall be “none detect”. The Authority may collect random samples of treated and untreated groundwater.

D. The Contractor shall be responsible for mitigating any releases of untreated water into the environment in accordance with the regulations of the Virginia Department of Environmental Quality.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PORTABLE OIL/WATER SEPARATOR

A. Minimum capacity: 45 gallons per minute

B. Carbon unit: Coordinated with oil/water separator capacity to meet The Authority’s TPH discharge requirement of “non-detect.”

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Install dewatering system to ensure minimum interference with active areas of the AOA, roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities.

DEWATERING 312319-3 DCATERMINALAIMPROVEMENTSSCHEMATICDESIGN TASKORDER04:OUTBOUNDBAGGAGEFACILITY 31JULY2012 RONALDREAGANWASHINGTONNATIONALAIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

B. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from The Authority and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by governing regulations.

C. Stage the treatment system and storage tanks in the pre-approved location (if applicable).

3.2 DEWATERING

A. Prior to initiating dewatering activities, the Contractor shall visibly inspect the water for the presence of contamination. The Contractor shall maintain a log detailing existing conditions (i.e. odor, sheen, color, estimated water volume, etc.). If the Contractor suspects contamination (sheen, odor, discoloration, etc.), the COTR shall immediately be notified, and the Contractor shall make preparations for the removal, storage, treatment, and proper disposal of the contaminated water. .

B. Provide adequate equipment to dewater, store, treat/dispose, and control ground water from entering the impacted manholes or excavation.

C. Dispose of water in a manner to avoid endangering public health, property, and portions of work under construction or completed. Dispose of water in a manner to avoid inconvenience to others. Provide sumps, sedimentation tanks, and other flow-control devices as required to complete the work. Contaminated water shall be treated in accordance with 1.6 of this Section.

D. Provide standby equipment on-site, installed and available for immediate operation, to maintain dewatering on a continuous basis if any part of system becomes inadequate or fails. If dewatering requirements are not satisfied due to inadequacy or failure of dewatering system, restore damaged structures and foundation soils at no additional expense.

E. Remove dewatering system from Project site on completion of dewatering.

F. Damages: promptly repair damages to adjacent facilities caused by dewatering operations.

3.3 DOCUMENTATION

A. Provide all field logs and manifests for the offsite disposal of contaminated water.

PART 4 - CONTRACTOR’S QUALITY CONTROL REQUIREMENTS

4.1 GENERAL

A. Comply with applicable provisions of Division 01 Section “Quality Requirements” for requirements for Contractor Quality Control Program.

END OF SECTION 31 23 19

DEWATERING 312319-4 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

SECTION 31 25 14 - STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings, Contract and Special Provisions, Supplementary Conditions, latest version of Virginia Erosion and Sediment Control Handbook and other Division-01 Specifications apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes preparation for and submitting for approval for a Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SPPP).

1. Provisions for furnishing, installing and removal of silt fence, filter boxes, storm drain inlet protection, straw bale barriers, construction entrances, sediment traps, diversion berm, dust control and other erosion control measures during construction, and temporary and permanent soil stabilization measures, as noted on the contract plans and in the approved SPPP. All measures and practices shall be in accordance with the latest version of the Virginia Erosion and Sediment Control Handbook and for preventing contamination of storm water from construction activities in accordance with the Commonwealth Of Virginia Regulation 9VAC 25-180 (i.e., temporary fuel storage, fueling operations, equipment maintenance, hazardous material and waste handling, good housekeeping practices, etc.).

B. Related Sections

1. Division 01 Section “Quality Requirements” for quality issues.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. CWA- Clean Water Act means the law passed by the Congress of the United States in 1972 controlling the Discharge of Pollutants into the Nation's waterways.

B. BMP- Best Management Practices are defined as any one or group of management practices, activities, policies, equipment, and structures that will: prevent pollutants from entering the environment, minimize pollutants from entering the environment, and mitigate, reduce, and treat prior to the pollutant entering the environment.

C. NPDES- National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System is the national program for issuing, modifying, revoking, reissuing, terminating, monitoring and enforcing permits pursuant to sections 402, 318, and 405 of the CWA.

D. VDEQ- Virginia Department of Environmental Quality is the agency of the Commonwealth of Virginia that manages the Commonwealth of Virginia's environmental regulations.

STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN 31 25 14 - 1 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

E. VPDES- Virginia Pollutant Discharge Elimination System is the Commonwealth of Virginia program and regulations that describe the proper management of discharges of pollutants into the waters of the Commonwealth

F. DCR- The Commonwealth of Virginia Department of Conservation and Recreation, Division of Soil and Water Conservation, regulates land disturbing activities and erosion and sedimentation compliance.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Storm water Pollution Prevention Plan (SPPP) - Prepare and submit for written approval by The Authority in accordance with the information provided below. Do not initiate ground- disturbing activities until The Authority has approved the SPPP. In addition, the SPPP will serve as the Soil Erosion and Sediment Control Plan required as a condition of The Authority's issuance of a Construction Permit by The Authority's Building Codes Department. Issuance of this Construction Permit is required prior to initiation of any project construction.

B. The SPPP may utilize plans, details, notes and other information provided in the construction documents, however, such information shall not, in itself, be construed to meet the requirements of this Section. Provide additional details to ensure that the SPPP accurately reflects means and methods for construction.

C. Prepare the SPPP on regular 8 ½ X 11 inch paper. Include attachments of the plans showing locations of erosion and sediment control devices and BMPs. Submit four bound copies to the COTR for review and approval.

D. Plan Certification with Virginia Pollution Discharge Elimination System Regulation (9VAC 25-180) and DCR (4VAC50-30).

1. Submit with Plan Certification the following certification statement signed by an officer of the company of Contractor and signed by all its subcontractors:

"I certify under penalty of law that I understand the terms and conditions of the General Permit for Discharges from Construction Activities that authorizes the storm water discharges from construction activities associated with the site identified by the permit."

2. The above certification shall be executed on the Contractor's letterhead. Include the name, title, address, and telephone number of contractor and all subcontractors, and the date the certification is made. The Certification shall be attached to the SPPP and submitted to the COTR.

E. Once the SPPP has been approved by the COTR, submit a Virginia Storm Water Management Program (VSMP) permit application to the Virginia Department of Conservation and Recreation (DCR) to obtain the VSMP permit. Submit payment of $500 with the permit application. The Contractor shall include the cost of the VSMP in his proposal

F. Be responsible for submitting the Notice of Project Termination (NPT) shown in Appendix II for all construction activities within this particular construction project. Contractor shall notify The Authority and provide a copy to the COTR upon completion of this construction project.

STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN 31 25 14 - 2 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

G. Apply for permit coverage under the Construction General Permit (CGP) prior to starting land disturbing activities. Complete and submit to the appropriate EPA NPDES permitting Authority a Notice of Intent (NOI) Form. To discontinue permit coverage, complete and submit to the appropriate EPA NPDES permitting Authority a Notice of Termination (NOT) Form upon satisfying the appropriate permit conditions described in the CGP.

H. Submit the name, and a copy of the certificate of competence issued by the Department of Conservation and Recreation for the person in charge of and responsible for carrying out the land-disturbing activity prior to conducting any land-disturbing activities.

I. Prepare the SPPP narrative and associated drawings in accordance with the following outline:

1. Site Description: A detailed description of the construction activities, physical features of the site, and other pertinent information shall be included in this Section.

a. A description of the nature of the construction activities; b. A description of the intended sequence of major activities which disturb soils for major portions of the site (e.g. grubbing, excavation, grading); c. Estimate of the total area of land disturbing activities. Land disturbing areas greater than 2,500 square feet require the implementation and enforcement of a SPPP. d. Describe the quality of any discharge water from the site; e. A description of the existing vegetative cover at the site, include an estimate of the total buffer area that is covered by the vegetation before construction activities commence. f. The name of the receiving water(s), their tributaries, and the ultimate receiving water(s). A description of the aerial extent of wetlands present at the site and other sensitive habitats present on site describe measures that will be used to protect wetlands. g. Include in the plan a schedule of the planned start and completion of construction activities, major grading activities, and other activities that may require stabilization measures to be initiated at the site.

2. Potential Pollution Sources:

a. Describe potential pollution sources. Description should include, but not be limited to, the following:

1) Vehicle Fueling: A description of the location and number of all above ground storage tanks (ASTs) and any storage containers that will be used for the purpose of fueling vehicles or storing any materials used during construction activities (indicate location on the site map). 2) Storage Tanks: ASTs storing regulated substances and greater than 660 gallons shall be registered with the Department of Environmental Quality. All ASTs shall be properly equipped and follow the AST requirements. For example, requirements include that ASTs be double walled or have 110% secondary containment devices that will not collect rainwater. Tanks shall have spill containment buckets and be properly labeled, etc. Earthen berms shall not be permitted.

STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN 31 25 14 - 3 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

3) Materials Storage: A description of the storage location and a minimum quantity of all hazardous and non-hazardous materials that might pollute storm water. Pollutants such as, but not limited to, paints, solvents, hydraulic fluids, engine oil, form oil, etc. that will be used during the course of construction activities. All containers of materials of any size that are used on site and their associated secondary containment shall be covered to prevent rainwater from coming in contact with the containers. Earthen berms shall not be permitted. All drums and containers shall be removed from the site as they become empty. 4) Sanitary Waste Facility: A description of the location and the number of sanitary waste facilities (e.g. portable chemical toilets) and method of disposal for the subject waste during the course of construction activities on site. 5) Equipment Maintenance: A detailed description of how and where equipment will be maintained. This shall include fluid changes, servicing, breakdowns, etc. The plan shall provide a standard operating procedure that shall be used for the protection of the environment while maintaining the equipment. 6) Concrete Batch Plants: Provide a maintenance plan for the concrete washout area. The plan shall include inspection and pumping procedures, as well as water, solid disposal, and recycling procedures. All batch plants shall have a valid VDEQ air permit. Obtain a General Virginia Pollutant Discharge Elimination System Permit (GVPDES) in accordance with 9 VAC 25-193-10 for the batch plant. Submit both the GVPDES and the VDEQ air permits with the Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SPPP). 7) The SPPP shall include a drum and container management plan. The plan shall describe the methods and location for the containment, protection, and storage of all solvents, chemicals, petroleum products, and all toxic material as defined by the EPA brought on site. All drums and containers shall be stored within a secondary containment system and shall be covered to prevent rainwater from entering the secondary containment.

3. Best Management Practices (BMPs) And Control Measures. The purpose of this Section is to identify all appropriate BMPs and control measures that shall be implemented at the construction site. This Section of the plan shall clearly describe the construction activities in sequence and their associated BMPS, control measures, and Erosion and Sediment (E&S) controls that are applicable. This Section shall indicate the timing to achieve the above-referenced sequencing relative to the installation of BMPs, E&S, and the control measures.

a. The components of this Section of the plan shall, at a minimum, include but not be limited to the following:

1) Stabilization Practices: All stabilization practices, including interim and permanent stabilization measures as well as specific scheduling of the Implementation of the practices, shall be included in this Section. Where possible, this portion of the plan shall describe all existing vegetation that is preserved for the purpose of site stabilization. Stabilization measures include, but are not limited to the following:

STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN 31 25 14 - 4 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

a) Vegetative buffer strips b) Sod stabilization c) Geotextile d) Mulching e) Temporary Seeding f) Permanent Seeding g) Protection of trees h) Preservation of mature vegetation i) Other measures/stabilization practices

2) Structural BMPS: This Section shall adequately describe the structural BMPs and practices that will divert and mitigate storm water runoff from soils, sediments, exposed materials, ASTs, and containers of hazardous/non- hazardous materials. Structural BMPs include, but are not limited to the following list:

a) Silt fences b) Earth dikes c) Drainage swales d) Sediment traps e) Subsurface drains f) Secondary containment for ASTs and containers g) Pipe slope drains h) Coverage for ASTs and containers i) Level spreaders j) Storm drain inlet protection k) Reinforced soil retaining systems l) Rock outlet protection/wheel washers m) Gabions n) Construction rock entrance o) Temporary or permanent sediment basins p) Other BMPs and structural controls.

3) The installation of these structural BMPs may be subject to the CWA Section 404 "Permitting Requirements". Be responsible for determination whether the above-permitting requirements apply to any of the structural BMPs.

4) Provide wheel washers and construction rock entrances for all projects where constructions traffic enters or exits paved surfaces. Be responsible for ensuring that all wheel washers and construction rock entrances are designed and constructed to adequately meet the expected construction traffic demand.

5) Temporary or Permanent Sediment Basins

a) If the project site involves common drainage areas that serve 3 acres or more of disturbed area(s), a temporary or permanent sediment basin is required. Such a basin shall provide 134 cubic feet of storage per acre drained. Where 134 cubic feet of storage per acre drained or

STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN 31 25 14 - 5 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

equivalent is not attainable due to site constraints, smaller sediment basins and sediment traps shall be used as approved by the COTR on a case-by-case basis. b) To prevent the movement and erosion of soils, structural measures should be placed on all upland areas.

4. Operational Practices (Good Housekeeping Practices). This Section shall include measures and BMPs including good housekeeping practices that address the following sources of pollution:

a. The plan shall contain measures that prevent trash, innocuous solid materials, building materials, garbage, and debris from entering The Authority's storm sewer system or directly into a stream or waterway. b. Provide a daily program of vacuum or hand sweeping or other acceptable means of cleaning sediments that are tracked or transported onto the public roads from the construction sites shall be implemented. The roads may be washed only after the sediments have been removed.

5. Inspection And Maintenance of BMPs

a. Provide a schedule of inspection of all structural BMPs, the necessary maintenance and corrective action to correct all discrepancies found on site. Designate qualified personnel that have adequate knowledge of E&S requirements and storm water management and pollution prevention requirements, to inspect all structural control measures and BMPs at "least every seven calendar days and within 24 hours of the end of a storm event that is .5 inches or greater." b. At a minimum develop a checklist for these inspections that conforms to the inspection checklist of Appendix I. Areas where final stabilization has been established need only be inspected once every month. Provide the completed inspection checklist and a report summarizing the corrective actions taken by the contractor to the COTR according to the following schedule of frequencies: c. Every seven calendar days: Under the normal circumstances. d. Every 24 hours: After a rainfall of 0.5 inches or greater, of intensity. e. Every 30 days: for the areas where final stabilization has been accomplished. f. Correct any and all discrepancies immediately upon discovery. The SPPP shall be revised as necessary to reflect any modifications to strengthen the BMPs and other structural controls in order to address the discrepancies. The above inspections and findings shall be subject to Authority field verification. Be responsible for responding to all regulatory inquiries from the Virginia Department of Environmental Quality-Water Division (VDEQ-Water), Virginia Department of Conservation and Recreation (DCR), and the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) Region III. Be responsible for addressing the outcome of all compliance monitoring inspections conducted by the above regulatory agencies. Take all corrective actions as required by VDEQ-Water, DCR or EPA Region III.

6. Non-Storm water Discharge. This SPPP is for the sole purpose of preventing pollution associated with storm water runoff (Act of God: rain, snow, etc.). Plan shall identify all non-storm water components, process waste water discharges, and any other non-storm water influent that may exist in this particular construction site. Plan shall ensure that all

STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN 31 25 14 - 6 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

of the above non-storm water discharges are appropriately eliminated, permitted or addressed through other acceptable regulatory permitting mechanisms.

7. Detailed Composite SPPP Map. Prepare the following:

a. Drainage pattern and approximate slopes anticipated after completing major grading activities on site b. Soil disturbance areas c. Location of all Best Management Practices (BMPs), structural controls, nonstructural controls, good housekeeping practices (GHP) and other erosion and sediment (E&S) control measures to be used during the course of construction activities d. Locations where stabilization is expected to be used, including the types of vegetative cover which will be employed on site e. Location of all receiving waters, including their tributaries and the ultimate receiving waters (including wetlands/sensitive habitats) f. Location of all points of discharge to existing storm sewers and outfalls g. Existing and planned paved areas, impervious surfaces, and buildings h. Location of all post-construction BMPs and Storm water management practices that will address the long-term water quality improvement needs for the site, if applicable. i. Location of any fuel storage, materials storage and sanitary waste and other potential pollution sources and their associated BMPs. shall be reflected on the site map. j. Two site maps shall be developed, one indicating pre-construction and during construction site conditions and the second indicating final site conditions. Maps shall be to the same scale.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Prepare and submit the SPPP with input from each subcontractor.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. Provide erosion and sediment control devices and products as indicated, in accordance with the SPPP and in accordance with the latest updated version of the Virginia Erosion and Sediment Control Handbook.

STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN 31 25 14 - 7 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 IMPLEMENTATION

A. Implement and maintain the approved SPPP throughout the life of the contract in accordance with provisions of the Virginia Erosion and Sediment Control Handbook and applicable contract documents.

B. Exercise every reasonable precaution, including temporary and permanent measures, throughout the duration of the project to control erosion and prevent or minimize pollution of rivers, streams, lakes and other receiving waters. Apply siltation and stabilization control measures to material, subject to erosion, exposed by any activity associated with construction including but not limited to local material sources, stockpiles, disposal areas, and haul roads.

C. Initiate stabilization measures as soon as practicable in portions of the site where construction activities have temporarily or permanently ceased but no later than 14 days after the construction activities have temporarily or permanently ceased. Except as provided in the following paragraphs:

1. If snow cover and or severe weather conditions preclude initiation of the stabilization measures by the 14th day after construction activities have ceased, either temporarily or permanently, the stabilization practices shall be initiated as soon as practicable. 2. If construction activities resume on a portion of the site within 21 days from the date that construction activities have temporarily ceased, then stabilization practices need not be initiated on that particular portion of the site by the 14th day after construction activities have temporarily ceased.

D. Be solely responsible for complying with the soil erosion, sedimentation control and good housekeeping requirements of this Contract, and for otherwise preventing contamination of storm water from construction activities. Be solely responsible for any and all fines, penalties or damage that result from the Contractor’s failure to comply.

3.2 EROSION AND SILTATION CONTROL

A. Control erosion and siltation through the use of the devices and measures specified herein, in the approved SPPP or as is otherwise necessary. The Authority reserves the right to require other temporary measures not specifically described herein to correct an erosion or siltation condition.

B. Maintenance: Maintain erosion and siltation control devices and measures in a functional condition at all times. Inspect temporary and permanent erosion and sedimentation control measures after each rainfall and at least daily during periods of prolonged rainfall. Correct deficiencies immediately. Make a daily review of the location of erosion and sediment control devices to ensure that they are properly located for effectiveness. Where deficiencies exist, make corrections immediately as approved or directed by the COTR.

STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN 31 25 14 - 8 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

PART 4 - CONTRACTOR’S QUALITY CONTROL

4.1 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Conform to all applicable provisions of Division 01 Section “Quality Requirements". Be responsible for periodic inspections for conformance with the approved SPPP. The results of the periodic inspections shall be submitted to the COTR upon completion.

STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN 31 25 14 - 9 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK APPENDIX I THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK SPPP INSPECTION CHECKLIST

Proper Potential Discharge: Proper Housekeeping Installation Hazard Storm water BMP Operation Practices Effectiveness Yes, No. or Yes or Non-storm NA Yes or No Good-Poor No water of BMP Observations Comments

1. Drainage Swale

2. Gabion

3. Silt Fence

4. Dry Pond

5. Cattle Grate

6. Earth Dike

7. Sediment Trap

8. Hay Bale

9. Subsurface Drains

10. Pipe Slope Drains

11. Level Spreaders

12. Storm Drain Inlet Protection

13. Reinforced Soil Retaining Basins THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK SPPP INSPECTION CHECKLIST

14. Temporary or Permanent Sediment Basins

15. Construction Rock Entrance

16. Rock Outlet Protection

17. Secondary Containment for all ASTs

18. Evidence of oil, fuel or other material spills or releases on site

19. Other BMPs

20. Other BMPs THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Please list any discrepancies or items that are not in compliance in the space provided below.

Please list the corrective actions necessary to abate the above-listed discrepancies.

Note: All corrective actions must take place within 7 days of the discovery of the above discrepancies and non-compliance item(s).

Inspector: ______

Signature: Date: ______THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK APPENDIX II THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Metropolitan Washington Airports Authority

Notice of Project Termination

For

Storm water Discharges from Construction Activities

Note: This form shall be completed by the construction contractors upon final stabilization of the site, upon elimination of all storm water, or when the construction contractor has changed within the same construction project. The contractor shall submit a completed copy of this form to The Authority, at the address provided below and a copy to PMC's Resident Engineer within 30 days after final stabilization has been achieved or when it is no longer the construction contractor for this project. (An officer of the company shall sign this certification)

Completed form shall be submitted to:

Manager, Building Codes/Environmental Branch Engineering Division Ronald Reagan Washington National Airport Washington, D.C. 20001

Copy to: Parsons Management Consultants

For DCA Projects

Building Modifications to Accommodate In-Line Baggage Screening Ronald Reagan Washington National Airport Washington, D.C. 20001 Attn: Project's Resident Engineer THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Contract Number: ______Contractor Information: Contractor's name and mailing address: ______Subcontractor(s) name and mailing address: ______

Location of Construction Site: Project Name______Address ______City State Zip Code ______Latitude Longitude ______If there is a change in the contractor(s) please provide the new contractor's information here: ______Certification: "I certify under penalty of law that disturbed soils at the identified project have been finally stabilized and temporary erosion and sediment control measures have been removed or will be removed at an appropriate time and that all storm water discharges associated with construction activities in this project have been eliminated, or that I am no longer the contractor for this construction site." Print name: ______Title: ______Signature: ______Date: ______(This certification shall be signed by an officer of the company) THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK APPENDIX III THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK METROPOLITAN WASHINGTON AIRPORTS AUTHORITY RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT HAZARDOUS MATERIALS SPILL NOTIFICATION CHECKLIST

Note: This checklist shall be completed by all tenants of Ronald Reagan Washington National Airport (DCA) in the event of a hazardous material spill (under CERCLA, CWA, CAA, TSCA and/or a release of hazardous waste under RCRA). It is the responsibility of the tenants to notify all pertinent regulatory agencies within the time frame prescribed under the respective statutes and regulations.

1. Tenant Name: 2. Facility location within DCA where spill occurred: 3. Facility Environmental Manager, Foreman, or person in charge: 4. Time and date of release: 5. Amount of release material: 6. Description of how the release occurred and whether material reached a floor drain (if the situation occurred, describe amount of material that entered drain): 7. Type of material released (include common and chemical name; attach MSDS and/or Waste Manifest):

a. In the event of a release, verbal notification to DCA Fire Department and DCA b. Environmental Coordinator must be made immediately as follows: Fire Department: (703) 417-8250 DCA Operations: (703) 417-8050 Government Programs Engineer (703) 417-8071 (703) 417-8099 (fax) Manager, Resource Support Division (703) 417-8072 (703) 417-8099 (fax)

8. Provide details of immediate actions taken to stop spill/release and subsequent clean-up: 9. The checklist and written copies of all notifications to the regulatory agencies shall be submitted to the following person within six (6) hours of the incident (on weekends, note time of submittal): Government Programs Engineer Engineering and Maintenance Division East Building Washington, DC 20001 Fax: (703) 417-8099

Submitted Not submitted

10. A report describing how the incident occurred, if it entered storm or sanitary drain, emergency response me covered from the clean-up actions, and follow up activities shall be submitted to the person in question assures taken, post-emergency clean up actions, the storage and disposition of any materials re 9 within 48 hours of the emergency.

Submitted Not submitted

Any questions regarding the use, completion, and scope of this checklist should be directed to The Authority’s Building Codes/Environmental Department. FOR DCA USE ONLY Please explain below the follow-up actions required with respect to this incident.

END OF SECTION 31 25 14 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

SECTION 34 77 16 – BAGGAGE HANDLING EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY OF PRE-QUALIFIED VENDORS

A. The Contractor/Bidder shall obtain Baggage Handling System (BHS) sub-contract services from only the following pre-authorized BHS Contractors;

1. Diversified Conveyors Inc., 2. G&S Airport Conveyor, 3. Jervis B. Webb Company, 4. Vanderlande Industries, Inc.

B. The Contractor/Bidder (and BHS sub-contractors) shall obtain engineering sub-contract services only from the following pre-authorized BHS Control Engineering Contractors;

1. Alliant Technologies, 2. Brock Solutions, 3. Control Touch Systems, Inc., 4. G&S Airport Conveyor, 5. Jervis B. Webb Company.

1.2 SUMMARY OF WORK

A. Section includes the performance specification, herein, and the drawing sets for this project.

1. This specification is a performance-based description of the Baggage Handling System (BHS) work; the Baggage Handling System Contractor (BHSC) shall complete the work (including design, manufacturing and/or purchasing, installing, testing and commissioning the BHS of this work, and shall generate shop drawings that meet the spatial design and functional requirements of these contract documents. The extent of the BHS work is shown on the drawings and is defined to include all labor, materials, equipment, and supervision required to design, furnish, fabricate, and install the BHS specified herein. Furnish and install all necessary equipment to provide functional, complete, operable, and maintainable systems, which includes, but is not limited to: conveyor bed sections, drives, take-ups, various types of conveyor, sideguards, shrouding, floor supports, ceiling hangers and headers, stainless steel panels and conveyor trim, warning beacons and audio messages, draft curtains, security/fire doors, controls and control panels, software, computer equipment, network equipment, Uninterruptible Power Supplies (UPS), electrical equipment and materials, catwalks, platforms and access ladders, and guard rails as required to complete the systems. 2. Coiling Security and Fire Doors (and associated Electrical and controls work) as specified herein, including operation, controls, interfaces, and power as described in this section. 3. Guardrails adjacent to conveyors and recirculating devices as indicated on the BHS drawings.

BAGGAGE HANDLING EQUIPMENT 34 77 16 - 1 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

4. Additional steel members necessary for support of the conveyors and catwalks beyond what is provided as structural steel members. Where replacement of fireproofing is necessary, fireproofing shall be of the same type and thickness as existing. 5. Interface connections and coordination as specified herein with the existing and new building constraints, expansion joints, signage, fire alarm and smoke detection system, and access control system.

B. Related Sections:

1. The Baggage Handling System Contractor shall design the Baggage Handling System per the latest version of Metropolitan Washington Airports Authority’s Design Manual as specified in Division 01. 2. Fire Alarm and Smoke Detection System will be furnished and installed within the General Contract and are specified in Division 28 Section “Digital, Addressable Fire – Alarm System”. Controls interface with the BHS is described in this section. 3. Control Access Security System will be furnished and installed within the General Contract and is specified in Division 28 Section “Access Control and Alarm Monitoring System”. Controls interface with the BHS is described in this section. 4. Electrical requirements for general provisions, materials, and installations shall be in accordance with Division 26 Sections.

C. Alternates: Not Used

1.3 REFERENCES

A. Reference Standard:

1. Comply with the requirements of the reference standards noted herein, except where more stringent requirements are listed herein or otherwise required by the Contract Documents. The publications of the codes and standards listed below form a part of this specification section to the same extent as if bound herein. 2. All electrical work shall be in accordance with the latest applicable municipal electrical code and N.E.C., whichever is more stringent. 3. All work shall be in accordance with the latest applicable municipal building code and I.B.C., whichever is more stringent.

B. Additional Codes and Standards:

1. Federal Safety and Health Laws: All equipment and accessory items furnished and installed under this contract shall be governed at all times by applicable provisions of the Federal laws, including, but not limited to, the latest revisions of the following:

a. William Steiger Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970, Public Laws 91-596 b. Part 1910 - Occupational Safety and Health Standards, Chapter XVII of Title 29, Code of Federal Regulations c. Part 1926 - Occupational Safety and Health Standards, Chapter XVII of Title 29, Code of Federal Regulations. d. The Authority’s Construction Safety Manual.

BAGGAGE HANDLING EQUIPMENT 34 77 16 - 2 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

2. Referenced Documents:

a. American Welding Society (AWS)

1) AWS-A2.0 – Standard Welding Symbols 2) AWS-Cl.1 – Recommended Practice for Resistance Welding 3) AWS-Dl.0 – Standard Welding Practice in Building Construction 4) AWS-A5.2 – Welding Electrodes 5) (Copies of AWS publications may be obtained from the American Welding Society, 550 LeJeune Rd. NW, Miami, FL 33126. Internet address: www.aws.org)

b. American Gear Manufacturers Association Standard (AGMA)

1) 460.04 – Practice for Gear Motors 2) 461.01 – Practice for Worm Gear Motors 3) (Standards of the American Gear Manufacturers Association are published by the American Gear Manufacturers Association, 500 Montgomery Street, Suite 350, Alexandria, VA 22314. Internet address: www.agma.org)

c. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)

1) A-12.1 – Safety Code for Floor and Wall Openings, Railings, and Toe Boards 2) B-20.1 – Safety Code for Conveyors, Cableways and Related Equipment 3) B-29.0 – Transmission, Rollerchains, and Sprocket Teeth 4) B-105.1 – Specifications for Welding Steel Conveyor Pulleys 5) C-33.1 – Safety Standard for Flexible Cord and Fixture Wire 6) Z-53.1 – Safety Color Code 7) ANSI C2 – National Electrical Safety Code 8) (Copies of ANSI Standards may be obtained from the American National Standards Institute, 1819 L Street NW, Suite 600, Washington, DC 20036. Internet address: www.ansi.org)

d. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)

1) ASTM F792-82 – Standard Practice for Design and Use of Ionizing Radiation Equipment for the Detection of Items Prohibited in Controlled Access Areas 2) ASTM A-36 – Structural Steel 3) ASTM A-569 – Hot Rolled Sheets and Coils 4) ASTM A-307 Fasteners – Class 2A thread fit for bolts and Class 2B thread fit for nuts 5) (Copies of ASTM Standards may be obtained from the American Society for Testing and Materials, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959. Internet address: www.astm.org)

e. National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST)

BAGGAGE HANDLING EQUIPMENT 34 77 16 - 3 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

1) Handbook H 28 – Screw Thread Standards 2) (Copies of handbook H 28 may be obtained upon application accompanied by a money order, coupon, or cash, to the Superintendent of Documents, Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C. 20402. Internet address: www.nist.gov.)

f. Conveyor Equipment Manufacturers Association (CEMA)

1) ANSI/CEMA 402 – Belt Conveyors 2) ANSI/CEMA B105.1 – Specifications for Welded Steel Conveyor Pulleys with Compression Type Hubs 3) (Copies of CEMA Standards may be obtained from the Conveyor Equipment Manufacturers Association, 6724 Lone Oak Blvd., Naples, FL 34109. Internet address: www.cemanet.org)

g. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)

1) NFPA No. 70 – National Electrical Code or latest adopted issue 2) NFPA No. 79 – Electrical Standards for Industrial Machinery 3) NFPA No. 80 – Standard for Fire Doors and Fire Windows 4) (Copies of NFPA publications may be obtained from National Fire Protection Association, 1 Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02169-7471. Internet address: www.nfpa.org)

h. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)

1) ICS – Industrial Controls and Systems 2) MG-1 – Motors and Gear Motors 3) (Copies of NEMA Standards may be obtained from the National Electrical Manufacturers Association, 1300 North 17th Street, Suite 1847, Rosslyn, VA 22209. Internet address: www.nema.org)

i. Air Transport Association (ATA)

1) A.T.A. Specification No. 101 – Specification for Ground Equipment Technical Data 2) (Copies of A.T.A. Spec. No. 101 may be obtained from the Air Transport Association, 1301 Pennsylvania Ave. NW, Suite 1100, Washington, DC 20004-1707. Internet address: www.air-transport.org)

j. International Air Transport Association (IATA)

1) Resolution 740 – Baggage Tags 2) Recommended Practice 1740b – Licence Plate Fallback Sortation Tag 3) Recommended Practice 1740c – Radio Frequency (RF) Specification for Interline Baggage 4) Recommended Practice 1740d – Read and Sortation Rate in Baggage Handling Systems 5) Recommended Practice 1745 – Baggage Services Messages

BAGGAGE HANDLING EQUIPMENT 34 77 16 - 4 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

6) Recommended Practice 1797b – Baggage System Interface 7) (Copies of IATA Resolutions and Recommended Practices may be obtained from the International Air Transport Association, Publications Assistant, 800 Place Victoria, P.O. Box 113, Montreal, Quebec, Canada, H42 1M2; or IATA Centre, Route de l’Aéroport 33, P.O. Box 416, 15 Airport, CH-1215, Geneva, Switzerland. Internet address: www.iata.org)

k. Code of Federal Regulations (CFR)

1) CFR 47 Part 15 – Radio Frequency Devices 2) CFR 14 Part 108.17 – Use of X-ray Systems 3) CFR 14 Part 129.26 – Use of Airport X-ray Security Systems 4) (Copies of CFRs may be obtained from the Superintendent of Documents, Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C. 20402. Internet address: www.access.gpo.gov)

l. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)

1) UL 6 (1981 - Rev. through Dec. 1992) – Rigid Metal Conduit 2) UL 797 (1993 – Rev. through May 1995) – Safety Electrical Metallic Tubing 3) UL 187 – Standard for X-ray Equipment (Electrical) 4) UL 10B – Fire Tests of Door Assemblies 5) (Copies of UL Standards may be obtained from the Underwriters Laboratories, Northbrook Division, 333 Pfingsten Road, Northbrook, IL 60062-2096. Internet address: www.ul.com)

m. Federal Aviation Administration (FAA)

1) Federal Aviation Regulations, Part 108. 2) (Copies of FAA Standards may be obtained from the Federal Aviation Administration, Internet address: www.faa.gov)

n. Federal Communications Commission (FCC)

1) (Copies of FCC Standards may be obtained from the Federal Communications Commission, 445 12th St. SW, Washington, DC 20554. Internet address: www.fcc.gov)

o. Transportation Security Administration (TSA)

1) Integrated Site Acceptance Master Plan and Evaluation Plan 2) Hold Baggage Screening System – Independent Verification and Validation Master Plan 3) Planning Guidelines and Design Standards for Checked Baggage Inspection Systems 4) (Copies of TSA Requirements may be obtained from the Security Equipment Deployment Office, Transportation Security Administration, 590

BAGGAGE HANDLING EQUIPMENT 34 77 16 - 5 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

Herndon Parkway, Suite 120, Herndon, VA 20170-5232. Internet address: www.tsa.gov)

p. Building Industry Consulting Services International (BICSI)

1) BICSI Design manuals and latest edition of publications. 2) (Copies of BICSI Design manuals may be obtained from the Building Industry Consulting Services International, 8610 Hidden River Parkway, Tampa, FL 33637-1000. Internet address: www.bicsi.org)

3. Materials:

a. General: Materials shall be of the quality specified herein, new, free from defects, of the best commercial/industrial grade, and approved by a nationally recognized testing laboratory wherever published standards exist. Materials shall be standardized and of the same make and manufacturer throughout the project, wherever possible.

b. Steel and Connection Standards: Steel and connections shall meet the following standards:

1) Structural plates shall confirm to ASTM A-36. 2) Hot rolled sheets and coils shall conform to ASTM A-569. 3) Structural steel shapes shall conform to ASTM A-36. 4) All welding electrodes shall conform to AWS A-5.2. Use the standard code for arc and gas welding in building construction as a guide to general procedure and qualification of welders. 5) All fasteners shall conform to ASTM A-307 Class 2A thread fit for bolts and Class 2B thread fit for nuts. All fasteners shall be zinc plated or equivalent. All fasteners shall be locked with locknuts or lockwashers. 6) All bearings and bolts shall be of standard sizes and the amount of different sizes shall be minimal where possible.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Refer to the General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions for additional definitions.

B. Baggage Handling System (BHS): Transport system or systems of baggage consisting of a complete system of static and dynamic mechanical, electrical and control components as specified in this section.

C. Baggage Handling System Contractor (BHSC): Installer/coordinator of baggage handling system equipment working as either a General Contractor or as a Subcontractor to a General Contractor.

D. Contractor: See Baggage Handling System Contractor (BHSC).

BAGGAGE HANDLING EQUIPMENT 34 77 16 - 6 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

E. Base Building Contractor/General Contractor: General Contractor (GC) for Base Building Contract.

F. Owner: Metropolitan Washington Airports Authority (The Authority).

G. COTR: See Division 01 Section “Summary.”

1.5 PROJECT DESCRIPTION

A. The BHSC shall work with General Contractor (GC) on scheduling and coordination of other disciplines.

B. Contractor shall coordinate with other contractor to integrate the BHS with the following:

1. Terminal Fire Alarm System (FAS) 2. Terminal Access Control System (ACS)

C. Contractor shall provide a fully operational and functional BHS as described herein.

1.6 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. The Baggage Handling System (BHS) Work consists of provision of BHS equipment as shown on the BHS Contract Drawings to meet the performance based requirements herein. BHS components shall be new, in compliance with the requirements herein. The BHSC shall provide equipment and components that comply with the operational, functional and performance requirements of these specifications. All subsystems listed below shall be considered as complete systems with interface to the overall system for testing purposes. Listed below are the systems that are to be provided as part of this Work.

B. Outbound Baggage Handling System (BHS) shall function as described below.

1. Introduction:

a. The intent of this contract is to provide a new outbound Baggage Handling System (BHS) at the existing Terminal A of Ronald Reagan Washington National Airport (DCA). b. The outbound BHS shall be divided into the following functional zones. The BHSC shall provide a BHS that complies with these operational, functional and performance requirements as described below.

2. Function Zone 1 – Baggage Collecting:

a. On the departure level, there are twenty-four (24) ticket counter positions. After the passengers have checked their bags, the ticket agents will manually relocate them to the back of ticket counters. Then the porters (under an existing contract) will move the bags from the ticket counter area to the Transportation Security Administrations (TSA) screening area for bag screening. After TSA screening, the porters (under the existing contract) will load the cleared bags onto the load

BAGGAGE HANDLING EQUIPMENT 34 77 16 - 7 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

conveyor; the load conveyor shall have a stainless steel finish. Non-cleared bags shall be handled by Law Enforcement Office (LEO). b. At the end of the load conveyor, there is a new stainless steel fire/security door. An over-height detection photoelectric sensor shall be provided at the charge end of the conveyor after the door. Bags 36” or more in height shall be detected by the over-height photoelectric sensors; the over-height bags shall stop at this location (when the over-height bag arrives at the head-end photoelectric sensor of the conveyor) and will be removed by the porter and processed as oversized. c. Bags that are too large to be processed on BHS are termed Oversize. Oversize bags shall be identified by airline ticket agent and screened according to the existing TSA process near the ticket counter. Cleared oversize bags shall be manually moved to the make-up areas for processing. Non-cleared bags shall be handled by Law Enforcement Office (LEO). d. A stainless steel control station with warning buzzer shall be provided near the load conveyor for starting the load conveyor. A card reader will be provided next to the control station. e. A motorized pulley shall be provided to drive the load conveyor. f. All conveyors in this zone shall be equipped with Variable Frequency Drives (VFD).

3. Function Zone 2 – Outbound Transporting

a. The cleared bags shall be transported to the make-up area. After the stainless steel security/fire door, the outbound transport conveyor line shall be routed within the new enclosure and finally arrives at the new baggage makeup building. The transport conveyor lines shall be routed to the new building according to the respective predefined paths and elevations. The BHSC shall coordinate with GC for the predefined conveyor routing paths vertically and horizontally to construct the BHS based on these physical constraints in order to provide a fully functional BHS. b. A catwalk system shall be provided along the conveyor line. c. The conveyor line with catwalk system shall be hanged in this function zone. d. The control stations shall be provided along the conveyor line as indicated herein. e. There are at least three (3) sets of visual (Red for Startup, Amber for Fault and E- Stop) and audible warning beacons along the conveyor line.

4. Function Zone 3 – Make-up Area

a. At the new baggage make-up building, the outbound conveyor line shall be routed to the new make-up inclined/slope carousel (approximately 246 Feet carousel, centerline). b. The make-up carousel shall be provided with redundancy drives; the ratio of redundancy drive to the normal drive shall be one to one. c. The conveyor line with catwalk system shall be hanged except inside of the make- up carousel. d. There are eight (8) control stations for the make-up carousel; three (3) control station at each side and one (1) at each end. e. There are three (3) sets of visual (Red for Startup, Amber for Fault and E-Stop) and audible warning beacons within the make-up carousel.

BAGGAGE HANDLING EQUIPMENT 34 77 16 - 8 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

f. Each drive of the make-up carousel shall be provided with Variable Frequency Drive (VFD). g. The BHSC shall provide a plywood deck within the make-up carousel and a structural steel deck for MCP within the wood deck. h. The BHSC shall provide two (2) access hatches as shown on the BHS Contract Drawings.

C. Inbound Baggage Handling System (BHS):

1. The existing inbound Baggage Handling System (BHS) will not be modified in this project.

D. Coordination of the Work:

1. The Baggage Handling System Contractor (BHSC) shall include coordination with General Contractor and other systems that interface with BHS. 2. The Baggage Handling System Contractor (BHSC) shall provide a minimum of one (1) staff member (Site Lead) for coordination on site throughout the construction period. 3. The Baggage Handling System Contractor (BHSC) shall coordinate with General Contractor, airlines, and other system suppliers that interface with BHS for BHS demolition work and construction phasing. The BHSC shall not interrupt baggage processing flow during the BHS demolition work and construction phasing. The airline/airport operation and maintenance teams will also occupy and access the construction site anytime (i.e. 24 hours a day, 7 days a week, 365 days a year); the BHSC shall coordinate with the airline/airport operation and maintenance teams. 4. The Baggage Handling System (BHS) Contractor shall coordinate with General Contractor for all BHS electrical conduit routings and supports.

E. Alternatives: Not Used.

1.7 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittal Procedures: Refer to Division 01 Section “Submittals” for submission procedures. BHSC shall submit for this Work a schedule of submittals with delivery dates prior to submission of all other submittals and no more than 30 calendar days after award of contract for review and approval. No other submittals will be accepted until this schedule is approved.

B. Compliance List: Submit a “Compliance List” no more than 30 calendar days after award of contract for review and approval. The compliance list shall clearly identify every clause of this specification whether the BHSC fully complies, partially complies or does not comply. If the BHSC provides a statement of partially compliance or non-compliance, the BHSC shall include an explanation or suggest the associated substitutions.

C. Substitutions: Approval of substitute products shall be considered only under the terms and conditions specified in Division 01 Section “Product Requirements”. The BHSC shall indicate its substitutions to the COTR in writing. The BHSC shall not purchase any alternative products prior to obtaining the written consent from the COTR. The BHSC shall provide the following for review and approval:

BAGGAGE HANDLING EQUIPMENT 34 77 16 - 9 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

1. Detailed comparison of components specified herein with equipment to be provided.

D. Product Data: Submit product data and cut sheets including the highlighted model/part number and its description for all mechanical, electrical, control, computer and network components and/or equipment provided for this Work. The equipment that is to be provided for this Work shall be indicated appropriately with arrows, where multiple items are shown in the data. Product data shall be submitted prior to shop drawing submission. After approval, no variations from the submittal data will be permitted except by written consent of the COTR.

E. Description of Operation: The BHSC shall submit a description of operation for review and approval. The description of operation shall describe in detail the logic and controls (hardware/software) used to provide each function and list all associated devices for each function. The description of operation shall be submitted with the shop drawing submission. Provide Description of Operations of all systems, including interim and final configurations. Submittal shall be complete and include all systems identified herein.

F. Shop Drawings:

1. In addition to the submittal requirements specified in the General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, and/or Division 01, submit shop drawings for each conveyor system, existing BHS (if any) to be integrated into the complete functional BHS and all of its components, including layout, typical details of assembly, erection and anchorage drawn at large scale. Consolidated shop drawings for the items listed below shall be provided. Piece meal submissions are not acceptable and will be rejected and returned. At a minimum, include the following items:

a. Location, type and load of supports, each reaction at building connection and lateral bracing; additional steel members necessary to support BHS and catwalk; specific vibration isolation devices and techniques utilized at each support. For vibration isolation, shop drawings shall indicate specific structural loads, isolation device type, and device rating at each support. b. Layout plan of BHS with dimensions and elevations with components tied to the detailed bill of materials list. Section/Elevation drawings of the BHS keyed to the layout with components tied to the bill of materials list. Building and other building systems shown in the background for coordination. c. Location, dimensions, and rating of drive units. d. Provide manufacturer's product information on components of each system. e. Wiring diagrams for the complete power distribution systems and control systems. Submittal shall be completed with summary index page, legend page, comprehensive electrical installation notes, detailed device layout, detailed part list, power load, wiring diagrams, conduit size, conduit routing layout, electrical components, control station layouts, system layout plan showing control locations, static system map, PLC layout, wiring of I/O, interfaces with other systems, VFDs, etc. Fuses to be identified by wiring diagram rung ID. Electrical shop drawings must be submitted together with the Description of operation. f. Network Point to Point block diagram including field devices and switches. Include fields for IP addresses for as-built purposes. g. Static BHS map for each subsystem.

BAGGAGE HANDLING EQUIPMENT 34 77 16 - 10 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

h. Provide shop drawing detailing layout, front view, wiring schematics, material list, spare parts, etc. of each motor control panel. i. Shop drawing shall be of BHSC’s own design. If not, COTR will reject the drawing immediately, and any schedule impacts will be the sole responsibility of the BHSC.

2. Baggage Handling System Contractor’s written approval of installer’s qualifications, and copies of written warranty.

3. Identify each part in reference to a bill of material which shall indicate each part name, number, description, quantity, size, gauge, model name and number of purchase, component, and reference to detail part drawings or assembly drawing, if required for fabrication.

4. Assemble shop drawings into coordinated submittals. Drawings shall be complete, orderly and applicable to this installation only. Standard drawings properly referenced to assembly drawings are acceptable. Only drawings stamped with approval by the COTR, as required by the General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, and/or Division 1, shall be used for fabrication and installation.

5. Submit, 30 calendar days maximum after award of contract, structural shop drawings and detailed BHS structural components and connections calculations with illustrations prepared, signed and stamped by a registered structural engineer, licensed in the location of installation, for all conveyor and catwalk supports, additional steel members necessary for support, the stanchions for control station and the MCP structural steel deck and pipe rail around the carousel, all of which shall be engineered for seismic and structural loading.

G. Work Schedules: Submit comprehensive work schedule of BHS work as identified herein within 30 calendar days after award of contract for review.

H. Software, Programming and Report:

1. Submit documentation on all software and customized programs as identified herein, and hard copy of PLC programming for review. Submit detailed printouts of all software display screens. A FINAL DRAFT printed copy (letter size) of the PLC programs shall be submitted along with a final draft copy of all of the computer programming files prior to start-up. A final printed copy (letter size) of the PLC programs along with a final copy of all of the computer programming files shall be included in the O&M Manuals.

I. Power distribution: Submit, within 30 calendar days after award of contract, a summary of power distribution design data indicating the total connected load and greatest demand on the power supply.

J. Certification: Submit certification that the supervisory personnel have the required training and experience to perform their responsibilities within 30 calendar days after award of contract.

BAGGAGE HANDLING EQUIPMENT 34 77 16 - 11 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

K. Warranty Draft: Submit two (2) draft copies of BHS warranty and “New Daylight Saving Time” compliance warranty as specified herein for complete operating BHS for COTR’s review. Submit concurrent with shop drawings and include all specified inclusions.

L. Operating/Maintenance Manuals:

1. Submit Operation and Maintenance Manuals as specified herein and in Division 01 Section “Operation and Maintenance Data”. 60 calendar days prior to completion, submit a draft copy for review. The COTR shall indicate their approval or comments related thereto and return the draft to the BHSC. Submit the final manual copies no less than 30 calendar days prior to substantial completion or date of beneficial use, whichever occurs first, as specified, but prior to training of personnel. 2. Final O & M Manuals: These Manuals shall be bound in an orderly manner in loose-leaf lockable 3-ring binders with complete table of contents. A minimum of 15 sets shall be provided. Contents shall be divided into sections separated by dividers with properly labeled margin tabs. Manuals shall include the drawings as built, operating and maintenance instructions, wiring diagrams, connections and complete parts list of all items. Include manufacturer's literature, sources of purchase and similar information. Content of manual shall be acceptable to the COTR.

a. In addition to the above, the operating section of the O&M Manual(s) shall include the following:

1) Complete listing of electrical graphic symbols and reference designation per ANSI standards for all electrical equipment/components contained in the system(s). 2) Summary, location, units controlled, and function of Pushbuttons, Photosensors, Limit Switches, etc. 3) Normal system start-up and shutdown procedures of conveyor system(s). 4) Detailed description of operational troubleshooting of the conveyor system(s). 5) Electrical drawings:

a) Complete As-Built schematics. b) Power and control device location layout. c) Power and control device field termination. d) Motor Control Panel (MCP) back panel layout diagram. e) MCP door layout diagram. f) Status panel layout diagram. g) Control station face plate and legend layout diagram. h) Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) ladder diagrams.

3. The O & M Manuals shall fully cover appropriate safety measures, precautions and instructions to be followed before, during and after making repairs, adjustments, clearing jams, or performing routine maintenance, which shall conform to all established Federal, State, and Local Safety Laws and Regulations. 4. O & M Manuals must be updated by supplement to reflect any field changes (by the BHSC), equipment changes due to warranty changes, etc., that were made during the

BAGGAGE HANDLING EQUIPMENT 34 77 16 - 12 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

warranty period of the system(s), so that all sets of the O & M Manuals shall reflect As- Built information.

M. Testing prior to Commissioning:

1. Submit testing program/procedure/plan, include network and redundant computer failover testing, 60 calendar days prior to actual testing for review and approval. 2. Prior to final demonstration reviewed by the COTR, submit all approved testing program/procedure/plan, completely filled out, for review and use in the demonstration.

N. Commissioning:

1. Submit commissioning plan/procedure, include network and redundant computer failover testing, 60 calendar days prior to actual commissioning for review and approval. 2. Prior to final demonstration reviewed by the COTR, submit all approved commissioning plan/procedure, completely filled out, for review and use in the demonstration.

O. Training: Submit a draft copy of the training outline and program 60 calendar days prior to the start-up of the system for review and approval.

P. As-Built Drawing: Prior to project closeout, submit revised BHS mechanical, electrical and structural layouts and assembly drawings showing all field changes to the approved configuration. Refer to Division 01 Section “Project Record Documents” for format requirements.

Q. Spare Part Lists: Submit recommended and critical spare parts lists as identified in Part 3 of this Specification Section no later than 60 days prior to final testing.

1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Baggage Handling System (BHS) Contractor Qualifications:

1. BHS Project Manager: Subcontractor’s project manager who has successfully completed the installation and commissioning the previous five (5) years of at least two (2) systems of similar scope of Baggage Handling System as herein specified within the United States. 2. Control Engineering Team:

a. A Senior Control Engineer shall be assigned to the project as Lead Control Engineer and shall continue to work on the project site for the project duration. b. If the BHS/CBIS control and electrical engineering works including fabrication and installation are subcontracted to other firms, the BHSC shall submit a list of subcontractors (With The Proposal) for:

1) Upper level control software and hardware, 2) Lower level control software and hardware, 3) MCP and panel fabrications, 4) Field wiring.

BAGGAGE HANDLING EQUIPMENT 34 77 16 - 13 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

And the list shall indicate what percentage the subcontractor shall be responsible for its associated scope of work. c. After award of project, the approved control engineering team and the subcontractors for upper level control software and hardware, lower level control software and hardware, MCP and panel fabrications and field wiring shall not be replaced by others; their scope of work percentages shall not be changed.

3. Installer: If the BHS is to be installed by an entity other than the Suppler, the Installer and its Supervisory personnel shall be listed on the proposal forms and shall comply with the following requirements. Qualified personnel shall install the equipment with factory- trained and certified supervisors. Supervisory personnel shall each have at least five (5) years of successful experience with the installation of airport BHS devices of the type specified herein. 4. Electrical Installer: If the Electrical Installation is by an entity other than the Suppler, the Electrical Installer and its Supervisory personnel shall be listed on the proposal forms and shall comply with the following requirements. The Electrical Installer shall have not less than five (5) years continuous experience in the installation of similar systems, as specified herein; including systems utilizing PLC operated motor control panels and controls, as specified herein.

1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Delivery, storage and handling shall be in accordance with Division 01 Section “Product Requirements.”

B. Methods of storage of conveyor materials shall protect the materials from weather, rust, air-born grit and other construction debris. Deteriorated equipment shall not be installed.

1.10 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS

A. The BHSC shall coordinate with the GC.

1.11 SEQUENCING

A. The BHSC shall coordinate with the GC.

1.12 SCHEDULING

A. The BHSC shall coordinate with the GC.

1.13 WARRANTY

A. The warranty period shall be one (1) year from the Final Acceptance of BHS. Refer to the General Conditions for additional requirements.

BAGGAGE HANDLING EQUIPMENT 34 77 16 - 14 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

B. The BHS shall be warranted jointly and severally, on a single document, by the BHSC, Installer, and Manufacturer for complete operating BHS as specified herein and agreeing to repair or replace defective materials and workmanship of the work during the warranty period. Defective materials and workmanship are hereby defined to include operational failure, performance below required minimums, excessive deterioration or aging, abnormal wear considering intensity of use, unsafe conditions, excessive noise or vibration and similar unusual, unexpected and unsatisfactory conditions; but does not include defects caused by acts of nature, alterations, abusive use, vandalism, and similar cases beyond the control of the BHSC, Installer, and Designer/Manufacturer. In the event that the above defects occur within the warranty period, the BHSC for work under this section shall repair or replace the defective item(s) and assume full costs of labor and materials for such replacement. Replacement item(s) shall be new and meet the requirements of this specification.

C. New Daylight Saving Time Compliance:

1. BHSC shall warrant that all computer systems and related software installed under this contract are “New Daylight Saving Time” compliant. Non-compliance shall not be acceptable and shall be considered a design failure.

D. Design Failure: In the event that a design failure occurs during the warranty period, BHSC shall redesign/re-select and replace all components, assemblies, and/or devices utilized in and contributing to the failed design at no cost to The Authority. Submit proposed redesign shop drawings and component data sheets to COTR for approval. BHSC shall provide a new warranty period upon the correction of such design failure. Components, assemblies, and/or devices shall be considered as design failures if any of the following occurs during the warranty period:

1. Inappropriate action of control system components during operational conditions. 2. Discovering of an imminent safety hazard or occurrence of an accident during operational conditions. 3. Non-compliance with “New Daylight Saving Time” computer requirements as stated herein.

1.14 MAINTENANCE

A. The BHSC, prior to final acceptance of the BHS equipment, shall provide a written program for preventative maintenance and a schedule of implementation to be utilized by airport or airline maintenance personnel for approval by The Authority. The program shall, as a minimum, identify, adjust where necessary to comply with manufacturer's specifications, and schedule procedural activities. At a minimum, the schedule for implementation of the maintenance plan shall provide for monthly performance of the maintenance procedures for the first 4 months and bi-monthly thereafter.

B. Maintenance is not included in the Base Price of this Contract. The Authority may, at their option, enter into contract with the BHSC for preventative maintenance and repairs beyond the scope of this specification. If the Authority elects to accept this option for Maintenance, the minimum scope of services shall be as follows:

BAGGAGE HANDLING EQUIPMENT 34 77 16 - 15 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

1. The BHSC shall provide preventive maintenance for the conveyor equipment for a period of one (1) year beginning at the time the system is placed in service. 2. The BHSC, as part of his proposal documents, shall establish a program for preventative maintenance and a schedule of implementation for approval by the COTR. The program shall identify the functions to be performed, the frequency and schedule of routine and preventative maintenance functions, the maximum response time for emergency repair service and the staffing and other costs associated with providing the services. 3. At minimum, the program shall describe and schedule procedural activities for the following:

a. Lubricate all equipment periodically according to manufacturer's recommendations. b. Check for unusual noise on all drive and roller assemblies. c. Check for motion and vibration of motors. d. Check the temperature of gearboxes and motors. e. Check belt tension and tracking; check belts for wear and lacing. f. Check alignment for shift on shafts, drive belts and chains, loose keys. g. Check claim devices for wear, catch points, guide wheel/guide track misalignment and drive component noise. h. Operate all equipment and exercise all control functions. i. Clean equipment to the extent that accumulated dirt or lubricants could affect wear or performance or mark baggage.

4. The BHSC shall provide all materials, lubricants, consumables, tools, special tools and equipment necessary to accomplish equipment maintenance. 5. The Authority may, at their option, enter into contract with the BHSC for preventative maintenance and repairs in future years beyond the scope of this specification.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE

A. Assumptions:

1. This specification, a part of the contract documents, is a functional performance specification. The BHSC agrees to provide the work of this specification, as defined herein, to meet the functional performance requirements. 2. The BHSC shall develop a schedule of work, defining all tasks, to include those that require night work, tasks out of the construction barriers, and tasks that impact airport or airline systems. 3. Where tasks must be accomplished outside of the construction barriers, or where tasks impact the airport or airline systems, the BHSC shall be aware that the hours of airline operation are from 0600 to 2200. 4. Damages are defined in the contract for impacting airport or airline operations.

B. Performance Requirement:

BAGGAGE HANDLING EQUIPMENT 34 77 16 - 16 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

1. The BHS is to be designed / constructed to serve the performance standards listed herein.

a. The BHS shall not have jams in excess of 1%. This is calculated by taking the total number of bag jam events divided by the total number of bags in a 24 hour period. Three (3) bags shall be counted in any given bag jam.

2. System Processing:

a. Collecting Conveyor: 1000 Bags Per Hour b. Transport Conveyor: 1800 Bags Per Hour

C. Mechanical Design:

1. The BHSC shall be responsible for the detail design, fabrication, and installation of the systems to satisfy the requirements herein. 2. The drawings depict substantial physical and dimensional constraints necessary for coordination with the building structure, the existing mechanical and electrical equipment within the limited building envelope. The design represents functional requirements of the stakeholders. Minor alterations to the design to accommodate the BHSC’s equipment shall be left to the discretion of the BHSC. Verify all given dimensions and to obtain all other required dimensions from actual field measurements. The conveyor equipment schedule on the drawings is only intended for reference. Detail system engineering shall be the responsibility of the BHSC/manufacturer in accordance with good design practice for airport Baggage Handling Systems (BHS). 3. All steel works are related to BHS shall be part of BHS scope of work under BHSC. 4. Baggage Characteristics:

a. The equipment for standard bags shall be capable of conveying baggage of various sizes and shapes with dimensions not to exceed 36” high x 36” wide. Lengths of baggage, in general, will not exceed 54”. b. The minimum size of conveyable baggage is presumed to be 4” high by 12” wide by 12” long. The conveyable baggage under 12” shall be conveyed in a tub. c. The maximum weight per piece of baggage shall be assumed to be 100 lbs. The live load is assumed to be 40 lbs. per lineal foot at 90 fpm loading belts. All accumulating, load and unload conveyors shall be designed for a live load of 60 lbs. per lineal foot at 90 fpm. All conveyor equipment shall be capable of supporting a single concentrated load of 250 lbs.

5. Clearances and Configuration:

a. Conveyor lines shall be engineered and installed to have a minimum of 36” baggage clearance above the belt surface for standard bag. b. Conveyors with the associated catwalks installed over the driveways shall provide at least 8’-0” clearance to the lowest hanger of the catwalk, conveyor or drive components, unless noted otherwise on drawings. c. Maximum Angles:

1) For conveyor transporting normal sized baggage, the maximum angles of inclines and declines shall not exceed 17 degrees from the horizontal in non-

BAGGAGE HANDLING EQUIPMENT 34 77 16 - 17 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

tracking zones, unless noted otherwise on BHS Contract drawings. In some locations, angles greater than 17 degrees may be required and at these locations, the slope shall not exceed the angle noted on the contract drawings and special belting is required as identified herein. If conveyor angles are required to be greater than 17 degrees and are not noted on the BHS Contract Drawings as being greater than 17 degrees, the BHSC shall identify the location(s) and inform the COTR for review of the situation.

6. Conveyor Speeds:

a. Input conveyor speeds shall be approximately 90 feet per minute and the speed of each downstream section shall be incrementally increased as appropriate for the installation to promote the successful transfer of bags from section to section. The speed of conveyors discharging bags to make-up devices shall be as recommended by the carousel device manufacturer. Actual belt speeds shall be determined by the BHSC in accordance with good design practice for airport Baggage Handling Systems (BHS). BHSC shall design the systems to minimize the number of different horsepower ratings and size of reducers to maximize use of spare parts. b. Within the BHS, the conveyors which have frequently start and stop function shall be equipped with Variable Frequency Drives (VFD), dynamic braking resistor module and heat sink. All conveyors which are located at the sort lines and upstream of the sort lines shall be equipped with VFD’s, its internal/external dynamic braking resistor module and heat sink, which depends on its duty cycle, in a remote panel adjacent to conveyor/motor. c. The belt speed on each conveyor with VFD shall be at least 10% above the design speed with VFD setting at 60 Hz.

7. Quality Assurance:

a. All materials and components furnished shall be new and free from defects and rust. Used equipment, whether reconditioned or refurbished, shall not be installed for permanent work. b. Standardization shall be applied to the greatest extent practicable. Supply equipment of the same type and from the same manufacturer when multiple applications are required.

8. Operating Condition:

a. Normal operations shall be considered to be 20 hours per day, 365 days per year. b. All components shall operate satisfactorily within a temperature range of 20 deg. F to 120 deg. F, with a relative humidity of 0 to 100 percent. In spaces subject to exterior environmental conditions, all components shall operate satisfactorily within a temperature range of -30 deg. F to 120 deg. F, with a relative humidity of 0 to 100 percent.

9. Maintainability:

a. Equipment components requiring inspection and servicing shall be readily accessible. Suitable doors or removable enclosures in the building shall be

BAGGAGE HANDLING EQUIPMENT 34 77 16 - 18 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

furnished and installed within this contract for this purpose. On the conveyor, access holes in frames or guards are acceptable but shall be held to a minimum number and size, and shall not create protrusions or discontinuities detrimental to the baggage being conveyed or produce a safety hazard. b. Components shall be easily disconnected and removed from the equipment without the necessity for extensive disassembly. Components other than power turns, spiral turns, merges, and full conveyor sections shall be designed for removal and replacement by two maintenance workers in a period not to exceed two (2) hours. All components shall allow scheduled routine maintenance to be performed by two maintenance workers in a period not to exceed two (2) hours.

10. Vibration:

a. The conveyor equipment shall not produce or induce objectionable vibrations into the building structure. Vibration levels induced by the BHS and its components shall be minimized to the greatest extent possible by installation of vibration isolation devices as identified herein. In no situation shall vibration be injurious to the BHS or the building structure or be harmful or annoying to passengers and employees. b. Furnish and install vibration isolation devices or techniques on suspended and floor supported BHS to meet this requirement. Devices shall be as specified herein.

11. Seismic:

a. The BHS equipment and its structural attachments including all connection types shall be designed by the BHSC’s structural engineer, who shall be licensed in the location of installation, to meet the seismic requirements at this location. The structural engineer’s drawings and comprehensive calculations for all BHS structural components and connection types shall be submitted with 30 calendar days after award of contract for review and approval. b. The BHS structural design for BHS mechanical, electrical and static components shall comply with the general structural notes in Structural Contract Drawings.

12. Noise:

a. The BHS equipment with bags shall not generate noise which would be annoying or harmful to passengers and/or employees in public and operations areas. Noise requirements defined herein are based upon measurements indicating an ambient noise level of 50 dB in public areas, and 65 dB in non-public areas. The baggage handling system equipment shall not increase the ambient noise level more than 15 dB. The total noise levels shall not exceed 70 dB above the frequency of 4000 CPS or below 100 CPS (a harmonic condition could occur that would result in a cumulative noise level, due to the physical installation of other equipment in the area). b. Test conditions shall be as follow:

1) The BHS equipment with bags shall be turned off.

BAGGAGE HANDLING EQUIPMENT 34 77 16 - 19 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

2) All other equipment (i.e., HVAC equipment) shall be on and outside noise sources shall be normal, including aircraft and mobile ground equipment operating. 3) Noise level readings shall be taken throughout a zone five (5) feet above and away from the noise source using a standard ASA sound level meter set to the “A” weighted network. 4) After the ambient noise level has been determined, the BHS equipment with bags shall be turned on and the total noise level shall be measured at the same points throughout the zone that the ambient levels were measured.

13. Finger guards: Finger guards shall be provided on all conveyors that are in tenant work areas, accessible to tenant personnel; in public areas, and accessible to the public. 14. Skirting: Provide skirting on all load and unload conveyors in all tenant staffed areas. Provide flared sideguard(s) on adjacent downstream conveyor, as detailed in the BHS drawings. Skirting is not required where guardrail is provided adjacent to the conveyor. 15. Sideguards:

a. There is no sideguard at the load conveyor. b. All sideguards after the load conveyor shall be 21” in height. All sideguards at the catwalk side shall be 12” in height. c. Flared sideguards shall be provided at the charge-end of the conveyor after a fire/security door.

16. Catwalks, Ladders and Crossovers:

a. Catwalks, ladders, crossovers shall be provided to access all bag jam points, all control station locations, conveyor access point locations, and as required by code to properly access and maintain conveyors. BHS Contract Drawings show required catwalk locations, but may not show all necessary catwalk/ladder with self-close swinging gate/crossover. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to design and provide access, catwalks, ladders and crossovers for this function. The BHSC shall provide all necessary catwalks, ladders with self-close swinging gates, steps and crossovers as requested after the BHS has been installed. b. Six (6) feet clear above catwalk surface shall be provided. Where access is less than six feet, those locations shall be submitted for review and approval. Access points at or more than seven feet above any walkway surface shall supported by additional catwalk, unless noted otherwise or unless access above added catwalk would be less than the clear height restrictions listed above. Access points, bag jam points, control stations, etc. above four (4) feet from walkway shall be accessed by ladder wherever added catwalk is not possible. c. Catwalk materials shall be in accordance with the requirements identified herein. d. Clear access along catwalks shall be provided. Drive units along the catwalk shall not protrude across the catwalk more than 2/3 of its width with a minimum clear access of 14” between drive and other side of catwalk. Drives shall be staggered for access where conveyors are adjacent to each other with catwalk or maintenance access between the conveyors. Any obstructions, other than drive units, along the catwalk shall not restrict clear access more than 1/3 of its width.

BAGGAGE HANDLING EQUIPMENT 34 77 16 - 20 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

e. Ladders shall be ship ladder type wherever possible. Wherever ship ladders are not possible and vertical ladders are necessary, the locations shall be identified and submitted for review and approval. f. Catwalks shall be constructed of galvanized steel bar grating with serrated finish and with a minimum 70% open space except at the drive and high maintenance areas which need to be covered with a sheet of galvanized steel that is free of tripping hazard. Bar grating clips/clamp with bolt shall be utilized; self-tapping screw is not acceptable. Preferred catwalk width shall be 30 inches with a 4 inches kick plate except where adjacent to conveyors. The catwalk live load shall be 55 lbs. per square foot for building load calculations. g. Crossover shall be installed before any electrical works. h. All header steel beam and hanger connections shall be double nutted with flat washer and lock washer. i. Lateral bracings shall be provided throughout the system. The locations of lateral bracing shall be submitted for review and approval. Lateral bracings shall also be provided when the extra locations are identified by the COTR during the site inspections.

17. Handrails: Handrails shall be installed on all platforms and catwalks except where adjacent to conveyors. Handrails shall be constructed from 1-1/2 inch x 1-1/2 inch steel tubing and shall be nominally 42 inches from the catwalk to the top rail with a mid-rail provided at 21 inches above catwalk. Handrail shall be designed to withstand a concentrated load of 250 lbs. 18. Conveyor Openings:

a. Where conveyor penetrates the floor or other walking/working surfaces, the gap between the equipment and the edge of the opening shall be secured so that no person or tools can fall through the gap. The materials used to secure the gap shall be easily removable. b. Removable pan shall be provided between conveyor gaps.

19. Fire Resistance Filler at Fire Doors: Provide fire resistance filler at the locations of Fire Door to seal any openings that allow fire to penetrate. 20. Draft Curtains: Provide draft curtain with each security/fire door. 21. Expansion Joints: Expansion Joints have been placed throughout the existing building and new enclosure/building. The BHSC shall design the BHS to accommodate the building movement at each expansion joint; the design shall not cause any bags to have a jam or interruption of BHS and CBIS operation.

D. Electrical Design:

1. System Power Provisions:

a. Base Building Contractor:

1) Source for systems: 480 VAC, 3 phase, 60 Hz power will be furnished and installed within the Base Building Contract to each Motor Control Panel (MCP) as shown on the BHS contract drawings and/or electrical drawings.

BAGGAGE HANDLING EQUIPMENT 34 77 16 - 21 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

Amperage requirements vary with each system; refer to the BHS drawings and/or electrical drawings for amperage provisions. 2) The Base Building Contractor shall also provide emergency power to each MCP that is controlling security doors, security/fire doors, fire doors and conveyors immediately upstream and downstream of each type of door. 3) The Base Building Contractor shall provide Distribution Panels/Junction Box as shown on the electrical drawing. 4) The Base Building Contractor shall provide feeder cable from the Distribution Panels/Junction Box to each MCP within BHS. 5) The Base Building Contractor shall provide 120 VAC, single-phase control power required to each MCP.

b. Baggage Handling System (BHS) Contractor:

1) The BHSC shall coordinate with the Base Building Contractor for the connection of the feeder from the Distribution Panel/Junction Box to the BHS MCP and for the connection between the BHS MCP to the BHS field devices. 2) Beyond each provided feeder, the BHSC shall furnish and install services, feeders, and fused disconnects for branch circuits from each MCP as specified and furnish and install panel boxes, wireways, conduits, conductors, transformers, fuses, equipment and materials required to complete the fully functional electrical power distribution for the operation of BHS. If additional power is required, the COTR shall be informed immediately upon discovery. 3) The BHS field wiring work shall be part of BHS scope of work under BHSC.

c. Motors and Efficiency: Motors shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Energy Policy Act (EPAct) efficiency standards. For motor which is controlled by Variable Frequency Drives (VFD), the motor shall be inverter duty type and its motor insulation system shall be complied with NEMA MG-1 Part 31. Motors shall be listed and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories (UL). Motors shall be by one manufacturer throughout this Work. d. Drive Horsepower: Size conveyor drives so that starts can be made under full load conditions. BHSC shall identify horsepower requirements for each conveyor drive using the requirements identified herein. Requirements for determining the horsepower rating for each drive are listed herein and shall be complied with in the calculations. e. Variable Frequency Drives (VFD): Provide VFDs on all equipment where the manufacturer requires or recommends their use or as defined on the BHS Drawings. Where an equipment manufacturer requires or recommends use of a VFD, the BHSC shall coordinate with equipment manufacturer for VFD operational and location requirements or recommendations. VFD locations shall be submitted for review and acceptance. Each VFD shall be mounted at the conveyor/close to the conveyor that it is controlling, not in a centralized motor control panel. The VFD shall be equipped with external appropriately sized dynamic brake resistors and heat sink.

BAGGAGE HANDLING EQUIPMENT 34 77 16 - 22 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

f. Radio Interference: BHS equipment provided or its installation shall not cause interference with communications within the airport or between the airport and aircraft or ground vehicles. BHS electrical and electronic equipment, including inter-connecting wires and cables shall be designed to operate without malfunction in the presence of normal electro-magnetic emissions generated by other equipment installed or used at the airport. The normal airport environments shall include various electrical motors and controls, power tools (including welders), radar, automotive vehicles, communications equipment, etc. Provide isolation transformers and line suppression, if required. g. The BHSC shall submit a summary of power load requirements for each system to the COTR to verify the feeder size. Refer to submittal requirements. h. Uninterruptible and Conditioned Power (UPS): The BHSC shall provide Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) and conditioned power regulation for control and network equipment in the MCP. The BHSC shall be responsible to size the UPS for the actual equipment provided in order to meet the functional requirements of the BHS as stated herein.

2. Baggage Handling Control System:

a. Baggage Handling Inbound System: It will not be modified in this project. b. PLC system for Outbound System: The controls shall be designed to meet the specific functional requirements of the BHS for operation and maintenance information. The PLC shall have the ability to test the fire alarm and access control interface functions. At a minimum, the system shall consist of the following:

1) Programmable Logic Controllers (PLCs): The BHS shall utilize two (2) fully redundant Programmable Logic Controllers in a Cold-Backup configuration with an A/B switch. Remote I/O shall be in the Motor Control Panel (MCP). The BHS logic controller shall accept all external inputs from push-buttons, switches, and photocells, and act as the logic unit to control all conveyor functions and operations as specified in this Specification Section, as indicated on the drawings, and as required for a complete functional operating system. The PLCs shall be installed in the Motor Control Panel (MCP), as indicated on the drawings. The PLC shall be networked to each PanelView via Ethernet TCP/IP, or approved equal data communications link protocol. The PLC program shall control all operation functions, unless specified otherwise. Power to inputs and outputs that must remain operational during shut down due to E-Stop activation, circuit breaker trip, overload trip, etc. shall not be interrupted or disconnected by the associated occurrence, unless necessary for safety. 2) Redundancy: Equipment and components downstream of the PLCs are not required to be redundant, unless noted otherwise or necessary for the operation. 3) Software and Programming: The BHSC shall provide software and hardware consistent with industry standards, and where necessary, compatible with existing equipment.

BAGGAGE HANDLING EQUIPMENT 34 77 16 - 23 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

a) Graphical User Interface (GUI): Graphical User Interface (GUI) shall be user friendly. It shall be provided through a multi-tasking operating system capable of controlling multiple programs at one time. It shall incorporate object linking and embedding (OLE) technology or similar, and shall comply with the requirements identified herein and on the Contract Drawings. b) Networking and Communications: Networking and Communications shall be compatible with the data communication protocols and provide fast interfacing performance between all communication/control tiers. It shall comply with the requirements identified herein and on the Contract Drawings.

4) Software Documentation: The BHSC shall provide latest commercially available non-proprietary software wherever possible and applicable, unless application requires customized programming. Beta software is not acceptable. All software proprietary information shall be provided to the Authority prior to Final Acceptance, but shall not indemnify the BHSC for technical defects that occur with the software. Program source codes with Non-Disclosure Agreement and software licenses for this Work shall be owned by the Authority.

a) Documentation of commercially available software used in the system shall include all available information from the supplier of such software; all programmer and user manuals; and other similar material along with a complete listing of all software programs. Refer to submittal requirements. b) All data, software, related documentation of any form of writing, figures, or delineations, which are created for the Work that are not commercially available shall be provided to the Owner. Documentation on software unique to the system, not commercially available, shall include functional, performance, and interface requirements; descriptions of the supervisory, control, and operating software; configuration control documentation; flow charts; source listings; and programmer and user manuals incorporating appropriate modification and control procedures. Refer to submittal requirements.

5) Network Equipment for PLC: Provide an operational BHS network complete with all accessories as described herein.

3. Motor Control Panels (MCP): Control panels shall consist of floor-mounted code gauge sheet steel painted enclosures with hinged doors with key locks. An open type starter and circuit breaker shall be installed in the panel interior for each motor. A main disconnect switch or circuit breaker shall be furnished and installed inside housing with operating handle arranged to open or close with doors of control panels in closed position. Each starter and each control device shall be provided with a nameplate for maintenance purposes. All transformers shall be installed on the exterior of an MCP. The power for the control system shall be 120 VAC.

BAGGAGE HANDLING EQUIPMENT 34 77 16 - 24 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

a. System Status Indicators: Each MCP shall include a red startup visual beacon, an amber fault visual beacon and an audible alarm. Each MCP face shall include an E-Stop pushbutton, alarm silence pushbutton, system start pushbutton, lamp test pushbutton, and LED indicator lights for the following conditions:

1) LED Indicator lights

a) Green “System Ready” indicator (one per MCP) - indicates run condition. b) Red “E-Stop Activated” indicator (one per MCP) - indicates E-STOP pushbutton has been activated. c) Amber “Jam” indicator (one per MCP) - indicates bag jam condition. d) Blue “Motor Fault” indicator (one per MCP) - indicates motor overload trip condition. e) Blue “Motor Circuit Breaker Trip” indicator (one per MCP) - indicates motor circuit breaker trip condition (if applicable). f) Amber “Fire Detection” indicator (one per MCP) - indicates fire detection system interface activation (if applicable). g) Amber “Security Interface” indicator (one per MCP) - indicates baggage system activation enabling via interface with control access security system (if applicable).

2) Operator Interface Terminal (OIT): Each MCP shall be provided with an Operator Interface Terminal (OIT) display indicating the system configuration and providing maintenance operation controls. OIT units shall provide system status information for the associated system. The locations of BHS component graphics such as control station, photoelectric sensor and MCP shall match the BHS components in the field. OIT shall be able to display and track the hours of system operation and quantity of bags processed through the system. An 18” (minimum) square stainless steel static system map shall be provided adjacent to each OIT showing the system layout and location of equipment associated with motor control panel. OIT shall graphically display the baggage system or subsystem(s) layout associated with the motor control panel and each section of conveyor or device on the system layout shall show a color fill that is representative of the current status as follows:

a) Green fill for conveyor on and running. b) Gray fill for conveyor on and stopped. c) Red fill for conveyor stopped due to E-Stop activation. d) Yellow fill for conveyor stopped due to bag jam condition. e) Blue fill for conveyor stopped due to motor overload. f) Cyan fill for conveyors stopped due to circuit breaker trip (if applicable). g) Magenta fill for conveyor stopped due to flow control. h) Brown fill for out of service conveyor. i) Light Green fill for conveyor that has a HMI override. j) Brown fill for conveyor that has a motor disconnect off. k) Black fill for auto-stopped conveyor (Timed Out).

BAGGAGE HANDLING EQUIPMENT 34 77 16 - 25 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

3) In addition to the graphic BHS layout status fill colors, provide status indication symbols on the system layout display screens for the following conditions:

a) Green indicator (one per system controlled) - indicates "run" condition. Locate on bottom of all graphical display screens. b) Red indicator (one per E-STOP push-button) - indicates location at which an E-STOP push-button has been activated. Locate one symbol at each E-STOP location and turn symbol red only at activated E-STOP. c) Yellow indicator (one per bag jam photosensor) - indicates location at which a bag jam has occurred. Locate one symbol at each bag jam photosensor location and turn symbol yellow only at bag jam occurrence. d) White indicator (one per tall bag photosensor) - indicates location at which a tall bag jam has occurred. Locate one symbol at each tall bag photosensor location and turn symbol white only at tall bag jam occurrence. e) Blue indicator (one per motor) - indicates motor overload trip condition. Locate one symbol at each motor location and turn symbol blue only at overload tripped motor. f) Blue indicator (one per motor with VFD) – indicates VFD fault condition. Locate one symbol at each motor location and turn symbol blue only with VFD fault. g) Cyan indicator (one per motor control panel) - indicates motor circuit breaker trip condition. Locate one symbol at each system controlled from a motor control panel location and turn symbol cyan only at circuit breaker tripped system. h) Orange indicator (one per system controlled) - indicates fire detection system activation. Locate on bottom of all graphical display screens.

4. Control Functions:

a. Security/Fire Doors, Security Doors, Fire Doors:

1) Provide connection to limit switches and/or other monitoring devices on security/fire doors and additional contacts, if necessary, for monitoring of door open and door closed positions, and operational status of the door. These contacts shall be used for monitoring purposes by the BHS and the Access Control System. 2) Provide photoelectric sensor at security/fire door (Arrange the orientation of the photoelectric sensor to detect across the security/fire door and conveyors before and after the door) to detect presence of baggage. If baggage is detected, the conveyor belt shall advance to deliver the bag. If baggage is still detected, the warning system shall sound. 3) Doors that are strictly fire doors and do not provide a security function, as indicated on the drawings, shall function the same as security doors at all times, except in the event of a fire, when they shall operate as indicated herein in the “Description of Operation” for each type of BHS. Fire doors

BAGGAGE HANDLING EQUIPMENT 34 77 16 - 26 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

shall be provided with fusible links and labeled for the required fire rating by UL or an approved testing laboratory as described herein. 4) The BHSC shall provide doors that meet the requirements of these specifications and the requirements/physical constraints within the location of installation.

b. Interface with Signing System for Inbound Claim System: There is no interface between the existing Signing System of Inbound Claim System and the new BHS.

c. Interface with Access Control System (ACS):

1) Inbound Systems: It will not be modified in this project. 2) Outbound Systems: The interfaces shall be relocated to the new building and near the new MCP which control the security doors. 3) Additional signals from BHS to ACS, if any, shall be provided if they are requested by ACS.

d. Interface with Fire Alarm/Detection System (FAS): The BHSC shall provide wiring, circuitry and programming to stop the BHS in a control fashion upon direction from the Fire Alarm System (FAS). See Description of Operations for control sequences. The BHSC shall coordinate with Fire Alarm System (FAS) contractor for interface programming and connection requirements.

1) The interface of the BHS to the FAS will be one (1) dry contact closure per MCP which controls the fire doors. The BHSC’s responsibility shall wire to the dry contact and ensure that when a signal is sent to the dry contact from the FAS, that the conveyor segment of the conveyor line shall shut down appropriately (i.e., the conveyors will stop, ensuring that no bags are in door openings and if so will advance enough to clear the openings, and then the security/fire doors will come to a fully closed position). The GC/Electrical/Specialty contractor will supply the dry contact. See the FAS drawings for the location of this contact. The GC/Electrical/Specialty contractor will wire them back to the FAS, and ensure that when the FAS is in an alarm condition that the dry contacts will send that signal.

e. Interface with CCTV: There is no interface between BHS and CCTV. f. Interface with Common Users Terminal Equipment (CUTE): There is no interface between BHS and CUTE. g. Interface with Airline Departure Control System (DCS): There is no interface between BHS and DCS. h. Interface with Fight Information Display System (FIDS): There is no interface between BHS and FIDS. i. Interface with Bags Information Display System (BIDS): There is no interface between BHS and BIDS. j. Interface with Master Clock: There is no interface between BHS and Master Clock. k. Hold-In Circuit: A hold-in circuit shall be provided to ensure that all timers shall stop and not time-out whenever a system is stopped by either a jam or emergency

BAGGAGE HANDLING EQUIPMENT 34 77 16 - 27 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

stop so that no baggage can generate false alarms or become stranded between the load belt and the bag room. l. Jams Sensors:

1) Jam photoelectric sensors shall be positioned at the discharge end of all conveyors except the conveyors are located in public view behind check-in counters. If baggage blocks the photoelectric sensor for a timed interval exceeding set timer limit (adjustable 0-10 seconds), that conveyor plus the adjacent downstream conveyor shall stop and all related upstream conveyors shall cascade stop as bags block the photoelectric sensor of each section of conveyor. At power turns, spiral turns, queue conveyors, and short conveyors, where applicable, the shut-down operation shall be the same as identified above. Additionally, an audible and amber visual alarms shall turn on at the associated Motor Control Panel (MCP) and all associated audible and amber visual alarms in the field shall also turn on, an amber JAM light of JAM RESET pushbutton shall be lit on each associated loading belt control station and local JAM RESET lamp, at the appropriate point on the System Status OIT located on the front panel of the affected MCP. The MCP shall have a button for silencing the alarm. Each jam photoelectric sensor shall be provided with an adjacent amber JAM RESET illuminated pushbutton in the associated control station. After the jam has been cleared, actuation of the JAM RESET pushbutton shall turn off the local JAM RESET lamp, the associated loading belt JAM RESET lamp if applicable and silence the Fault Warning Beacons on the associated system. The baggage handling personnel shall then push the START pushbutton to start the stopped conveyors with the Start-up Warning sequence. 2) Photoelectric sensors and reflector shall be securely and rigidly installed and located in areas not subject to misalignment by transported baggage bumping the unit.

m. Bag Counters: The BHSC shall provide bag counter photosensor at the end of load conveyor. The counter shall keep track of the number of bags processed by the BHS. Counts shall be accumulated by the PLCs to track system usage. n. Timers: All timer functions shall be within the PLC programming, unless required otherwise for the operation or noted on the drawings. o. Head-end Photoelectric Sensors and Control Logic: The BHSC shall provide a photoelectric sensor at the discharge end of each non-public conveyor segment, to be controlled by head-end/cascade control logic. The BHSC shall provide associated PLC controls to allow the system to operate head-end/cascade function. Bag shall be stopped within each conveyor with head-end/cascade function; bag shall not be stopped at the gap between conveyors or onto the downstream conveyor. p. Public Accessible Emergency Stop Reset: At all E-STOP pushbutton stations located in areas accessible to the public, the reset function shall be key operated in addition to resetting the pushbutton. q. Manual Operation: For maintenance operation, provide manual control capability through an Operator Interface Terminal (OIT) or by other means acceptable to The Authority and Users, for each section of conveyor, device, or other type of conveying equipment within BHS for the purpose of providing belt tracking and

BAGGAGE HANDLING EQUIPMENT 34 77 16 - 28 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

equipment testing. System shall provide flexibility to allow different modes of operation. Manual control shall be locked either by password or mechanical means to prevent others from deactivating the maintenance control and producing a potential safety hazard. In the event that an E-Stop is activated on the associated system while a section is under manual operation, that section shall not automatically restart when the E-Stop is deactivated to prevent a safety hazard condition for maintenance personnel. Starting any conveyor in manual operation mode shall, at a minimum, activate the Start-up Warning subsystem in the local area of the activated conveyor sections. r. Control Station: The BHSC shall provide a control station enclosure at various locations along the conveyor lines; the BHSC shall provide the control stations at the make-up carousel and shall provide a control station every other straight conveyor section mounted on the conveyor frame near the drive section; the control station locations shall be submitted for review and approval. JAM RESET, E-STOP, START/RESTART and other associated pushbuttons shall be installed in these enclosures. Along the conveyor sections, size each control station enclosure appropriately for the number of pushbuttons and switches to be installed. E-STOP, JAM RESET, START/RESTART and miscellaneous pushbuttons for each conveyor section shall be grouped together as appropriate, unless noted otherwise on the drawings or herein. E-Stop control stations shall be provided at every 25 feet interval and as otherwise required herein. Separate control stations may be required for E-Stops as required herein. A control station shall be provided for each fire/security door. At outbound load conveyor and make-up carousel, the BHSC shall provide control stations as indicated on the BHS drawings and as required herein. The BHSC shall also provide all control stations including appropriate types which are requested by the COTR during shop drawing reviewing process and BHS construction. s. Emergency Stop: E-Stops shall be zoned for shut down. Zones shall be wired in series. Zones that are downstream shall not be taken off line. Description of zones shall be in the Description of Operations submittal. Refer to submittal requirements. t. E-Stop Zone: When one or more E-Stops are activated on a subsystem/zone, the E-Stop zone associated with that system shall cease to run immediately and the associated door shall close, the E-Stop pushbuttons within the zone shall illuminate, the activated E-Stop button shall illuminate flashing, the E-Stop Activated lamp on the associated MCP shall illuminate and the E-Stop shall be shown on the OIT display. To restart the system, the activated E-Stop pushbutton (mushroom head pulled out) shall be deactivated, the E-Stop pushbuttons within the zone shall cease to illuminate except the activated E-Stop pushbutton, and it places the subsystem in “Ready to Start” mode, the baggage handling personnel shall push the associated START/RESTART pushbutton to start the stopped conveyors and the door with the Start-up Warning sequence and the activated E- Stop pushbutton shall cease to illuminate. E-Stop zoning shall conform to the following conditions.

1) E-Stop Zone 1: E-Stop Zone 1 shall be comprised of the load conveyor and the security/fire door in public areas and shall stop the load conveyors and the security/fire door, but not the rest of the system.

BAGGAGE HANDLING EQUIPMENT 34 77 16 - 29 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

2) E-Stop Zone 2: E-Stop Zone 2 shall be comprised of all the transport conveyors downstream of the security/fire door in the public area and shall stop all conveyors of that zone up to the make-up carousel in the new building. If one or more E-Stops are activated within this E-Stop zone, the conveyors within the E-Stop zone shall stop and the associated upstream conveyors shall also stop, but not the rest of the system. 3) E-Stop Zone 3: E-Stop Zone 3 shall be comprised of the make-up carousel in the new building and shall stop the make-up carousel. If one or more E- Stops are activated within this E-Stop zone, the carousel within the E-Stop zone shall stop and the associated upstream conveyors shall cascade stop.

u. System Start-up: BHS activation from a stopped condition in a staffed area shall activate the start-up sequence of the warning system as described herein prior to the system operating. BHS shall not start-up under any circumstances without activating the start-up warning system procedures. Start-up warning system shall be in accordance with ANSI B-20.1. v. System Restart: BHS activation from a Restart station (from a stopped condition) shall activate the start-up sequence of the warning system as described herein prior to the system operating. Systems shall not start-up under any circumstances without activating the start-up warning system procedures. Start-up warning system shall be accordance with ANSI B-20.1.

5. Expansion Joints: The BHSC shall design the electrical and control BHS components and equipment to accommodate the building movement at each expansion joint according to the NEC or local electrical code requirements, whichever is more stringent; the design shall not cause any breakages/damages of the electrical and control BHS components and equipment or interruption of the BHS operations. 6. BHS Conduit: The BHSC shall provide BHS conduit and its supports for a complete functional BHS. The BHSC shall coordinate with the COTR and General Contractor for conduit routings and supports. 7. Phenolic Label: Each BHS component in the field (but is not limited to motor, motor disconnect, VFD, warning beacon, photoeye, shaft encoder, limit switch, panel view, control station and pushbutton) and in the MCP (but is not limited to disconnect, transformer, warning beacon, panel view, pushbutton, replay, motor starter, fuse, PLC, I/O modules, switch, light, receptacle, 24VDC power supply and circuit breaker) shall be provided with a device identification phenolic label with a minimum 1/2” letters.

E. Description of Operations:

1. Outbound System:

a. Load Conveyor:

1) System Start at Load Conveyor: Each system shall be started through a START pushbutton in each of the control stations along each loading belt. These START pushbuttons shall be enabled by a security access card reader/key pad, furnished and installed by the Access Control System (ACS) Contractor. Once the activation of the baggage system has been approved, pushing the START pushbutton shall activate the start-up audible and visual

BAGGAGE HANDLING EQUIPMENT 34 77 16 - 30 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

warning beacons along the associated conveyor system and in the make-up areas, as required by code. After a predetermined time delay (adjustable 10 to 60 seconds), the security/fire door shall open, the system shall start, and the audible and visual warning beacons shall shut off. Once the security/fire door is open and the limit switch indicating door fully open has enabled the baggage system activation, the baggage system shall start. The “Start” pushbuttons at the load conveyors shall activate the transport conveyors in a sequenced order starting from the downstream end.

a) A security access card reader/key pad will be furnished and installed by the ACS Contractor, at locations indicated on the baggage system and security system drawings. Refer to “Interface with Access Control System – Outbound Systems” identified herein for operational and interface requirements. b) If the ACS is not functioning, the system shall be started by a keyswitch at the control station, which is provided by the BHSC, from authorized airport personnel.

2) System Restart: Restarting the system due to stoppage from emergency stop pushbuttons, jam detection shutdowns, or motor overloads shall activate the start-up warning system sequence prior to the system restarting. The system shall start the associated downstream transport conveyors in a sequenced order from the downstream end. Systems shall not start up under any circumstances without activating the start-up warning system sequence. 3) System Stop (Auto):

a) Automatic stopping of each system shall be accomplished through a “last bag” photosensor located at the discharge end of each loading belt. Each time the system is started and when a bag interrupts the photosensor beam, the timing logic shall be reset. After a time interval sufficient to ensure that all bags in transit on the conveyor line have reached their destination, the timing logic shall time out and the transport conveyor shall stop and the security/fire door shall close. The security/fire door closing function shall be on an adjustable timer (0 to 5 minutes) in the programming of the system. b) Cascade Stop: When the system detects a downstream conveyor stop, the preceding conveyor and the upstream conveyors shall continue to operate until the head-end photosensor, which controls the associated conveyors, detects a bag. At that time, that conveyor shall stop. The next upstream conveyor shall continue to operate until that head-end photosensor’s beam is blocked. This action shall continue until the most upstream conveyor is stopped. During the cascade stop condition, the cascaded conveyors shall remain stopped for safety purpose even if their associated head-end photosensors are cleared.

4) Load Conveyor Stop: Provide STOP pushbuttons in the control stations at the load conveyor. STOP pushbuttons when pressed shall immediately stop the conveyors at and upstream of the security/fire door and shall close the security/fire door immediately.

BAGGAGE HANDLING EQUIPMENT 34 77 16 - 31 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

5) System Stop (Emergency):

a) Each system may be stopped anytime during the normal operation by depressing one of the maintained-contact emergency-stop (E-STOP) buttons which are to be located adjacent to the belt conveyors. E-STOP push-buttons shall be located at a maximum of twenty-five (25) foot intervals along the conveyors. If a control station containing an E-Stop is more than twenty-five (25) feet away, an additional E- Stop control station must be provided to comply with this requirement. E-Stop pushbutton shall be provided in every control station containing a START/RESTART and/or JAM RESET pushbutton. Zoning of E-Stop shut down shall be as identified herein. b) When one or more E-Stop buttons are depressed, all conveyors within this associated E-Stop zone as identified herein shall be stopped and the red visual beacons and audible alarm shall be activated at the MCP and in the field. When the E-Stop pushbutton is depressed, the red light shall flash on the actuated E-Stop pushbutton and all E-Stop pushbuttons in the E-Stop zone shall be illuminated solid. After clearing the emergency, the system shall be restarted by resetting the actuated E-Stop pushbutton and then pressing the START/RESTART pushbutton. Resetting the E-Stop pushbutton shall extinguish the lamp of E-Stop pushbutton. The start-up warning system shall activate as required prior to the system restarting, as described herein. c) The security/fire door shall close when the system stops due to E- Stop. d) When one or more E-Stop pushbuttons are depressed during the automatic system stop, the security/fire door will continue to close. e) After E-Stop pushbutton is depressed, it shall immediately stop all conveyors except the conveyors before and after the security/fire door, and after the “Door Obstruction” photosensors at the security/fire doors identify that the doors are clear, the conveyors before and after the security/fire doors shall stop and the doors shall fully close. If the “Door Obstruction” photosensor sees a bag which is under the door, the conveyors shall advance the bag until the “Door Obstruction” photosensor is clear, and then the conveyors shall stop and the door shall close. If the door is not able to be closed, BHS shall send a signal to ACS.

6) System Stop (Fire Emergency):

a) Provide wiring to connect BHS to the dry contact(s) interface of the Fire Alarm System. In the event of a fire, a signal shall be sent to the BHS from the Fire Alarm System; the PLC programming shall stop all BHS equipment of the associated Life-Safety zone. The BHSC shall coordinate interface requirements with the Fire Alarm System Contractor and installer. b) After BHS receives the Fire Alarm signal, it shall immediately stop all conveyors except the conveyors before and after the security/fire doors, and after the “Door Obstruction” photosensors at the

BAGGAGE HANDLING EQUIPMENT 34 77 16 - 32 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

security/fire doors identify that the doors are clear, the conveyors before and after the security/fire doors shall stop and the doors shall fully close. If the “Door Obstruction” photosensor sees a bag which is under the door, the conveyors shall advance the bag until the “Door Obstruction” photosensor is clear, and then the conveyors shall stop and the door shall close. c) System restart shall be accomplished through the system start-up procedure.

7) Ticket Counter System Stop (Power Outage):

a) In the event of a power outage, all security/fire doors shall fully close after emergency power is provided and the “Door Clear” photosensors at the security/fire doors identify that the doors are clear. If the “Door Obstruction” photosensor sees a bag which is under the door, the conveyors shall advance the bag until the “Door Obstruction” photosensor is clear, and then the conveyors shall stop and the door shall close. If the door is not able to be closed, BHS shall send a signal to ACS.

b. Transport System:

1) Transport System Start: After the load conveyor has been activated and security/fire doors are fully open, each associated transport conveyor shall be activated in a sequenced order starting from the downstream end at carousel and the visual and audible warning subsystems shall shut off.

2) Transport System Restart: Restarting the system due to stoppage from emergency stop pushbuttons, jam detection shutdowns, or motor overloads shall activate the start-up warning system sequence prior to the system restarting. The system shall start the associated downstream transport conveyors in a sequenced order from the downstream end. Systems shall not start up under any circumstances without activating the start-up warning system sequence. 3) Transport System Stop (Auto):

a) Automatic stopping of each system shall be accomplished through a “last bag” photosensor located at the discharge end of a transport conveyor. Each time the system is started and when a bag interrupts the photosensor beam, the timing logic shall be reset. After a time interval sufficient to ensure that all bags in transit on the conveyor line have reached their destination, the timing logic shall time out and the transport conveyor shall stop and the security/fire door shall close. The security/fire door closing function shall be on an adjustable timer (0 to 5 minutes) in the programming of the system. b) Cascade Stop: When the system detects a downstream conveyor stop, the preceding conveyor and the upstream conveyors shall continue to operate until the head-end photosensor, which controls the associated conveyors, detects a bag. At that time, that conveyor shall stop. The

BAGGAGE HANDLING EQUIPMENT 34 77 16 - 33 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

next upstream conveyor shall continue to operate until that head-end photosensor’s beam is blocked. This action shall continue until the most upstream conveyor is stopped. During the cascade stop condition, the cascaded conveyors shall remain stopped for safety purpose even if their associated head-end photosensors are cleared.

4) Transport System Stop (Emergency):

5) Transport System Stop (Fire Emergency):

BAGGAGE HANDLING EQUIPMENT 34 77 16 - 34 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

all BHS equipment of the associated Life-Safety zone. The BHSC shall coordinate interface requirements with the Fire Alarm System Contractor and installer. b) After BHS receives the Fire Alarm signal, it shall immediately stop all conveyors except the conveyors before and after the security/fire doors, and after the “Door Obstruction” photosensors at the security/fire doors identify that the doors are clear, the conveyors before and after the security/fire doors shall stop and the doors shall fully close. If the “Door Obstruction” photosensor sees a bag which is under the door, the conveyors shall advance the bag until the “Door Obstruction” photosensor is clear, and then the conveyors shall stop and the door shall close. c) System restart shall be accomplished through the system start-up procedure.

6) Transport System Stop (Power Outage):

c. Make-up System:

1) Make-up System Start: After the load conveyor has been activated and fire/security doors are fully open, each associated transport conveyor shall be activated in a sequenced order from the downstream end (make-up carousel) and the visual and audible warning subsystems shall shut off. 2) Make-up System Restart: Restarting the system due to stoppage from emergency stop pushbuttons, or motor overloads shall activate the start-up warning system sequence prior to the system restarting. Systems shall not start up under any circumstances without activating the start-up warning system sequence. 3) Make-up System Stop (Auto):

a) Automatic stopping of each system shall be accomplished through a “last bag” photosensor located at the discharge end of the input conveyor at the public area. Each time the system is started and when a bag interrupts the photosensor beam, the timing logic shall be reset. After a time interval sufficient to ensure that all bags in transit on the conveyor line have reached their destination, the timing logic shall time out and the transport conveyor shall stop and the fire/security door shall close. The fire/security door closing function shall be on an adjustable timer (0 to 5 minutes) in the programming of the system. When the last bag has arrived at the carousel, the carousel shall continue to run for 5 minutes (adjustable timer 0 to 10 minutes).

BAGGAGE HANDLING EQUIPMENT 34 77 16 - 35 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

4) Make-up System Stop (Emergency):

a) Each system may be stopped anytime during the normal operation by depressing one of the maintained-contact emergency-stop (E-STOP) buttons which are to be located above the make-up device. E-Stop pushbutton shall be provided in every control station containing a START/RESTART and/or JAM RESET pushbutton. Zoning of E- Stop shut down shall be as identified herein. b) When one or more E-Stop buttons are depressed, the make-up device within this associated E-Stop zone shall be stopped and the associated upstream conveyors shall cascade stop. When the E-Stop pushbutton is depressed, the red light shall flash on the actuated E-Stop pushbutton and all E-Stop pushbuttons in the E-Stop zone shall be illuminated solid. After clearing the emergency, the system shall be restarted by resetting the actuated E-Stop pushbutton and then pressing the START/RESTART pushbutton. Resetting the E-Stop pushbutton shall extinguish the lamp of E-Stop pushbutton. The start- up warning system shall activate as required prior to the system restarting, as described herein.

5) Make-up System Stop (Fire Emergency):

a) In the event of a fire, a signal shall be sent to the BHS from the Fire Alarm System; the PLC programming shall stop all BHS equipment of the associated Life-Safety zone. The BHS Contractor shall coordinate interface requirements with the Fire Alarm System Contractor and installer. b) System restart shall be accomplished through the system start-up procedure.

6) Make-Up System Stop (Power Outage):

a) In the event of a power outage, all fire/security doors shall fully close after emergency power is provided

2. Inbound System: It will not be modified in this project.

2.2 RECIRCULATING MAKE-UP DEVICES

A. Slope Plate Carousel:

1. Description: Rotating, slope plate/inclined plane display devices, consisting of a stainless steel stationary curb and top with a canted moving surface for baggage display constructed of linked stainless steel flights and capable of operation in the configuration shown on the drawings. 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, or as acceptable to the Authority, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product. Products may be provided by, but are not limited to, one of the following:

BAGGAGE HANDLING EQUIPMENT 34 77 16 - 36 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

a. Slope plate carousel manufactured by G&S b. Slope plate carousel manufactured by Siemens c. Slope plate carousel manufactured by VanDerLande Industries d. Or approved equal.

3. Load Rating: Carousel shall be capable of a minimum live load of 125# per peripheral foot, starting fully loaded without the redundant drives. Load test shall be performed under fully loaded with the combination of drives (without the redundant drives). 4. Speed: Carousel shall rotate at a constant peripheral speed not less than 90 FPM nor greater than 100 FPM and coordinated with the input velocity of the feed conveyors. 5. Flights:

a. Flights and closure panels shall be fabricated from heavy gauge stainless steel. Sharp or protruding edges shall not be acceptable. Fabrication shall be to close tolerance to avoid gaps capable of trapping fingers, baggage or otherwise constituting a safety hazard. Where flights are designed to bear on adjacent flights, means shall be employed to avoid deterioration, grinding and residue from such contact which would mark or stain baggage. Flights shall be fabricated for the direction of rotation and shall not produce a catch point for bags at the turns. b. Flights shall be approximately 60 inches in length and set at a slope not less than 18 degrees or exceeding 22 3/4 degrees.

6. Curb: Perimeter curb shall be of formed stainless steel sections fastened with concealed fasteners or countersunk, button head or oval head matching screws. Joints shall be true and edges shall be finished. Protrusions or sharp edges shall not be acceptable. Curb shall provide an adequate toe space. The back of the toe space shall be finished with a rubber base mounted with ½” plywood backing on devices. 7. Baggage Stop: Provide a stainless steel backstop with a stainless steel railing mounted to the floor and independent of the devices at the points where baggage is transferred onto the devices. The purpose of this rail shall prevent injury to baggage handler/passengers from removing bags at the point where baggage is sliding down to the curb bumper from the feed conveyor. 8. Bumper: Perimeter bumper shall be a black, resilient non marking material. The bumper shall be configured to avoid gaps or open unprotected condition at the curb, which would be hazardous. 9. Frame, Track and Drive: Frame shall be constructed of structural steel, primed and enameled except for wearing surfaces. Drive chain guideways and wheel tracks shall have tight, well aligned joints or liners for smooth, noise free operation. Drive lugs or sprockets engaging the drive chain shall be smooth and quiet. Drives shall be protected with overload and jam protection. Frame and track shall be grounded. Drive shall be designed for operation from a 480 VAC, 3 phase, 60 Hz power source. Each drive shall be provided with a VFD. VFD type shall be as specified herein. The drive shall be sized to permit start up under full load conditions without the redundant non-primary drives. Each carousel shall be provided with redundant drives (One to one ratio). Motors shall be as specified for conveyor sections. Reducer type shall be SEW Eurodrive S or K- Series, or approved equal. 10. Deck: Raised platform consisting of a 3/4 inch fire resistant plywood deck capable of supporting 75 pounds per square foot and paint with gray color. Provide two (2) access

BAGGAGE HANDLING EQUIPMENT 34 77 16 - 37 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

hatches with lockable latches, flush with surface, for finish, and sized per manufacturer's requirements at locations shown on the BHS Contract Drawings. 11. Structural Steel Deck for MCP: Provide a structural steel deck for MCP within the plywood deck as shown on the BHS Contract Drawings; and the deck shall be grounded per NEC. The surface shall flush with the plywood deck. 12. Feed:

a. Transition Plate: Provide stainless steel transition plate to steel substrate transition plate at gap between feed conveyor and device as detailed in the BHS Contract Drawings.

13. Toe Space: The gap between the floor and the carousel unit shall be completely closed.

2.3 SILDER BED BELT CONVEYORS

A. Description: Steel frame slider bed conveyors for normal and high speed operations.

B. Drives: See electrical section for other requirements.

1. Motors:

a. The conveyors shall be driven by AC motors or brake motors that comply electrically with NEMA MG1. Motors shall be sized for maximum load and belt speed requirements under continuous operation (minimum size 2 HP), and shall be capable of withstanding shock caused by frequent starting and stopping under full load where applicable. If overrun is critical to system control operation, motors shall be equipped with automatically applied brakes to prevent overrun after the motors have been de-energized. All motors shall be provided with overload protection of each leg in the control panel. Bolts for mounting of motors shall be welded to motor mount frame for easy replacement of motors. b. Conveyor motors shall be in accordance with Energy Policy Act (EPAct) Efficiency Standard. Motors shall be wired for operation with 230/460 volt, 3- Phase, 60 Hz current, Class F insulation and operable in an ambient temperature up to 40°C. All motors shall have NEMA Design B characteristics and shall be provided with Totally Enclosed Fan Cooled (TEFC) enclosure and a service factor of 1.15. Speed under full load shall be constant at approximately 1800 RPMs. Type shall be SEW Eurodrive or as acceptable to The Authority. c. Conveyor motor which is controlled by Variable Frequency Drives (VFD) shall be inverter duty type and its motor insulation system shall meet NEMA MG1, Part 31.

2. Reducers:

a. In-line Reducers: In-line reducers shall be SEW Eurodrive R-Series or as acceptable to The Authority. b. Right Angle Reducers: Right angle reducers shall be SEW Eurodrive K-Series or as acceptable to The Authority.

BAGGAGE HANDLING EQUIPMENT 34 77 16 - 38 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

c. Class II applications: Reducers are to be sized for Class II applications as a minimum. Reducers used on inclines and declines shall be equipped with a brake motor. d. Shaft End cover: Shaft end cover shall be provided at the end of exposed rotating shaft.

3. General Requirements: All drive units shall be equipped with drip pans.

C. Roller Assemblies:

1. Pulley and Shaft Requirements: All pulleys and shafts shall be sized either as indicated herein or per ANSI/CEMA B105.1, latest revision. Pulleys and shafts sized per ANSI/CEMA B105.1, latest revision shall comply with all applicable ANSI/CEMA requirements and the requirements specified herein, unless in conflict with ANSI/CEMA. BHSC shall indicate on their submittals which method used for sizing pulleys and shafts. 2. Power Pulleys: All power pulleys for intermediate-type drives shall be lagged with a minimum 3/8” thick vulcanized lagging of 50-60 durometer and be trapezoidal faced and equipped with taper-lock hubs and 1-7/16” minimum diameter C1018 C.R.S. shafts mounted in eccentric locking-type precision and ground flange-type ball bearing units. Pulleys and shaft sizes are determined by maximum belt pull, and there are four classes which are as follows:

a. Light-Duty (250 pounds maximum belt pull) consists of a 6-3/4” minimum diameter drive pulley with a 1-7/16” minimum diameter shaft. Where used, roller chain shall be RC-60. b. Normal-Duty (500 pounds maximum belt pull) consists of an 8-3/4” minimum diameter drive pulley with a 1-11/16” minimum diameter shaft. Where used, roller chain shall be RC-60 or larger. c. Intermediate-Duty (1,000 pounds maximum belt pull) consists of a 10-3/4” minimum diameter drive pulley with a 1-15/16” minimum diameter shaft. Where used, roller chain shall be RC-60 or larger. d. Heavy-Duty (1,500 pounds maximum belt pull) consists of a 12-3/4” minimum diameter drive pulley with a 2-3/16” minimum diameter shaft. Where used, roller chain shall be RC-80 or larger.

3. End Drive Power Pulleys:

a. Power pulleys for end-type drives or power take offs shall be lagged with a minimum 3/8” thick vulcanized lagging of 50-60 durometer, and be 6” diameter (minimum) trapezoidal faced and equipped with taper-lock hubs and 1-7/16” minimum diameter C.R.S. shafts mounted in eccentric locking-type precision and ground flange ball bearing units. End-type drive units shall not be used for conveyors exceeding 25’ in length.

4. Motorized Pulley:

a. The motorized pulley shall be wired for operation with 230/460 volt, 3-Phase, 60 Hz current, Class F insulation and utilize oil for lubrication and heat dissipation. Checking oil level shall be permitted without removing the motorized pulley from

BAGGAGE HANDLING EQUIPMENT 34 77 16 - 39 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

the conveyor frame. Oil shall be minimum rated for 10,000 hours of life. Type shall be Van der Graaf or as acceptable to The Authority.

5. Head and Tail Pulleys:

a. All non-powered head and tail pulleys shall be of steel, trapezoidal faced, equipped with taper-lock type hubs and 1-7/16” minimum diameter AISI 1018 C.R.S. shafts mounted in eccentric locking type precision and ground flange-type ball bearing units. All head and tail pulleys shall be 6” in diameter minimum x 10-gauge wall. Pulleys shall be of a single piece steel construction and have steel end discs attached to the rim by continuous welding. Slider bed shall be arranged to keep the gap between the end section and the end pulley to a minimum. All head and tail pulleys used for belt tracking shall be equipped with jacking bolts to facilitate adjustment. b. All pulleys are to be statically balanced when operating speeds exceed 200 rpm, and dynamically balanced when speeds exceed 500 rpm. Rollers of eccentric material, such as standard pipe, are to be statically balanced when operating speeds exceed 200 rpm, and dynamically balanced when speeds exceed 400 rpm. Rollers made of seamless tubing may be used without balancing at speeds up to 1000 rpm, providing straightness is held to close limits and excessive welding flash is not present; for speeds in excess of 1000 rpm, dynamic balance is required.

6. Return Idlers:

a. The return rollers shall be a minimum of 2-1/2” diameter, 12-gauge steel equipped with an 11/16” hex axle. b. All hex shaft return idler rollers shall be equipped with sealed, permanently lubricated, caged, semi-precision type ball bearings. Return idlers shall be located on centers not to exceed ten feet, with spacing being reduced in areas where belting may drag against the floor or conveyor structure. The shafts shall be mounted to the conveyor bed with adjustable retainers for proper belt tracking.

7. Snub Pulleys:

a. All snub pulleys shall be a minimum of 3-1/2” in diameter, steel, trapezoidal faced, and equipped with taper-lock type hubs and 1-7/16” minimum diameter C1018 C.R.S. annealed and machined steel shafts mounted in eccentric locking type precision and ground flange-type ball bearing units. All snub rollers used for belt tracking shall be equipped with jacking bolts to facilitate adjustment.

8. Take-Ups:

a. All take-up pulleys shall be a minimum of 4” in diameter, steel, trapezoidal faced and equipped with taper-lock hubs and 1-7/16” minimum diameter AISI 1018 C.R.S. shafts mounted in eccentric locking-type precision and ground flange-type ball bearing units. Pulleys shall be mounted on threaded take-up devices with steel guides and a minimum of 6” adjustment. All conveyors shall be provided with take-ups for field adjustment of a minimum of 2% of the conveyor bed length.

BAGGAGE HANDLING EQUIPMENT 34 77 16 - 40 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

Take-ups shall be an integral part of the drive frames on all intermediate-drive conveyors. b. All conveyor sections in excess of 50’ in length operating in tunnels or outside of the building subject to extreme temperature and humidity' changes shall be equipped with automatic take-up devices. c. All take-ups used in heavy-duty or high-speed applications shall be the same as above except shall be of 6” diameter with 1-7/16” diameter shafts.

9. Bearings:

a. Each roller/pulley shall be equipped with a pair of proper duty type bearings. The bearings shall be Dodge ABHS bearings, Eccentric Collar Ball bearings or as acceptable to The Authority. b. All bearings shall be lubed for life (66% grease fill) with pipe plug and pop-in end cover. Bearings shall be mounted on the outside of the conveyor frame unless clearance restrictions prohibit. c. All exposed bearings in work areas shall be equipped with bearing covers and meet OSHA requirements for employee safety. Bearing covers shall be provided on all conveyors that are in tenant work areas, accessible to tenant personnel; in public areas, and accessible to the public. d. Bearings shall have a minimum L-10 life of 70,000 hours based on the service and loading of conveyors and on the manufacturer's published data showing load rating of each bearing used. e. Bearings shall be greased when installed per manufacturer’s recommendations.

D. Chutes and Slides: Where a chute or slide is indicated on the drawings or is required, it shall be constructed of 10 gauge min. galvanized steel for the bed and the sideguards shall be 12 gauge min. hot-rolled steel. Sideguards shall be 18 inches high and reinforced with stiffeners spaced at 40” maximum on center.

E. Power Turns and Spiral Turns:

1. Turns shall be steel frame construction, shall be ‘C’ size and the width shall match the width between sideguards of the adjacent downstream conveyor. Belt speed of turns, as measured on the centerline, shall be at least as fast as the input conveyor and the same speed or slower than the output conveyor. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, or as acceptable to the Authority, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. FLOmaster Division of Portec, Inc. b. Or as acceptable to The Authority.

F. Belting:

1. All belting for level transport, feeder lines, or incline and decline conveyors up to 6 degrees and exposed to public view shall be Goodyear “Plylon 2 Ply 220 Poly/Nylon Rib Weave Bare x Bare”, Scandura “Royalon 2-220 Bare by Bare”, Habasit “NMB-11ESBV”

BAGGAGE HANDLING EQUIPMENT 34 77 16 - 41 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

or “NAD-10ESBV”, Nitta “BLC-12A”, Ammeraal Beltech “PHR 2-220 1/32 x Bare FR”, Siegling America “E8/2 U0/V5H MT-FR Black” or as acceptable to The Authority. 2. All belting for level transport, feeder lines, or incline and decline conveyors up to 6 degrees and not exposed to public view shall be Goodyear “Plylon 2 Ply 220 Poly/Nylon Rib Weave Bare x Bare”, Scandura “Royalon 2-220 Bare by Bare”, Fenner Dunlop “FDI 150 FR FxB” or “FDI 150 PH FR FxB” or “FDI 150 TR FR FxB”, Habasit “NAL- 12ELBV” or “NSL-10ESBV” or “NSL-11ESBV” or “UMS130LR-B”, Nitta “BLC- 18DKF2”, Ammeraal Beltech “EX 10/2 0+00 AS FR”, Siegling America “PVK125 FS x FS-NA FR Black” or as acceptable to The Authority. 3. All belting for level transport with sortation function shall be Siegling America “PHR3- 200TW BB x BB FR or as acceptable to The Authority. 4. Belting for all incline and decline conveyors with 6 degrees to 18 degrees slope shall be Chemprene “2 ply 150 PIW Stepped Diamond by Bare”, Fenner Dunlop “FDI 150 HI RTxB Green” or “FDI 150 FR RTxB Black”, Goodyear “3 Ply 135 PIW Black Airport x FS Wedge-Grip”, Habasit “NAL-12ELBV” or “NSL-10ESBV” or “NSL-11ESBV” or “UMS130RT-B”, Nitta “BLRB-16A”, Ammeraal Beltech “EX 10/2 0+A32 Black AS FR”, Siegling America “PVK125 RT x FS-NA FR” or as acceptable to The Authority. 5. Belting for all incline and decline conveyors with more than 18 degrees (if any) shall be Siegling America “E12/2 V1/V10 LG-M FR” or as acceptable to The Authority. 6. The width of all belts shall equal the between guard dimension of the respective conveyor minus three (3) inches. 7. Belts for Queues, Merges, Reverse-Merges, High-Speed Horizontal Diverters, Vertical Diverters, Power Turns and Spiral Turns shall be heavy-duty type, and as recommended by the manufacturer for BHS. 8. Belt Lacing: Each conveyor belt shall be furnished and installed in one piece and spliced at one location. All belt lacing shall be Clipper type or approved equal and sized as required for belt thickness and type per the belt manufacturer’s recommendation for each application.

G. Static Components:

1. Beds: Sturdy slider bed construction is required and shall be constructed of a minimum of #11 gauge steel. Butt type coupling joints shall be provided. Cross braces shall be located so as not to contact the belt run under normal circumstances. Bed widths are as shown on the drawings.

a. Adjacent conveyors shall be bolted together. Welding shall not be permitted as an assembly technique.

2. Noseovers: At all transitions from incline to horizontal or horizontal to decline, the bend shall be constructed in the same manner as slider bed construction. The bed shall have a 10’-0” radius breakover slider bed as a design objective, unless noted otherwise on the drawings. Bends may have a 5’-0” radius minimum where a smaller radius is required due to space limitations. For return belt idling, noseovers shall be equipped with a snub roll. 3. Skirts:

BAGGAGE HANDLING EQUIPMENT 34 77 16 - 42 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

a. Skirts shall be bolted to the top of the frame rails on the loading side(s) of the conveyor and shall consist of #14 gauge or heavier sheet metal approximately 6” deep with a toe space, where applicable. b. Provide skirting on all load and unload conveyors in tenant staffed areas, and as shown on the BHS drawings.

4. Sideguards: Guards shall be a hot-rolled steel formed channel #12 gauge steel with stiffeners (bracing) on a maximum of 3’-4” centers on transport lines and 2’-6” centers on the loading belts. Unless otherwise noted, guards shall be required on both sides except where baggage is being loaded at which point only one guard shall be required. Provide flared sideguard(s) on adjacent downstream conveyor after a security/fire door, as detailed in the BHS drawings.

a. The top rail of all sideguards shall be formed with a ¾” double break to eliminate exposed sharp edges and snag points. b. Butt type coupling joints shall be employed on all sideguards exposed to the baggage flow.

5. Protective Guarding:

a. Protective Under Bed Guarding:

1) All drive units shall be completely enclosed by expanded metal screen, either hinged at one end or with quarter-turn fasteners at both ends, and of minimum 14-gauge steel. 2) All guards shall comply with applicable OSHA standards and shall have an expanded metal screen to allow belt inspection without removal of the guard. All expanded metal screen shall have a maximum size opening of 1/2 inch. Paint the screen OSHA yellow. 3) Provide removable expanded metal screen on the return belt side of all conveyors from 1’ to 13’-0” above finish floor or catwalks. 4) Paint all such guarding, including the pipe guard around load areas, with OSHA yellow enamel. 5) Underguarding shall be in accordance with ANSI B 20.1, OSHA, and local code requirements.

b. End Roll/Pulley Guarding: Finger guards shall be provided on all end rolls and pulleys not covered by shrouding that are in tenant work areas, accessible to tenant personnel; in public areas, accessible to the public, and as shown on the BHS Contract Drawings.

6. Supports: Floor type supports shall be vertically adjustable and of sturdy design. Bracing between the vertical support legs and the conveyor bed frame shall be provided to ensure rigidity of the installed conveyor. Such supports shall be at a maximum of 5-foot centers for loading and unloading conveyors, and a maximum of 10-foot centers elsewhere. Supports are to be anchored to the floor using mechanical or chemical anchors in keeping with the floor construction. Supports shall be constructed from 12- gauge material or heavier. Vibration isolators shall be Type ND Double Deflection Neoprene Mounts by Mason Industries, Inc. or as acceptable to The Authority.

BAGGAGE HANDLING EQUIPMENT 34 77 16 - 43 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

7. Hangers: Ceiling hangers shall be limited to a maximum load of 1800# each. Hangers shall be spaced at a maximum of 10-foot centers, and, in general, shall be located at the discretion of the Installer except where specific requirements are shown on the drawings. All hanger connections shall be double nutted with flat washer and lock washer, if bolted, or have similar safeguards to avoid loosening from vibration. Header steel shall be installed horizontally; tilted header steel is not acceptable. All header steel beam connections shall be double nutted with flat washer and lock washer. Threaded rod shall be installed perpendicular to the conveyor support/sill; bowed threaded rod is not acceptable. Vibration isolators shall be provided for BHS and catwalk system. Vibration isolators shall be the combination spring and double deflection LDS hanger type by Mason Industries, Inc. or as acceptable to The Authority. 8. Padding: Provide 1-inch thick foam rubber pipe insulation on all conveyor supports, conveyor edges, or any other new or existing equipment located less than 6’-8” above catwalks and above conveyor where catwalk is not provided adjacent to the conveyor. 9. Painting:

a. All structural parts, except those surfaces coated with a hot-dig galvanized coating, and those that would normally be unpainted (such as rollers, shafts, sprockets, bearings, chains, nameplates, etc.) shall be painted with two shop coats of rust-inhibiting enamel or shall be electrostatic powder coating. This includes all support structure, bed underside, drive structure and pulley guards, etc. Paint the chain guards OSHA “yellow”. b. The conveyor bed surface or the interior surface of sideguards shall be electrostatic powder coated as described below or as acceptable to The Authority.

1) Electrostatic Powder Coating Application: All surfaces to be painted shall be thoroughly cleaned of rust, scale, oil, grease, grit, welding flash, and other forms of dirt. Paint shall be an epoxy-type powder coat. Paint shall be applied as an electrostatic spray to a film thickness of 1.5 – 2.5 mils and cured at a minimum of 350 degrees Fahrenheit for 10 minutes. Finish shall conform to ASTM D3363 with a hardness of 3H, and shall conform to ASTM D3359B, with an adhesion and cross hatch rating of 5B PASS.

c. Paint OSHA “yellow” at each location of catwalk elevation change.

10. Shrouding:

a. Shrouding shall be provided for conveyor equipment located in public areas as shown on the drawings. The shrouding shall be formed stainless steel, minimum 12-gauge, Type 304 with #4 brushed finish running longitudinally. All connections shall be smooth and flush without openings. b. All joints between stainless steel sections shall be uniform with adjacent surfaces properly aligned. Tolerances of joint width and surface alignment shall not exceed 1/16” per foot, which shall not be accumulative. Joints shall align properly, where joint meet and are parallel with each other. c. Where stainless steel shrouding requires a laminated substrate for stiffness, the substrate shall be laminated on all surfaces for stabilization and moisture control to prevent warpage.

BAGGAGE HANDLING EQUIPMENT 34 77 16 - 44 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

11. Conveyor Identification: Each conveyor section shall be permanently and indelibly marked. Each conveyor number shall be carefully and neatly painted or stenciled in a contrasting color, nominally 4” high, in a conspicuous location on the conveyor drive. Temporary markings on the conveyors or other equipment shall be made with a medium which is readily removable with water or a readily available commercial solvent, such that they may be removed without requiring refinishing of the surface on which they appear. All existing conveyor identifications shall be removed/covered.

2.4 ASSOCIATED EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL

A. Draft Curtains: Draft curtains with mounting shall be provided where the doors (any types of door) are shown on the drawings and shall be two staggered layers of black vinyl strip (8” x 1/16”) with anti-static beaded belting.

B. Catwalk and Ladders:

1. Provide and install catwalks and ladders as shown on the drawings. All apparatus shall conform to OSHA and Local Building Code standards and requirements. 2. Catwalk support system shall be integral with the conveyor support system. 3. Catwalks shall be constructed of galvanized steel bar grating with serrated finish, minimum of 70% open space except at the drive and high maintenance areas which need to be covered with a sheet of diamond plate galvanized steel that is free of tripping hazards to provide a flat surface for maintenance access. Catwalk shall be supported as shown on the BHS Contract Drawings and as required herein. 4. Catwalks shall be parallel to level conveyors. Where conveyor is inclined, catwalks shall be level platforms connected by steps or ship ladders. Under inclines, catwalks shall extend under conveyors to provide a work space to service drives. 5. Provide design and assembly drawings, stamped by a licensed structural engineer who has a license at the location of installation, for the catwalk/conveyor supporting system and attachments to the building structure. 6. Ladders shall have a capacity of 300 pounds per rung. The rungs shall be square in shape (cross section) and the foot hold (top surface to each rung) shall have a gripping surface. 7. Angled ladders shall have hand rails. Vertical ladders where taller than 8’-0” shall have cages for the portion above 8’-0” except on a side where access to an adjacent catwalk or platform is required. Ladders shall be provided with self-close swinging gates.

C. Curbing and Guardrails: Dia. 4” Steel tube guardrails (OSHA Safety Yellow) shall be provided as shown on the BHS drawings for protection of conveyor sections, drive assemblies, and electrical hardware vulnerable to damage by tug/cart movements. (Concrete curbing, if required, will be furnished and installed within the General Contract).

D. Security/Fire Doors:

1. Security and fire doors are required as shown on the drawings and shall be 2 hour fire rated minimum, electrically operated coiling/rolling type. Door models shall be selected to conform with the limited space available inside the claim devices and within doghouses where applicable. All exposed surfaces visible to the public shall be stainless steel, type 304 with #4 brushed finish. Accessibility to all motors, operators, emergency

BAGGAGE HANDLING EQUIPMENT 34 77 16 - 45 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

operators, door attachments, guide attachments, hoods, etc. shall be from the secured side of the door only, unless noted otherwise. 2. Operation: Shall be by motor operator. Power supply shall be provided through the associated BHS and controls shall be coordinated with the BHS. Door activation shall only be through the associated BHS, refer to “Description of Operations” as specified in this section for operational sequence requirements. 3. Curtains: At locations not visible to the public, provide interlocking slats of cold roll formed galvanized steel. At locations visible to the public, provide interlocking slats of stainless steel. Gauge to be as recommended by manufacturer to withstand applicable impact from the BHS or other forces. Endlocks shall be attached to the slats to maintain curtain alignment and prevent lateral slat movement in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. Curtain shall be reinforced with a bottom bar consisting of two steel angles or a box shape. At locations of a climate separation, the curtains shall be thermally insulated as specified by the manufacturer. 4. Guides: Shall be roll-formed steel shapes or structural steel angles as recommended by the manufacturer. Attachment to jamb shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. 5. Brackets: Shall be steel plate to support the barrel, counterbalance, and hood, and shall be equipped with self-aligning lubricated ball bearings. 6. Counterbalance: Shall be helical torsion springs housed in a steel pipe barrel, supporting the curtain with a maximum deflection of .03 inches per foot of width. Counterbalance shall be adjustable by means of an adjusting tension wheel. 7. Hood: Shall be 24-gauge galvanized primed steel minimum. Hood shall be equipped with thermally controlled internal galvanized steel flame baffle when required. 8. Locking: Gearing shall be self-locking. 9. Fire Rated Doors: Where a fire rated door is required herein or as indicated on the drawings, the door shall be rated to meet the requirements of the location of installation. The door shall operate as indicated in “Description of Operations” in this specification section. Fire doors shall be labeled by “Underwriters Laboratories” or other testing laboratory acceptable to local code authorities. Fire doors shall be provided with fusible links, that in the event of a fire is present at the door location, the door will close. All doors and conveyor sections shall function as indicated in the “Description of Operations”. The Security/Fire Door shall be Vigneaux Corp. or as acceptable to The Authority. 10. Motor Operation: Shall include 120 volt AC, single-phase, high torque motor; reduction gearing; solenoid break; emergency operation; overload protection; and prewiring terminal block. Door shall be activated by the associated baggage system, refer to “Description of Operations” in this section for system sequence. Emergency operation shall be activated a control access security system card reader, furnished and installed within this contract, or a key operation if the card reader is not provided. 11. Controls: Provide limit switches to identify when door is closed, partially open, and fully open. Switches shall be heavy-duty, industrial type. Provide a photoelectric sensor at security/fire door to detect presence of baggage. Photoelectric sensor shall be as specified herein. Limit switches and photoelectric sensors shall be monitored by the associated BHS and control access security system through the BHS control subsystem. Coordinate BHS and control access security system for controls interface requirements. 12. Fire Resistance Filler at Fire Doors: Provide fire resistance filler at the locations of Fire Door to seal any openings that allow fire to penetrate.

BAGGAGE HANDLING EQUIPMENT 34 77 16 - 46 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

13. Waterfall Arrangement: The conveyor which is immediately upstream of the security/fire door shall be installed at least 1/2” higher in elevation than the immediately downstream conveyor.

2.5 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

A. General:

1. Materials shall be of the quality specified herein, new, free from defects, of the best commercial/industrial grade, and approved by a nationally recognized testing laboratory wherever published standards exist. Each type of material shall be of the same make and manufacturer throughout the project. Materials shall comply with NEC or Local Code requirements, whichever are more stringent. 2. The electrical equipment identified herein is based on products by different manufacturers and indicates the level of quality and performance required for the equipment. Provided that the equipment is equal in quality and performance to that identified herein and meets the requirements of these contract documents, electrical equipment by Allen-Bradley, Schneider Electric, Cutler-Hammer, Square D, or as acceptable to The Authority is acceptable for use in this Work. 3. All computers, PLCs, and other components with processor chips shall be “Year 2000” and “New Daylight Saving Time” compliant. Refer to Warranty section identified herein for design failure requirements.

B. Motor Control Panels (MCP):

1. Panels shall be designed and arranged by a control company with a history of 5 years experience of previous work in BHS. Control panels shall be provided fully designed and manufactured ready to install for field connected wiring. BHSC shall install panels secured to floor to withstand earthquake conditions of 1.5 times panel force. Provide fluorescent light fixture(s) inside each motor control panel to properly light electrical equipment and tagging, which shall turn on when MCP door is opened. 2. Control Device Identification: MCP component identification shall be provided so that all relays, timers, starters, overloads, fuses, etc. can be readily identified when the MCP door is opened. In addition to all prime manufacturers' nameplates, all electrical and mechanical control items mounted in or on panels or pushbutton stations shall be further identified in the system by permanently attached corrosion-proof, etched, engraved, or stamped identification plates. Dymo-type labels are not acceptable. 3. All motor control panels and surface-mounted enclosures shall be NEMA Type 12, except those exposed to direct rain, which shall be Type 3 or 4 Weatherproof. MCP shall be Hoffman Heavy-Duty Free-Standing Enclosure or as acceptable to The Authority. Other panels shall be Hoffman or as acceptable to The Authority. 4. Main Power Shutoff: Shall be a heavy duty, 480-Volts, 3 Phase, fused switch. Shutoff shall be General Electric, Allen-Bradley, Square D or as acceptable to The Authority. Fuses shall be up to 600A - RK1 fuses. Shutoff shall be installed inside housing with operating handle arranged for connect or disconnect with doors of control panel in closed position. Size for added 30% code motor load. The BHSC shall install all required warning placards on all MCPs.

BAGGAGE HANDLING EQUIPMENT 34 77 16 - 47 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

5. Emergency Power Fusible Disconnect Switch and Operating Mechanism: Shall be a heavy duty, 480 Volts, 3 Phase, fused. Disconnect shall be General Electric, Allen Bradley, Square D or as acceptable to The Authority. Fuses shall be RK1 fuses. Disconnect shall be installed inside the MCP. Size for added 30% code motor load. The BHSC shall install all required warning placards on all MCPs. 6. NEMA Motor Starters and Circuit Breakers: Contractor shall have option of providing either NEMA Starters or IEC Starters, as listed below.

a. Circuit Breakers: Motor circuit breakers shall be Magnetic Only Motor Circuit Breakers, 480-Volts, 3-Pole, 15,000 A.I.C. minimum, and sized as required for intended load. Circuit breakers shall be Allen Bradley, General Electric, Schneider Electric or as acceptable to The Authority. Circuit breakers shall coordinate with RK1 fuses in main and shall be an UL approved coordination. b. NEMA Starters: All NEMA starters shall be Allen-Bradley 509 Series or as acceptable to The Authority. Motor starters shall be NEMA Rated, 3-Pole, 480V, 120V Starter Coil Voltage, magnetic across-the-line contactors, each with a holding contact and auxiliary contacts as required. Motor starters shall each have three manual-reset, thermal-overload relays. Reversing motor starters shall be Allen-Bradley 505 Series or as acceptable to The Authority and shall have electrical and mechanical interlocks. Starters shall incorporate thermal overload protection in all phases. Overload shall be set at 100%. Minimum starter size shall be NEMA size “0”. All motor starters shall be mounted in Motor Control Panels with their associated controls.

7. IEC Motor Starters and Group Fusing: Contractor shall have option of providing either IEC Starters or NEMA Starters, as listed above.

a. Group Fusing: Fuse blocks shall be rated for 600-Volt, 3-Pole, and sized as required for intended load. Fuse blocks shall be Bussmann, Marathon, or as acceptable to The Authority. Fuse block, fuses, and associated components shall coordinate with RK1 fuses in main and IEC starter, and shall be an UL approved coordination. Components and installation shall comply with NEC or Local Code requirements, whichever are more stringent. b. IEC Starters: All IEC starters shall be Schneider Electric TeSys U-Line motor starters with “D-Line” series contactors, Allen-Bradley bulletin 140 series starters with bulletin 100 series contactors, or as acceptable to The Authority. Motor starters shall be UL approved for group motor installations and protected by group fusing in accordance with UL and NEC requirements. Short circuit protective device size shall comply with NEC requirements for group motor installations of this type. Starters shall be 3-Pole, 480V, 120V Starter Coil Voltage, with auxiliary contacts as required. Installation shall conform to NEC requirements. All motor starters shall be mounted in Motor Control Panels with their associated controls.

8. Relays:

a. Control Relays: Shall have a 120-volt AC coil rating, and each relay shall have a minimum of eight NO/NC contacts rated at 600 volts, 10 amps. Allen-Bradley Model 700-P Series with 700-MP universal mounting strip. Provide Allen-Bradley surge suppressors on control relays.

BAGGAGE HANDLING EQUIPMENT 34 77 16 - 48 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

b. Relays: Shall have a 120-volt AC coil rating, Model 700-HA Series with 700- HN100 screw terminal tube base socket. c. All timing functions shall be accomplished in the programming. Timer relays are not acceptable, unless specifically required for an operation. For VFD delay control in E-Stop function, it shall be Allen-Bradley Model 700-FE Series or as acceptable to The Authority.

9. Programmable Logic Controllers (PLCs) with Cold-Backup Redundancy: System shall have Cold-Backup Redundancy with an A/B switch, Processor with 30% spare memory minimum, 120-volts AC Power Supply input, 6 month minimum battery backup for memory, 20% spare I/O capacity minimum, remote I/O communications capability, peer- to-peer communications, communication port configured for programming or user-defined ASCII connection, low voltage and 120 volt I/O Modules, Programmer unit, Mounting Bases, and all appurtenant equipment necessary for a complete operating system. Systems shall be Allen-Bradley 1756 ControlLogix System 1756-L62 controller or as acceptable to The Authority. Network communication shall be Allen-Bradley “ControlNet” or as acceptable to The Authority. 10. Terminal Strip for Terminal Blocks: Shall be Allen-Bradley 1492 Series, screw connection and space-saver feed-through type, screw connection and space-saver grounding type or as acceptable to The Authority with white marking surface. Provide 20% spare capacity in terminal strips. Terminals shall be used as contact points for system operation and interface with other systems. Identify each contact for its system or interface connection. 11. Control Transformers: 480/120-volt, Single-Phase, 60-Hz, size with 15% spare capacity, dry type, encapsulated core and coil transformer. Power protection and conditioning is needed for PLCs, I/O racks and OITs; the type shall be Sola/Hevi-Duty MCR Hardwired Series, Model 63-23. For other control equipment, it shall be Sola/Hevi-Duty, General Electric 9T58K, Acme Electric Corp., or as acceptable to The Authority. 12. 24 VDC Power Supply: The type shall be Sola/Hevi-Duty, SDN DIN Rail Series, 120 VAC input or as acceptable to The Authority. 13. Power Distribution Block: 600V, 3 pole, Allen-Bradley Model 1492, Bussmann PDBFS Series, or as acceptable to The Authority. 14. System Display/Maintenance Control: Provide one Operator Interface Terminal (OIT) unit at each motor control panel for system display and maintenance control operations. Type shall be Allen-Bradley “PanelView Plus 1250 Color” or as acceptable to The Authority. In addition to the OIT, provide a stainless steel static system map adjacent to the OIT with location of all associated control components. Graphic display software shall be Allen-Bradley FactoryTalk View, or acceptable to The Owner. 15. Three Phase Voltage Source and Phase Reversal Protection: Provide monitoring for protection against loss of three phase voltage source and phase reversal. Signal from relay shall shut the associated BHS down and identify a fault condition in the fault monitoring system. Monitors shall be Allen-Bradley “Solid-State Line Voltage and Current Monitor Relays (Bulletin 813S)”, Square D “Phase Failure Relays (Class 8430 – Type MPD)”, or as acceptable to The Authority. 16. Provide a florescent light fixture for every two bays of the motor control panel. Fixture type and size shall be coordinated with the MCP and mounted in the top of the panel. It shall not prevent easy maintenance access of any controls or other components in the panel. Provide a door switch inside the panel to control the light fixture. Locate on the main panel door. Single pole switches shall be rated 20 amps at 120/277 volts.

BAGGAGE HANDLING EQUIPMENT 34 77 16 - 49 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

17. Provide a cooling fan/air Conditioning Unit with filter for each MCP; the unit shall meet the requirements of NEMA Type 12 Ventilated Enclosures. 18. Provide a duplex outlet in the panel for power to a laptop or programming module for programming of the PLC. Outlet shall not be used for operating power tools or non- programming activities. Receptacles shall be of specification grade and shall be Duplex 20-amp, 120-volt, 2-poled, 3-wire, Ivory color, Hubbell CR20 or as acceptable to The Authority. 19. Pilot Light: Each light shall be Allen-Bradley Type 800T LED pilot light or as acceptable to The Authority. 20. Future Equipment: All BHS motor control panels shall be designed for "future" equipment. Based on the available space in the control panel, panel builder shall determine the type and amount of future equipment. As an example, future motor circuit equipment shall be arranged as a logical continuation of the current circuits as space permits, extend the control relay mounting rail as space permits for future control relays, etc. Control panel back plane shall be drilled and tapped as required for all future equipment. Electrical/controls drawings shall identify the location of future equipment.

C. Conduit/Raceways:

1. Except as otherwise noted, all electrical wiring shall be enclosed in conduit. The trade size of the conduit shall be 3/4” or larger. Conduit shall be in compliance with NEC or Local Code requirements, whichever are more stringent. Except in public areas, conduit shall be installed exposed in locations selected to prevent damage to conduit by moving vehicles or equipment. In public areas, conduit runs shall be inconspicuous by running under cover plates, behind conveyors, or otherwise concealed from public view. Conduit shall be Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) above 7’-0” AFF. Conduit shall be rigid galvanized below 7’-0”. Raceways shall be concealed in public and finished areas. Raceways shall be run parallel with or at right angles to the building lines. Conduits shall be grouped as practical. Provide flex connections to motor control panels. Wiring shall be installed only after conduits have been cleaned and belled. Conduits shall be sized in accordance with NEC or Local Code requirements, whichever are more stringent. 2. All flexible conduit, where used, shall be in compliance with NEC or Local Code requirements, whichever are more stringent. Flexible conduit shall be connected from wall mounted, ceiling mounted, floor mounted, or trapeze mounted conduit to conveyor sections and to motors. 3. Rigid Steel Conduit: Hot-dip galvanized. Allied, Western, Triangle or as acceptable to The Authority. All conduits greater than 1.5” diameter shall be rigid steel conduit, unless noted otherwise. 4. Conduit Fittings:

a. Unions: Threaded-type, Erickson or split couplings. T & B, Steel City, OZ, or as acceptable to The Authority. b. Locknuts: Steel up to two-inch; malleable iron for 2-1/2 inch and larger. T & B, Appleton, or as acceptable to The Authority. c. Bushings: Cadmium-plated malleable iron for 1/2 to 1 inch; phenolic-insulated type for 1-1/4 inch and larger. OZ, T & B, Appleton. Note: Aluminum fittings shall not be used.

BAGGAGE HANDLING EQUIPMENT 34 77 16 - 50 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

5. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT): Galvanized. Allied, Western and Triangle. Minimum size shall be ¾”. All conduits 1.5” diameter or less and not susceptible to damage shall be EMT, unless noted otherwise. 6. EMT Fittings: Couplings and connectors shall be steel compression-ring type, rain tight and concrete tight. T & B, Appleton or as acceptable to The Authority. 7. Flexible Conduit (Less than 2 feet): Liquidtight type, minimum size 1/2 inch. Shall be AFC, or as acceptable to The Authority. 8. Flexible Conduit Connectors: Cast metal, clamp style and insulated type. Screw-in type connectors are not acceptable. 9. Wireway: Hinged cover, baked enamel finish, size as required. Shall be General Electric, Square D, Circle AW, or as acceptable to The Authority. 10. Conduit Supports:

a. Surface-mounted: 1-hole, malleable iron, hot-dip-galvanized straps. T & B, Appleton, Steel City. b. Pendant-mounted: For single units, 1/4-inch rod with pear-shaped hanger; for multiple raceways or wireways, trapeze-type hanger with 3/8-inch rod, 1-5/8 inch square performed channel and pipe clamps.

D. Conductors:

1. All conductors shall be copper and in accordance with NEC or Local Code requirements, whichever are more stringent. Low voltage (less than 90 volts) control wiring shall be installed in separate conduits and not combined with power or control (greater than 90 volts) wiring. Control wiring shall be installed in separate conduits and not combined with power wiring. Control wiring shall be terminated, where necessary, in junction boxes on terminal boards, make wire numbers on terminal strips. The term “conductor” as used in these specifications shall be considered as any wire cord, cable, rod, buss, fuse, or similar product designed for the transmission of electrical energy. 2. Conductors for Motor Control Only: Exterior to control panels, conductors shall be Type THHN/THWN-2 for all wet and dry indoor locations and shall be Type XHHW-2 for outdoor locations. Conductors shall be 600-volt insulation, stranded copper, Class “B” stranding, no solid conductors allowed. All power conductors shall be 12 AWG, minimum. All control wiring shall be No. 14 AWG, minimum. Grounding conductors: #6 AWG and larger: stranded copper, bare soft drawn as required. #8 AWG and smaller: stranded copper with green insulation. 3. Conductors Motor Control Only: Interior to control panels, conductors shall be Type MTW, 600-volt insulation, stranded copper, Class “B” stranding, no solid conductors allowed. Motor feeders shall be sized as required. All power conductors shall be 12 AWG, minimum. Control wire shall be 14 AWG, minimum. 4. Conductors for All Area Except Motor Control: Conductors shall be 600-volt. Wiring shall be run in conduit, except where specified or indicated otherwise, and conductors shall not be less than No. 12 AWG except for control wiring in conduit, which may be NO. 14 AWG and fire alarm wiring, which may be No. 16 AWG. Wire shall be furnished in types to conform to the following:

a. Thermoplastic Type THWN (for fire alarm circuit only): Type THWN shall bear Underwriters Laboratories approval. Conductors shall be solid. Wire shall meet the requirement of IEEE/IPCEA Standards S-61-402 Copper.

BAGGAGE HANDLING EQUIPMENT 34 77 16 - 51 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

b. Thermoplastic Type THHN/THWN-2: Type THHN/THWN-2 wire shall bear Underwriters Laboratories approval. Conductors shall be stranded having IEEE/IPCEA Class “B” stranding. Wire shall meet the requirements of IEEE/IPCEA Standards S-61-402 Copper. c. S.O. Cord: Shall be 600-volt, heavy-duty, Type W, as manufactured by ITT, or as acceptable to The Authority. Size as required. Length shall extend 5’-0” past furthest access panel of associated sloped plate or flat plate recirculating devices. d. Ground Wire: Ground wire shall be insulated copper with green insulation.

5. Color Coding: BHS phase wire colors to be: for 277/480-volt--Phase A, yellow; Phase B, brown; Phase C, orange (Phase wire colors shall be verified on site). For 120- volt wire in control panel, the wire color shall be the same as identified in the section of Wire and Cable Identifications. For 480-volt wire in control panel, the wire color shall be the same as identified in the section of Wire and Cable Identifications. All panel wires shall have wire numbers at both ends of the wire. For DC voltage, all wire shall be blue with wire numbers both inside and outside of panels. For 120-volt AC outside of the control panel, the wire color shall be the same as identified in the section of Wire and Cable Identifications; the color of the wire must be consistent between panels and devices, and must be identified by wire numbers. Verify conductor color code with local electrical inspector. Where colors are not available (No. 4 and larger, or by special permission of The Authority), all wires shall be identified within panel boards, cabinets, switchboards, and other accessible locations, using vinyl marking tape with color to match coding of phase wires. Wire markings shall be Brady number tape or sleeve-type number markers. 6. Manufacturer: Cablec, General Cable, Rome, as acceptable to The Authority. 7. Electric Tape: All taping of electrical connections shall be done with #M Scotch No. 33 plus all-weather vinyl plastic tape, or as acceptable to The Authority.

E. Boxes and Fittings:

1. Outlet and Device Boxes: One piece pressed steel, electrogalvanized, size and depth required by code except four inch square or four inch octagonal minimum. Appleton, Steel City, Raco. Provide bushings or thwarted fitting on conduits without bushings. 2. Junction and Pull Boxes: Steel, screw cover, code gage and size, baked enamel finish. Junction boxes used for splicing shall be 12”x 12” minimum and contain terminal strip for all splice joints. An exception is where one or more photoelectric sensors are spliced and all components are easily accessible with wire fill shall be limited to 31% in accordance with NEC and without moving wires out of the way, a 4-11/16 junction box can be used, provided that the proper terminal strip assembly is provided. Terminal strip assembly shall include, but is not limited to; terminal blocks, mounting rail, end barrier, end anchors, jumpers (if necessary), fanning strip (if necessary), and marking system. Minimum size for all other junction boxes or pull boxes not used for splicing shall be 4-11/16” x 2-1/8” deep. Junction and pull boxes shall be Circle AW, Square D, or as acceptable to The Authority. 3. Fittings: Junction boxes shall be cast conduit fittings at the Contractor’s option. Provide one size larger than raceway for feeders, with “mogul-type” openings. Openings shall be accessible at all times. Fittings shall be Crouse-Hinds, Killark, Appleton, Pyle-National, or as acceptable to The Authority. Conduit bodies (condulets) shall be cast and limited to “LB”, “LL”, and “LR” types. Wire fill shall be limited to 31% in accordance with NEC.

BAGGAGE HANDLING EQUIPMENT 34 77 16 - 52 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

F. Disconnect Safety Switches at Conveyor Motors: At each motor furnish and install a heavy duty, 480V, 3 Phase, NEMA 1 Disconnect Switch with auxiliary contact to report status of disconnect to PLC for system monitoring, and shall not combine the disconnect safety switch with VFD. Disconnects and assembly shall be lockable, UL listed, and comply with NEC or Local Code requirements, whichever are more stringent. Type shall be General Electric, Schneider Electric, Allen-Bradley, or as acceptable to The Authority. Mount motor disconnect switch adjacent to motor. Label disconnect switch with black phenolic, white incised 3/4” letters.

G. Tachometers: The high resolution encoder shall be low-level (24 VDC) and interface to the PLC through low-level input modules. Type shall be Photocraft, RS-P64AJ programmable cube encoder or as acceptable to The Authority.

H. Variable Frequency Drives (VFD): VFDs shall accelerate and decelerate conveyor speed in a S-Curve. A minimum service factor of 1.5 shall be provided. Actual service factor shall be determined by the Contractor for the specific requirements of the conveyor section being driven. Variable Frequency Drives shall be SEW Eurodrive MOVIMOT with quick disconnects and external brake resistor, Allen-Bradley PowerFlex 40 with external brake resistor, or as acceptable to The Authority. Drive shall be coordinated with the motor for the specific application. Allen-Bradley PowerFlex 40 shall be housed in a NEMA rated panel with heat sink on the side of the conveyor near the motor.

I. Photoelectric Sensors:

1. All photo cells used for jam detection, overheight bag detection, etc., shall be Allen-Bradley Photoswitch Series 9000 Polarized Retroreflective, Solid State Isolated N.O. output type or as acceptable to The Authority. 2. Photosensors shall be mounted on structural members attached to the machinery structure so that minimal vibration is transmitted to these units. No more than two penetrations per sensor (one each for the photosensor and the reflector) shall be allowed in conveyor sideguards; each penetration shall not exceed 1-1/2” in diameter and shall be beveled to remove sharp edges.

J. Pushbutton Stations:

1. Pushbutton Stations: Pushbutton control stations shall be Allen Bradley Type 800T switches, indicators and pushbuttons or as acceptable to The Authority. All pushbutton stations in public view shall be flush-mounted with stainless steel cover plates. All pushbutton stations in non-public view shall be painted with OSHA safety yellow. Adequate maintenance access is required at all control stations. 2. Keyswitch shall be Best Access Systems, W-Series, electric switch lock or as acceptable to The Authority. 3. All pushbutton switches with padlocking attachment used for E-STOP applications shall be of the maintained-contact, push-to-stop, illuminated red LED mushroom-head type. Other pushbutton switches shall be momentary-contact type. START or START/RESTART pushbuttons at the load conveyors shall be green, illuminated, LED, extended-head with guard type; START or START/RESTART pushbuttons at other areas shall be green, non-illuminated, flush-head type. Normal stop buttons (where used) shall be red, non-illuminated, flush-head type. JAM RESET pushbuttons shall be amber,

BAGGAGE HANDLING EQUIPMENT 34 77 16 - 53 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

illuminated, LED, extended-head with guard type. OVER HEIGHT RESET pushbuttons shall be white, illuminated, LED, extended-head with guard type. LAMP TEST pushbuttons shall be black, non-illuminated, flush-head type. ALARM SILENCE pushbuttons shall be yellow, non-illuminated, flush-head type. 4. Control stations shall be a single or multiple pushbutton station with labels for each pushbutton operation. Enclosure shall be a NEMA Type 4/13 pushbutton station, Allen-Bradley 800T Die Cast Enclosure or as acceptable to The Authority. All control stations other than START and E-STOP stations for conveyor sections in public view shall be located on adjacent conveyor sections out of public view and labeled for the conveyor section being controlled.

K. Audible Warning System:

1. Warning Horn: In Baggage Make-up areas and along baggage system as shown on the Baggage System Contract Drawings, furnish and install warning horns. Horns shall be 120-volts AC, 103 dB at 10' with adjustable volume. Type shall be Edwards “AdaptaHorn” series 876-N5 or as acceptable to The Authority. 2. Control Station Buzzer: At each control station with a START pushbutton in public areas, furnish and install a buzzer in the control station. Buzzer shall be 60/250-volts AC with 120-volt AC supplied to the unit to provide 55 to 60 dB at 2’. Type shall be Mallory “Sonalert” series SC250E or as acceptable to The Authority.

L. Warning Lights (Rotating Beacon):

1. System Start-up: Light shall be a rotating, 120VAC or 24VDC, flat-base mounting fixture with a red lens. Location as indicated on drawings and shall be Federal Signal #121S, Vitalite, Allen Bradley LED Round Beacon 855 Series or as acceptable to The Authority. 2. Fault/Jam Detection/Emergency Stop: Light shall be a rotating, 120VAC or 24VDC, flat-base mounting fixture with an amber lens. Location as indicated on drawings and shall be Federal Signal #121S, Vitalite, Allen Bradley LED Round Beacon 855 Series or as acceptable to The Authority.

M. Junction Boxes for Control Wiring: Furnish and install all junction boxes with terminal boards per NEC.

N. Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS): Furnish and install at least one UPS to provide a minimum of 15 minutes of power to PLCs during a power outage, prior to emergency power activation. Unit shall be type manufactured by Sola, APC, Eaton Powerware, or as acceptable to The Authority. UPS shall have an easy to replace, hot-swappable battery module.

O. Electrical Power Conditioners: The Contractor shall furnish and install power regulators, as required, to ensure that the power to the control systems is properly conditioned. Regulators shall be manufactured by Square D, Sola, Best Power model Ferrups, or as acceptable to The Authority.

P. Fiber Optic Communications:

BAGGAGE HANDLING EQUIPMENT 34 77 16 - 54 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

1. Optic Communications Modules: Converter modules shall be compatible with the data link communication protocol selected by the BHS designer/integrator for communications between PLCs and converter modules, and fiber optic cabling type. Data link communication protocol shall be either TCP/IP Ethernet, data communications provided by PLC manufacturer, or other protocol acceptable to The Authority. Module type shall be as manufactured by Phoenix Digital Corporation, Weed Instrument (Fiber-Optic Division), or as acceptable to The Authority. Converters shall meet the following requirements:

a. Multi-mode or Single-mode Fiber Optic Cable Type. b. ST or SMA Connector. c. Transmit Launch Power: -15dbm (Typical Multi-mode) and -18dbm (Single-mode). d. Receive Sensitivity: -32dbm. e. Environmental Operating Temperature: 0 to 60 deg. C (32 to 140 deg. F). f. Environmental Storage Temperature: -40 to 85 deg. C (-40 to 185 deg. F). g. Environmental Relative Humidity: 0 to 95% RH, Non-Condensing.

2. Fiber Optic Cabling: Provide Multi-Mode 62.5/125, dedicated network, FDDI grade cabling where necessary for connection to fiber optic converters and fiber optic communications backbone. Fiber optic backbone will be provided by others. Contractor shall coordinate all interface requirements with fiber optic backbone Contractor.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine conditions under which Baggage Handling System (BHS) work will be installed

B. Notify COTR in writing of unsatisfactory conditions.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Site Interfaces:

1. Responsibility of Baggage Handling System equipment. 2. Cover and protect Baggage Handling System equipment from debris and dirt. 3. Responsibility of removing daily erection debris and discarded materials. 4. Equipment staging area will be assigned by Contractor. 5. Coordinate the work schedule with Contractor.

B. Welded Construction: Provide welded connections for fabrication and installation of work wherever bolted connections are not required for subsequent removal or for normal operation, adjustment, inspection, maintenance and replacement of worn parts. Comply with AWS standards for workmanship and for qualifications of welding operators.

C. Installation Tolerances:

BAGGAGE HANDLING EQUIPMENT 34 77 16 - 55 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

1. Gaps between end rolls shall not exceed 1” except gap at the Security/Fire Doors, where gap shall not exceed 3”. 2. Uneven joints in sideguards shall be epoxy filled and ground smooth to eliminate all snag points.

D. Ceiling Attachments:

1. Ceiling attachments shall be designed to avoid the transmission of excessive conveyor periodic or transitory loads into the structure. (The COTR shall determine the acceptability of specific conditions.) 2. Attachments to steel beams shall be clamped. Attachments to concrete slabs shall be with drilled expansion anchors sized for the load with adequate safety factors and not exceeding 2” in depth. Attachments to concrete beams shall be with drilled expansion anchors into the sides of beams only and placed a minimum of 6” up from the bottom of beam. All attachments shall be submitted for approval.

E. Wire and Cable Identifications:

1. Field electric wire and cable shall be color-coded and shall have the wire numbers as shown on the electrical drawings affixed to both ends of each wire and cable, and every 5’-0” apart throughout the length of each wire and cable. Coding shall be as follows: 2. Power Wiring - Line Side: This code applies to all field power wiring from source to the line side of the fuse in the Motor Control Panel and the power wire colors shall be verified on site. The neutral, if applicable, shall terminate at the terminal board.

a. Phase "A" (120/208) Black (277/480) Yellow b. Phase "B" (120/208) Red (277/480) Brown c. Phase "C" (120/208) Blue (277/480) Orange d. Neutral (120/208) White (277/480) Gray e. Mech. Ground (120/208) Green (277/480) Green

3. Power and Control Wiring - Load Side: The code for field power and control wiring from the load side of the fuses in the Motor Control Panel to all other devices shall be as follows:

a. Power As stated above b. A.C. Control Red c. D.C. Control Blue d. Neutral White e. Mech. Ground Green

4. Communications system wiring: Installation and termination of wiring shall follow premise wiring and horizontal cabling specifications. Cabling shall be properly labeled, supported, and terminated per industry standards. Cable routing of shall be neat and dressed out in appearance with adequate service loops and proper Velcro tie straps where applicable.

BAGGAGE HANDLING EQUIPMENT 34 77 16 - 56 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

F. Programming: The BHSC or approved representative shall program BHS to function as specified herein. A print out and CD of the programming shall be provided to The Authority for their use. Refer to submittal requirements identified herein.

3.3 NEW EQUPMENT DEMONSTRATION

A. Pre-Installation Demonstration and Testing of New Equipment Types:

1. Any new concept of new Baggage Handling System (BHS) equipment that the BHSC recommends for the system(s) must first be thoroughly demonstrated prior to the COTR’s consideration of actual approval or implementation and consistent with substitution request requirements. 2. By mutual agreement between COTR and the BHSC, the demonstration and/or testing of the new concept of equipment can be achieved through:

a. Thorough demonstration at the BHSC’s Manufacturing Facilities. b. Field demonstration at one or more sites that the BHSC has already implemented/installed the new concept equipment, if available.

3. Specific demonstration and testing requirements for the new concept or equipment will be developed by the COTR. 4. The specific demonstration and testing requirements will identify such requirements as: Number of test cycles, number of hours of “run time”, material processing rates, physical characteristics of material to be processed, Mean Time Between Failures, Mean Time to Repair, serviceability, etc.

3.4 POST-INSTALLATION

A. Inspection and Testing prior to Commissioning:

1. The BHSC shall test the operation and functionality of all computer and PLC programming. The operation and functionality of the Supervisory Computer System, which includes all BHS computers and PLCs, shall be tested at 50%, 75%, and 95% complete using emulation for the BHS operation prior to final installation and connection to the BHS. 2. After installation of the complete system(s), the BHSC shall test the completed system(s). All testing and “debugging” shall be complete prior to the demonstration of the system(s) during commissioning. The testing shall be witnessed by the COTR and shall include:

a. Complete mechanical, electrical, control and structural inspection for individual BHS equipment. b. Inspect the system(s) and make adjustments to belt and controls as required. c. Verification of BHSC’s O & M Manual for the system(s). d. Checkout of the operational controls and safety devices of the system(s) using bags, totes, or boxes. e. Test the capability to handle the required sizes and weights of baggage through the system(s) without jamming or toppling of baggage.

BAGGAGE HANDLING EQUIPMENT 34 77 16 - 57 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

f. Test the capability to handle the required maximum baggage handling rates of the system(s) in total, using all components/units required to achieve the required rates as specified. The operating speed of each component of the system(s) will be measured using a standard device in the presence of the COTR and be recorded on the Equipment Description list. Any component not operating within 2 percent of design speed shall be reworked to bring it up to design speed. g. The BHSC shall perform a functional test first for each BHS subsystem and then shall perform a load test on each individual conveyor. The individual load test shall comply with the load requirements identified herein; a container with water, sand or any materials can potentially damage the BHS and the building shall not be used as a load/weight. Both tests shall be witnessed by the COTR. h. The BHSC shall provide at least 40 hours of continuous operation under no-load conditions followed by a complete system(s) inspection for necessary corrections, belt adjustments. Such adjustments may include the requirement for retraining of the belts, re-tensioning of the belts and any required shorting of belting material required to meet the maximum take-up adjustment of 2%, as defined under the Section regarding Take-Up Pulleys. The 40 hours of testing shall be conducted a minimum elapsed time of two 20-hour days to a maximum of five 8-hour days. During the 40-hour no-load test, the BHSC shall record the actual current draw by each MCP in every hour interval; the record shall be included in the O&M manual. i. The BHSC shall also perform a 4-hour load test demonstration immediately following the Contractor’s 40 hour no-load test, before the system can cool down, for each system to be witnessed by the COTR as part of the commissioning effort, but can be performed prior to actual commissioning. Normal load condition shall be 160 bags per hour. This will require a minimum of 640 test bags; each test bag shall weight between 20 Lbs to 40 Lbs and the average bag length shall be between 25” to 28”. A successful hour of operational testing shall be defined as the system meeting the performance requirements as defined in the Specification Section 2.1, Paragraph B. During the 4-hour load test, the BHSC shall record the actual current draw by each MCP in every 10 minute interval; the record shall be included in the O&M manual. If any items/concerns/defects are identified by the Authority during the test, the BHSC shall remedy the items/concerns/defects during the daytime hours, and the BHS shall be ready to test in the following night. j. The BHSC shall demonstrate specific conditions for the following equipment:

1) Computer System Equipment including cold-backup switch over. 2) Motor Control Panels (MCP). 3) PanelView.

k. The BHSC shall test all interfaces with other systems. The BHSC shall coordinate interface testing with all parties involved.

B. Test Program:

1. The BHSC shall provide a Test Program for each system(s), which shall, at minimum, incorporate the requirements listed above in the Post-Installation Testing (BHSC’s Internal Testing) section in this Specification. 2. The BHSC is required to develop a Test Program for each system identify and demonstrate all System Control Functions. The Test Plan is to list each Control Station,

BAGGAGE HANDLING EQUIPMENT 34 77 16 - 58 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

Control Devices, etc., and its related control function that is to be demonstrated/tested in a checklist format with “Pass” and “Fail” check boxes, date, and recorder’s initials for each item. Items that fail during a test shall be retested after corrections are made and another checklist shall be used in the test recording of the previously failed items. The BHSC shall provide COTR with all checklists produced during testing. The Test Program shall identify all conveyor types, motors, brake motors, VFDs, nominal speeds, actual speeds, HP, nameplate FLA, lengths of conveyor section, the required load for each conveyor section and test procedure; the test program shall be submitted by BHSC for The Authority’s review and approval 60 calendar days prior to the start-up of the testing. 3. The Test Plan shall also include the recording of the following information per subsystem(s), conveyor and device during the inspection and testing of the system(s). All actual speeds and motor currents shall be measured with the system(s) in a “no-load” and “load” condition, i.e., all conveyors of BHS running but without and with bags. Contractor shall complete all recording in the Test Plan.

a. Main Feeds:

1) Fuse size per phase. 2) Actual amperage per phase.

b. Transformers:

1) Fuse size per phase. 2) Actual amperage per phase.

c. Conveyor/Device Speed:

1) Actual center line speed of conveyor/device.

d. Motor Name Plate Data:

1) Manufacturer 2) Horsepower 3) Nameplate Current 4) Voltage 5) Phase 6) RPM 7) Frame Size 8) Type 9) Hertz 10) NEMA Design 11) Service Factor 12) Insulation Class 13) Insulation Type

e. Fuse size per phase. f. Actual amperage per phase. g. Belt slippage under load.

BAGGAGE HANDLING EQUIPMENT 34 77 16 - 59 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

4. The above test results and information, final dynamic and static test results shall be included in the final O & M Manuals for reference information. 5. The material including test bags to be used for the all necessary tests, plus personnel to handle it, shall be provided by the BHSC. The BHSC shall have all personnel and a representative identified by the COTR “on site” during all periods of the system(s) Inspection and Testing. All tests shall be conducted with bags, tubs, blocks, etc. or combinations of these items; and at the COTR’s option with laded cartons to supplement available baggage. The BHSC shall identify a list of items in the test plan. 6. The BHSC shall provide all necessary testing, measuring, and recording devices required to demonstrate the operational characteristics and performance of the equipment to the satisfaction of the COTR. At a minimum, the required test equipment shall include: Clamp-on type ammeter, direct read F.P.M. digital readout Tachometer, etc. All testing, measuring and recording devices shall be calibrated and certified; each calibration certificate of each device shall be submitted with test plan.

C. Test Failure:

1. A failure during any test period shall be defined as any design characteristic or malfunction of the BHSC furnished equipment or materials that damages baggage or reduce any operating rate below those specified. Conditions resulting from improper loading of baggage or loading baggage of sizes not included the Specification requirements will not be considered as failures.

3.5 COMMISSIONING

A. Materials: The BHSC shall provide the following completed documents for commissioning:

1. Final Approved O&M Manuals. 2. Final Mechanical and Electrical As-Built Record Drawings specified herein. 3. Final Electrical As-Built Record Drawings in associated Motor Control Panel. 4. Test Program Information completed by BHSC. 5. Testing by BHSC is complete.

B. Post-Installation Commissioning - Demonstration and Observation:

1. The COTR will attend one initial demonstration/observation and one follow-up demonstration/observation. Any cost for additional observations required to “clean up” Punch list items shall be corrected at the BHSC’s expense. 2. After installation and testing of the complete system(s), its operating capability shall be demonstrated by the BHSC. All “debugging” shall have been accomplished prior to the start of the BHS/CBIS commissioning. The demonstration and observation shall include:

a. Static Observation: Observe the mechanical and electrical static components and identify deficiencies on the Punch list. b. Dynamic Observation: Observe the mechanical and electrical dynamic components and identify deficiencies on the Punch list. c. Demonstrate the operational controls and safety devices of the system(s). d. Demonstrate E-Stop Zoning operations.

BAGGAGE HANDLING EQUIPMENT 34 77 16 - 60 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

e. Demonstrate Bag Jam and Cascade Stop operations. f. Demonstrate security/fire door operations. g. Demonstrate “Hand-Off-Auto” operations. h. Demonstrate the capability to handle the required sizes and weights of baggage through the system(s) without jamming or toppling of baggage. i. Demonstrate the capability to handle the required maximum baggage handling rates of the system(s) in total, using all components/units required to achieve the required rates as specified. j. Demonstration of system(s) System Status Panel (PanelView). k. The BHSC shall demonstrate the operation and functionality of all computer and PLC programming. l. The BHSC shall demonstrate all interfaces with other systems. The BHSC shall coordinate interface demonstration with all parties involved.

3. Commissioning Plan:

a. The BHSC shall provide a Commissioning Plan for each system(s), which shall, at minimum, incorporate the requirements listed above in the Post-Installation Commissioning - Demonstration and Testing section in this Specification. b. The material to be used for the all necessary tests, plus personnel to handle it, shall be provided by the BHSC. The BHSC shall have all personnel and a representative identified by the COTR “on site” during all periods of the system(s) Commissioning Demonstration. All tests shall be conducted with bags, tubs, blocks, etc. or combinations of these items; and at the COTR’s option with laded cartons to supplement available baggage. The BHSC shall identify a list of items in the test plan. The Commissioning Plan shall be submitted by BHSC for COTR’s review and approval 30 calendar days prior to the start-up of commissioning. c. The BHSC shall provide all necessary testing, measuring, and recording devices required to demonstrate the operational characteristics and performance of the equipment to the satisfaction of The Authority. At a minimum, the required test equipment shall include: Clamp-on type ammeter, direct read F.P.M. digital readout Tachometer, etc. All testing, measuring and recording devices shall be calibrated and certified; each calibration certificate of each device shall be submitted with the Commissioning Plan.

4. Commissioning Test Failure:

a. A failure during any commissioning test period shall be defined as any design characteristic or malfunction of the BHSC furnished equipment or materials that damages baggage or reduce any operating rate below those specified. Conditions resulting from improper loading of baggage or loading baggage of sizes not included the Specification requirements will not be considered as failures.

3.6 ACCEPTANCE OF SYSTEM

A. Conditional Acceptance:

BAGGAGE HANDLING EQUIPMENT 34 77 16 - 61 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

1. The following shall be required for total system(s) conditional acceptance:

a. Satisfactorily pass the tests as outlined herein. b. Resulting Punch List of such test are relatively minor in nature and do not abrogate Beneficial Use of the system(s).

B. Final Acceptance:

1. Final acceptance of the system(s) shall require the BHSC to have completed all Punch list items to the satisfaction of the COTR. 2. The COTR will attend one initial demonstration/observation and one follow-up demonstration/observation. Any cost for additional observations required to “clean up” Punch list items will be at the BHSC’s expense.

3.7 START-UP SUPPORTS

A. The BHSC shall provide qualified mechanical, electrical and control engineers/technicians for start-up support (a 30 calendar day period immediately commencing after final acceptance of complete functional BHS) to troubleshoot the system. During hours of operation, the engineers/technicians shall be on site. During non-operations hours the engineers/technicians shall respond (be present on site) within 1 hour. At the completion of the 30 calendar day, the BHS must operate for 14 calendar days without failure, before the period of start-up support is complete.

3.8 TRAINING

A. Training provided shall be a minimum of 32 hours and provided for all shifts and all delegated airport and airline operation, maintenance personnel and TSA staffs. Training sessions shall be videotaped by Baggage Handling System (BHS) Contractor and turned over to The Authority.

1. Operations training: Training (minimum of 16 hours) shall cover the operational functions of all systems and all pertinent sections of the Operations and Maintenance Manual. 2. Maintenance training: Training (minimum of 16 hours) shall include “classroom” and “hands-on” programs covering actual troubleshooting, adjustment of equipment, and component removal and replacement.

B. The training classes shall be provided prior to the operations start-up of the system.

C. The training sessions shall be provided prior to the operational start-up of the respective Baggage Handling Systems. A detailed outline of the training material and text to be presented shall be submitted to The Authority for review prior to the first schedule training session.

D. The BHSC or approved representative shall provide training for Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) operations and programming procedures. However, during warranty period, the user shall not modify any PLC operations, PLC programming procedures or PLC programs.

BAGGAGE HANDLING EQUIPMENT 34 77 16 - 62 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

3.9 CLEANING

A. During installation, the BHSC shall protect BHS equipment from water, dirt and debris.

B. During installation, the BHSC shall perform the house-keeping of its related work.

C. The BHSC shall completely clean BHS equipment prior to turning it over to The Authority and shall protect the equipment from water, dirt and debris after it has been cleaned until it is turned over to The Authority for use.

3.10 SPARE PARTS

A. Spare Parts will not be purchased as part of this contract, but may be purchased after installation of the systems. The BHSC shall submit to the COTR, at the time that the system(s) design engineering has been completed (both electrical as well as mechanical), a list of all parts used in the development of the system(s). This complete listing of system(s) parts will then be used by the COTR to develop a listing of parts to be purchased as Spare Parts for the support of the system(s). This list must include the following:

1. Name of part. 2. Complete description of part. 3. Each specific location that the listed part is used in the system(s). 4. Total number of parts in the system(s). 5. Manufacturer of the part. 6. Manufacturer’s part number. 7. Source of supply. 8. Baggage System Contractor recommended quantity of spares per each item. 9. Price per unit. 10. Lead time or availability of part.

B. The listing of the above information regarding parts must be provided for each system.

C. Identify recommended and critical spare parts on the parts list and their prices for components that are not locally available and require shipping.

D. Spare parts shall be deliverable within 24 hours notice, except for long lead items.

PART 4 - CONTRACTOR’S QUALITY CONTROL REQUIREMENTS

4.1 GENERAL

A. Comply with applicable provisions of Division 01 Section “Quality Requirements” for requirements for Contractor Quality Control Program.

END OF SECTION 34 77 16

BAGGAGE HANDLING EQUIPMENT 34 77 16 - 63 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

ITEM D-701 PIPE FOR STORM DRAINS AND CULVERTS

DESCRIPTION 701-1.1 This item shall consist of the construction of pipe culverts and storm drains in accordance with these specifications and in reasonably close conformity with the lines and grades shown on the plans.

MATERIALS 701-2.1 Materials shall meet the requirements shown on the plans and specified below. Ductile Iron Pipe, DIP Class 52 Reinforced Concrete Pipe, RCP Class IV 701-2.2 PIPE. The pipe shall be of the type called for on the plans or in the proposal and shall be in accordance with the following appropriate requirements.

ASTM A 746 Ductile Iron Gravity Sewer Pipe

ASTM C 76 Reinforced Concrete Pipe

701-2.3 CONCRETE. Concrete for pipe cradles shall have a minimum compressive strength of 2000 psi (13.8 MPa) at 28 days and conform to the requirements of ASTM C 94. 701-2.4 RUBBER GASKETS. Rubber gaskets for rigid pipe shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C 443. Rubber gaskets for PVC pipe and polyethylene pipe shall conform to the requirements of ASTM F 477. Rubber gaskets for zinc-coated steel pipe and precoated galvanized pipe shall conform to the requirements of ASTM D 1056, for the “RE” closed cell grades. Rubber gaskets for steel reinforced thermoplastic (HDPE) ribbed pipe shall conform to the requirements of ASTM F 477. 701-2.5 JOINT MORTAR. Pipe joint mortar shall consist of one part Portland cement and two parts sand. The Portland cement shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C 150, Type I. The sand shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C 144. 701-2.6 JOINT FILLERS. Poured filler for joints shall conform to the requirements of ASTM D 1190. 701-2.7 PLASTIC GASKETS. Plastic gaskets shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 198 (Type B). CONSTRUCTION METHODS 701-3.1 EXCAVATION. The width of the pipe trench shall be sufficient to permit satisfactory jointing of the pipe and thorough tamping of the bedding material under and around the pipe, but it shall not be less than the external diameter of the pipe plus 6 in on each side. The trench walls shall be approximately vertical. Where rock, hardpan, or other unyielding material is encountered, the Contractor shall remove it from below the foundation grade for a depth of at least 12 in or ½ in for each foot of fill over the top of the pipe (whichever is greater) but for no more than three-quarters of the nominal diameter of the pipe. The width of the excavation shall be at least 1 ft greater than the horizontal outside diameter of the pipe. The excavation below grade shall be backfilled with selected fine compressible material, such as silty clay or loam, and lightly compacted in layers not over 6 in. in uncompacted depth to form a uniform but yielding foundation.

PIPE FOR STORM DRAINS AND CULVERTS D-701 - 1 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

Where a firm foundation is not encountered at the grade established, due to soft, spongy, or other unstable soil, the unstable soil shall be removed and replaced with approved granular material for the full trench width. The Engineer shall determine the depth of removal necessary. The granular material shall be compacted to provide adequate support for the pipe. The excavation for pipes that are placed in embankment fill shall not be made until the embankment has been completed to a height above the top of the pipe as shown on the plans. 701-3.2 BEDDING. The pipe bedding shall conform to the class specified on the plans. When no bedding class is specified or detailed on the plans, the requirements for Class C bedding shall apply. a. Rigid Pipe. Class A bedding shall consist of a continuous concrete cradle conforming to the plan details. Class B bedding shall consist of a bed of granular material having a thickness of at least 6 in below the bottom of the pipe and extending up around the pipe for a depth of not less than 30 percent of the pipe’s vertical outside diameter. The layer of bedding material shall be shaped to fit the pipe for at least 10 percent of the pipe’s vertical diameter and shall have recesses shaped to receive the bell of bell and spigot pipe. The bedding material shall be sand or selected sandy soil, all of which passes a 3/8 in (9 mm) sieve and not more than 10 percent of which passes a No. 200 (0.075 mm) sieve. Class C bedding shall consist of bedding the pipe in its natural foundation to a depth of not less than 10 percent of the pipe’s vertical outside diameter. The bed shall be shaped to fit the pipe and shall have recesses shaped to receive the bell of bell and spigot pipe. 701-3.3 LAYING PIPE. The pipe laying shall begin at the lowest point of the trench and proceed upgrade. The lower segment of the pipe shall be in contact with the bedding throughout its full length. Bell or groove ends of rigid pipes and outside circumferential laps of flexible pipes shall be placed facing upgrade. Paved or partially lined pipe shall be placed so that the longitudinal center line of the paved segment coincides with the flow line. Elliptical and elliptically reinforced pipes shall be placed with the manufacturer’s top of pipe mark within five degrees of a vertical plane through the longitudinal axis of the pipe. 701-3.4 JOINING PIPE. Joints shall be made with (1) Portland cement mortar, (2) Portland cement grout, (3) rubber gaskets, (4) plastic gaskets, or (5) coupling bands. Mortar joints shall be made with an excess of mortar to form a continuous bead around the outside of the pipe and shall be finished smooth on the inside. Molds or runners shall be used for grouted joints in order to retain the poured grout. Rubber ring gaskets shall be installed to form a flexible watertight seal. a. Concrete Pipe. Concrete pipe may be either bell and spigot or tongue and groove. The method of joining pipe sections shall be such that the ends are fully entered and the inner surfaces are reasonably flush and even. Joints shall be thoroughly wetted before mortar or grout is applied. b. Metal Pipe. Metal pipe shall be firmly joined by form fitting bands conforming to the requirements of ASTM A 760 for steel pipe and AASHTO M 196 for aluminum pipe. 701-3.5 BACKFILLING. Pipes shall be inspected before any backfill is placed; any pipes found to be out of alignment, unduly settled, or damaged shall be removed and relaid or replaced at the Contractor’s expense. Material for backfill shall be fine, readily compatible soil, granular material selected from the excavation or a source of the Contractor’s choosing. It shall not contain frozen lumps, stones that would be retained on a 2 in (50.0 mm) sieve, chunks of highly plastic clay, or other objectionable material. No less than 95

PIPE FOR STORM DRAINS AND CULVERTS D-701 - 2 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204 percent of a granular backfill material shall pass through a 1/2 in (12 mm) sieve, and no less than 95 percent of it shall be retained on a No. 4 (4.75 mm) sieve. When the top of the pipe is even with or below the top of the trench, the backfill shall be compacted in layers not exceeding 6 in on both sides of the pipe and shall be brought up 1 ft above the top of the pipe or to natural ground level, whichever is greater. Care shall be exercised to thoroughly compact the backfill material under the haunches of the pipe. Material shall be brought up evenly on both sides of the pipe. When the top of the pipe is above the top of the trench, the backfill shall be compacted in layers not exceeding 6 in and shall be brought up evenly on both sides of the pipe to 1 ft above the top of the pipe. The width of backfill on each side of the pipe for the portion above the top of the trench shall be equal to twice the pipe’s diameter or 12 ft, whichever is less. For PVC and polyethylene pipe, the backfill shall be placed in two stages; first to the top of the pipe and then at least 12 in over the top of the pipe. The backfill material shall meet the requirements of paragraph 701-3.2c. All backfill shall be compacted to the density required under Item P-152.

MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS

ASTM A 746 Ductile Iron Gravity Sewer Pipe

ASTM C 76 Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain, and Sewer Pipe

ASTM C 150 Portland Cement

ASTM C 443 Joints for Circular Concrete Sewer and Culvert Pipe, Using Rubber Gaskets

END ITEM D-701

PIPE FOR STORM DRAINS AND CULVERTS D-701 - 3 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

ITEM D-705 PIPE UNDERDRAINS FOR AIRPORTS

DESCRIPTION 705-1.1 This item shall consist of the construction of pipe drains in accordance with these specifications and in reasonably close conformity with the lines and grades shown on the plans.

MATERIALS 705-2.1 GENERAL. Materials shall meet the requirements shown on the plans and specified below. 705-2.2 PIPE. The pipe shall be of the type called for on the plans or in the proposal and shall be in accordance with the following appropriate requirements.

ASTM F 758 Smooth-Wall Perforated PVC Pipe

705-2.3 JOINT MORTAR. Pipe joint mortar shall consist of one part Portland cement and two parts sand. The Portland cement shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C 150, Type I. The sand shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C 144. 705-2.4 ELASTOMERIC SEALS. Elastomeric seals shall conform to the requirements of ASTM F 477. 705-2.5 POROUS BACKFILL. Porous backfill shall be free of clay, humus, or other objectionable matter, and shall conform to the gradation in Table 1 when tested in accordance with ASTM C 136. Table 1. Gradation Of Porous Backfill Percentage by Weight Passing Sieves Sieve Designation (square openings) Porous Material No. Porous Material 1 No. 2 1-1/2 in (38 mm) 100 1 in (25 mm) 90 - 100 3/8 in (9.5 mm) 100 25 - 60 No. 4 (4.75 mm) 95 – 100 5 - 40 No. 8 (2.36 mm) 0 - 20 No. 16 (1.18 mm) 45 – 80 No. 50 (0.30 mm) 10 – 30 No. 100 (0.15 mm) 0 – 10 When two courses of porous backfill are specified in the plans, the finer of the materials shall conform to particle size tabulated herein for porous material No. 1. The coarser granular material shall meet the gradation given in the tabulation for porous material No. 2. 705-2.6. GRANULAR MATERIAL. Granular material used for backfilling shall conform to the requirements of ASTM D 2321 for Class IA, IB, or II materials, or shall meet the requirements of AASHTO Standard Specification for Highway Bridges Section 30.

ITEM D-705 PIPE UNDERDRAINS FOR AIRPORTS D-705 - 1 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

705-2.7. FILTER FABRIC. The filter fabric shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 288-99, Class 2. Table 2 Fabric Property Test Method Test Requirement Grab Tensile Strength, lbs ASTM D 4632 125 min Grab Tensile Elongation % ASTM D 4632 50 min Burst Strength, psi ASTM D 3785 125 min Trapezoid Tear Strength, lbs ASTM D 4533 55 min Puncture Strength, lbs ASTM D 4833 40 min Abrasion, lbs ASTM D 4886 15 max loss Equivalent Opening Size ASTM D 4751 70-100 Permittivity sec-1 ASTM D 4491 0.80 Accelerated Weathering ASTM D 4355 (UV Stability) 70 *(500 hrs exposure) (Strength Retained - %) 705-2.8. CONTROLLED LOW STRENGTH MATERIAL (CLSM). Controlled low strength material shall conform to the requirements of Item P-153. When CLSM is used all joints shall have elastomeric seals.

CONSTRUCTION METHODS 705-3.1 EQUIPMENT. All equipment necessary and required for the proper construction of pipe underdrains shall be on the project, in first-class working condition, and approved by the Engineer before construction is permitted to start. 705-3.2 EXCAVATION. The width of the pipe trench shall be sufficient to permit satisfactory jointing of the pipe and thorough tamping of the bedding material under and around the pipe, but shall not be less than the external diameter of the pipe plus 6 in (150 mm) on each side. The trench walls shall be approximately vertical. Where rock, hardpan, or other unyielding material is encountered, it shall be removed below the foundation grade for a depth of at least 4 in (100 mm). The excavation below grade shall be backfilled with selected fine compressible material, such as silty clay or loam, and lightly compacted in layers not over 6 in (150 mm) in uncompacted depth to form a uniform but yielding foundation. Where a firm foundation is not encountered at the grade established, due to soft, spongy, or other unstable soil, the unstable soil shall be removed and replaced with approved granular material for the full trench width. The Engineer shall determine the depth of removal necessary. The granular material shall be compacted to provide adequate support for the pipe. Excavated material not required or acceptable for backfill shall be disposed of by the Contractor as directed by the Engineer. The excavation shall not be carried below the required depth; when this is done,

ITEM D-705 PIPE UNDERDRAINS FOR AIRPORTS D-705 - 2 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204 the trench shall be backfilled at the Contractor’s expense with material approved by the Engineer and compacted to the density of the surrounding earth material. The bed for the pipe shall be so shaped that at least the lower quarter of the pipe shall be in continuous contact with the bottom of the trench. Spaces for the pipe bell shall be excavated accurately to size to clear the bell so that the barrel supports the entire weight of the pipe. The Contractor shall do such trench bracing, sheathing, or shoring necessary to perform and protect the excavation as required for safety and conformance to governing laws. Unless otherwise provided, the bracing, sheathing, or shoring shall be removed by the Contractor after the completion of the backfill to at least 12 in (300 mm) over the top of the pipe. The sheathing or shoring shall be pulled as the granular backfill is placed and compacted to avoid any unfilled spaces between the trench wall and the backfill material. The cost of bracing, sheathing, or shoring, and the removal of same, shall be included in the unit price bid per foot (meter) for the pipe. 705-3.3 LAYING AND INSTALLING PIPE. a. PVC or Polyethylene Pipe. PVC or polyethylene pipe shall be installed in accordance with the requirements of ASTM D 2321 or AASHTO Standard Specification for Highway Bridges Section 30. Perforations shall meet the requirements of AASHTO M 252 or M 294 Class 2, unless otherwise indicated on the plans. The pipe shall be laid accurately to line and grade. b. All Types of Pipe. The upgrade end of pipelines, not terminating in a structure, shall be plugged or capped as approved by the Engineer. Unless otherwise shown on the plans, a 4 in (100 mm) bed of granular backfill material shall be spread in the bottom of the trench throughout the entire length under all perforated pipe underdrains. Pipe outlets for the underdrains shall be constructed when required or shown on the plans. The pipe shall be laid with tight-fitting joints. Porous backfill is not required around or over pipe outlets for underdrains. All connections to other drainage pipes or structures shall be made as required and in a satisfactory manner. If connections are not made to other pipes or structures, the outlets shall be protected and constructed as shown on the plans. c. Filter Fabric. The filter fabric shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations, or in accordance with AASHTO M 288-99 APPENDIX, unless otherwise shown on the plans. 705-3.4 MORTAR. The mortar shall be of the desired consistency for caulking and filling the joints of the pipe and for making connections to other pipes or to structures. Mortar that is not used within 45 minutes after water has been added shall be discarded. Retempering of mortar shall not be permitted. 705-3.5 NOT USED. 705-3.6 BACKFILLING. a. Earth. All trenches and excavations shall be backfilled within a reasonable time after the pipes are installed, unless other protection of the pipe is directed. The backfill material shall be selected material from excavation or borrow; material which is placed within a nominal pipe diameter distance at the sides of the pipe and 1 ft (30 cm) over the top shall be material that can be readily compacted. It shall not contain stones retained on a 3 in (75 mm) sieve, frozen lumps, chunks of highly plastic clay, or any other material that is objectionable to the Engineer. The material shall be moistened or dried, if necessary to be compacted by the method in use. Backfill material shall be approved by the Engineer. Special care shall be taken in placing the backfill. Great care shall be used to obtain thorough compaction under the haunches and along the sides to the top of the pipe.

ITEM D-705 PIPE UNDERDRAINS FOR AIRPORTS D-705 - 3 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

The backfill shall be placed in loose layers not exceeding 6 in (150 mm) in depth under and around the pipe, and not exceeding 8 in (200 mm) over the pipe. Successive layers shall be added and thoroughly compacted by hand and pneumatic tampers, approved by the Engineer, until the trench is completely filled and brought to the proper elevation. Backfilling shall be done in a manner to avoid injurious top or side pressures on the pipe. In embankments and for other areas outside of pavements, the backfill shall be compacted to the density required for embankments in unpaved areas under Item P-152. Under paved areas, the subgrade and any backfill shall be compacted to the density required for embankments for paved areas under Item P-152. b. Granular Material. When granular backfill is required, its placement in the trench and about the pipe shall be as shown on the plans. Special care shall be taken in placing the backfill. The granular backfill shall not contain a damaging amount of foreign matter, nor shall earth from the sides of the trench or from the windrow be allowed to filter into the backfill. When required by the Engineer, a template shall be used to properly place and keep separate the two sizes of backfill. The backfill shall be placed in loose layers not exceeding 6 in (150 mm) in depth and compacted by hand and pneumatic tampers to the requirements as given for earth backfill. Backfilling shall be done in a manner to avoid injurious top or side pressure on the pipe. The granular backfill shall be made to the elevation of the trench, as shown on the plans. When perforated pipe is specified, granular backfill material shall be placed along the full length of the pipe. The position of the granular material shall be as shown on the plans. If the original material excavated from the trench is pervious and suitable, it shall be used in lieu of porous backfill No. 1. When porous backfill is to be placed in paved or adjacent areas prior to the completion of grading or subgrade operations, the backfill material shall be placed immediately after laying the pipe. The depth of this granular backfill shall be not less than 12 in (300 mm), measured from the top of the underdrain. During subsequent construction operations, this minimum backfill of 12 in (300 mm) of depth shall not be disturbed until such time as the underdrains are to be completed. When the underdrains are to be completed, the unsuitable material shall be removed until the porous backfill is exposed. That part of the porous backfill that contains objectionable material shall be removed and replaced with suitable material. The cost of removing and replacing any such unsuitable material shall be borne by the Contractor. Whenever a granular subbase blanket course is to be used under pavements which extends several ft beyond the edge of paving to the outside edge of the underdrain trench, the granular backfill material over the underdrains shall be placed in the trench up to an elevation of 2 in (50 mm) above the bottom surface of the granular subbase blanket course. Immediately prior to the placing of the granular subbase blanket course, the Contractor shall blade this excess trench backfill from the top of the trench onto the adjacent subgrade where it can be incorporated into the granular subbase blanket course. Any unsuitable material that remains over the underdrain trench shall be removed and replaced. The subbase material shall be placed to provide clean contact between the subbase material and the underdrain granular backfill material for the full width of the underdrain trench. c. Controlled Low Strength Material (CLSM). Controlled low strength material shall conform to the requirements of Item P-153. d. Deflection Testing. The Engineer may at any time, not withstanding previous material acceptance, reject or require re-installation of pipe that exceeds 5 percent deflection when measured in accordance with ASTM D 2321, including Appendices.

ITEM D-705 PIPE UNDERDRAINS FOR AIRPORTS D-705 - 4 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

705-3.7 CONNECTIONS. When the plans call for connections to existing or proposed pipe or structures, these connections shall be watertight and made so that a smooth uniform flow line will be obtained throughout the drainage system. 705-3.8 CLEANING AND RESTORATION OF SITE. After the backfill is completed, the Contractor shall dispose of all surplus material, dirt, and rubbish from the site. Surplus dirt may be deposited in embankments, shoulders, or as ordered by the Engineer. Except for paved areas of the airport, the Contractor shall restore all disturbed areas to their original condition.

MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS

ASTM C 136 Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates

ASTM C 144 Aggregate for Masonry Mortar

ASTM C 150 Portland Cement

ASTM D 2321 Underground Installation of Thermoplastic Pipe for Sewers and Other Gravity- Flow Applications

ASTM D 3034 Type PSM Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings

ASTM F 477 Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe

ASTM F 758 Smooth Wall Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Underdrain Systems for Highway, Airport, and Similar Drainage

AASHTO M 288-99 Geotextile Specification for Highway Applications

AASHTO Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges

END OF ITEM D-705

ITEM D-705 PIPE UNDERDRAINS FOR AIRPORTS D-705 - 5 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

ITEM D-751 MANHOLES, CATCH BASINS, INLETS AND INSPECTION HOLES

DESCRIPTION 751-1.1 This item shall consist of construction of manholes, catch basins, inlets, and inspection holes, in accordance with these specifications, at the specified locations and conforming to the lines, grades, and dimensions shown on the plans or required by the Engineer.

MATERIALS 751-2.1 BRICK. The brick shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C 32, Grade SM. 751-2.2 MORTAR. Mortar shall consist of one part Portland cement and two parts sand. The Portland cement shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C 150, Type I. The sand shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C 144. 751-2.3 CONCRETE. Plain and reinforced concrete used in structures, connections of pipes with structures, and the support of structures or frames shall conform to the requirements of Item P-610. 751-2.4 PRECAST CONCRETE PIPE MANHOLE RINGS. Precast concrete pipe manhole rings shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C 478. Unless otherwise specified, the risers and offset cone sections shall have an inside diameter of not less than 36 in (90 cm) nor more than 48 in (120 cm). 751-2.5 CORRUGATED METAL. Corrugated metal shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 36. 751-2.6 FRAMES, COVERS, AND GRATES. The castings shall conform to one of the following requirements: ASTM A 48, Class 30B and a. Gray iron castings 35B b. ASTM A 47 Malleable iron castings c. ASTM A 27 Steel castings d. ASTM A 283, Grade D Structural steel for grates and frames e. ASTM A 536 Ductile iron castings f. ASTM A 897 Austempered ductile iron castings All castings or structural steel units shall conform to the dimensions shown on the plans and shall be designed to support the loadings, aircraft gear configuration and/or direct loading, specified. Each frame and cover or grate unit shall be provided with fastening members to prevent it from being dislodged by traffic but which will allow easy removal for access to the structure. All castings shall be thoroughly cleaned. After fabrication, structural steel units shall be galvanized to meet the requirements of ASTM A 123. 751-2.7 STEPS. The steps or ladder bars shall be gray or malleable cast iron or galvanized steel. The steps shall be the size, length, and shape shown on the plans and those steps that are not galvanized shall be given a coat of bituminous paint, when directed.

ITEM D-751 MANHOLES, CATCH BASINS, INLETS AND INSPECTION HOLES D-751 - 1 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

CONSTRUCTION METHODS 751-3.1 UNCLASSIFIED EXCAVATION. a. The Contractor shall do all excavation for structures and structure footings to the lines and grades or elevations, shown on the plans, or as staked by the Engineer. The excavation shall be of sufficient size to permit the placing of the full width and length of the structure or structure footings shown. The elevations of the bottoms of footings, as shown on the plans, shall be considered as approximately only; and the Engineer may order, in writing, changes in dimensions or elevations of footings necessary to secure a satisfactory foundation. b. Boulders, logs, or any other objectionable material encountered in excavation shall be removed. All rock or other hard foundation material shall be cleaned of all loose material and cut to a firm surface either level, stepped, or serrated, as directed by the Engineer. All seams or crevices shall be cleaned out and grouted. All loose and disintegrated rock and thin strata shall be removed. When concrete is to rest on a surface other than rock, special care shall be taken not to disturb the bottom of the excavation, and excavation to final grade shall not be made until just before the concrete or reinforcing is to be placed. c. The Contractor shall do all bracing, sheathing, or shoring necessary to implement and protect the excavation and the structure as required for safety or conformance to governing laws. The cost of bracing, sheathing, or shoring shall be included in the unit price bid for the structure. d. Unless otherwise provided, bracing, sheathing, or shoring involved in the construction of this item shall be removed by the Contractor after the completion of the structure. Removal shall be effected in a manner that will not disturb or mar finished masonry. The cost of removal shall be included in the unit price bid for the structure. e. After each excavation is completed, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer to that effect; and concrete or reinforcing steel shall be placed after the Engineer has approved the depth of the excavation and the character of the foundation material. 751-3.2 BRICK STRUCTURES. a. Foundations. A prepared foundation shall be placed for all brick structures after the foundation excavation is completed and accepted. Unless otherwise specified, the base shall consist of reinforced concrete mixed, prepared, and placed in accordance with the requirements of Item P-610. b. Laying Brick. All brick shall be clean and thoroughly wet before laying so that they will not absorb any appreciable amount of additional water at the time they are laid. All brick shall be laid in freshly made mortar. Mortar that is not used within 45 minutes after water has been added shall be discarded. Retempering of mortar shall not be permitted. An ample layer of mortar shall be spread on the beds and a shallow furrow shall be made in it that can be readily closed by the laying of the brick. All bed and head joints shall be filled solid with mortar. End joints of stretchers and side or cross joints of headers shall be fully buttered with mortar and a shoved joint made to squeeze out mortar at the top of the joint. Any bricks that may be loosened after the mortar has taken its set, shall be removed, cleaned, and relaid with fresh mortar. No broken or chipped brick shall be used in the face, and no spalls or bats shall be used except where necessary to shape around irregular openings or edges; in which case, full bricks shall be placed at ends or corners where possible, and the bats shall be used in the interior of the course. In making closures, no piece of brick shorter than the width of a whole brick shall be used; and wherever practicable, whole brick shall be used and laid as headers.

ITEM D-751 MANHOLES, CATCH BASINS, INLETS AND INSPECTION HOLES D-751 - 2 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

c. Joints. All joints shall be slushed with mortar at every course, but slushing alone will not be considered adequate for making an acceptable joint. Exterior faces shall be laid up in advance of backing. Exterior faces shall be back plastered or pargeted with a coat of mortar not less than 3/8 in (9 mm) thick before the backing is laid up. Prior to pargeting, all joints on the back of face courses shall be cut flush. Unless otherwise noted, joints shall be not less than 1/4 in (6 mm) nor more than 1/2 in (12 mm) wide and whatever width is adopted shall be maintained uniform throughout the work. d. Pointing. Face joints shall be neatly struck, using the weather joint. All joints shall be finished properly as the laying of the brick progresses. When nails or line pins are used the holes shall be immediately plugged with mortar and pointed when the nail or pin is removed. e. Cleaning. Upon completion of the work all exterior surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned by scrubbing and washing down with water and, if necessary to produce satisfactory results, cleaning shall be done with a 5% solution of muriatic acid which shall then be rinsed off with liberal quantities of clean fresh water. f. Curing and Cold Weather Protection. In hot or dry weather, or when directed by the Engineer, the brick masonry shall be protected and kept moist for at least 48 hours after laying the brick. Brick masonry work or pointing shall not be done when there is frost in the brick or when the air temperature is below 50 F (10 C) unless the Contractor has on the project ready to use, suitable covering and artificial heating devices necessary to keep the atmosphere surrounding the masonry at a temperature of not less than 60 F (15 C) for the duration of the curing period. 751-3.3 CONCRETE STRUCTURES. Concrete structures shall be built on prepared foundations, conforming to the dimensions and form indicated on the plans. The construction shall conform to the requirements specified in Section 03 30 00 “Cast-In-Place Concrete. Any reinforcement required shall be placed as indicated on the plans and shall be approved by the Engineer before the concrete is poured. All invert channels shall be constructed and shaped accurately so as to be smooth, uniform, and cause minimum resistance to flowing water. The interior bottom shall be sloped downward toward the outlet. 751-3.4 PRECAST CONCRETE PIPE STRUCTURES. Precast concrete pipe structures shall be constructed on prepared or previously placed slab foundations and shall conform to the dimensions and locations shown on the plans. All precast concrete pipe sections necessary to build a completed structure shall be furnished. The different sections shall fit together readily, and all jointing and connections shall be cemented with mortar. The top of the upper precast concrete pipe member shall be suitably formed and dimensioned to receive the metal frame and cover or grate, or other cap, as required. Provision shall be made for any connections for lateral pipe, including drops and leads that may be installed in the structure. The flow lines shall be smooth, uniform, and cause minimum resistance to flow. The metal steps that are embedded or built into the side walls shall be aligned and placed at vertical intervals of 12 in (300 mm). When a metal ladder replaces the steps, it shall be securely fastened into position. 751-3.5 CORRUGATED METAL STRUCTURES. Corrugated metal structures shall be constructed on prepared foundations, conforming to the dimensions and locations as shown on the plans. The structures shall be prefabricated. standard or special fittings shall be furnished to provide pipe connections or branches of correct dimensions. The connections or branches shall be of sufficient length to accommodate connecting bands. The fittings shall be welded in place to the metal structures. When indicated, the structures shall be placed on a reinforced concrete base. The top of the metal structure shall be designed so that either a concrete slab or metal collar may be attached to which can be fastened a standard metal frame and grate or cover. Steps or ladders shall be furnished as shown on the plans.

ITEM D-751 MANHOLES, CATCH BASINS, INLETS AND INSPECTION HOLES D-751 - 3 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

751-3.6 INLET AND OUTLET PIPES. Inlet and outlet pipes shall extend through the walls of the structures for a sufficient distance beyond the outside surface to allow for connections but shall be cut off flush with the wall on the inside surface, unless otherwise directed. For concrete or brick structures, the mortar shall be placed around these pipes so as to form a tight, neat connection. 751-3.7 PLACEMENT AND TREATMENT OF CASTINGS, FRAMES, AND FITTINGS. All castings, frames, and fittings shall be placed in the positions indicated on the plans or as directed by the Engineer, and shall be set true to line and to correct elevation. If frames or fittings are to be set in concrete or cement mortar, all anchors or bolts shall be in place and position before the concrete or mortar is placed. The unit shall not be disturbed until the mortar or concrete has set. When frames or fittings are to be placed upon previously constructed masonry, the bearing surface or masonry shall be brought true to line and grade and shall present an even bearing surface in order that the entire face or back of the unit will come in contact with the masonry. The unit shall be set in mortar beds and anchored to the masonry as indicated on the plans or as directed and approved by the Engineer. All units shall set firm and secure. After the frames or fittings have been set in final position and the concrete or mortar has been allowed to harden for 7 days, then the grates or covers shall be placed and fastened down. 751-3.8 INSTALLATION OF STEPS. The steps shall be installed as indicated on the plans or as directed by the Engineer. When the steps are to be set in concrete, they shall be placed and secured in position before the concrete is poured. When the steps are installed in brick masonry, they shall be placed as the masonry is being built. The steps shall not be disturbed or used until the concrete or mortar has hardened for at least 7 days. After this period has elapsed, the steps shall be cleaned and painted, unless they have been galvanized. When steps are required with precast concrete pipe structures, they shall be cast into the sides of the pipe at the time the pipe sections are manufactured or set in place after the structure is erected by drilling holes in the concrete and cementing the steps in place. When steps are required with corrugated metal structures, they shall be welded into aligned position at a vertical spacing of 12 in (300 mm). In lieu of steps, prefabricated ladders may be installed. In the case of brick or concrete structures, the ladder shall be held in place by grouting the supports in drilled holes. In the case of metal structures, the ladder shall be secured by welding the top support and grouting the bottom support into drilled holes in the foundation or as directed. 751-3.9 BACKFILLING. a. After a structure has been completed, the area around it shall be filled with approved material, in horizontal layers not to exceed 8 in (200 mm) in loose depth, and compacted to the density required in Item P-152. Each layer shall be deposited all around the structure to approximately the same elevation. The top of the fill shall meet the elevation shown on the plans or as directed by the Engineer. b. Backfilling shall not be placed against any structure until permission is given by the Engineer. In the case of concrete, such permission shall not be given until the concrete has been in place 7 days, or until tests made by the laboratory under supervision of the Engineer establish that the concrete has attained sufficient strength to provide a factor of safety against damage or strain in withstanding any pressure created by the backfill or the methods used in placing it.

ITEM D-751 MANHOLES, CATCH BASINS, INLETS AND INSPECTION HOLES D-751 - 4 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

c. Backfill shall not be measured for direct payment. Performance of this work shall be considered on obligation of the Contractor covered under the contract unit price for the structure involved. 751-3.10 CLEANING AND RESTORATION OF SITE. After the backfill is completed, the Contractor shall dispose of all surplus material, dirt, and rubbish from the site. Surplus dirt may be deposited in embankments, shoulders, or as ordered by the Engineer. The Contractor shall restore all disturbed areas to their original condition. After all work is completed, the Contractor shall remove all tools and equipment, leaving the entire site free, clear, and in good condition.

MATERIAL REQUIREMENT

ASTM A 27 Steel Castings, Carbon, for General Application

ASTM A 47 Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings

ASTM A 48 Gray Iron Castings

ASTM A 123 Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware

ASTM A 283 Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars

ASTM A 536 Ductile Iron Castings

ASTM A 897 Austempered Ductile Iron Castings

ASTM C 32 Sewer and Manhole Brick (Made from Clay or Shale)

ASTM C 144 Aggregate for Masonry Mortar

ASTM C 150 Portland Cement

ASTM C 478 Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections

AASHTO M 36 Zinc Coated (Galvanized) Corrugated Iron or Steel Culverts and Underdrains

END OF ITEM D-751

ITEM D-751 MANHOLES, CATCH BASINS, INLETS AND INSPECTION HOLES D-751 - 5 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

ITEM F-162 CHAIN LINK FENCE

DESCRIPTION 162-1.1 This item shall consist of furnishing and erecting a chain-link fence in accordance with these specifications and the details shown on the plans and in conformity with the lines and grades shown on the plans or established by the Engineer.

MATERIALS 162-2.1 FABRIC. The fabric shall be woven with a 9-gauge galvanized steel wire in a 2 in mesh and shall meet the requirements of ASTM A 392, Class 2. 162-2.2 BARBED WIRE. Barbed wire shall be 2-strand 12-1/2 gauge zinc-coated wire with 4-point barbs and shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A 121. 162-2.3 POSTS, RAILS AND BRACES. Line posts, rails, and braces shall conform to the requirements of ASTM F 1043 or ASTM F 1083 as follows. Galvanized tubular steel pipe shall conform to the requirements of Group IA, (Schedule 40) coatings conforming to Type A, or Group IC ( High Strength Pipe), External coating Type B, and internal coating Type B or D. Posts, rails, and braces, with the exception of galvanized steel conforming to ASTM F 1043 or ASTM F 1083, Group 1A, Type A, or aluminum alloy, shall demonstrate the ability to withstand testing in salt spray in accordance with ASTM B 117 as follows: External: 1,000 hours with a maximum of 5% red rust. Internal: 650 hours with a maximum of 5% red rust. The dimensions of the posts, rails, and braces shall be in accordance with Tables I through VI of Fed. Spec. RR-F-191/3. 162-2.4 GATES. Gate frames shall consist of galvanized steel pipe and shall conform to the specifications for the same material under paragraph 162-2.3. The fabric shall be of the same type material as used in the fence. 162-2.5 WIRE TIES AND TENSION WIRES. Wire ties for use in conjunction with a given type of fabric shall be of the same material and coating weight identified with the fabric type. Tension wire shall be 7-gauge marcelled steel wire with the same coating as the fabric type and shall conform to ASTM A 824. All material shall conform to Fed. Spec. RR-F-191/4. 162-6 MISCELLANEOUS FITTINGS AND HARDWARE. Miscellaneous steel fittings and hardware for use with zinc-coated steel fabric shall be of commercial grade steel or better quality, wrought or cast as appropriate to the article, and sufficient in strength to provide a balanced design when used in conjunction with fabric posts, and wires of the quality specified herein. All steel fittings and hardware shall be protected with a zinc coating applied in conformance with ASTM A 153. Barbed wire support arms shall withstand a load of 250 pounds applied vertically to the outermost end of the arm. 162-2.7 CONCRETE. Concrete shall be of a commercial grade with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 2500 psi.

CHAIN LINK FENCE F-162 - 1 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

162-2.8 MARKING. Each roll of fabric shall carry a tag showing the kind of base metal (steel, aluminum, or aluminum alloy number), kind of coating, the gauge of the wire, the length of fencing in the roll, and the name of the manufacturer. Posts, wire, and other fittings shall be identified as to manufacturer, kind of base metal (steel, aluminum, or aluminum alloy number), and kind of coating.

CONSTRUCTION METHODS 162-3.1 RESERVED. 162-3.2 INSTALLING POSTS. All posts shall be set in moveable concrete barriers at the required dimension and depth and at the spacing shown on the plans. 162-3.3 INSTALLING TOP RAILS. The top rail shall be continuous for each length of movable barrier and shall pass through the post tops. The coupling used to join the top rail lengths shall allow for expansion. 162-3.4 INSTALLING BRACES. Horizontal brace rails, with diagonal truss rods and turnbuckles, shall be installed at all terminal posts. 162-3.5 INSTALLING FABRIC. The wire fabric shall be firmly attached to the posts and braced in the manner shown on the plans. All wire shall be stretched taut and shall be installed to the required elevations. The fence shall generally follow the contour of the ground, with the bottom of the fence fabric no less than 1 in or more than 4 in from the ground surface. At locations of small natural swales or drainage ditches and where it is not practical to have the fence conform to the general contour of the ground surface, longer posts may be used and multiple strands of barbed wire stretched thereon to span the opening below the fence. The vertical clearance between strands of barbed wire shall be 6 in or less. 162-3.6 RESERVED.

MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS

ASTM A 121 Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Barbed Wire

ASTM A 123 Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products

ASTM A 153 Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware

ASTM A 392 Zinc-Coated Steel Chain-Link Fence Fabric

ASTM A 572 High-Strength Low-Alloy Columbium-Vanadium Steels of Structural Steel Quality

ASTM A 653 Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy- Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process

ASTM A 824 Metallic-Coated Steel Marcelled Tension Wire for Use With Chain Link Fence

ASTM B 117 Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus

CHAIN LINK FENCE F-162 - 2 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

ASTM F 1043 Strength and Protective Coatings on Metal Industrial Chain Link Fence Framework

ASTM F 1083 Pipe, Steel, Hot-Dipped Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Welded, for Fence Structures

FED SPEC RR-F-191/3 Fencing, Wire and Post, Metal (Chain-Link Fence Posts, Top Rails and Braces)

FED SPEC RR-F-191/4 Fencing, Wire and Post, Metal (Chain-Link Fence Accessories)

END OF ITEM F-162

CHAIN LINK FENCE F-162 - 3 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

ITEM P-101 CIVIL DEMOLITION AND SURFACE PREPARATION

DESCRIPTION 101-1.1 This item shall consist of preparation of existing pavement surfaces for overlay, removal of existing pavement, and other miscellaneous items. The work shall be accomplished in accordance with these specifications and the applicable drawings.

EQUIPMENT 101-2.1 All equipment shall be specified hereinafter or as approved by the Engineer. The equipment shall not cause damage to the pavement to remain in place.

CONSTRUCTION 101-3.1 REMOVAL OF EXISTING PAVEMENT a. Concrete: The existing concrete to be removed shall be freed from the pavement to remain unless jackhammers are used for the complete removal. This shall be accomplished by line drilling or sawing through the complete depth of the slab 1 ft inside the perimeter of the final removal limits or outside the load transfer devices, whichever is greater. In this case, the limits of removal would be located on joints. If line drilling is used, the distance between holes shall not exceed the diameter of the hole. The pavement between the perimeter of the pavement removal and the saw cut or line-drilled holes shall be removed with a jackhammer. Where the perimeter of the removal limits is not located on the joint, the perimeter shall be saw cut 2 in in depth or 1/4 the slab thickness, whichever is less. Again, the concrete shall be line drilled or saw cut the full depth of the pavement 6 in inside the removal limits. The pavement inside the saw cut or line shall be broken by methods suitable to the Contractor; however, if the material is to be wasted on the airport site, it shall be reduced to a maximum size designated by the airport owner. The Contractor’s removal operation shall not cause damage to cables, utility ducts, pipelines, or drainage structures under the pavement. Any damage shall be repaired by the Contractor at no expense to the airport owner. b. Bituminous Concrete: Bituminous concrete pavement to be removed shall be cut to the full depth of the bituminous material around the perimeter of the area to be removed. The pavement shall be removed in such a manner that the joint for each layer of pavement replacement is offset 1 ft from the joint in the preceding layer. This does not apply if the removed pavement is to be replaced with concrete or soil. If the material is to be wasted on the airport site, it shall be broken to a maximum size as designated by the airport owner. 101-3.2 PREPARATION OF JOINTS AND CRACKS. All joints and cracks in bituminous and concrete pavements to be overlaid with bituminous concrete shall be cleaned of joint and crack sealer, debris, and vegetation. Any excess joint or crack sealer on the surface of the pavement shall also be removed from the pavement surface. If vegetation is a problem a soil sterilant shall be applied. Cracks and joints wider than 3/8 in shall be filled with a mixture of emulsified asphalt and aggregate. The aggregate shall consist of limestone, volcanic ash, sand, or other material that will cure to form a hard substance. The combined gradation shall be as shown in Table 1.

SURFACE PREPARATION P-101-1 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

Table 1

Sieve Size Percent Passing No. 4 100 No. 8 90-100 No. 16 65-90 No. 30 40-60 No. 50 25-42 No. 100 15-30 No. 200 10-20 Up to 3% cement can be added to accelerate the set time. The mixture shall not contain more than 20% natural sand without approval in writing from the Engineer. The proportions of asphalt emulsion and aggregate shall be determined in the field and may be varied to facilitate construction requirements. Normally, these proportions will be approximately one part asphalt emulsion to five parts aggregate by volume. The material shall be poured into the joints or cracks or shall be placed in the joint or crack and compacted to form a voidless mass. The joint or crack shall be filled within 0 to 1/8 in of the surface. Any material spilled outside the width of the joint shall be removed from the surface prior to constructing the overlay. Where concrete overlays are to be constructed, only the excess joint material on the surface and vegetation in the joints need to be removed. 101-3.3 RESERVED 101-3.4 RESERVED. 101-3.5 COLD PLANING. The machine shall be capable of cutting a vertical edge without chipping or spalling the edges of the pavement to remain. The machine shall have a positive method of controlling the depth of cut. The Engineer shall layout the area to be milled. The area shall be laid out with straightedges in increments of 1 ft widths. Any excessive area that is milled because the Contractor doesn’t have the appropriate machine, or areas that are damaged because of his negligence, shall not be included in the measurement for payment.

END OF ITEM P-101

SURFACE PREPARATION P-101-2 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

ITEM P-152 EXCAVATION AND EMBANKMENT

DESCRIPTION 152-1.1 This item covers excavation, disposal, placement, and compaction of all materials within the limits of the work required to construct safety areas, runways, taxiways, aprons, and intermediate as well as other areas for drainage, building construction, parking, or other purposes in accordance with these specifications and in conformity to the dimensions and typical sections shown on the plans. 152-1.2 CLASSIFICATION. All material excavated shall be classified as defined below: a. Unclassified Excavation. Unclassified excavation shall consist of the excavation and disposal of all material, regardless of its nature, which is not otherwise classified and paid for under the following items. b. Drainage Excavation. Drainage excavation shall consist of all excavation made for the primary purpose of drainage and includes drainage ditches, such as intercepting, inlet or outlet; temporary levee construction; or any other type as shown on the plans. c. Borrow Excavation. Borrow excavation shall consist of approved material required for the construction of embankment or for other portions of the work in excess of the quantity of usable material available from required excavations. Borrow material shall be obtained from areas within the limits of the airport property but outside the normal limits of necessary grading, or from areas outside the airport. 152-1.3 Unsuitable Excavation. Any material containing vegetable or organic matter, such as muck, peat, organic silt, or sod shall be considered unsuitable for use in embankment construction.

CONSTRUCTION METHODS 152-2.1 General. The suitability of material to be placed in embankments shall be subject to approval by the Engineer. All unsuitable material shall be disposed of in waste areas shown on the plans. All waste areas shall be graded to allow positive drainage of the area and of adjacent areas. The surface elevation of waste areas shall not extend above the surface elevation of adjacent usable areas of the airport, unless specified on the plans or approved by the Engineer. When the Contractor’s excavating operations encounter artifacts of historical or archaeological significance, the operations shall be temporarily discontinued. At the direction of the Engineer, the Contractor shall excavate the site in such a manner as to preserve the artifacts encountered and allow for their removal. Such excavation will be paid for as extra work. Those areas outside of the pavement areas in which the top layer of soil material has become compacted, by hauling or other activities of the Contractor shall be scarified and disked to a depth of 4 in, in order to loosen and pulverize the soil. If it is necessary to interrupt existing surface drainage, sewers or under-drainage, conduits, utilities, or similar underground structures, the Contractor shall be responsible for and shall take all necessary precautions to preserve them or provide temporary services. When such facilities are encountered, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer, who shall arrange for their removal if necessary. The Contractor shall, at his/her own expense, satisfactorily repair or pay the cost of all damage to such facilities or structures that may result from any of the Contractor’s operations during the period of the contract. 152-2.2 EXCAVATION. No excavation shall be started until the work has been staked out by the Contractor and the Engineer has obtained elevations and measurements of the ground surface. All suitable

EXCAVATION AND EMBANKMENT P-152 - 1 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204 excavated material shall be used in the formation of embankment, subgrade, or for other purposes shown on the plans. All unsuitable material shall be disposed of offsite. All excess soil is assumed to contaminated, but non-hazardous. The Authority will characterize the soil for disposal but the Contractor is responsible for the stockpiling, hauling, and disposing of all excess material. The excess soil shall be disposed of at a recycling facility capable of accepting and treating low level contaminated soil. The recycling facility shall be approved by the Authority before the start of any land disturbing activities. Disposing of the soil at a landfill or reclamation site is prohibited. When the volume of the excavation exceeds that required to construct the embankments to the grades indicated, the excess shall be used to grade the areas of ultimate development or disposed of as directed. When the volume of excavation is not sufficient for constructing the fill to the grades indicated, the deficiency shall be obtained from borrow areas. The grade shall be maintained so that the surface is well drained at all times. When necessary, temporary drains and drainage ditches shall be installed to intercept or divert surface water that may affect the work. a. Selective Grading. When selective grading is indicated on the plans, the more suitable material as designated by the Engineer shall be used in constructing the embankment or in capping the pavement subgrade. If, at the time of excavation, it is not possible to place this material in its final location, it shall be stockpiled in approved areas so that it can be measured for payment for rehandling as specified in paragraph 3.3. b. Undercutting. Rock, shale, hardpan, loose rock, boulders, or other material unsatisfactory for safety areas, subgrades, roads, shoulders, or any areas intended for turfing shall be excavated to a minimum depth of 12 in, or to the depth specified by the Engineer, below the subgrade. Muck, peat, matted roots, or other yielding material, unsatisfactory for subgrade foundation, shall be removed to the depth specified. Unsuitable materials shall be disposed of at locations shown on the plans. This excavated material shall be paid for at the contract unit price per cubic yard for unclassified excavation. The excavated area shall be refilled with suitable material obtained from the grading operations or borrow areas and compacted to specified densities. The necessary refilling will constitute a part of the embankment. Where rock cuts are made and refilled with selected material, any pockets created in the rock surface shall be drained in accordance with the details shown on the plans. c. Overbreak. Overbreak, including slides, is that portion of any material displaced or loosened beyond the finished work as planned or authorized by the Engineer. The Engineer shall determine if the displacement of such material was unavoidable and his/her decision shall be final. All overbreak shall be graded or removed by the Contractor and disposed of as directed; however, payment will not be made for the removal and disposal of overbreak that the Engineer determines as avoidable. Unavoidable overbreak will be classified as “Unclassified Excavation.” d. Removal of Utilities. The removal of existing structures and utilities required to permit the orderly progress of work will be accomplished by someone other than the Contractor, for example, the utility unless otherwise shown on the plans. All existing foundations shall be excavated for at least 2 feet below the top of subgrade or as indicated on the plans, and the material disposed of as directed. All foundations thus excavated shall be backfilled with suitable material and compacted as specified herein. e. Excavation for Structures. Excavate to indicated elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch. If applicable, extend excavations a sufficient distance from structures for placing and removing concrete formwork, for installing services and other construction, and for inspections.

Excavations for Footings and Foundations: Do not disturb bottom of excavation. Excavate by hand to final grade just before placing concrete reinforcement. Trim bottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive other work.

EXCAVATION AND EMBANKMENT P-152 - 2 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

f. Excavation for Utility Trenches. Excavate trenches to indicated gradients, lines, depths, and elevations. Excavate trenches to uniform widths to provide 12 inches of clearance on each side of pipe or conduit. Excavate trench walls vertically from trench bottom to 12 inches higher than top of pipe or conduit unless otherwise indicated.

Trench Bottoms: Excavate and shape trench bottoms to provide uniform bearing and support of pipes and conduit. Shape subgrade to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits. Remove projecting stones and sharp objects along trench subgrade.

Excavate trenches 6 inches deeper than elevation required in rock or other unyielding bearing material, 4 inches deeper elsewhere, to allow for bedding course.

g. Compaction Requirements. The subgrade under areas to be paved shall be compacted to a depth of 12 inches and to a density of not less than 95 percent of the maximum density as determined by ASTM D 1557. The material to be compacted shall be within +/- 2 percent of optimum moisture content before rolled to obtain the prescribed compaction (except for expansive soils). The subgrade under proposed foundations and slabs-on-grade shall be compacted to a depth of 12 inches and to a density of not less than 95 percent of the maximum density as determined by ASTM D 698. The material to be compacted shall be within +/- 2 percent of optimum moisture content before rolled to obtain the prescribed compaction (except for expansive soils.) Subgrade compaction shall be accepted for density on a lot basis. A lot will consist of one day’s production where it is not expected to exceed 2000 sq yd. Each lot shall be divided into two equal sublots. One test shall be made for each sublot. Sampling locations will be determined by the Engineer on a random basis in accordance with statistical procedures contained in ASTM D 3665. Each lot will be accepted for density when the field density is at least 95 percent of the maximum density of laboratory specimens prepared from samples of the subgrade material. The specimens shall be compacted and tested in accordance with ASTM D 1557. The in-place field density shall be determined in accordance with ASTM D 6938. If the specified density is not attained, the entire lot shall be reworked and/or recompacted and two additional random tests made. This procedure shall be followed until the specified density is reached. Stones or rock fragments larger than 4 inches in their greatest dimension will not be permitted in the top 6 in of the subgrade. The finished grading operations, conforming to the typical cross section, shall be completed and maintained at least 1,000 feet ahead of the paving operations or as directed by the Engineer. In cuts, all loose or protruding rocks on the back slopes shall be barred loose or otherwise removed to line of finished grade of slope. All cut-and-fill slopes shall be uniformly dressed to the slope, cross section, and alignment shown on the plans or as directed by the Engineer. Blasting will not be permitted. 152-2.3 BORROW EXCAVATION. Borrow areas within the airport property are indicated on the plans. Borrow excavation shall be made only at these designated locations and within the horizontal and vertical limits as staked or as directed. When borrow sources are outside the boundaries of the airport property, it shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to locate and obtain the supply, subject to the approval of the Engineer. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer, at least 15 days prior to beginning the excavation, so necessary measurements and tests can be made. All unsuitable material shall be disposed of by the Contractor. All borrow pits

EXCAVATION AND EMBANKMENT P-152 - 3 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204 shall be opened up to expose the vertical face of various strata of acceptable material to enable obtaining a uniform product. Borrow pits shall be excavated to regular lines to permit accurate measurements, and they shall be drained and left in a neat, presentable condition with all slopes dressed uniformly. If a borrow site is required, the contractor shall identify the borrow site for approval by the COTR. The Contractor shall allow 3 weeks for the approval and sampling of the borrow site(s) to determine if the borrow material is clean fill. No fill material shall be brought onsite until the material has been sampled and approved by the Authority. Only clean fill is permitted to be used for this project. 152-2.4 DRAINAGE EXCAVATION. Drainage excavation shall consist of excavating for drainage ditches such as intercepting; inlet or outlet, for temporary levee construction; or for any other type as designed or as shown on the plans. The work shall be performed in the proper sequence with the other construction. All satisfactory material shall be placed in fills; unsuitable material shall be placed in waste areas or as directed. Intercepting ditches shall be constructed prior to starting adjacent excavation operations. All necessary work shall be performed to secure a finish true to line, elevation, and cross section. The Contractor shall maintain ditches constructed on the project to the required cross section and shall keep them free of debris or obstructions until the project is accepted. 152-2.5 UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION

Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations or wall footings by extending bottom elevation of concrete foundation or footing to excavation bottom, without altering top elevation. Lean concrete fill, with 28-day compressive strength of 2500 psi, may be used when approved by Architect. Fill unauthorized excavations under other construction, pipe, or conduit as directed by Engineer. 152-2.6 FORMATION OF EMBANKMENTS. Embankments shall be formed in successive horizontal layers of not more than 8 inches in loose depth for the full width of the cross section, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. The grading operations shall be conducted, and the various soil strata shall be placed, to produce a soil structure as shown on the typical cross section or as directed. Materials such as brush, hedge, roots, stumps, grass and other organic matter, shall not be incorporated or buried in the embankment. Operations on earthwork shall be suspended at any time when satisfactory results cannot be obtained because of rain, freezing, or other unsatisfactory conditions of the field. The Contractor shall drag, blade, or slope the embankment to provide proper surface drainage. The material in the layer shall be within +/-2 percent of optimum moisture content before rolling to obtain the prescribed compaction. In order to achieve a uniform moisture content throughout the layer, wetting or drying of the material and manipulation shall be required when necessary. Should the material be too wet to permit proper compaction or rolling, all work on all of the affected portions of the embankment shall be delayed until the material has dried to the required moisture content. Sprinkling of dry material to obtain the proper moisture content shall be done with approved equipment that will sufficiently distribute the water. Sufficient equipment to furnish the required water shall be available at all times. Samples of all embankment materials for testing, both before and after placement and compaction, will be taken for each 2,000 square yards of material placed per layer. Based on these tests, the Contractor shall make the necessary corrections and adjustments in methods, materials or moisture content in order to achieve the correct embankment density. Rolling operations shall be continued until the embankment is compacted to not less than 100 percent of maximum density for noncohesive soils, and 95 percent of maximum density for cohesive soils as determined by ASTM D 1557.

EXCAVATION AND EMBANKMENT P-152 - 4 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

On all areas outside of the pavement areas, no compaction will be required on the top 4 in. The in-place field density shall be determined in accordance with ASTM D 6938. Compaction areas shall be kept separate, and no layer shall be covered by another until the proper density is obtained. During construction of the embankment, the Contractor shall route his/her equipment at all times, both when loaded and when empty, over the layers as they are placed and shall distribute the travel evenly over the entire width of the embankment. The equipment shall be operated in such a manner that hardpan, cemented gravel, clay, or other chunky soil material will be broken up into small particles and become incorporated with the other material in the layer. In the construction of embankments, layer placement shall begin in the deepest portion of the fill; as placement progresses, layers shall be constructed approximately parallel to the finished pavement grade line. Stones or fragmentary rock larger than 4 inches in their greatest dimensions will not be allowed in the top 6 in of the subgrade. Rockfill shall be brought up in layers as specified or as directed and every effort shall be exerted to fill the voids with the finer material forming a dense, compact mass. Rock or boulders shall not be disposed of as directed. When the excavated material consists predominantly of rock fragments of such size that the material cannot be placed in layers of the prescribed thickness without crushing, pulverizing or further breaking down the pieces, such material may be placed in the embankment as directed in layers not exceeding 2 feet in thickness. Each layer shall be leveled and smoothed with suitable leveling equipment and by distribution of spalls and finer fragments of rock. These type lifts shall not be constructed above an elevation 4 feet below the finished subgrade. Frozen material shall not be placed in the embankment nor shall embankment be placed upon frozen material. There will be no separate measurement of payment for compacted embankment, and all costs incidental to placing in layers, compacting, disking, watering, mixing, sloping, and other necessary operations for construction of embankments will be included in the contract price for excavation, borrow, or other items. a. Drainage Course Under Concrete Slabs-On-Grade. Material shall be a narrowly graded mixture of washed crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed gravel; ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 57; with 100 percent passing a 1-1/2 inch sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 8 (2.36) sieve. Place drainage course on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice. Place drainage course that exceeds 6 inches in compacted thickness in layer of equal thickness, with no compacted layer more than 6 inches thick or less than 3 inches thick. Compact each layer of drainage course to required cross sections and thicknesses to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698. 152-2.7 FINISHING AND PROTECTION OF SUBGRADE. After the subgrade has been substantially completed the full width shall be conditioned by removing any soft or other unstable material that will not compact properly. The resulting areas and all other low areas, holes or depressions shall be brought to grade with suitable select material. Scarifying, blading, rolling and other methods shall be performed to provide a thoroughly compacted subgrade shaped to the lines and grades shown on the plans. Grading of the subgrade shall be performed so that it will drain readily. The Contractor shall take all precautions necessary to protect the subgrade from damage. He/she shall limit hauling over the finished subgrade to that which is essential for construction purposes.

EXCAVATION AND EMBANKMENT P-152 - 5 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

All ruts or rough places that develop in a completed subgrade shall be smoothed and recompacted. No subbase, base, or surface course shall be placed on the subgrade until the subgrade has been approved by the Engineer. 152-2.8 HAUL. All hauling will be considered a necessary and incidental part of the work. Its cost shall be considered by the Contractor and included in the contract unit price for the pay of items of work involved. No payment will be made separately or directly for hauling on any part of the work. 152-2.9 TOLERANCES. In those areas upon which a subbase or base course is to be placed, the top of the subgrade shall be of such smoothness that, when tested with a 16 ft straightedge applied parallel and at right angles to the centerline, it shall not show any deviation in excess of 1/2 in, or shall not be more than 0.05 ft from true grade as established by grade hubs or pins. Any deviation in excess of these amounts shall be corrected by loosening, adding, or removing materials; reshaping; and recompacting by sprinkling and rolling. 152-2.10 RESERVED.

TESTING REQUIREMENTS

ASTM D 698 Test for Moisture-Density Relations of Soils and Soil-Aggregate Mixtures, Using 5.5-pound (2.49 kg) Rammer and 12 in (305 mm) Drop

ASTM D 1557 Test for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort

ASTM D 3665 Random Sampling of Construction Materials

ASTM D 6938 In-Place Density and Water Content of Soil and Soil-Aggregate by Nuclear Methods

END OF ITEM P-152

EXCAVATION AND EMBANKMENT P-152 - 6 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

ITEM P-154 SUBBASE COURSE

DESCRIPTION 154-1.1 This item shall consist of a subbase course composed of granular materials constructed on a prepared subgrade or underlying course in accordance with these specifications, and in conformity with the dimensions and typical cross section shown on the plans.

MATERIALS 154-2.1 MATERIALS. The subbase material shall consist of hard durable particles or fragments of granular aggregates. This material will be mixed or blended with fine sand, clay, stone dust, or other similar binding or filler materials produced from approved sources. This mixture must be uniform and shall comply with the requirements of these specifications as to gradation, soil constants, and shall be capable of being compacted into a dense and stable subbase. The material shall be free from vegetable matter, lumps or excessive amounts of clay, and other objectionable or foreign substances. Pit-run material may be used, provided the material meets the requirements specified. Table 1 Gradation Requirements

Sieve designation (square Percentage by openings) as per ASTM C 136 weight passing and ASTM D 422 sieves 3 in (75.0 mm) 100 No. 10 (2.0 mm) 20-100 No. 40 (0.450 mm) 5-60 No. 200 (0.075 mm) 0-8 The portion of the material passing the No. 40 (0.450 mm) sieve shall have a liquid limit of not more than 25 and a plasticity index of not more than 6 when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4318. The maximum amount of material finer than 0.02 mm in diameter shall be less than 3%.

CONSTRUCTION METHODS 154-3.1 GENERAL. The subbase course shall be placed where designated on the plans or as directed by the Engineer. The material shall be shaped and thoroughly compacted within the tolerances specified. Granular subbases which, due to grain sizes or shapes, are not sufficiently stable to support without movement the construction equipment, shall be mechanically stabilized to the depth necessary to provide such stability as directed by the Engineer. The mechanical stabilization shall principally include the addition of a fine-grained medium to bind the particles of the subbase material sufficiently to furnish a bearing strength, so that the course will not deform under the traffic of the construction equipment. The addition of the binding medium to the subbase material shall not increase the soil constants of that material above the limits specified. 154-3.2 OPERATION IN PITS. All work involved in clearing and stripping pits and handling unsuitable material encountered shall be performed by the Contractor at his/her own expense. The subbase material

ITEM P-154 SUBBASE COURSE P-154 - 1 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204 shall be obtained from pits or sources that have been approved. The material in the pits shall be excavated and handled in such manner that a uniform and satisfactory product can be secured. 154-3.3 PREPARING UNDERLYING COURSE. Before any subbase material is placed, the underlying course shall be prepared and conditioned as specified. The course shall be checked and accepted by the Engineer before placing and spreading operations are started. To protect the subgrade and to ensure proper drainage, the spreading of the subbase shall begin along the centerline of the pavement on a crowned section or on the high side of pavements with a one-way slope. 154-3.4 MATERIALS ACCEPTANCE IN EXISTING CONDITION. When the entire subbase material is secured in a uniform and satisfactory condition and contains approximately the required moisture, such approved material may be moved directly to the spreading equipment for placing. The material may be obtained from gravel pits, stockpiles, or may be produced from a crushing and screening plant with the proper blending. The materials from these sources shall meet the requirements for gradation, quality, and consistency. It is the intent of this section of the specifications to secure materials that will not require further mixing. The moisture content of the material shall be approximately that required to obtain maximum density. Any minor deficiency or excess of moisture may be corrected by surface sprinkling or by aeration. In such instances, some mixing or manipulation may be required, immediately preceding the rolling, to obtain the required moisture content. The final operation shall be blading or dragging, if necessary, to obtain a smooth uniform surface true to line and grade. 154-3.5 PLANT MIXING. When materials from several sources are to be blended and mixed, the subbase material shall be processed in a central or travel mixing plant. The subbase material, together with any blended material, shall be thoroughly mixed with the required amount of water. After the mixing is complete, the material shall be transported to and spread on the underlying course without undue loss of the moisture content. 154-3.6 GENERAL METHODS FOR PLACING. The subbase course shall be constructed in layers. Any layer shall be not less than 3 in (75 mm) nor more than 8 in (200 mm) of compacted thickness. The subbase material shall be deposited and spread evenly to a uniform thickness and width. The material, as spread, shall be of uniform gradation with no pockets of fine or coarse materials. The subbase, unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer, shall not be spread more than 2,000 sq yd (1700 sq m) in advance of the rolling. Any necessary sprinkling shall be kept within this limit. No material shall be placed in snow or on a soft, muddy, or frozen course. When more than one layer is required, the construction procedure described herein shall apply similarly to each layer. During the placing and spreading, sufficient caution shall be exercised to prevent the incorporation of subgrade, shoulder, or foreign material in the subbase course mixture. 154-3.7 FINISHING AND COMPACTING. After spreading or mixing, the subbase material shall be thoroughly compacted by rolling and sprinkling, when necessary. Sufficient rollers shall be furnished to adequately handle the rate of placing and spreading of the subbase course. The field density of the compacted material shall be at least 100 percent of the maximum density of laboratory specimens prepared from samples of the subbase material delivered to the jobsite. The laboratory specimens shall be compacted and tested in accordance with ASTM D 1557. The in-place field density shall be determined in accordance with ASTM D 6938. The moisture content of the material at the start of compaction shall not be below nor more than 2 percentage points above the optimum moisture content. Testing shall be in accordance with Section 120.

ITEM P-154 SUBBASE COURSE P-154 - 2 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

The course shall not be rolled when the underlying course is soft or yielding or when the rolling causes undulation in the subbase. When the rolling develops irregularities that exceed 1/2 in (12 mm) when tested with a 16 ft (4.8 m) straightedge, the irregular surface shall be loosened and then refilled with the same kind of material as that used in constructing the course and again rolled as required above. Along places inaccessible to rollers, the subbase material shall be tamped thoroughly with mechanical or hand tampers. Sprinkling during rolling, if necessary, shall be in the amount and by equipment approved by the Engineer. Water shall not be added in such a manner or quantity that free water will reach the underlying layer and cause it to become soft. 154-3.8 SURFACE TEST. After the course is completely compacted, the surface shall be tested for smoothness and accuracy of grade and crown; any portion found to lack the required smoothness or to fail in accuracy of grade or crown shall be scarified, reshaped, recompacted, and otherwise manipulated as the Engineer may direct until the required smoothness and accuracy re obtained. The finished surface shall not vary more than 1/2 in (12 mm) when tested with a 16 ft (4.8 m) straightedge applied parallel with, and at right angles to, the centerline. 154-3.9 THICKNESS. The thickness of the completed subbase course shall be determined by depth tests or sample holes taken at intervals so each test shall represent no more than 500 sq yd (420 sq m). When the deficiency in thickness is more than 1/2 in (12 mm), the Contractor shall correct such areas by scarifying, adding satisfactory mixture, rolling, sprinkling, reshaping, and finishing in accordance with these specifications. The Contractor shall replace at his/her expense the subbase material where borings are taken for test purposes. 154-3.10 PROTECTION. Work on subbase course shall not be conducted during freezing temperature nor when the subgrade is wet. When the subbase material contains frozen material or when the underlying course is frozen, the construction shall be stopped. 154-3.11 MAINTENANCE. Following the final shaping of the material, the subbase shall be maintained throughout its entire length by the use of standard motor graders and rollers until, in the judgment of the Engineer, the subbase meets all requirements and is acceptable for the construction of the next course.

TESTING REQUIREMENTS

ASTM C 136 Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates

ASTM D 422 Particle Size Analysis of Soils

ASTM D 1557 Test for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort

ASTM D 6938 In-Place Density and Water Content of Soil and Soil-Aggregate by Nuclear Methods

ASTM D 4318 Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils

END OF ITEM P-154

ITEM P-154 SUBBASE COURSE P-154 - 3 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

ITEM P-209 CRUSHED AGGREGATE BASE COURSE

DESCRIPTION 209-1.1 This item consists of a base course composed of crushed aggregates constructed on a prepared course in accordance with these specifications and in conformity to the dimensions and typical cross sections shown on the plans.

MATERIALS 209-2.1 AGGREGATE. Aggregates shall consist of clean, sound, durable particles of crushed stone, crushed gravel, or crushed slag and shall be free from coatings of clay, silt, vegetable matter, and other objectionable materials and shall contain no clay balls. Fine aggregate passing the No. 4 (4.75 mm) sieve shall consist of fines from the operation of crushing the coarse aggregate. If necessary, fine aggregate may be added to produce the correct gradation. The fine aggregate shall be produced by crushing stone, gravel, or slag that meet the requirements for wear and soundness specified for coarse aggregate. The crushed slag shall be an air-cooled, blast furnace slag and shall have a unit weight of not less than 70 pounds per cubic foot when tested in accordance with ASTM C 29. The coarse aggregate portion, defined as the material retained on the No. 4 (4.75 mm) sieve and larger, shall contain no more than 15 percent, by weight, of flat or elongated pieces as defined in ASTM D 4791 and shall have at least 90 percent by weight of particles with at least two fractured faces and 100 percent with at least one fractured face. The area of each face shall be equal to at least 75 percent of the smallest midsectional area of the piece. When two fractured faces are contiguous, the angle between the planes of fractures shall be at least 30° to count as two fractured faces. The percentage of wear shall not be greater than 45 percent when tested in accordance with ASTM C 131. The sodium sulfate soundness loss shall not exceed 12 percent, after 5 cycles, when tested in accordance with ASTM C 88. The fraction passing the No. 40 (0.42 mm) sieve shall have a liquid limit no greater than 25 and a plasticity index of not more than 4 when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4318. The fine aggregate shall have a minimum sand equivalent value of 35 when tested in accordance with ASTM D 2419. a. Sampling and Testing. Aggregates for preliminary testing shall be furnished by the Contractor prior to the start of production. All tests for initial aggregate submittals necessary to determine compliance with the specification requirements will be made by the Engineer at no expense to the Contractor. Samples of aggregates shall be furnished by the Contractor at the start of production and at intervals during production. The sampling points and intervals will be designated by the Engineer. The samples will be the basis of approval of specific lots of aggregates from the standpoint of the quality requirements of this section. In lieu of testing, the Engineer may accept certified state test results indicating that the aggregate meets specification requirements. Certified test results shall be less than 6 months old. Samples of aggregates to check gradation shall be taken by the Engineer. At least one sample per lot shall be taken. The lot will be consistent with acceptable sampling for density. The samples shall be taken from the in-place, compacted material or as directed by the Engineer. Sampling shall be in accordance with ASTM D 75, and testing shall be in accordance with ASTM C 136 and ASTM C 117.

CRUSHED AGGREGATE BASE COURSE P-209 - 1 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

b. Gradation Requirements. The gradation (job mix) of the final mixture shall fall within the design range indicated in Table 1, when tested in accordance with ASTM C 117 and ASTM C 136. The final gradation shall be continuously well graded from coarse to fine and shall not vary from the low limit on one sieve to the high limit on an adjacent sieve or vice versa. Where environmental conditions (temperature and availability of free moisture) indicate potential damage due to frost action, the maximum percent of material by weight of particles smaller than 0.02 mm shall be 3 percent when tested in accordance with ASTM D 422. Table 1 Requirements For Gradation Of Aggregate

Sieve Size Design Range Job Mix Tolerances Percentage by Weight Percent 2 in (50.0 mm) 100 0 1-1/2 (37.0 mm) 95-100 +/- 5 1 in (25.0 mm) 70-95 +/- 8 3/4 in (19.0 mm) 55-85 +/- 8 No. 4 (4.75 mm) 30-60 +/- 8 No. 30 (0.60 mm) 12-30 +/- 5 No. 200 (0.075 mm) 0-5 +/- 3

The job mix tolerances in Table 1 shall be applied to the job mix gradation to establish a job control grading band. The full tolerance still will apply if application of the tolerances results in a job control grading band outside the design range. The fraction of the final mixture that passes the No. 200 (0.075 mm) sieve shall not exceed 60 percent of the fraction passing the No. 30 (0.60 mm) sieve.

CONSTRUCTION METHODS 209-3.1 PREPARING UNDERLYING COURSE. The underlying course shall be checked and accepted by the Engineer before placing and spreading operations are started. Any ruts or soft yielding places caused by improper drainage conditions, hauling, or any other cause shall be corrected at the Contractor’s expense before the base course is placed thereon. Material shall not be placed on frozen subgrade. 209-3.2 MIXING. The aggregate shall be uniformly blended during crushing operations or mixed in a plant. The plant shall blend and mix the materials to meet the specifications and to secure the proper moisture content for compaction. 209-3.3 PLACING. The crushed aggregate base material shall be placed on the moistened subgrade in layers of uniform thickness with a mechanical spreader. The maximum depth of a compacted layer shall be 6 in. If the total depth of the compacted material is more than 6 in, it shall be constructed in two or more layers. In multi-layer construction, the base course shall be placed in approximately equal-depth layers. The previously constructed layer should be cleaned of loose and foreign material prior to placing the next layer. The surface of the compacted material shall be kept moist until covered with the next layer.

CRUSHED AGGREGATE BASE COURSE P-209 - 2 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

209-3.4 COMPACTION. Immediately upon completion of the spreading operations, the crushed aggregate shall be thoroughly compacted. The number, type, and weight of rollers shall be sufficient to compact the material to the required density. The moisture content of the material during placing operations shall not be below, nor more than 2 percentage points above, the optimum moisture content as determined by ASTM D 1557. 209-3.5 ACCEPTANCE SAMPLING AND TESTING FOR DENSITY. Aggregate base course shall be accepted for density on a lot basis. A lot will consist of one day’s production where it is not expected to exceed 2000 sq yd. A lot will consist of one-half day’s production where a day’s production is expected to consist of between 2000 and 5000 sq yd. Each lot shall be divided into four equal sublots. One test shall be made for each sublot. Sampling locations will be determined by the Engineer on a random basis in accordance with statistical procedures contained in ASTM D 3665. Each lot will be accepted for density when the field density is at least 100 percent of the maximum density of laboratory specimens prepared from samples of the base course material delivered to the job site. The specimens shall be compacted and tested in accordance with ASTM D 1557. The in-place field density shall be determined in accordance with ASTM D 6938. If the specified density is not attained, the entire lot shall be reworked and/or recompacted and two additional random tests made. This procedure shall be followed until the specified density is reached. When acceptance testing is accomplished using a nuclear gauge in accordance with ASTM D 6938, the gauge should be field calibrated in accordance with Section 120 and ASTM standards. Calibration tests shall be conducted on the first lot of material placed that meets the density requirements. When using the nuclear method ASTM D 6938 shall be used to determine the moisture content of the material. The calibration curve furnished with the nuclear gauges shall be checked in accordance with ASTM standards. The calibration checks shall be made at the beginning of a job and at regular intervals. 209-3.6 FINISHING. The surface of the aggregate base course shall be finished by blading or with automated equipment especially designed for this purpose. In no case will the addition of thin layers of material be added to the top layer of base course to meet grade. If the elevation of the top layer is 1/2 in or more below grade, the top layer of base shall be scarified to a depth of at least 3 in, new material added, and the layer shall be blended and recompacted to bring it to grade. If the finished surface is above plan grade, it shall be cut back to grade and rerolled. 209-3.7 SURFACE TOLERANCES. The finished surface shall not vary more than 3/8 in when tested with a 16 ft straightedge applied parallel with or at right angles to the centerline. Any deviation in excess of this amount shall be corrected by the Contractor at the Contractor’s expense. 209-3.8 THICKNESS CONTROL. The completed thickness of the base course shall be within 1/2 in of the design thickness. Four determinations of thickness shall be made for each lot of material placed. The lot size shall be consistent with that specified in paragraph 3.5. Each lot shall be divided into four equal sublots. One test shall be made for each sublot. Sampling locations will be determined by the Engineer on a random basis in accordance with procedures contained in ASTM D 3665. Where the thickness is deficient by more than 1/2 in, the Contractor shall correct such areas at no additional cost by excavating to the required depth and replacing with new material. Additional test holes may be required to identify the limits of deficient areas. 209-3.9 MAINTENANCE. The base course shall be maintained in a condition that will meet all specification requirements until the work is accepted. Equipment used in the construction of an adjoining section may be routed over completed portions of the base course, provided no damage results and

CRUSHED AGGREGATE BASE COURSE P-209 - 3 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204 provided that the equipment is routed over the full width of the base course to avoid rutting or uneven compaction. The Contractor shall remove all survey and grade hubs from the base courses prior to placing any bituminous surface course.

TESTING REQUIREMENTS

ASTM C 29 Unit Weight of Aggregate

ASTM C 88 Soundness of Aggregates by Use of Sodium Sulfate or Magnesium Sulfate

ASTM C 117 Materials Finer than 75 μm (No. 200) Sieve in Mineral Aggregates by Washing

ASTM C 131 Resistance to Degradation of Small-Size Coarse Aggregate by abrasion and impact in the Los Angeles Machine

ASTM C 136 Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates

ASTM D 75 Sampling Aggregate

ASTM D 422 Particle Size Analysis of Soils

ASTM D 698 Moisture-Density Relations of Soils and Soil-Aggregate Mixtures Using 5.5- lb (2.49-kg) Rammer and 12 in (305 mm) Drop

ASTM D 1557 Test for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort

ASTM D 2419 Sand Equivalent Value of Soils and Fine Aggregate

ASTM D 4791 Flat Particles, Elongated Particles, or Flat and Elongated Particles in Coarse Aggregate

ASTM D 6938 In-Place Density and Water Content of Soil and Soil-Aggregate by Nuclear Methods

ASTM D 3665 Random Sampling of Construction Materials

ASTM D 4318 Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils

END OF ITEM P-209

CRUSHED AGGREGATE BASE COURSE P-209 - 4 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

ITEM VDOT 315 - ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVEMENT

DESCRIPTION

315-1.1 This item shall consist of an asphalt concrete pavement composed of mineral aggregate and bituminous material, mixed in a central mixing plant and placed on a prepared course in accordance with these specifications and in conformity with the dimensions and typical cross sections shown on the plans and with the lines and grades established by the Contractor.

MATERIALS

315-2.1 The asphalt pavement material shall conform to VDOT Road and Bridge specifications, current edition, Section 315 - Asphalt Concrete Pavement, with the following clarifications:

a. Asphalt concrete shall conform to the requirements of Section 211 of the VDOT Road and Bridge Specifications, current edition. The mix shall be VDOT SM 19.0D, performance grade PG 70-22, nominal maximum aggregate size 3/4-inch. RAP shall be limited to 20% maximum.

b. Prime coat shall not be required.

c. Curb backup material and liquid asphalt emulsion for rumble strip shall not be required.

Job-mix formulas shall be submitted by the Contractor to the Engineer prior to starting work. A new job- mix formula shall be required, if new sources of supply are added or used and if unsatisfactory results occur.

EQUIPMENT AND CONSTRUCTION METHODS

315-3.1 The equipment used for placement of asphalt concrete shall be as described in the VDOT Road and Bridge specifications, current edition, Section 315 - Asphalt Concrete Pavement, paragraph 315.03.

CONSTRUCTION METHODS

315-4.1 Placement limitations shall be in accordance with Section 315, paragraph 315.04 of the VDOT Road and Bridge Specifications, current edition.

315-4.2 Construction methods and procedures shall be in accordance with Section 315, paragraph 315.05 of the VDOT Road and Bridge Specifications, current edition. Priming the base course will not be required.

ACCEPTANCE

315-5.1 A control strip shall be placed in accordance with Section 315, paragraph 315.05 of the VDOT Road and Bridge Specifications, current edition. A control strip shall be constructed for each course. Density requirements shall be in accordance with Table III-3 of the course for which the control strip represents. Payment shall be in accordance with Table II-4.

ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 315 - 1 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

315-5.2 Acceptance for each day's production will be on a lot basis as defined in Section 315, paragraph 315.05 of the VDOT Road and Bridge Specifications, current edition.

315-5.3 Pavement samples for purposes of testing for depth and density of the course shall be made in accordance with Section 315, paragraph 315.06 of the VDOT Road and Bridge Specifications, current edition

315-5.4 Acceptance of the pavement for surface tolerance, finished grade tolerance, and thickness tolerance will be based on the requirements contained in Section 315, paragraph 315.07 of the VDOT Road and Bridge Specifications, current edition

TESTING REQUIREMENTS

ASTM C 29 Bulk Density (“Unit Weight”) and Voids in Aggregate

ASTM C 88 Soundness of Aggregates by Use of Sodium Sulfate or Magnesium Sulfate

ASTM C 117 Materials Finer than 75-um (No.200) Sieve in Mineral Aggregates by Washing

ASTM C 127 Specific Gravity and Absorption of Coarse Aggregate

ASTM C 131 Resistance to Degradation of Small Size Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine

ASTM C 136 Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates

ASTM C 183 Sampling and the Amount of Testing of Hydraulic Cement

ASTM C 566 Total Evaporable Moisture Content of Aggregate by Drying

ASTM D 75 Sampling Aggregates

ASTM D 979 Sampling Bituminous Paving Mixtures

ASTM D 995 Mixing Plants for Hot-Mixed Hot-Laid Bituminous Paving Mixtures

ASTM D 1073 Fine Aggregate for Bituminous Paving Mixtures

ASTM D 1074 Compressive Strength of Bituminous Mixtures

ASTM D 1188 Bulk Specific Gravity and Density of Compacted Bituminous Mixtures Using Paraffin-Coated Specimens

ASTM D 1461 Moisture or Volatile Distillates in Bituminous Paving Mixtures

ASTM D 2041 Theoretical Maximum Specific Gravity and Density of Bituminous Paving Mixtures

ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 315 - 2 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

ASTM D 2172 Quantitative Extraction of Bitumen from Bituminous Paving Mixtures

ASTM D 2419 Sand Equivalent Value of Soils and Fine Aggregate

ASTM D 2489 Estimating Degree of Particle Coating of Bituminous-Aggregate Mixtures

ASTM D 2726 Bulk Specific Gravity and Density of Non-Absorptive Compacted Bituminous Mixtures

ASTM D 2950 Density of Bituminous Concrete in Place by Nuclear Methods

ASTM D 3203 Percent Air Voids in Compacted Dense and Open Bituminous Paving Mixtures

ASTM D 3665 Random Sampling of Construction Materials

ASTM D 3666 Minimum Requirements for Agencies Testing and Inspecting Road and Paving Materials

ASTM D 4125 Asphalt Content of Bituminous Mixtures by the Nuclear Method

ASTM D 4318 Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils

ASTM D 4791 Flat Particles, Elongated Particles, or Flat and Elongated Particles in Coarse Aggregate

ASTM D 4867 Effect of Moisture on Asphalt Concrete Paving Mixtures

ASTM D 5444 Standard Test Method For Mechanical Size Analysis of Extracted Aggregate

ASTM D 6926 Standard Practice for Preparation of Bituminous Specimens Using MARSHALL Apparatus

ASTM D 6927 Standard Test Method for MARSHALL Stability and Flow of Bituminous Mixtures

ASTM E 11 Wire-Cloth Sieves for Testing Purposes

ASTM E 178 Dealing with Outlying Observations

ASTM E 1274 Measuring Pavement Roughness Using a Profilograph

AASHTO T 30 Mechanical Analysis of Extracted Aggregate

AASHTO T 110 Moisture or Volatile Distillates in Bituminous Paving Mixtures

ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 315 - 3 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

The Asphalt Institute's Mix Design Methods for Asphalt Concrete Manual No. 2 (MS-2)

MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS

ASTM D 242 Mineral Filler for Bituminous Paving Mixtures

ASTM D 946 Penetration Graded Asphalt Cement for Use in Pavement Construction

ASTM D 3381 Viscosity-Graded Asphalt Cement for Use in Pavement Construction

ASTM D 4552 Classifying Hot-Mix Recycling Agents

AASHTO M320 Performance Graded Asphalt Binder

END OF ITEM VDOT 315

ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 315 - 4 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

ITEM P-603 – BITUMINOUS TACK COAT

DESCRIPTION 603-1.1 This item shall consist of preparing and treating a bituminous or concrete surface with bituminous material in accordance with these specifications and in reasonably close conformity to the lines shown on the plans.

MATERIALS 603-2.1 BITUMINOUS MATERIALS. The bituminous material shall be either cutback asphalt, emulsified asphalt, or tar and shall conform to the requirements of Table 1. The type, grade, controlling specification, and application temperature of bituminous material to be used shall be specified by the Engineer. Table 1 Bituminous Material Type and Grade Specification Application Temperature Deg. F Deg. C Emulsified Asphalt SS-1, SS-1h ASTM D 977 75-130 25-55 CSS-1, CSS-1h ASTM D 2397 75-130 25-55 Cutback Asphalt RC-70 ASTM D 2028 120-160 50-70 Tar RTCB 5, RTCB 6 AASHTO M 52 60-120 15-50

CONSTRUCTION METHODS 603-3.1 WEATHER LIMITATIONS. The tack coat shall be applied only when the existing surface is dry and the atmospheric temperature is above 60 °F (15 °C). The temperature requirements may be waived, but only when so directed by the Engineer. 603-3.2 EQUIPMENT. The Contractor shall provide equipment for heating and applying the bituminous material. The distributor shall be designed, equipped, maintained, and operated so that bituminous material at even heat may be applied uniformly on variable widths of surface at the specified rate. The allowable variation from the specified rate shall not exceed 10 percent. Distributor equipment shall include a tachometer, pressure gauges, volume-measuring devices or a calibrated tank, and a thermometer for measuring temperatures of tank contents. The distributor shall be self-powered and shall be equipped with a power unit for the pump and full circulation spray bars adjustable laterally and vertically. If the distributor is not equipped with an operable quick shut off valve, the tack operations shall be started and stopped on building paper. The Contractor shall remove blotting sand prior to asphalt concrete lay down operations at no additional expense to the owner.

BITUMINOUS TACK COAT P-603 - 1 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

A power broom and/or blower shall be provided for any required cleaning of the surface to be treated. 603-3.3 APPLICATION OF BITUMINOUS MATERIAL. Immediately before applying the tack coat, the full width of surface to be treated shall be swept with a power broom and/or air blast to remove all loose dirt and other objectionable material. Emulsified asphalt shall be diluted by the addition of water when directed by the Engineer and shall be applied a sufficient time in advance of the paver to ensure that all water has evaporated before any of the overlying mixture is placed on the tacked surface. The bituminous material including vehicle or solvent shall be uniformly applied with a bituminous distributor at the rate of 0.05 to 0.15 gallons per square yard depending on the condition of the existing surface. The type of bituminous material and application rate shall be approved by the Engineer prior to application. Following the application, the surface shall be allowed to cure without being disturbed for such period of time as may be necessary to permit drying out and setting of the tack coat. This period shall be determined by the Engineer. The surface shall then be maintained by the Contractor until the next course has been placed. Suitable precautions shall be taken by the Contractor to protect the surface against damage during this interval. 603-3.4 BITUMINOUS MATERIAL CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITY. Samples of the bituminous material that the Contractor proposes to use, together with a statement as to its source and character, must be submitted and approved before use of such material begins. The Contractor shall require the manufacturer or producer of the bituminous material to furnish material subject to this and all other pertinent requirements of the contract. Only satisfactory materials so demonstrated by service tests, shall be acceptable. The Contractor shall furnish the vendor’s certified test reports for each carload, or equivalent, of bituminous material shipped to the project. The tests reports shall contain all the data required by the applicable specification. If the Contractor applies the material prior to receipt of the tests reports, payment for the material shall be withheld until they are received. If the material does not pass the specifications it shall be replaced at the contractor’s expense. The report shall be delivered to the Engineer before permission is granted for use of the material. The furnishing of the vendor’s certified test report for the bituminous material shall not be interpreted as a basis for final acceptance. All such test reports shall be subject to verification by testing samples of material received for use on the project. 603-3.5 FREIGHT AND WEIGH BILLS. Before the final estimate is allowed, the Contractor shall file with the Engineer receipted bills when railroad shipments are made, and certified weigh bills when materials are received in any other manner, of the bituminous materials actually used in the construction covered by the contract. The Contractor shall not remove bituminous material from the tank car or storage tank until the initial outage and temperature measurements have been taken by the Engineer, nor shall the car or tank be released until the final outage has been taken by the Engineer. Copies of freight bills and weigh bills shall be furnished to the Engineer during the progress of the work.

MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS

ASTM D 633 Volume Correction Table for Road Tar

ASTM D 977 Emulsified Asphalt

ASTM D 1250 Petroleum Measurement Tables

BITUMINOUS TACK COAT P-603 - 2 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

ASTM D 2028 Cutback Asphalt (Rapid-Curing Type)

ASTM D 2397 Cationic Emulsified Asphalt

Asphalt Institute Manual Asphalt Pocketbook of Useful Information (Temperature-Volume MS-6 Table IV-3 Corrections for Emulsified Asphalts)

END OF ITEM P-603

BITUMINOUS TACK COAT P-603 - 3 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

ITEM P-605 – JOINT SEALING FILLER

DESCRIPTION 605-1.1 This item shall consist of providing and installing a resilient and adhesive joint sealing filler capable of effectively sealing joints and cracks in pavements.

MATERIALS 605-2.1 JOINT SEALERS. Joint sealing materials shall meet the requirements of ASTM D 5893. Each lot or batch of sealing compound shall be delivered to the jobsite in the manufacturer’s original sealed container. Each container shall be marked with the manufacturer’s name, batch or lot number, the safe heating temperature, and shall be accompanied by the manufacturer’s certification stating that the compound meets the requirements of this specification.

CONSTRUCTION METHODS 605-3.1 TIME OF APPLICATION. Joints shall be sealed as soon after completion of the curing period as feasible and before the pavement is opened to traffic, including construction equipment. The pavement temperature shall be above 50 °F (10 °C) at the time of installation of the poured joint sealing material. 605-3.2 PREPARATION OF JOINTS. a. Sawing. All joints shall be sawed in accordance with specifications and plan details. Immediately after sawing the joint, the resulting slurry shall be completely removed from joint and adjacent area by flushing with a jet of water, and by use of other tools as necessary. b. Sealing. Immediately before sealing, the joints shall be thoroughly cleaned of all remaining laitance, curing compound, and other foreign material. Cleaning shall be accomplished by sandblasting. Sandblasting shall be accomplished in a minimum of two passes. One pass per joint face with the nozzle held at an angle directly toward the joint face and not more than 3 in from it. Upon completion of cleaning, the joints shall be blown out with compressed air free of oil and water. Only air compressors with operable oil and water traps shall be used to prepare the joints for sealing. The joint faces shall be surface dry when the seal is applied. 605-3.3 INSTALLATION OF SEALANTS. Joints shall be inspected for proper width, depth, alignment, and preparation, and shall be approved by the Engineer before sealing is allowed. Sealants shall be installed in accordance with the following requirements: Cold Applied Sealants. Cold applied joint sealing compound shall be applied by means of pressure equipment that will force the sealing material to the bottom of the joint and completely fill the joint without spilling the material on the surface of the pavement. A backing material shall be placed as shown on the plans and shall be both non-reactive and non-adhesive to the pavement or the sealant material. Sealant that does not bond to the pavement surface of the joint walls, contains voids, or fails to set to a tack-free condition will be rejected and replaced by the Contractor at no additional cost. Before sealing the joints, the Contractor shall demonstrate that the equipment and procedures for preparing, mixing, and placing the sealant will produce a satisfactory joint seal. This shall include the preparation of two small batches and the application of the resulting material. Any sealant spilled on the surface of the pavement, structures and/or lighting fixtures, shall be removed immediately.

JOINT SEALING FILLER ITEM P-605 - 1 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

TESTING REQUIREMENTS

ASTM C 719 Test Methods for Adhesion and Cohesion of Elastomeric Joint Sealants Under Cyclic Movement

ASTM D 412 Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers - Tension

ASTM D 2240 Test Methods for Rubber Property - Durometer Hardness

MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS

ASTM D 5893 Standard Specifications for Cold Applied, Single Component, Chemically Curing Silicone Joint Sealant for Portland Cement Concrete Pavements

END OF ITEM P-605

JOINT SEALING FILLER ITEM P-605 - 2 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

ITEM P-620 – PAVEMENT MARKING

DESCRIPTION 620-1.1 This item shall consist of the painting of numbers, markings, and stripes on the surface of runways, taxiways, and aprons, in accordance with these specifications and at the locations shown on the plans, or as directed by the Engineer.

MATERIALS 620-2.1 MATERIALS ACCEPTANCE. The Contractor shall furnish manufacturer’s certified test reports for materials shipped to the project. The certified test reports shall include a statement that the materials meet the specification requirements. The reports can be used for material acceptance or the Engineer may perform verification testing. The reports shall not be interpreted as a basis for payment. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer upon arrival of a shipment of materials to the site. 620-2.2 PAINT. Paint shall be waterborne in accordance with the requirements of paragraph 620-2.2a. Paint shall be furnished in White (37925), Yellow (33538 or 33655), Red (31136), and Black (37038) in accordance with Federal Standard No. 595. a. Waterborne. Paint shall meet the requirements of Federal Specification TT-P-1952E, Type II, or Type III. 620-2.3 REFLECTIVE MEDIA. Glass beads shall meet the requirements for Federal Specification. TT- B-1325D, Type I, gradation A. Glass beads shall be treated with all compatible coupling agents recommended by the manufacturers of the paint and reflective media to ensure adhesion and embedment.

CONSTRUCTION METHODS 620-3.1 WEATHER LIMITATIONS. The painting shall be performed only when the surface is dry and when the surface temperature is at least 45 °F (7 °C) and rising and the pavement surface temperature is at least 5 °F (2.7 °C) above the dew point. Markings shall not be applied when the pavement temperature is greater than 120 °F (49 °C). 620-3.2 EQUIPMENT. Equipment shall include the apparatus necessary to properly clean the existing surface, a mechanical marking machine, a bead dispensing machine, and such auxiliary hand-painting equipment as may be necessary to satisfactorily complete the job. The mechanical marker shall be an atomizing spray-type or airless-type marking machine suitable for application of traffic paint. It shall produce an even and uniform film thickness at the required coverage and shall apply markings of uniform cross-sections and clear-cut edges without running or spattering and without over spray. 620-3.3 PREPARATION OF SURFACE. Immediately before application of the paint, the surface shall be dry and free from dirt, grease, oil, laitance, or other foreign material that would reduce the bond between the paint and the pavement. The area to be painted shall be cleaned by sweeping and blowing or by other methods as required to remove all dirt, laitance, and loose materials without damage to the pavement surface. Use of any chemicals or impact abrasives during surface preparation shall be approved in advance by the Engineer. Paint shall not be applied to Portland cement concrete pavement until the areas to be painted are clean of curing material. Sandblasting or high-pressure water shall be used to remove curing materials.

PAVEMENT MARKING ITEM P-620 - 1 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

620-3.4 LAYOUT OF MARKINGS. The proposed markings shall be laid out in advance of the paint application. The locations of markings to receive glass beads shall be shown on the plans. 620-3.5 APPLICATION. Paint shall be applied at the locations and to the dimensions and spacing shown on the plans. Paint shall not be applied until the layout and condition of the surface has been approved by the Engineer. The edges of the markings shall not vary from a straight line more than 1/2 in in 50 ft and marking dimensions and spacings shall be within the following tolerances:

Dimension and Spacing Tolerance 36 in or less ±1/2 in greaterthan36into6ft ±1in greaterthan6ftto60ft ±2in greater than 60 ft ± 3 in The paint shall be mixed in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and applied to the pavement with a marking machine at the rate shown in Table 1. The addition of thinner will not be permitted. A period of 28 days shall elapse between placement of a bituminous surface course or seal coat and application of the permanent paint. Temporary paint may be applied once the bituminous surface course or seal coat has cooled to a temperature consistent with the paint manufacturer’s requirements. Table 1 Application Rates For Paint And Glass Beads (See Note regarding Red and Pink Paint)

Glass Beads, Type I, Gradation Paint A Paint Type Sq ft per gallon, ft2/gal. Pounds per gallon of paint- lb./gal. Waterborne (Temporary) 230 ft2/gal. max -- Waterborne (Permanent) 115 ft2/gal. max 7 lb./gal. min

Glass beads shall be distributed upon the marked areas at the locations shown on the plans to receive glass beads immediately after application of the paint. A dispenser shall be furnished that is properly designed for attachment to the marking machine and suitable for dispensing glass beads. Glass beads shall be applied at the rate shown in Table 1. Glass beads shall not be applied to black paint. Glass beads shall adhere to the cured paint or all marking operations shall cease until corrections are made. All emptied containers shall be returned to the paint storage area for checking by the Engineer. The containers shall not be removed from the airport or destroyed until authorized by the Engineer. 620-3.6 RESERVED. 620-3.7 PROTECTION AND CLEANUP. After application of the markings, all markings shall be protected from damage until dry. All surfaces shall be protected from excess moisture and/or rain and from disfiguration by spatter, splashes, spillage, or drippings. The Contractor shall remove from the work area all debris, waste, loose or unadhered reflective media, and by-products generated by the surface preparation and application operations to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The Contractor shall dispose of these wastes in strict compliance with all applicable state, local, and Federal environmental statutes and regulations.

PAVEMENT MARKING ITEM P-620 - 2 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

TESTING REQUIREMENTS

ASTM C 146 Chemical Analysis of Glass Sand

ASTM C 371 Wire-Cloth Sieve Analysis of Nonplastic Ceramic Powders

ASTM D 92 Test Method for Flash and Fire Points by Cleveland Open Cup

ASTM D 711 No-Pick-Up Time of Traffic Paint

ASTM D 968 Standard Test Methods for Abrasion Resistance of Organic Coatings by Falling Abrasive

ASTM D 1213-54 (1975) Test Method for Crushing Resistance of Glass Spheres

ASTM D 2074 Test Method for Total Primary, Secondary, and Tertiary Amine Values of Fatty Amines by Alternative Indicator Method

ASTM G 15453 Operating Light and Water-Exposure Apparatus (Fluorescent Light Apparatus UV-Condensation Type) for Exposure of Nonmetallic Materials.

Federal Test Method Paint, Varnish, Lacquer and Related Materials; Methods of Inspection,

Standard No. 141D/GEN Sampling and Testing

MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS

ASTM D 476 Specifications for Dry Pigmentary Titanium Dioxide Pigments Products

Code of Federal Regulations 40 CFR Part 60, Appendix A – Definition of Traverse Point Number and Location

Code of Federal Regulations 29 CFR Part 1910.1200 – Hazard Communications

FED SPEC TT-B-1325D Beads (Glass Spheres) Retroreflective

AASHTO M 247 Glass Beads Used in Traffic Paints

FED SPEC TT-P-1952E Paint, Traffic and Airfield Marking, Waterborne

FED STD 595 Colors used in Government Procurement

END OF ITEM P-620

PAVEMENT MARKING ITEM P-620 - 3 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

SECTION 110 – METHOD OF ESTIMATING PERCENTAGE OF MATERIAL WITHIN SPECIFICATION LIMITS (PWL)

110-01 GENERAL. When the specifications provide for acceptance of material based on the method of estimating percentage of material within specification limits (PWL), the PWL will be determined in accordance with this section. All test results for a lot will be analyzed statistically to determine the total estimated percent of the lot that is within specification limits. The PWL is computed using the sample average (X) and sample standard deviation (Sn) of the specified number (n) of sublots for the lot and the specification tolerance limits, L for lower and U for upper, for the particular acceptance parameter. From these values, the respective Quality index, QL for Lower Quality Index and/or QU for Upper Quality Index, is computed and the PWL for the lot for the specified n is determined from Table 1. All specification limits specified in the technical sections shall be absolute values. Test results used in the calculations shall be to the significant figure given in the test procedure. There is some degree of uncertainty (risk) in the measurement for acceptance because only a small fraction of production material (the population) is sampled and tested. This uncertainty exists because all portions of the production material have the same probability to be randomly sampled. The Contractor’s risk is the probability that material produced at the acceptable quality level is rejected or subjected to a pay adjustment. The Owner’s risk is the probability that material produced at the rejectable quality level is accepted. It is the intent of this section to inform the contractor that, in order to consistently offset the contractor’s risk for material evaluated, production quality (using population average and population standard deviation) must be maintained at the acceptable quality specified or higher. In all cases, it is the responsibility of the contractor to produce at quality levels that will meet the specified acceptance criteria when sampled and tested at the frequencies specified. 110-02 METHOD FOR COMPUTING PWL. The computational sequence for computing PWL is as follows: a. Divide the lot into n sublots in accordance with the acceptance requirements of the specification. b. Locate the random sampling position within the sublot in accordance with the requirements of the specification. c. Make a measurement at each location, or take a test portion and make the measurement on the test portion in accordance with the testing requirements of the specification. d. Find the sample average (X) for all sublot values within the lot by using the following formula:

X = (x1 + x2 + x3 + . . .xn) / n Where: X = Sample average of all sublot values within a lot

x1, x2 = Individual sublot values n = Number of sublots

e. Find the sample standard deviation (Sn) by use of the following formula:

2 2 2 2 1/2 Sn = [(d1 + d2 + d3 + . . .dn )/(n-1)]

Where: Sn = Sample standard deviation of the number of sublot values in the set

METHOD OF ESTIMATING PERCENTAGE OF MATERIAL WITHIN SPECIFICATION LIMITS (PWL) 110 - 1 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

d1, d2 = Deviations of the individual sublot values x1, x2, … from the average value X

that is: d1 = (x1 - X), d2 = (x2 - X) … dn = (xn -X) n = Number of sublots

f. For single sided specification limits (that is, L only), compute the Lower Quality Index QL by use of the following formula:

QL = (X - L) / Sn Where: L = specification lower tolerance limit

Estimate the percentage of material within limits (PWL) by entering Table 1 with QL, using the column appropriate to the total number (n) of measurements. If the value of QL falls between values shown on the table, use the next higher value of PWL.

g. For double-sided specification limits (that is, L and U), compute the Quality Indexes QL and QU by use of the following formulas:

QL = (X - L) / Sn AND QU = (U - X) / Sn Where: L and U = specification lower and upper tolerance limits Estimate the percentage of material between the lower (L) and upper (U) tolerance limits (PWL) by entering Table 1 separately with QL and QU, using the column appropriate to the total number (n) of measurements, and determining the percent of material above PL and percent of material below PU for each tolerance limit. If the values of QL fall between values shown on the table, use the next higher value of PL or PU. Determine the PWL by use of the following formula:

PWL = (PU + PL) - 100

Where: PL = percent within lower specification limit

PU = percent within upper specification limit

EXAMPLE OF PWL CALCULATION Project: Example Project Test Item: Item P-401, Lot A. A. PWL Determination for Mat Density. 1. Density of four random cores taken from Lot A. A-1 = 96.60 A-2 = 97.55 A-3 = 99.30 A-4 = 98.35 n = 4 2. Calculate average density for the lot.

X = (x1 + x2 + x3 + . . .xn) / n

METHOD OF ESTIMATING PERCENTAGE OF MATERIAL WITHIN SPECIFICATION LIMITS (PWL) 110 - 2 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

X = (96.60 + 97.55 + 99.30 + 98.35) / 4 X = 97.95 percent density 3. Calculate the standard deviation for the lot. 2 2 2 2 1/2 Sn = [((96.60 - 97.95) + (97.55 - 97.95) +(99.30 -97.95) + (98.35 -97.95) )) / (4 - 1)] 1/2 Sn = [(1.82 + 0.16 + 1.82 + 0.16) / 3]

Sn = 1.15

4. Calculate the Lower Quality Index QL for the lot. (L=96.3)

QL = (X -L) / Sn

QL = (97.95 - 96.30) / 1.15

QL = 1.4348

5. Determine PWL by entering Table 1 with QL= 1.44 and n= 4. PWL = 98 B. PWL Determination for Air Voids. 1. Air Voids of four random samples taken from Lot A. A-1 = 5.00 A-2 = 3.74 A-3 = 2.30 A-4 = 3.25 2. Calculate the average air voids for the lot.

X = (x1 + x2 + x3 . . .n) / n X = (5.00 + 3.74 + 2.30 + 3.25) / 4 X = 3.57 percent

3. Calculate the standard deviation Sn for the lot. 2 2 2 2 1/2 Sn = [((3.57 - 5.00) + (3.57 - 3.74) + (3.57 - 2.30) + (3.57 -3.25) ) / (4 - 1)] 1/2 Sn = [(2.04 + 0.03 + 1.62 + 0.10 ) / 3]

Sn = 1.12

4. Calculate the Lower Quality Index QL for the lot. (L= 2.0)

QL = (X - L) / Sn

QL = (3.57 - 2.00) / 1.12

QL = 1.3992

5. Determine PL by entering Table 1 with QL = 1.41 and n = 4.

PL = 97

6. Calculate the Upper Quality Index QU for the lot. (U= 5.0)

QU = (U - X) / Sn

QU = (5.00 - 3.57) / 1.12

QU = 1.2702

METHOD OF ESTIMATING PERCENTAGE OF MATERIAL WITHIN SPECIFICATION LIMITS (PWL) 110 - 3 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

7. Determine PU by entering Table 1 with QU = 1.29 and n = 4.

PU = 93 8. Calculate Air Voids PWL

PWL = (PL + PU) - 100 PWL = (97 + 93) - 100 = 90

EXAMPLE OF OUTLIER CALCULATION (REFERENCE ASTM E 178) Project: Example Project Test Item: Item P-401, Lot A. A. Outlier Determination for Mat Density. 1. Density of four random cores taken from Lot A arranged in descending order. A-3 = 99.30 A-4 = 98.35 A-2 = 97.55 A-1 = 96.60 2. Use n=4 and upper 5 percent significance level of to find the critical value for test criterion = 1.463. 3. Use average density, standard deviation, and test criterion value to evaluate density measurements. a. For measurements greater than the average: If (measurement - average)/(standard deviation) is less than test criterion, then the measurement is not considered an outlier For A-3, check if ( 99.30 - 97.95 ) / 1.15 is greater than 1.463. Since 1.174 is less than 1.463, the value is not an outlier. b. For measurements less than the average: If (average - measurement)/(standard deviation) is less than test criterion, then the measurement is not considered an outlier. For A-1, check if ( 97.95 - 96.60 ) / 1.15 is greater than 1.463. Since 1.435 is less than 1.463, the value is not an outlier. NOTE: In this example, a measurement would be considered an outlier if the density were: Greater than (97.95 + 1.463 x 1.15) = 99.63 percent OR less than (97.95 - 1.463 x 1.15) = 96.27 percent.

METHOD OF ESTIMATING PERCENTAGE OF MATERIAL WITHIN SPECIFICATION LIMITS (PWL) 110 - 4 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

Table 1. Table for Estimating Percent of Lot Within Limits (PWL)

Percent Within Positive Values of Q (QL and QU) Limits n=3 n=4 n=5 n=6 n=7 n=8 n=9 n=10 (PL and PU) 99 1.1541 1.4700 1.6714 1.8008 1.8888 1.9520 1.9994 2.0362 98 1.1524 1.4400 1.6016 1.6982 1.7612 1.8053 1.8379 1.8630 97 1.1496 1.4100 1.5427 1.6181 1.6661 1.6993 1.7235 1.7420 96 1.1456 1.3800 1.4897 1.5497 1.5871 1.6127 1.6313 1.6454 95 1.1405 1.3500 1.4407 1.4887 1.5181 1.5381 1.5525 1.5635 94 1.1342 1.3200 1.3946 1.4329 1.4561 1.4717 1.4829 1.4914 93 1.1269 1.2900 1.3508 1.3810 1.3991 1.4112 1.4199 1.4265 92 1.1184 1.2600 1.3088 1.3323 1.3461 1.3554 1.3620 1.3670 91 1.1089 1.2300 1.2683 1.2860 1.2964 1.3032 1.3081 1.3118 90 1.0982 1.2000 1.2290 1.2419 1.2492 1.2541 1.2576 1.2602 89 1.0864 1.1700 1.1909 1.1995 1.2043 1.2075 1.2098 1.2115 88 1.0736 1.1400 1.1537 1.1587 1.1613 1.1630 1.1643 1.1653 87 1.0597 1.1100 1.1173 1.1192 1.1199 1.1204 1.1208 1.1212 86 1.0448 1.0800 1.0817 1.0808 1.0800 1.0794 1.0791 1.0789 85 1.0288 1.0500 1.0467 1.0435 1.0413 1.0399 1.0389 1.0382 84 1.0119 1.0200 1.0124 1.0071 1.0037 1.0015 1.0000 0.9990 83 0.9939 0.9900 0.9785 0.9715 0.9671 0.9643 0.9624 0.9610 82 0.9749 0.9600 0.9452 0.9367 0.9315 0.9281 0.9258 0.9241 81 0.9550 0.9300 0.9123 0.9025 0.8966 0.8928 0.8901 0.8882 80 0.9342 0.9000 0.8799 0.8690 0.8625 0.8583 0.8554 0.8533 79 0.9124 0.8700 0.8478 0.8360 0.8291 0.8245 0.8214 0.8192 78 0.8897 0.8400 0.8160 0.8036 0.7962 0.7915 0.7882 0.7858 77 0.8662 0.8100 0.7846 0.7716 0.7640 0.7590 0.7556 0.7531 76 0.8417 0.7800 0.7535 0.7401 0.7322 0.7271 0.7236 0.7211 75 0.8165 0.7500 0.7226 0.7089 0.7009 0.6958 0.6922 0.6896 74 0.7904 0.7200 0.6921 0.6781 0.6701 0.6649 0.6613 0.6587 73 0.7636 0.6900 0.6617 0.6477 0.6396 0.6344 0.6308 0.6282 72 0.7360 0.6600 0.6316 0.6176 0.6095 0.6044 0.6008 0.5982 71 0.7077 0.6300 0.6016 0.5878 0.5798 0.5747 0.5712 0.5686 70 0.6787 0.6000 0.5719 0.5582 0.5504 0.5454 0.5419 0.5394 69 0.6490 0.5700 0.5423 0.5290 0.5213 0.5164 0.5130 0.5105 68 0.6187 0.5400 0.5129 0.4999 0.4924 0.4877 0.4844 0.4820 67 0.5878 0.5100 0.4836 0.4710 0.4638 0.4592 0.4560 0.4537 66 0.5563 0.4800 0.4545 0.4424 0.4355 0.4310 0.4280 0.4257 65 0.5242 0.4500 0.4255 0.4139 0.4073 0.4030 0.4001 0.3980 64 0.4916 0.4200 0.3967 0.3856 0.3793 0.3753 0.3725 0.3705 63 0.4586 0.3900 0.3679 0.3575 0.3515 0.3477 0.3451 0.3432 62 0.4251 0.3600 0.3392 0.3295 0.3239 0.3203 0.3179 0.3161 61 0.3911 0.3300 0.3107 0.3016 0.2964 0.2931 0.2908 0.2892 60 0.3568 0.3000 0.2822 0.2738 0.2691 0.2660 0.2639 0.2624 59 0.3222 0.2700 0.2537 0.2461 0.2418 0.2391 0.2372 0.2358 58 0.2872 0.2400 0.2254 0.2186 0.2147 0.2122 0.2105 0.2093 57 0.2519 0.2100 0.1971 0.1911 0.1877 0.1855 0.1840 0.1829 56 0.2164 0.1800 0.1688 0.1636 0.1607 0.1588 0.1575 0.1566 55 0.1806 0.1500 0.1406 0.1363 0.1338 0.1322 0.1312 0.1304 54 0.1447 0.1200 0.1125 0.1090 0.1070 0.1057 0.1049 0.1042 53 0.1087 0.0900 0.0843 0.0817 0.0802 0.0793 0.0786 0.0781 52 0.0725 0.0600 0.0562 0.0544 0.0534 0.0528 0.0524 0.0521 51 0.0363 0.0300 0.0281 0.0272 0.0267 0.0264 0.0262 0.0260 50 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000

METHOD OF ESTIMATING PERCENTAGE OF MATERIAL WITHIN SPECIFICATION LIMITS (PWL) 110 - 5 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

Percent Within Negative Values of Q (QL and QU) Limits n=3 n=4 n=5 n=6 n=7 n=8 n=9 n=10 (PL and PU) 49 -0.0363 -0.0300 -0.0281 -0.0272 -0.0267 -0.0264 -0.0262 -0.0260 48 -0.0725 -0.0600 -0.0562 -0.0544 -0.0534 -0.0528 -0.0524 -0.0521 47 -0.1087 -0.0900 -0.0843 -0.0817 -0.0802 -0.0793 -0.0786 -0.0781 46 -0.1447 -0.1200 -0.1125 -0.1090 -0.1070 -0.1057 -0.1049 -0.1042 45 -0.1806 -0.1500 -0.1406 -0.1363 -0.1338 -0.1322 -0.1312 -0.1304 44 -0.2164 -0.1800 -0.1688 -0.1636 -0.1607 -0.1588 -0.1575 -0.1566 43 -0.2519 -0.2100 -0.1971 -0.1911 -0.1877 -0.1855 -0.1840 -0.1829 42 -0.2872 -0.2400 -0.2254 -0.2186 -0.2147 -0.2122 -0.2105 -0.2093 41 -0.3222 -0.2700 -0.2537 -0.2461 -0.2418 -0.2391 -0.2372 -0.2358 40 -0.3568 -0.3000 -0.2822 -0.2738 -0.2691 -0.2660 -0.2639 -0.2624 39 -0.3911 -0.3300 -0.3107 -0.3016 -0.2964 -0.2931 -0.2908 -0.2892 38 -0.4251 -0.3600 -0.3392 -0.3295 -0.3239 -0.3203 -0.3179 -0.3161 37 -0.4586 -0.3900 -0.3679 -0.3575 -0.3515 -0.3477 -0.3451 -0.3432 36 -0.4916 -0.4200 -0.3967 -0.3856 -0.3793 -0.3753 -0.3725 -0.3705 35 -0.5242 -0.4500 -0.4255 -0.4139 -0.4073 -0.4030 -0.4001 -0.3980 34 -0.5563 -0.4800 -0.4545 -0.4424 -0.4355 -0.4310 -0.4280 -0.4257 33 -0.5878 -0.5100 -0.4836 -0.4710 -0.4638 -0.4592 -0.4560 -0.4537 32 -0.6187 -0.5400 -0.5129 -0.4999 -0.4924 -0.4877 -0.4844 -0.4820 31 -0.6490 -0.5700 -0.5423 -0.5290 -0.5213 -0.5164 -0.5130 -0.5105 30 -0.6787 -0.6000 -0.5719 -0.5582 -0.5504 -0.5454 -0.5419 -0.5394 29 -0.7077 -0.6300 -0.6016 -0.5878 -0.5798 -0.5747 -0.5712 -0.5686 28 -0.7360 -0.6600 -0.6316 -0.6176 -0.6095 -0.6044 -0.6008 -0.5982 27 -0.7636 -0.6900 -0.6617 -0.6477 -0.6396 -0.6344 -0.6308 -0.6282 26 -0.7904 -0.7200 -0.6921 -0.6781 -0.6701 -0.6649 -0.6613 -0.6587 25 -0.8165 -0.7500 -0.7226 -0.7089 -0.7009 -0.6958 -0.6922 -0.6896 24 -0.8417 -0.7800 -0.7535 -0.7401 -0.7322 -0.7271 -0.7236 -0.7211 23 -0.8662 -0.8100 -0.7846 -0.7716 -0.7640 -0.7590 -0.7556 -0.7531 22 -0.8897 -0.8400 -0.8160 -0.8036 -0.7962 -0.7915 -0.7882 -0.7858 21 -0.9124 -0.8700 -0.8478 -0.8360 -0.8291 -0.8245 -0.8214 -0.8192 20 -0.9342 -0.9000 -0.8799 -0.8690 -0.8625 -0.8583 -0.8554 -0.8533 19 -0.9550 -0.9300 -0.9123 -0.9025 -0.8966 -0.8928 -0.8901 -0.8882 18 -0.9749 -0.9600 -0.9452 -0.9367 -0.9315 -0.9281 -0.9258 -0.9241 17 -0.9939 -0.9900 -0.9785 -0.9715 -0.9671 -0.9643 -0.9624 -0.9610 16 -1.0119 -1.0200 -1.0124 -1.0071 -1.0037 -1.0015 -1.0000 -0.9990 15 -1.0288 -1.0500 -1.0467 -1.0435 -1.0413 -1.0399 -1.0389 -1.0382 14 -1.0448 -1.0800 -1.0817 -1.0808 -1.0800 -1.0794 -1.0791 -1.0789 13 -1.0597 -1.1100 -1.1173 -1.1192 -1.1199 -1.1204 -1.1208 -1.1212 12 -1.0736 -1.1400 -1.1537 -1.1587 -1.1613 -1.1630 -1.1643 -1.1653 11 -1.0864 -1.1700 -1.1909 -1.1995 -1.2043 -1.2075 -1.2098 -1.2115 10 -1.0982 -1.2000 -1.2290 -1.2419 -1.2492 -1.2541 -1.2576 -1.2602 9 -1.1089 -1.2300 -1.2683 -1.2860 -1.2964 -1.3032 -1.3081 -1.3118 8 -1.1184 -1.2600 -1.3088 -1.3323 -1.3461 -1.3554 -1.3620 -1.3670 7 -1.1269 -1.2900 -1.3508 -1.3810 -1.3991 -1.4112 -1.4199 -1.4265 6 -1.1342 -1.3200 -1.3946 -1.4329 -1.4561 -1.4717 -1.4829 -1.4914 5 -1.1405 -1.3500 -1.4407 -1.4887 -1.5181 -1.5381 -1.5525 -1.5635 4 -1.1456 -1.3800 -1.4897 -1.5497 -1.5871 -1.6127 -1.6313 -1.6454 3 -1.1496 -1.4100 -1.5427 -1.6181 -1.6661 -1.6993 -1.7235 -1.7420 2 -1.1524 -1.4400 -1.6016 -1.6982 -1.7612 -1.8053 -1.8379 -1.8630 1 -1.1541 -1.4700 -1.6714 -1.8008 -1.8888 -1.9520 -1.9994 -2.0362

END OF SECTION 110

METHOD OF ESTIMATING PERCENTAGE OF MATERIAL WITHIN SPECIFICATION LIMITS (PWL) 110 - 6 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

SECTION 120 NUCLEAR GAUGES

120-01 TESTING. When the specifications provide for nuclear gauge acceptance testing of material for Items P-152, P-154, and P-209, the testing shall be performed in accordance with this section. At each sampling location, the field density shall be determined in accordance with ASTM D 6938 using the Direct Transmission Method. The nuclear gauge shall be calibrated in accordance with ASTM D 6938. Calibration and operation of the gauge shall be in accordance with the requirements of the manufacturer. The operator of the nuclear gauge must show evidence of training and experience in the use of the instrument. The gauge shall be standardized daily in accordance with ASTM standards. When using the nuclear method, ASTM D 6938 shall be used to determine the moisture content of the material. The calibration curve furnished with the nuclear gauges shall be checked in accordance with ASTM standards. The calibration checks shall be made at the beginning of a job and at regular daily intervals. The material shall be accepted on a lot basis. Each Lot shall be divided into eight (8) sublots when ASTM D 6938 is used. 120-02. When PWL concepts are incorporated, compaction shall continue until a PWL of 90 percent or more is achieved using the lower specification tolerance limits (L) below. The percentage of material within specification limits (PWL) shall be determined in accordance with the procedures specified in Section 110 of the General Provisions. The lower specification tolerance limit (L) for density shall be: Specification Item Number Specification Tolerance (L) for Density, (percent of laboratory maximum) Item P-152 90.5 for cohesive material, 95.5 for non-cohesive Item P-154 95.5 Item P-209 97.0 If the PWL is less than 90 percent, the lot shall be reworked and recompacted by the Contractor at the Contractor’s expense. After reworking and recompaction, the lot shall be resampled and retested. Retest results for the lot shall be reevaluated for acceptance. This procedure shall continue until the PWL is 90 percent or greater. 120-03 VERIFICATION TESTING. (For Items P-152 and P-154 only.) The Engineer will verify the maximum laboratory density of material placed in the field for each lot. A minimum of one test will be made for each lot of material at the site. The verification process will consist of; (1) compacting the material and determining the dry density and moisture-density in accordance with ASTM D 1557, and (2) comparing the result with the laboratory moisture-density curves for the material being placed. This verification process is commonly referred to as a “one-point Proctor”. If the material does not conform to the existing moisture-density curves, the Engineer will establish the laboratory maximum density and optimum moisture content for the material in accordance with ASTM D 1557. Additional verification tests will be made, if necessary, to properly classify all materials placed in the lot. The percent compaction of each sampling location will be determined by dividing the field density of each sublot by the laboratory maximum density for the lot.

NUCLEAR GAUGES 120 - 1 DCA TERMINAL A IMPROVEMENTS SCHEMATIC DESIGN TASK ORDER 04: OUTBOUND BAGGAGE FACILITY 31 JULY 2012 RONALD REAGAN WASHINGTON NATIONAL AIRPORT PROJECT DT1204

END OF SECTION 120

NUCLEAR GAUGES 120 - 2